FS C8650dnensmr3 PDF

Télécharger au format pdf ou txt
Télécharger au format pdf ou txt
Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 752

ECOSYS FS-C8600DN

ECOSYS FS-C8650DN

SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in April 2014
2MNSM063
Rev. 3

CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE
DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut tre illgal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux dgout municipales. Vrifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre rgion pour les dtails concernant des dchets solides
et une mise au rebut approprie.

Notation of products in the manual


For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and
black and white modes.
ECOSYS FS-C8600DN: 45 ppm model
ECOSYS FS-C8650DN: 55 ppm model

Revision history
Revision

Date

Replaced pages

Remarks

June 18, 2012

Contents, 1-1-1 to 1-1-3,1-1-6,1-2-2,1-2-8,1-2-9,


1-2-19,1-2-20,1-2-22,1-2-26,1-2-28,1-3-32,1-2-33,
1-2-38,1-2-43,1-3-6 to 1-3-8,1-3-10,1-3-16,1-3-17,
1-3-21 to 1-3-23,1-3-26 to 1-3-29,1-3-31 to 1-3-34,
1-3-37,1-3-38,1-3-48,1-3-49,1-3-53,1-3-54,1-3-59,
1-3-60,1-3-62,1-3-65,1-3-72,1-3-76,1-3-77,1-3-79,
1-3-84,1-3-85,1-3-87 to 1-3-91,1-3-93 to 1-3-96,
1-3-99,1-3-106,1-3-108,1-3-112 to 1-3-116,1-3-126,
1-3-130 to 1-3-133,1-3-135,1-3-137,1-3-139,
1-3-141,1-3-147 to1-3-150,1-4-2,1-4-26 to 1-4-28,
1-4-35 to 1-4-39,1-4-42,1-4-55,1-4-58 to 1-4-60,
1-4-71,1-4-88,1-4-90,1-4-91,1-5-1,1-5-4,1-5-8,
1-5-11,1-5-17,1-5-18,1-5-24,1-5-26,1-5-32,1-5-44 to
1-5-46,1-5-48,1-5-49,1-5-54,1-5-79 to 1-5-81,1-6-1,
1-6-2,2-2-1,2-2-3,2-3-1,2-3-8,2-3-28,2-3-32,2-3-36,
2-3-46,2-3-56,2-3-62,2-3-68,2-3-72,2-4-3,2-4-7,
2-4-8,2-4-13,2-4-22,2-4-23

April 4, 2013

Cover,Contents, 1-1-2,1-2-4,1-2-5,2-4-3,2-4-4,
2-4-15 to 2-4-20

April 15, 2014

Contents, 1-1-3,1-2-16,1-2-21 to 1-2-24,1-3-18,


1-3-20,1-3-29,1-3-39,1-3-51,1-3-75 to 1-3-77,
1-3-102 to 1-3-105,1-3-147,1-3-148,1-4-85,1-4-86,
1-4-92,1-4-93,1-4-98,1-5-6 to 1-5-9,1-5-29,1-5-32,
1-5-65,1-5-68,1-5-76,1-5-87,1-5-88,1-6-2,2-1-2,
2-1-5,2-1-6,2-2-4,2-2-5,2-2-10,2-3-60,2-4-1,2-4-2,
2-4-7,2-4-10,2-4-13,2-4-28

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols
The triangle (

) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is

shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Always ground the machine.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the machine may cause fire
or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

Do not place the machine on an infirm or angled surface: the machine may tip over, causing injury. .

Do not install the machine in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
Do not install the machine near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire............................................................................................................................
Allow sufficient space around the machine to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as
cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor printing performance. .....

Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on machines so equipped. Failure to do this may
cause the machine to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ...............................................
Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. .....................................................................................................................................................
Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the
machines instruction handbook. .......................................................................................................

2. Precautions for Maintenance


WARNING

Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................

Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................


Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...................................................................................................................................................

When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................

Always check that the machine is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...........
Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................

CAUTION
Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................

Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........

Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................

Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the machine except for routine replacement. .................
Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................

Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........

Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................

Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
Always wash hands afterwards.
Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
Should smoke be seen coming from the machine, remove the power plug from the wall outlet
immediately. .......................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................

This page is intentionally left blank.

2MN/2N1

CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-4
(1) Machine ............................................................................................................................ 1-1-4
(2) Option ............................................................................................................................... 1-1-6
(3) Operation panel ................................................................................................................ 1-1-7
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................... 1-1-8

1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation..................................................................................................... 1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure ....................................................................................................... 1-2-2
(2) Shut-down ...................................................................................................................... 1-2-19
(3) Setting initial print modes ............................................................................................... 1-2-20
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option).................................................................................. 1-2-21
1-2-4 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option) ....................................................................... 1-2-25
1-2-5 Installing the IC card reader holder (option) ........................................................................ 1-2-27
1-2-6 Installing the duct unit (option)............................................................................................. 1-2-42

1-3 Maintenance Mode


1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list ............................................................................................ 1-3-2

1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection ........................................................................................................ 1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication .................................................................................................. 1-4-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................... 1-4-2
1-4-2 Self-diagnostic function ....................................................................................................... 1-4-26
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................. 1-4-26
(2) Self diagnostic codes...................................................................................................... 1-4-27
1-4-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................... 1-4-85
(1) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.
Colored spots in the printed objects. .............................................................................. 1-4-87
(2) No image appears (entirely black).................................................................................. 1-4-87
(3) Image is too light. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-88
(4) The background is colored. ............................................................................................ 1-4-88
(5) White streaks are printed vertically................................................................................. 1-4-89
(6) Black streaks are printed vertically. ................................................................................ 1-4-89
(7) Streaks are printed horizontally. ..................................................................................... 1-4-89
(8) Spots are printed. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-90
(9) mage is blurred............................................................................................................... 1-4-90
(10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. .................. 1-4-90
(11) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. .................. 1-4-90
(12) Paper is wrinkled. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-91
(13) Offset occurs. ................................................................................................................. 1-4-91
(14) Part of image is missing. ................................................................................................ 1-4-91
(15) Fusing is loose................................................................................................................ 1-4-92
(16) Image is out of focus. ..................................................................................................... 1-4-92

2MN/2N1
(17) Image center does not align with the original center. ..................................................... 1-4-92
(18) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects.
Colored spots in the printed objects. ............................................................................. 1-4-92
(19) Grainy image. ................................................................................................................. 1-4-93
1-4-4 Electric problems ................................................................................................................. 1-4-94
1-4-5 Mechanical problems......................................................................................................... 1-4-101

1-5 Assembly and disassembly


1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(2) Drum................................................................................................................................. 1-5-1
(3) Toner ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container................................................................. 1-5-2
1-5-2 Paper feed section................................................................................................................. 1-5-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit.......................................................... 1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation pulley... 1-5-7
(3) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit ....................................................... 1-5-10
(4) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley,
MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley ............................................................ 1-5-14
1-5-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-19
(1) Detaching and refitting the LSU...................................................................................... 1-5-19
(2) Color registration adjustment.......................................................................................... 1-5-26
1-5-4 Image formation section ...................................................................................................... 1-5-29
(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit.............................................................................. 1-5-29
(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit ............................................... 1-5-31
(3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit................................................................. 1-5-34
1-5-5 Transfer section ................................................................................................................... 1-5-35
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit ........................................................... 1-5-35
(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit................................................................... 1-5-37
(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush ............................................................... 1-5-39
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ....................................................................... 1-5-41
1-5-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-43
(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit.............................................................................. 1-5-43
(2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit ............................................................................... 1-5-45
1-5-7 PWBs................................................................................................................................... 1-5-47
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB............................................................................ 1-5-47
(2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB......................................................................... 1-5-52
(3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB.............................................................. 1-5-54
(4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 ............................................................. 1-5-57
(5) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 ............................................................. 1-5-58
(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB....................................................................... 1-5-59
1-5-8 Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 1-5-64
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY................... 1-5-64
(2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit ..................................................................... 1-5-69
(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit......... 1-5-70
(4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2.................................................................. 1-5-76
1-5-9 Others .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-77
(1) Detaching the eject filter ................................................................................................. 1-5-77
(2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter............................................................................. 1-5-78
(3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter................................................................................ 1-5-79
(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filter.................................................................. 1-5-80
(5) Detaching and refitting the left filter ................................................................................ 1-5-81
(6) Detaching and refitting the developer filter ..................................................................... 1-5-82

2MN/2N1-3
(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit ....................................................................... 1-5-83
(8) Detaching and refitting the eject unit .............................................................................. 1-5-85
(9) Direction of installing the principal fan motors ................................................................ 1-5-86
(10) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment....................................................................... 1-5-87

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement


1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware ......................................................................................................... 1-6-1
1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement..................................................................................... 1-6-3
1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement ................................................................................. 1-6-5

2-1 Mechanical Construction


2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section ............................................................................................... 2-1-1
(1) Cassette paper feed section............................................................................................. 2-1-1
(2) MP tray paper feed section............................................................................................... 2-1-3
(3) Paper conveying section .................................................................................................. 2-1-5
2-1-2 Drum section ......................................................................................................................... 2-1-7
2-1-3 Developer section .................................................................................................................. 2-1-9
2-1-4 Laser scanner section ......................................................................................................... 2-1-11
2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section ................................................................................................ 2-1-13
(1) Intermediate transfer unit section ................................................................................... 2-1-13
(2) Secondary transfer roller section.................................................................................... 2-1-15
2-1-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-17
2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section ........................................................................................................ 2-1-19
2-1-8 Duplex conveying section .................................................................................................... 2-1-21

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout


2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-4
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-6
(4) Fan motors ....................................................................................................................... 2-2-8
(5) Others............................................................................................................................. 2-2-10

2-3 Operation of the PWBs


2-3-1 Main PWB.............................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
2-3-2 Engine PWB .......................................................................................................................... 2-3-8
2-3-3 Power source PWB ............................................................................................................. 2-3-32
2-3-4 Front PWB ........................................................................................................................... 2-3-36
2-3-5 Feed PWB 1 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-46
2-3-6 Feed PWB 2 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-56
2-3-7 Relay PWB .......................................................................................................................... 2-3-62
2-3-8 Motor control PWB .............................................................................................................. 2-3-68
2-3-9 LSU relay PWB.................................................................................................................... 2-3-72

2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Maintenance kits............................................................................................................... 2-4-2
(3) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-3
(4) Repetitive defects gauge .................................................................................................. 2-4-7
(5) Firmware environment commands ................................................................................... 2-4-8

2MN/2N1
(6) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline ......................................................................................... 2-4-16
(7) Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................... 2-4-22

INSTALLATION GUIDE
PAPER FEEDER
LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER
SIDE DECK
SIDE MULTI TRAY
1000-SHEETS FINISHER
4000-SHEETS FINISHER
FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
MAILBOX
MAILBOX ATTACHMENT KIT
PUNCH UNIT
BANNER GUIDE

2MN/2N1-1

1-1-1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications

Machine
Specifications

Item

45 ppm

Type

Desktop

Printing method
Paper weight

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system

Cassette

60 to 256 g/m2

MP tray

60 to 300 g/m2

Cassette

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),


Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as simplex)

MP tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,


Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Cassette

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR,
StatementR, Oficio II, 12 18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR

MP tray

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, ISO B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, Return postcard,
Postcards, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10
(Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Ledger,
Legal, Letter, LetterR, Executive, StatementR, Oficio II, 12 18", Folio,
8K, 16K, 16KR, Custom (98 148mm 304.9 1219.2mm)

Paper type

Paper size

B/W

A4
Letter
A4R
LetterR
A3
Ledger
B4
Legal
B5

: 45 ppm
: 45 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 22 ppm
: 22 ppm
: 27 ppm
: 21 ppm
: 45 ppm

A4
Letter
A4R
LetterR
A3
Ledger
B4
Legal
B5

: 55 ppm
: 55 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 27 ppm
: 27 ppm
: 33 ppm
: 21 ppm
: 55 ppm

Color

A4
Letter
A4R
LetterR
A3
Ledger
B4
Legal
B5

: 45 ppm
: 45 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 22 ppm
: 22 ppm
: 27 ppm
: 21 ppm
: 45 ppm

A4
Letter
A4R
LetterR
A3
Ledger
B4
Legal
B5

: 50 ppm
: 50 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 24 ppm
: 25 ppm
: 25 ppm
: 30 ppm
: 21 ppm
: 50 ppm

Printing
speed

First print
time
(A4, feed from
cassette)

55 ppm

B/W

5.4 s or less

4.9 s or less

6.6 s or less

6.2 s or less

Color

1-1-1

2MN/2N1-2
Specifications

Item
Warm-up
time
(22 C/71.6
F, 60% RH)

30 s or less

30 s or less

Low Power

20 s or less

20 s or less

Sleep

30 s or less

30 s or less

Cassette

550 sheets (64 g/m2)


500 sheets (80 g/m2)

MP tray

A4/Letter or less
165 sheets (64 g/m2) 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
More than A4/Letter
55 sheets (64 g/m2) 50 sheets (80 g/m2)

Main tray
Job separator tray

Photoconductor
Image write system
Charging system
Developing system

Transfer system
Separation system
Cleaning system
Charge erasing system
Fusing system
CPU
Main
memory

500 sheets (80 g/m2)


250 sheets (80 g/m2)
(When the Documents Finisher is installed, 100 sheets.)
a-Si (drum diameter 30 mm)
Semiconductor laser
Charger roller
Touch down developing system
Developer: 2-component
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Primary: Roller transfer system (Intermediate transfer belt)
Secondary:Roller transfer system
Small diameter separation, Separation electrode
Drum: Counter blade, Cleaning roller
Transfer belt: Fur brush
Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Belt fusing
Heat source: IH
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
PowerPC 750GL/750 MHz

Standard

1024 MB (1024 MB DIMMx 1)

Maximum

2048 MB(1024 MB DIMMx 2)

Hard Disk

Interface

55 ppm

Power on

Paper
capacity

Output tray
capacity

45 ppm

160 GB (160 GB x 1) (standard)

Standard

USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)


USB Port: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Option

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Resolution
Operating system
Page description language

600 600 dpi


Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows
Server 2008, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x
PRESCRIBE

1-1-2

2MN/2N1-3
Specifications

Item

45 ppm

55 ppm

Temperature 10 to 32.5 C/50 to 90.5 F


Operating
environment

Humidity

15 to 80% RH

Altitude

2,500 m/8,202 ft or less

Brightness

Dimensions
(W D H)

Space
required (W
D)

1,500 lux or less

machine
only

672 787 744 mm


26 29/64 30 63/64 29 13/32

machine
with Paper
feeder

672 787 1053 mm


26 29/64 30 63/64 41 19/64

Using
MP tray
FUll system

Weight
Rated input

Options

1001 787 mm
39 13/32 30 63/64
1937 787 mm (machine + 4000-sheet finisher + Side deck)
76 17/64 30 63/64
111 kg / 244.7 lb
120 V AC, 60 Hz, more than 12.0 A
220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, more than 7.2 A
Paper feeder, Large capacity feeder, Side deck, Side multi tray, Side paper
feeder, Side large capacity feeder, 1000-sheet finisher, 4000-sheet finisher,
Center-folding unit, Mailbox, Punch unit, Data security kit,Emulation option
kit, Gigabit ethernet board, IC card reader holder and Duct unit

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-1-3

2MN/2N1

1-1-2 Parts names


(1) Machine

14
15
16

17

5
6
7
8

3
1
2

18

13

10

11

12

Figure 1-1-1

10. Waste toner box


11. Waste toner tray
12. Front cover
13. Handles
14. Network interface connector
15. USB port
16. USB interface connector
17. Option interface
18. Toner container release lever

1. Operation panel
2. Indicators
3. Main tray
4. Job separator tray
5. Toner container K
6. Toner container M
7. Toner container C
8. Toner container Y
9. Release button

1-1-4

2MN/2N1

24

22

23

24
19

26

27
28
29
30
31
32

25

33
34
35
20

21

36

Figure 1-1-2

29. Duplex cover


30. MP paper width guide
31. Main power switch
32. MP support Tray
33. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray
34. Paper conveying cover lever
35. Paper conveying cover
36. Handle

19. USB port


20. Cassettes 1
21. Cassettes 2
22. Paper length guide
23. Guide lock lever
24. Paper width guide
25. Paper width adjusting tab
26. Paper conveying unit
27. Paper conveying unit lever
28. Duplex cover lever

1-1-5

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Option

11

11

9
1

5
6
2

3, 7

10

Figure 1-1-3

7. Side large capacity feeder


8. 1000-sheet finisher
9. 4000-sheet finisher
10. Center-folding unit
11. Mailbox

1. Machine
2. Paper feeder
3. Large capacity feeder
4. Side deck
5. Side multi tray
6. Side paper feeder

* : The mailbox can be installed either the main unit or the 4000-sheet finisher.(Not installable at the same
time)

1-1-6

2MN/2N1

(3) Operation panel



















Figure 1-1-4

1. Message display
2. Right select key
3. Left select key
4. Logout key
5. Menu key
6. Back key
7. Numeric keys
8. Cancel key

9. Cursor key
10. OK key
11. Clear key
12. Print Box key
13. Ready indicator
14. Data indicator
15. Attention indicator

1-1-7

2MN/2N1

1-1-3 Machine cross section

17

13

16
12

11

10

18

14

15
3
4

Paper Path
Figure 1-1-5

1. Cassette paper feed section


2. MP tray paper feed section
3. Paper conveying section
4. Laser scanner unit
5. Drum unit K
6. Drum unit M
7. Drum unit C

8. Drum unit Y
9. Developer unit K
10. Developer unit M
11. Developer unit C
12. Developer unit Y
13. Toner container section
14. Primary transfer section

1-1-8

15. Secondary transfer/Separation sections


16. Fuser section
17. Eject/Feed shift sections
18. Duplex section

2MN/2N1

1-2-1 Installation environment


1-2 Installation

1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5C/50 to 90.5F


2. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 12.0 A
220 - 240 V AC, 7.2 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 2%/60 Hz 2%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an
abrupt change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such
as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front : 100 cm/ 40"
Machine rear : 10 cm/ 4"
Machine right : 35 cm/ 14"
Machine left : 30 cm/ 12"
Machine top : 40 cm/ 15"

30 cm (12")

35 cm (14")

100 cm (40")

Figure 1-2-1

1-2-1

10 cm (4")

2MN/2N1-1

1-2-2 Unpacking and installation


(1) Installation procedure

Start

Unpacking

Adjusting the image

Removing the tapes and spacers

Setting the delivery date


(maintenance item U278)

Installing the main tray and jobseparator tray*


Output an own-status report
(maintenance item U000)
Release of lift plate stopper
Exit maintenance mode
Loading paper
Print out the user setting list
Installing the toner containers
Completion of the machine installation.
Unlocking the developer waste exit

Installing the waste toner box


Installing optional devices

Installing the cassette heater (option)

Replacing operation panel sheet

Connect the power cord

*: When the finisher has been installed, the job separator tray and the main tray are not needed.

1-2-2

2MN/2N1
Moving the machine
When moving the machine, pull out three carrying handles, and move with carrying handles and the handhold.

Handhold

Carrying
handle
Carrying
handle

Carrying
handle
Figure 1-2-2

*: Moving this machine is a job for four people.

Figure 1-2-3

1-2-3

2MN/2N1-2

Unpacking
120V model

17
18
16
14

3
4

11

15
13

12

10

1
2

7
20

6
6

7
21,22,
23,24,25

5
19

Figure 1-2-4

1-2-4

2MN/2N1-2
220-240V model

17

26

18
16

14

15

21,22,
23,24,25
20
9

12

11

13

1
2

19

10
8

6
6

Figure 1-2-5

1. Machine
2. Outer case
3. Inner case
4. Spacer A
5. Skid
6. Hinge joints
7. Bottom pad
8. Front pad
9. Left pad

10. Right pad


11. Rear pad
12. Top spacer
13. Machine cover
14. Toner container (Y,M,C,K)
15. Waste toner box
16. Main tray
17. Spacer B
18. Job separetor tray

Place the machine on a level surface.


1-2-5

19. Document tray


20. Power cord
21. Plastic bag
22. Paper size plates
23. Paper media plates
24. Pin
25. Operation guide etc.
26. Top pad*
*:220-240V model only

2MN/2N1

Removing the tapes


1. Remove two tapes and the protect
sheet.
2. Remove tape and the top spacer.

Protect sheet

Tape

Tapes
Top spacer

Figure 1-2-6

3. Remove tape and then two protect


sheets.
4. Remove three tapes and then protect
sheet.
5. Remove tape and then silica gel.

Tape

Protect sheets

Silica gel
Tape

Figure 1-2-7

1-2-6

2MN/2N1

6. Open the front cover and then remove


tape.

Tape

Figure 1-2-8

1. Remove three tapes and then remove


three protect sheet.
2. Remove two tapes.

Tape
Protect sheet

Tape
Tape
Tapes

Figure 1-2-9

1-2-7

2MN/2N1-1

3. Remove tape.

Tape
Figure 1-2-10

Installing the main tray and job separator tray


*: When the finisher has been installed, the job separator tray and the main tray are not needed.
1. Install the main tray included by latching
in two hooks and securing by one
screw.

Hooks

Main tray

Pin
Figure 1-2-11

1-2-8

2MN/2N1-1

2. Raise the tray fixing plate.


3. Latch the three hooks to the job separator tray.
4. Load the tray on the tray fixing board
and slide it to secure.
*: Make sure that the two clicks have been
properly locked.

Hooks
Hook

Jobseparator tray

Hook

Hook

Tray fixture plate


Figure 1-2-12

Release of lift plate stopper


1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out.
2. Remove the lift plate stopper from each
cassette and attach it to the storage
location.
When moving the machine, attach the
lift plate in original position.

Lift plate
stopper

Cassette
Figure 1-2-13

1-2-9

2MN/2N1

Loading paper
1. Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the
paper length guide and move the guide
to fit the length of the paper.

Paper length guide

Figure 1-2-14

2. Press the guide lock lever to release


the lock.
3. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and
move the paper width guides to fit the
paper.

Guide lock lever

Paper width
adjusting tab

paper width guides

Figure 1-2-15

1-2-10

2MN/2N1

4. Align the paper flush against the right


side of the cassette.
*: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is
not curled or folded.
*: Ensure that the loaded paper does not
exceed the level indicated.
*: Make sure that the paper length guide
and the paper width guides are correctly
abut with the paper. Be sure to remove
spaces between the guides and the
paper.

Paper

Figure 1-2-16

1-2-11

2MN/2N1

5. Press the guide lock lever to lock.

Guide lock lever

Figure 1-2-17

6. Insert the paper size plate and the


paper media plate.
7. Gently push the cassette back in.

Paper media plate


Paper size plate

Figure 1-2-18

1-2-12

2MN/2N1

Installing the toner containers


1. Open the front cover.
2. Hold the toner container vertically and
hit the upper part about 3 times. Invert
the toner container so that the other end
is up, and hit in the same way.
3. Hold the toner container horizontally
and shake from side to side about 3
times.

Toner container

Toner container

Figure 1-2-19
4. Install four color toner containers.
5. Turn down the toner container release
levers to lock the four color toner containers.

K
M
C
Y

Toner container

Toner container
Release lever
Figure 1-2-20
1-2-13

2MN/2N1

Unlocking the developer waste exit


Caution
To ease setup, the device was shipped
with the developer unit already replenished
with developer. Therefore, to prevent
developer from spilling during shipping, a
developer shutter is equipped with the
developer unit.
To disengage the shutter, use the following
procedure: Note that if the shutter is not
completely disengaged and retained in
place, the developer in the developer unit
may clog at the outlet causing a damage to
the developer unit.
1. Remove the tape and then remove the
set up leaflet.
*: The setup leaflet must be affixed in position before dispatching the machine.
2. Press the fixing pin in four positions and
rotate.
*: Fully insert the fixing pin keeping the line
vertical and rotate by 90 degrees clockwise. Make sure that the central line is
horizontal.

Tape

Set up leaflet

[Locked]

[Released]
1
2

Fixing pin

Fixing pin

Figure 1-2-21

1-2-14

2MN/2N1

3. Remove a screw and slide the lever


right wards.
4. Fix the lever using the screw previously
removed at the right screw hole and
unlock the developer waste exit.
*: When the device is shipped again or
removed, use the reverse procedure to
lock in the developer waste exit. Failure
to observe this caution could result in
deteriorated print quality and/or C calls.

[Locked]

[Released]
3

1
Screw
Lever

Lever

Screw
Figure 1-2-22

Installing the waste toner box


Caution
Before installing the waste toner box,
unlock the developer waste exit (see page
1-2-14).

Waste toner tray

1. Push the release button and pull out the


waste toner tray.
2. Open the lid and install the waste toner
box.
3. Push the waste toner tray back in.
4. Close the front cover.

2
1
Release button

Lid

Waste toner box

Figure 1-2-23
1-2-15

2MN/2N1-3

Installing optional devices


1. Install the optional devices (job separator, document finisher and/or fax kit etc.) as necessary.

Installing the cassette heater (option)


1. Install the optional cassette heater as necessary (see page 1-2-21).

Connect the power cord


1. Connect the power cord to the power cord connector on rear lower of the machine.
2. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.

Adjusting the image


1. Turn the main power switch on.
2. Check the messages on the operation panel
After completion of warming up, in case to display "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." on the operation panel, follow the step 3. (Performing Drum Refresh)
In case to display Warning for low temperature. Adjust the room temperature. on the operation panel,
install the machine in the other location this message wont be shown.
Installing the machine in a low temperature environment could cause image quality problems.
In case to have no display, follow the step 4 (Performing LSU cleaning).
*: Perform the high altitude settings when a leakage is developed on images in a high altitude installation,
such as in Mexico City.
U140 -> AC Calib -> Calibration -> Type 0 -> C,M,Y,K: On -> Execute -> Start
Result 1: Developing leak image occur
U140 -> AC Calib -> magnification
Result 2: Grain image (solid image is dropped) occur
U140 -> AC Calib -> Calibration -> Type 1 -> C,M,Y,K: On -> Execute -> Start
In case the density of image is dropped even with Type 1.
U140 -> AC Calib -> High Altitude -> Mode 2
3. Performing drum refresh (see the operation guide)
Press the Menu key.
In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press cursor key to select Service Setting.
Press the OK key.
In the Service Setting. menu screen, press cursor key to select [Durm].
Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left select key]).

1-2-16

2MN/2N1
4. Performing LSU cleaning (see the operation guide)
In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press cursor key to select Service Setting.
Press the OK key.
In the Service Setting. menu screen, press cursor key to select [LSU].
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left select key]).
5. Performing calibration
(see the operation guide,U464 Setting the ID correction operation - performing calibration)
In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press cursor key to select ColorCalibration.
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left select key]).
6. Performing color registration (see the operation guide,U469 Adjusting the color registration)
Print Chart (Printing the color registration correction chart)
In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press cursor key to select Color Regist.
Press the OK key.
In the Color Regist menu screen, press cursor key to select Detail.
Press the OK key.
In the Detail menu screen, press cursor key to select [Print Chart].
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] ([Left select key]).
Adjust Magenta
In the Adjust/Maint. menu screen, press cursor key to select Color Regist.
Press the OK key.
In the Color Regist menu screen, press cursor key to select Detail.
Press the OK key.
In the Detail menu screen, press cursor key to select [Adjust Magenta].
Press the OK key.The Adjust Magenta screen appears.
In the H and V charts for magenta printed in Print Chart above, note the values
where the lines are closest to forming a single straight line.
*: Values corrected are H-1, H-2, H-3, H-4, H-5, H-6, H-7, V-3.
Highlight the read value using the cursor up or down key and fill the other entries using the left and right
cursor keys.
When you have completed all the values, press the OK key.
The setting is saved and you are returned to the Color Regist. Detail menu screen.
Adjust Cyan and Adjust Yellow
In the Detail menu screen, press cursor key to select [Adjust Cyan] or [Adjust Yellow].
Press the OK key.The Adjust Cyan or Adjust Yellow screen appears.
Using the same procedure as for magenta above, identify the cyan and yellow values
in the color registration correction chart and set them in the printer.
7. Make test prints.
If image quality is unsatisfactory after test printing, confirm process section and execute calibration
again.
If paper is fed skewed, perform the adjustment of skewed paper in the cassette (see page 1-5-87).

1-2-17

2MN/2N1

Setting the delivery date (maintenance item U278)


1. Press the menu key while pressing and holding the OK and down cursor keys simultaneously.
2. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. (see page P.1-3-1)
3. Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the Ok key.
4. Select [Today].
5. Press the Ok key. The delivery date is set.
6. Press the Back key to exit.
Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000)
1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the Ok key.
2. Select [Maintenance] and press the Ok key. A status report is output.
3. Press the back key to exit.

Exit maintenance mode


1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the Ok key. The machine exits the maintenance mode.

Print out the user setting list


1. Select [Report Print] to output the user various setting reports.

Completion of the machine installation

1-2-18

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Shut-down
To turn main power off, be sure to perform the following before turning the main power switch off.

*: Before proceeding, make sure that the


data lamp is turned off.
*: The hard disk may be operating when the
Data indicator is lit or blinking. Turning off
the main power switch while the hard disk
is operating may cause damage.

Figure 1-2-24

1. Press menu key.


2. Press the cursor key to select Shut
down.
3. Press OK key. A confirmation screen
appears.
4. Press [Yes] (Left Select key).
5. Follow the instructions on the display to
turn the main power switch off.

Shut down.
Are you sure?

Yes

] [

No

Completed.
Turn the main power
switch off.

Figure 1-2-25

1-2-19

2MN/2N1-1

(3) Setting initial print modes


Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance
item No.

Contents

Factory setting

U253

Switching between double and single counts

DBL(A3/Ledger)

U260

Selecting the timing for print counting

U285

Setting service status page

On

U323

Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning

On

U325

Setting the paper interval

U327

Setting the cassette heater control

Eject

Off/1

1-2-20

Off

2MN/2N1-3

1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option)


Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:
Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

Cassette heater set (120V)

302K994931

Cassette heater set (240V)

302K994941

Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994931):


Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

Cassette heater (120V)

302H794620

Wire saddle

7YZM610001++H0

Label

302KP34220

Connector cover

303NF04140

M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw

7BB700308H

M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw

7BB700408H

Supplied parts of cassette heater set (302K994941):


Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

Cassette heater (240V)

302H794610

Wire saddle

7YZM610001++H0

Label

302KP34220

Connector cover

303NF04140

M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw

7BB700308H

M4 x 8 tap-tight S screw

7BB700408H

1-2-21

2MN/2N1-3
Procedure
1. After confirming the data lamp is turned
off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Pull the cassette 1 forward.

Cassette 1

Figure 1-2-26

3. Pull up the cassette.


4. Pull the cassette 2 forward.
5. Draw out Cassette 2 by releasing the
release lever.

Cassette

Figure 1-2-27

1-2-22

2MN/2N1-3

Remove the cassette 2 in the same manner as


above.

Cassette 2
Figure 1-2-28
6. Fit three wire saddles on the bottom
frame of the machine.
7. Fit the cassette heater using two M3 x 8
screws.

Wire saddle
Wire saddles
Screw

Screw

Cassette heater

Figure 1-2-29

1-2-23

2MN/2N1-3

8. Connect the connector of the cassette


heater to the connector in the rear
frame of the machine.
9. Pass the wire of the cassette heater
through three wire saddles and then
fasten the wire.

Wire saddle
Wire saddle

Cassette heater

Connector

Figure 1-2-30

10. After installing the cassette heater,


install the connector cover using the M4
8 screw.
11. Clean the label with alcohol and then
affix the label.

Cassette heater

Connector cover

Screw
Label

Figure 1-2-31

12. Replace the cassette 1 and 2.


*: Perform the maintenance mode U327 to configure the cassette heater control settings after a cassette
heater was installed (see page P.1-3-109).

1-2-24

2MN/2N1-1

1-2-4 Installing the gigabit ethernet board (option)


Gigabit ethernet board installation requires the following parts:
Parts
Gigabit ethernet board

Quantity

Part.No.

1505JV0UN0 (option)

Procedure
1. After confirming the data lamp is turned
off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle (see page P.1-2-19).
2. Open the controller lid.
3. Remove two pins and then remove the
slot cover.

Slot cover
Pin

Pin
Figure 1-2-32

1-2-25

2MN/2N1-1

4. Insert the gigabit ethernet board along


the groove in OPT2 and secure the
board with two pins that have been
removed in step 3.
*: Do not directly touch the gigabit ethernet
board terminal.
Hold the top and bottom of the gigabit
ethernet board, or the projection of the
board to insert the gigabit ethernet board.

Gigabit
ethernet board
Pin

Pin

Groove

Figure 1-2-33

5. Plug the modular connector cable into


the line terminal,
6. Close the controller lid.

Network cable

Figure 1-2-34

1-2-26

2MN/2N1-1

1-2-5 Installing the IC card reader holder (option)


IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts:
Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

IC card reader holder

1709AD0UN0 (option)

Relaying USB wire

302MN46210

*1: For internal wirings only


Supplied parts of IC card reader holder (1709AD0UN0):
Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

Card reader case

Card reader base

Card reader mount

Card reader tray

USB Wire (For extension)

Pin

303NS24410

Clamp

7YZM690002++H01

The card reader base, card reader mount, and the pin are packaged as an assembled kit.
For internal wirings
Procedure

1. After confirming the data lamp is turned


off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
3. Remove two screws and then remove
the upper right cover.

Upper right
cover
Screw
Screw

Paper conveying
unit
Figure 1-2-35

1-2-27

2MN/2N1

4. Remove two screws.


5. Unhook three hooks and then remove
the Left upper cover.

Hooks

Hook

Left upper cover

Screws
Left upper cover

Figure 1-2-36

6. Remove screw and then remove the


rear tray cover.

Rear tray cover


Screw

Figure 1-2-37

1-2-28

2MN/2N1

7. Remove eight screws and then remove


the rear upper cover.

Rear upper cover

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screw
Figure 1-2-38

Screw

8. Remove five screws and then remove


the Top cover.

Screw
Screw

Top cover

Screw

Screw
Figure 1-2-39

1-2-29

2MN/2N1

9. Cut out the aperture plate on the upper


right cover using nippers.

Upper right cover

Aperture
Figure 1-2-40

10. Fit two clamps.

Clamps

Figure 1-2-41

1-2-30

2MN/2N1-1

11. Fit four clamps.

Clamps

Clamp

Figure 1-2-42

12. Release ten wire saddles.


13. Remove two wire holders.

Wire holders
Clamps

Clamps
Clamps
Clamps

Clamps

Figure 1-2-43

1-2-31

2MN/2N1-1

14. Connect the relaying USB wire to the


USB wire of the IC card reader.
15. Insert the connector of the relaying USB
wire to the main PWB.
16. Fix the USB wire of the IC card reader
using ten wire saddles and two wire
holders.

Figure 1-2-44

17. Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader


through two clamps and then fasten the
wire.

Clamps

IC card reader
Figure 1-2-45

1-2-32

2MN/2N1-1

18. .Fix the wirings of extra portion using


two clamps so that the distance of the
USB power line from the clamp to the
IC card reader is approximately
160mm.

Clamps

160 mm

IC card reader

Figure 1-2-46

19. Route the IC card reader through the


opening in the upper right cover and fix
the upper right cover using the two
screws.

Upper right
cover

Screw

IC card reader
Screw
Figure 1-2-47

1-2-33

2MN/2N1

20. Remove the pin of the card reader base


and then remove the card reader
mount.

Card reader
base
Card reader
mount

Pin

Figure 1-2-48

21. Fit the card reader mount to the


machine using two pins.

Right upper
cover

Pins
Card reader
mount

Figure 1-2-49

1-2-34

2MN/2N1

22. Refit the card reader base to card


reader mount using the pin removed in
step 20.

Card reader
mount
Card reader
base

Pin

Figure 1-2-50

A
Card reader
tray

23. Fit the card reader tray to the card


reader base.
Choose the direction of mounting the IC
card reader according to the depth of
the reader.
10mm to 22mm: Face the mark A
upwards.
Less than 10mm: Face the mark B
upwards.

Card reader
base

B
B

Card reader
tray

Card reader
base
Figure 1-2-51
1-2-35

2MN/2N1

24. Mount the IC card reader on the card


reader base.

IC card reader

Figure 1-2-52

25. Hook the two hooks of the card reader


case to fit the card reader case to the
card reader base.
Press its top until it clicks in.

Card reader
case
Hooks
A
A

Figure 1-2-53
26. Replace the cover which was removed.

1-2-36

2MN/2N1-1
For external wirings
Procedure

1. After confirming the data lamp is turned


off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Remove the pin of the card reader base
and then remove the card reader
mount.

Card reader
base
Card reader
mount

Pin

Figure 1-2-54
3. Remove the upper right cover
(see page P.1-2-27).
4. Cut out the aperture plate on the upper
right cover using nippers
(see page P.1-2-30).
5. Replace the cover which was removed.

6. Fit the card reader mount to the


machine using two pins.

Right upper
cover

Pins
Card reader
mount
Figure 1-2-55

1-2-37

2MN/2N1

7. Refit the card reader base to card


reader mount using the pin removed in
step 2.

Card reader
mount
Card reader
base

Pin

Figure 1-2-56

A
Card reader
tray

8. Fit the card reader tray to the card


reader base.
Choose the direction of mounting the IC
card reader according to the depth of
the reader.
10mm to 22mm: Face the mark A
upwards.
Less than 10mm: Face the mark B
upwards.

Card reader
base

B
B

Card reader
tray

Card reader
Figure 1-2-57

1-2-38

2MN/2N1

9. Route the USB wire of the IC card


reader through the aperture of the card
reader base and mount the IC card
reader on the card reader base.

IC card reader

Aperture

USB wire

Figure 1-2-58

10. Hook the two hooks of the card reader


case to fit the card reader case to the
card reader base.
Press its top until it clicks in.

Card reader
case
Hooks
A
A

Figure 1-2-59

1-2-39

2MN/2N1

Clamps

11. Fit six clamps.


Right side: three
Rear side: three

Clamps

Figure 1-2-60

12. Pass the USB wire of the IC card reader


through six clamps and then fasten the
wire.
13. Connect the USB wire to the machine.
If the length does not suffice, use the
USB wire supplied.

Clamps

USB wire
Clamps

Figure 1-2-61
1-2-40

2MN/2N1
Enabling IC Card Authentication
Precautions
To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated web site of your
dealer or service representative, and register Machine No. indicated on your machine and Product ID indicated on the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.

1. Turn the main power switch on.


2. Press [Menu].
3. Select Op Function. Press OK key.
4. The Login screen appears.
5. With the Login User Name entry field selected, press OK key.The Login User Name entry screen is displayed.
6. Enter the Login User Name using the numeric keys then press OK key.
7. Select the Login Password entry field. press OK key.
8. Enter the Login Password with the numeric keys then press OK key.
9. Pressing [Login] ([Right Select]).
10. The Op Functions menu appears.
11. Select the IC Card, then press OK key.
12. Select the License On. then press OK key.
13. Select the Official. then press OK key.
14. To use the application as a trial, select Trial and press OK key.
15. Enter the License key using the numeric keys.
16. When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes] ([Left Select]).
To use a SSFC card, run maintenance mode U222 and set SSFC.

1-2-41

2MN/2N1-1

1-2-6 Installing the duct unit (option)


Duct unit installation requires the following parts:
Parts
Duct unit

Quantity

Part.No.

302LC94530

Supplied parts of duct unit (302LC94530):


Parts

Quantity

Part.No.

Duct A

Duct B

Filter

M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw

7BB200308H

M3 x 8 tap-tight P screw (black)

7BB282308H

M3 x 8 tap-tight S screw (black)

7BB782308H

*: This option unit cannot be installed together with the finisher.

Procedure
1. After confirming the data lamp is turned
off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Fit duct B to duct A using two M3 x 8
tap-tight P screws.

Duct A

Duct B

M3 x 8
tap-tight
P screw
M3 x 8
tap-tight
P screw
Figure 1-2-62

1-2-42

2MN/2N1

3. Fit two filters to duct A.

Duct A

Filters

Figure 1-2-63
4. Remove the screw A from the rear
lower cover.

Rear lower
cover
Screw A

Figure 1-2-64
1-2-43

2MN/2N1

5. Fit the duct unit to the machine using


the removed screw A, M3 x 8 tap-tight P
screw (black) and two M3 x 8 tap-tight S
screws (black).

M3 x 8 tap-tight
S screws (black)

M3 x 8 tap-tight
P screw (black)
Screw A

Figure 1-2-65

1-2-44

2MN/2N1

1-3-1 Maintenance mode


1-3 Maintenance Mode

The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item


Perform this operation when the panel displays
Ready to print or that the cover is open.
Start
Press the menu key while pressing and
holding the OK and down cursor keys
simultaneously.

Enter 10871087 using


the numeric keys.

( 0 -16digit)
Press the Right Select key for [Enter].

Enter the maintenance item


number using the numeric keys.

Press the OK key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the Back key.

Yes

Repeat the same


maintenance item?

No
Yes

Run another maintenance


item?
No
Enter 001 using the numeric keys
and press the OK key.

End

1-3-1

Maintenance mode is exited.

2MN/2N1

(2) Maintenance modes item list


Section
General

Item
No.

Content of maintenance item

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

U000 Outputting an own-status report

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

U002 Setting the factory default data

U004 Setting the machine number

U019 Displaying the ROM version

Initialization

U021 Memory initializing

U024 HDD formatting

Drive,
paper
feed and
paper
conveying system

U030 Checking the operation of the motors

U031 Checking switches and sensors for


paper conveying

U032 Checking the operation of the clutches

U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids

U034 Adjusting the print start timing

LSU Out Top

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

LSU Out Left

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

LSU Out Top B/W

0/0/0/0/0/0

LSU Out Top 3/4

0/0/0/0/0/0

U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors

U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper


Paper Loop Amount

Paper Loop Amount B/W

-5/0/-5/0/
-5/0/-5/0
-6/-1/-5/0

-7/-1/-7/-1/
-7/-1/-7/-1/
-8/-2/-7/-1

-8/-8/-8/
-8/-9/-8

Paper Loop Amount 3/4

-2/-2/-2/-2/-3/-2

U052 Setting the fuser motor control


Set Loop Sensor

Loop Sensor Control

On/On/On/On

Set Loop Sensor Valid

On

U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor


speed
Motor1

12

11

Motor2

0/0/0/17/0

0/0/0/15/0

1-3-2

2MN/2N1

Section
Drive,
paper
feed and
paper
conveying system

Item
No.
U053

Content of maintenance item

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

Motor3

27/0/-30/
-30/82/0/18/-30/-30/
0/0/0/0

-18/0/-27/
-27/73/0/
16/-27/-27/
0/0/0/0

Motor4

-/28

25/22

Motor5

0/0/14/0

Motor6

-16/0/-25/
-25/66/0/
15/-24/-24

Motor1 Half

Motor2 Half

0/0/0/34/0

0/0/0/30/0

Motor3 Half

54/0/-43/
-43/164/0/
36/-60/-60

-36/0/-38/
-38/147/0/
32/-54/-54

Motor1 3/4

Motor2 3/4

0/0/0/22/0

Motor3 3/4

-26/0/-39/-39/106/0/
23/
-39/-39

35/0/-39/-39/106/0/
23/
-39/-39

U059 Setting fan mode


Fan Mode

Mode1

Cooling Mode

U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern


High
voltage

U100 Adjusting main high voltage


Adj AC Bias

Set AC Auto Adj

On

Set DC Bias

Adj DC Bias

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

Set Low Temp

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
1

Set Charger Freq

11022/10690/10690
8857

8807/
-/
10690/
8857

Chk Current

Set AC Gain

Auto

U101 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer


Normal Full

126

131

Normal Half

108

110

Normal 3/4

118

118

1-3-3

2MN/2N1

Section
High
voltage

Item
No.
U101

Content of maintenance item


Normal B/W
Add Color

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

135

2/2/5

Add Color 2nd

-3/-3/-2/-14

Surround Correct

Off

U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary


transfer
Light/Normal 1st
Normal2/3 1st

143/134/120

150/139/128

Light/Normal 2nd
Normal2/3 2nd

207/155/124

220/163/128

Light/Normal 1st 3/4(Gloss)


Normal2/3 1st 3/4(Gloss)

131/123/120

Light/Normal 2nd 3/4(Gloss)


Normal2/3 2nd 3/4(Gloss)

180/140/120

Light/Normal 1st B/W


Normal2/3 1st B/W

150/144/128/

Light/Normal 2nd B/W


Normal2/3 2nd B/W

183/171/128

Heavy1 1st 3/4

133/129/124

Heavy1 2nd 3/4

155/150/124

Heavy4/5 1st Half

126/123/119

130/127/122

Heavy4/5 2nd Half

144/140/119

151/146/122

OHP

134/129/124

139/133/128

Bias

1/1/1/-/138/126/133

1/1/1/1/143/130/133

U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage

Belt(A)

202/180/192/-

207/182/192/212

Belt(B)

150/110/130/-

160/110/130/160

U108 Setting separation shift bias

Output

55/55/55/55/0/0

Output 3/4

55/55/55/55

Output B/W

20/20/20/20

Timing

Subtraction Value

-35

U110 Checking the drum count

U111 Checking the drum drive time

U117 Checking the drum number

U118 Displaying the drum history

U119 Setting the drum

1-3-4

2MN/2N1

Section
High
voltage

Item
No.

Content of maintenance item

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number

U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history

U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count

U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing

-5/0/13

-5/0/10

Developer U130 Initial setting for the developer

U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage

Manual

150/150/150/150

Mode

Auto

U132 Replenishing toner forcibly


U135 Checking toner motor operation

U136 Setting toner near end detection

3/3

U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity


outside the machine

U140 Displaying developer bias


Sleeve DC

84/84/84/70/-

84/84/84/70/70

Sleeve AC

155/155/155/155/-

155/155/155/155/155

Mag DC

155/155/155/155/-

155/155/155/155/155

Mag AC

160/200/200/200/-

160/200/200/200/160

Sleeve Freq

5345/
-/
5345/
5345

5511/5345/5345/5345

Sleeve Duty

68/-

68/68

Mag Duty

43/-

43/43

AC Calib

15/15/15/12
Mode1

U147 Setting for toner applying operation


Mode

Mode1

Upper Limit

2.0

Minimum

10

Interval Number

250/100/50

U148 Setting drum refresh mode

2/2

U155 Checking sensors for toner

U156 Setting the toner replenishment level


Supply

512/512/512/512/-

512/512/512/512/512

Empty

100/100/100/100/-

100/100/100/100/100

1-3-5

2MN/2N1-1

Section

Item
No.

Content of maintenance item

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

Developer U157 Checking the developer drive time

U158 Checking the developer count


Fuser

U161 Setting the fuser control temperature


Warm Up
Print

Operation
panel and
support
equipment

165/140/80/170/165/
150/50/155

170/145/80/175/175/
150/50/160

170/5

175/5

Low Power Mode

Mode1

Grain Mode

Mode0

U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count

U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source

U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature

U207 Checking the operation panel keys

U208 Setting the paper size for the side deck


U221 Setting the USB host lock function
U223 Operation panel lock

Letter (Inch)/A4 (Metric)


Off
Unlock

U234 Setting punch destination

Inch (Inch)/Europe Metric (Metric)

U237 Setting finisher stack quantity

0/0

U240 Checking the operation of the finisher

U241 Checking the operation of the switches


of the finisher

U246 Setting the finisher


Finisher

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

Booklet

0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

U247 Setting the paper feed device


Mode
setting

U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance


cycle

600000/600000/300000

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance


counter

0/0/0

U252 Setting the destination

U253 Switching between double and single


counts

DBL(A3/Ledger)

U260 Selecting the timing for print counting

Eject

U265 Setting OEM purchaser code

U271 Setting the page count

2/3

U278 Setting the delivery date

U285 Setting service status page

On

1-3-6

2MN/2N1-1

Section
Mode
setting

Item
No.

Content of maintenance item

U323 Setting abnormal temperature and


humidity warning
U325 Setting the paper interval

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm
On
Off/1

U327 Setting the cassette heater control

Off

U332 Setting the size conversion factor


Rate

1.0

Mode

Level 1

1.0

Level 2

2.5

U340 Setting the applied mode

190/1

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due


indication
Image
processing

U410 Setting a Gamma table.

0
Table1

U460 Adjusting the conveying sensor


Conveying Sensor

0/0

On/Off Config

Off

U464 Setting the ID correction operation


Permission

On

Time Interval

480

Mode

Normal

On/Sleep Out

On

AP/NE

On

Leaving Time

480

Driving Time

300

Timing

3600

Target Value

890/910/910/760/320/320/300/350

Print Rate(B/W)

50

Calib

Edge Reduction

Off

U465 Data reference for ID correction

U467 Setting the color registration adjustment

Color Regist

On

Timing

10

U468 Checking the color registration data

U469 Adjusting the color registration

U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation


U485 Setting the color table

1000
-

1-3-7

2MN/2N1-1

Section

Item
No.

Content of maintenance item

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

Image
processing

U486 Setting color/black and white operation


mode

Others

U901 Checking print counts by paper feed


locations

U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts

U904 Checking/clearing the call for service


counts

U905 Checking counts by optional devices

U906 Resetting partial operation control

U908 Checking the total counter value

U910 Clearing the print coverage data

U911 Checking print counts by paper sizes

U917 Setting backup data reading/writing

U920 Checking the print counts

U927 Clearing the all print counts and


machine life counts (one time only)

U928 Checking machine life counts

U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller


count

U952 Maintenance mode workflow

U964 Checking of log

U969 Checking of toner area code

U977 Data capture mode

U984 Checking the developer unit number

U985 Displaying the developer unit history

U989 HDD Scan disk

1-3-8

Mode2

2MN/2N1

Contents of the maintenance mode items


Item No.
U000

Description
Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display

Output list

Maintenance

List of the current settings of the maintenance modes

User Status

Outputs the user status page

Service Status

Outputs the service status page

Event

Outputs the event log

Network Status

Outputs the network status page

All

Outputs the all reports

3. Press the OK key. A list is output.


4. Press the OK key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display

Description

Ready

List of the current settings of the maintenance modes

Active

Outputs the user status page

Complete

Outputs the service status page

Error

Outputs the event log

1-3-9

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U000

Description
Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off (see page p.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the OK key.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display

Output list

Print

Outputs the report

USB (Text)

Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)

USB (HTML)

Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)

8. Press the OK key.


Output will be sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-10

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U000

Description
Event log

Event Log

(2) 27/Oct/2010 08:40

Printer
(1) Firmware version 2MN_2000.000.000 2010.10.27
(8) Paper Jam Log
#
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Count.
9999999
8888888
7777777
6666666
5555555
4444444
3333333
2222222
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666
555555 (a)
444444
1

Count.
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666
555555
444444
1

(10) Maintenance Log


#

Count.

(f) J0000:

(e)

Service Code
01.6000
01.2100
01.4000
01.6000
01.2100
01.4000
01.6000
01.2100

Item.

Log Data Nothing...

(11) Unknown toner Log


#
5
4
3
2
1

Count.
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666

(4)

(5)

(6)

(12) Counter Log

0501.01.08.01.01

(9) Service Call Log


#
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Event Descriprions
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
(b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01

(3)

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Item.
01.00
01.00
01.00
01.00
01.00

0
J0001: 1
J0002: 11
J0003: 222
J0004: 1
J0005: 1
J0006: 1
J0007: 1
J0008: 1
J0009: 1
J0010: 1
J0012: 999
J0013: 1
J0014: 1
J0015: 1
J0016: 1
J0017: 1
J0018: 1
J0019: 1
J0020: 1
J0021: 1
J0022: 1
J0023: 1
J0024: 1
J0025: 1
J0026: 1
J0027: 1
J0028: 1
J0029: 1
J0030: 1
J0031: 1
J0032: 1
J0033: 1
J0034: 1
J0035: 1
J0036: 1
J0037: 1
J0038: 1
J0039: 1
J0040: 1

J0041:
J0042:
J0043:
J0044:
J0045:
J0046:
J0047:
J0048:
J0049:
J0050:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

(g) C0000: 0 (h) T00: 10


C0001:
C0002:
C0003:
C0004:
C0005:
C0006:
C0007:
C0008:
C0009:
C0010:
C0011:
C0012:
C0013:
C0014:
C0015:
C0016:
C0017:
C0018:
C0019:
C0020:
C0021:
C0022:
C0023:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

T01: 20
T02: 30
T03: 40
T04: 50
T05: 999

(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-1
Detail of event log
No.

Items

(1)

System version

(2)

System date

(3)

Engine soft version

(4)

Engine boot version

Description

1-3-11

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U000

Description
Detail of event log
No.

Items

Description

(5)

Controller BROM version

(6)

Operation panel mask version

(7)

Machine serial number

(8)

Paper Jam
Log

Count.

The total page count


Remembers 1 to 16 of
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the
paper jam.
rence of the previous
paper jam is less than
16, all of the paper jams
are logged. When the
occurrence excesseds
16, the oldest occurrence is removed.

Event
Log code (hexadecimal, 5 categories)
(a) Cause of a paper
jam
(b) Paper source
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject

(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)


For details on the case of paper jam, refer to Paper Misfeed Detection.
(P.1-4-2)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)
06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
08 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: (Not specified)
01: Monarch
02: Business
03: International DL
04: International C5
05: Executive
06: Letter-R
86: Letter-E
07: Legal
08: A4R
88: A4E
09: B5R
89: B5E
0A: A3

1-3-12

0B: B4
0C: Ledger
0D: A5R
0E: A6
0F: B6
10: Commercial #9
11: Commercial #6
12: ISO B5
13: Custom size
1E: C4
1F: Postcard
20: Reply-paid postcard
21: Oficio II

22: Special 1
23: Special 2
24: A3 wide
25: Ledger wide
26: Full bleed paper
(12 x 8)
27: 8K
28: 16K-R
A8: 16K-E
32: Statement-R
B2: Statement-E
33: Folio
34: Western type 2
35: Western type 4

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U000
No.

Items

(8) Paper Jam


cont. Log

Description
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain
02: Transparency
03: Preprinted
04: Labels
05: Bond
06: Recycled
07: Vellum
08: Rough
09: Letterhead

0A: Color
0B: Prepunched
0C: Envelope
0D: Cardstock
0E: Coated
0F: 2nd side
10: Media 16
11: High quality

15: Custom 1
16: Custom 2
17: Custom 3
18: Custom 4
19: Custom 5
1A: Custom 6
1B: Custom 7
1C: Custom 8

(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)


01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD)
4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU)
29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD)
34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD)
48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved

1-3-13

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U000
No.
(9)

(10)

Items
Service Call
Log

Maintenance
Log

Description
#

Count.

Service Code

Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of self
diagnostics error. If
the occurrence of
the previous diagnostics error is less
than 8, all of the
diagnostics errors
are logged.

The total page


count at the time of
the self diagnostics
error.

Self diagnostic error code


(See page 1-4-27)

Count.

Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of
replacement. If the
occurrence of the
previous replacement of toner container is less than 8,
all of the occurrences of replacement are logged.

Code of maintenance
The total page
count at the time of replacing item
the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
the toner container.
First byte (Replacing item)
01: Toner container
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow

Example:
01.6000
01: Self diagnostic error
6000: Self diagnostic error
code number
Item

First byte (Replacing item)


02: Maintenance kit
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
01: MK-8505A
02: MK-8505B
03: MK-8505C
(11)

Unknown
Toner Log

Count.

Item

Remembers 1 to 5
of occurrence of
unknown toner
detection. If the
occurrence of the
previous unknown
toner detection is
less than 5, all of the
unknown toner
detection are
logged.

The total page


count at the time of
the toner empty
error with using an
unknown toner
container.

Unknown toner log code


(1 byte, 2 categories)

1-3-14

First byte
01: Toner container (Fixed)
Second byte
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U000
No.
(12)

Items
Counter Log
Comprised of
three log counters including
paper jams, self
diagnostics
errors, and
replacement of
the toner container.

Description
(f) Paper jam

(g) Self diagnostic


error

(h) Maintenance item


replacing

Indicates the log


counter of paper
jams depending on
location.

Indicates the log


counter of self diagnostics errors
depending on
cause.

Indicates the log counter depending on the


maintenance item for
maintenance.

Refer to Paper Jam


Log.

Example:
C6000: 4

All instances including those are not


Self diagnostics
error 6000 has hapoccurred are displayed.
pened four times.

T: Toner container
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
M: Maintenance kit
00: MK-8505A
01: MK-8505B
02: MK-8505C
Example:
T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.

1-3-15

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U000

Description
Service status page (1)

Service Status Page

(2) 27/10/2011 12:00

Printer

(3)

(1) Firmware version 2MN_2000.001.001 2011.10.27

(4)

(5)

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Controller Information
Memory status

(7) Standard Size


(8) Option Slot
(9) Total Size

1.0 GB
1.0 GB
2.0 GB

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Time

(10) Local Time Zone


(11) Date and Time
(12) Time Server

+01:00 Amsterdam
27/10/2010 12:00
10.183.53.13

Installed Options
Cassette (500 x 2)
(13) Paper feeder
Cassette (3000)
(14) Side Feeder
1000-Finisher
(15) Finisher
(16) IC Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed
Installed
(17) Security Kit (E)
Data Security Kit (E)

(18) UG-33
(19) UG-34
(20) USB Keyboard
(21) USB Keyboard Type

Installed
Installed
Connected
US-English

Print Coverage

(22) Average(%)
(23) K: 1.10
C: 2.20
M: 3.30
Y: 4.40

/ Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion)


/ 1111111.11
/ 2222222.22
/ 3333333.33
/ 4444444.44

e-MPS error control

Y6

(24) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44


RP Code

(26) 1234 5678 9012


(27) 5678 9012 3456
(28) 9012 3456 7890
(29) 3456 7890 1234

(25) FRPO Status


Default Pattern Switch B8
0
Default Font Number C5*1000+C2*100+C3 00000
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Figure 1-3-2

1-3-16

(6) [XXXXXXXXXX]

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U000

Description
Service status page (2)

Service Status Page

27/10/2011 12:00

Printer

Firmware version 2MN_2000.001.001 2011.10.27

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Engine Information
(30) NVRAM Version
(31) MAC Address

Send Information
(32) Date and Time
(33) Address

_1F31225_1F31225
00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D

11/10/27

1/2 (34) (35)


(36) 100/100
(37) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
(38) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/

(53)
(54)
(58)

(59)

(60)
(61)

(62)

(63)
(64)

(65)

0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (39) (40) (41) (42) (43) (44) (45) (46) (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52)
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (55) (56) (57)
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
XXXXXXXX
[2MN_81BR.001.010] [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (66) (67) (68)

(69) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00
0/3/ (70) (71)
0/12.3/56.7/ (72) (73) (74)
0/0 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (75)
1/5/ (76)(77)
1/1/ (78)(79)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (80)

Figure 1-3-3

1-3-17

[XXXXXXXXXX]

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U000

Description
Detail of service status page
No.

Description

Supplement

(1)

Firmware version

(2)

System date

(3)

Engine soft version

(4)

Engine boot version

(5)

Operation panel mask version

(6)

Machine serial number

(7)

Standard memory size

(8)

Option memory size

(9)

Total memory size

(10)

Local time zone

(11)

Report output date

Day/Month/Year hour:minute

(12)

NTP server name

(13)

Presence or absence of the


paper feeder

Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed

(14)

Presence or absence of the side


feeder

Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/


Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed

(15)

Presence or absence of the


finisher

1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/


Not Installed

(16)

Presence or absence of the IC


card authentication kit

Installed/Not Installed/Trial

(17)

Presence or absence of the


data security kit

Installed/Not Installed

(18)

Presence or absence of the


UG-33

Installed/Not Installed

(19)

Presence or absence of the


UG-34

Installed/Not Installed

(20)

Presence or absence of the


USB keyboard

Connected/Not connected

(21)

USB keyboard setting display

US-English/US-English with Euro/German/French

(22)

Page of relation to the A4/Letter

* :Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of toner consumption and will not match with
the actual toner consumption.

(23)

Average coverage for total

Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(24)

Coverage on the final output


page

(25)

FRPO setting

(26)

RP code

Code the engine software version and the date of


update.

1-3-18

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U000
No.

Description

Supplement

(27)

RP code

Code the main software version and the date of


update.

(28)

RP code

Code the engine software version and the date of


the previous update.

(29)

RP code

Code the main software version and the date of the


previous update.

(30)

NV RAM version

_ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225


(a) (b)
(c) (d) (e)
(f)
(a) Consistency of the present software version
and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).

(31)

Mac address

(32)

The last sent date and time

(33)

Transmission address

(34)

Destination information

(35)

Area information

(36)

Margin settings

Top margin/Left margin

(37)

Margin/Page length/Page width


settings

Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/


Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/
Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/
Page width integer part/Page width decimal part

(38)

Life counter (The first line)

Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/


Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Cassette 6/
Cassette 7/Duplex

Life counter (The second line)

Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/


Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/
Maintenance kit B/Maintenance kit C

1-3-19

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.

Description

U000
No.

Description

Supplement

(39)

Panel lock information

F00: Off/F01: Partial lock 1/F02:Partial lock 2


F03: Partial lock 3/F04: Full lock

(40)

USB information

U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed

(41)

Paper handling information

0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit

(42)

Color printing double count


mode

0: All single counts


1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)

(43)

Black and white printing double


count mode

0: All single counts


1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)

(44)

Billing counting timing

(45)

Temperature (machine inside)

(46)

Temperature (machine outside)

(47)

Relative humidity
(machine outside)

(48)

Humidity (machine inside)

(49)

Fixed assets number

(50)

Job end judgment time-out time

(51)

Job end detection mode

(52)

Prescribe environment reset

0: Off
1: On

(53)

Media type attributes


1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20)

Weight settings
0: Light
1: Normal 1
2: Normal 2
3: Normal 3
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2
6: Heavy 3
6: Heavy 4
6: Heavy 5
7: Extra Heavy

* : For details on settings,


refer to MDAT Command
in Prescribe Commands
Reference Manual.

Fuser settings
0: High
1: Middle
2: Low
3: Vellum
Duplex settings
0: Disable
1: Enable

(54)

Calibration information

Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(55)

Calibration information

(56)

Calibration information

(57)

Calibration information

(58)

Calibration information

(59)

Calibration information

1-3-20

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U000
No.

Description

Supplement

(60)

Calibration information

Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

(61)

Calibration information

(62)

Calibration information

(63)

Calibration information

(64)

RFID information

(65)

RFID reader/writer version information

(66)

Option messege version

(67)

Color table version for printer

(68)

Color table 2 version for printer

(69)

Maintenance information

(70)

Altitude

0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2

(71)

Charger roller correction

1 to 5

(72)

Configuring toner coverage


counters

0: Full-color count display


1: Color coverage count display

(73)

Low coverage setting

0.1 to 100.0

(74)

Middle coverage setting

0.1 to 100.0

(75)

Data Sanitization information

(76)

Toner low setting

0: Enabled
1: Disabled

(77)

Toner low detection level

0 to 100 (%)

(78)

Limiting shifting for one-page


document

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

(79)

Setting confirmation display for


banner printing

(80)

Drum serial number

Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

Code conversion
A

1-3-21

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U001

Description
Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal print mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The normal print mode is entered.

U002

Setting the factory default data


Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose

Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Mode1(All)].
3. Press the OK key.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U002.
Error codes
Codes

Description

0001

Entity error

0002

Counter error

0003

OS error

0020

Engine error

1-3-22

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U004

Description
Setting the machine number
Description
Sets or displays the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB
Display
Machine No.

Description
Displays the machine serial number

If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB
Display

Description

Machine No.(Main)

Displays the machine serial number of main

Machine No.(Eng)

Displays the machine serial number of engine

Setting
Carry out if the machine serial number does not match.
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the OK key. Writing of serial No. starts.
3. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-23

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U010

Description
Setting the maintenance mode ID
Description
Sets the maintenance mode ID.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for more security.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

New ID

Enter a new 8-digit ID

New ID(Reconfirm)

Enter a new 8-digit ID (to confirm)

Initialize

Initialize the ID

Setting
1. Select [New ID].
2. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 9, *, #). * and # are mandatory to contain.
3. Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
4. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 9, *, #).
5. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Method: [Initialize]
1. Select [Initialize].
2. Press the OK key. ID is initialized.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-24

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U019

Description
Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The ROM version are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
Display

Description

Main

Main ROM

MMI

Operation ROM

Engine

Engine ROM

Engine Boot

Engine booting

RFID

RFID ROM

IH CPU

IH CPU ROM

IH CPU Boot

IH CPU booting

Motor CPU

Motor CPU ROM

Motor CPU Boot

Motor CPU booting

PDF Resource

PDF resource ROM

Option Language

Optional language ROM

Color Table1(Prn)

Color table 1 (printer) ROM

Color Table2(Prn)

Color table 2 (printer) ROM

PF1

Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder ROM

PF1 Boot

Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder booting

Side PF

Side multi tray /Side deck ROM

Side PF Boot

Side multi tray /Side deck booting

SMT SSW

Side multi tray multi feed sensor

PF2

Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder ROM

PF2 Boot

Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder booting

DF

1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher ROM

DF Boot

1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher booting

PH

Punch ROM

PH Boot

Punch booting

MT

Mail box ROM

MT Boot

Mail box booting

BF

Center-folding unit ROM

BF Boot

Center-folding unit booting

1-3-25

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U019
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U021

Memory initializing
Description
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call history and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification
selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination.
Purpose
Restores the machine parameters to factory default settings.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between
machines is initialized based on the destination setting.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U021.
Error codes
Codes

Description

0001

Entity error

0002

Counter error

0020

Engine error

1-3-26

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U024

Description
HDD formatting
Description
Initializes the hard disk.
Purpose
To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping.
Caution
In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk.
System menu (user login administration, job accounting and document box etc.)
When fully formatted, the following pre-installed software are removed.
Option language, PDF1.7 resource
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Full

Full format

Data

Data format (the application software are retained)

3. Press [Execute].
4. Press the OK key to initialize the hard disk.
5. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-27

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U030

Description
Checking the operation of the motors
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the motor to be operated.
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Feed

Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on

DLP(K)

Developer motor K (DEVM-K) is turned on

DLP(CMY)

Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) is turned on

Fuser

Fuser motor (FUM) is turned on

SB(CW)

Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise

SB(CCW)

Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterclockwise

CMY Release

Color release motor (CRM) is turned on

JobSepa

JS eject motor (JSEM) is turned on

Regist

Registration motor (RM) is turned on

Bridge1

BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) is turned on

Bridge2

BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) is turned on

Belt Meand

Transfer motor (TRM) is turned on

Press Release

Transfer release motor (TRRM) is turned on

Fuser Release

Fuser release motor (FURM) is turned on

DU1

Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) is turned on

DU2

Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) is turned on

Mid Roller

Middle motor (RM) is turned on

InnerJobSepa(CW)

JS conveying motor (JSCM) is turned on clockwise

InnerJobSepa(CCW)

JS conveying motor (JSCM) is turned on counterclockwise

4. To stop operation, press the Back key.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-28

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U031

Description
Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch/sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch/sensor
will be 1.
Display
Switch 1

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: MP feed sensor (MPFS)
1

Second digit: Feed sensor 1 (FS1)

Third digit: Feed sensor 2 (FS2)

Fourth digit: Paper conveying sensor (PCS)

Fifth: Registration sensor (RS)

Sixth: Loop sensor (LPS)

1
Switch 2

Seventh: Switchback sensor (SBS)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)
1

Second digit: Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)

Third digit: BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1)

Fourth digit: BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2)

Fifth: BR eject sensor (BRES)

Sixth: Eject full sensor (EFS)

1
Switch 3

Seventh: Fuser eject sensor (FUES)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: Middle sensor (MS)
1

Second digit: JS eject sensor (JSES)


-

1
1

Fourth digit: Tray full sensor(JSTFS)


Fifth digit: Eject sensor (ES)

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-29

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U032

Description
Checking the operation of the clutches
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Motor On] or [Motor Off].
Display

Description

Motor On

Motor is turned on

Motor Off

Motor is turned off

3. Press the OK key.


4. Select the clutch to be operated.
5. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Feed1

Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) is turned on

Feed2

Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) is turned on

MPT Feed

MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) is turned on

Feed

Paper conveying clutch (PCCL) is turned on

Assist1

Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) is turned on

Assist2

Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2) is turned on

6. To stop operation, press the Back key.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-30

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U033

Description
Checking the operation of the solenoids
Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Motor On] or [Motor Off].
Display

Description

Motor On

Motor is turned on

Motor Off

Motor is turned off

1. Press the OK key.


2. Select the solenoid to be operated.z
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Branch Left

Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on

Branch Exit

Feedshift solenoid is turned on

JobSepa

JS feedshift solenoid (JSFSSOL) is turned on

ID Clean

Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) is turned on

Bridge Solenoid

Bridge solenoid is turned on

Mail box

Mail box solenoid is turned on

4. To stop operation, press the Back key.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-31

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U034

Description
Adjusting the print start timing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration or aligns the center line.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the print image.
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the print image.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Description

LSU Out Top

Leading edge registration adjustment

LSU Out Left

Center line adjustment

LSU Out Top B/W*

Leading edge registration adjustment in black/white mode

LSU Out Top 3/4

Leading edge registration adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed

*: 55 ppm model only.

1-3-32

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U034

Description
Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment
1. Press the menu key.
2. Press the OK key to output a test pattern.
3. Select the item to be adjusted.
[LSU Out Top]
Display
MPT(L)

Description

Setting
range

Initial
Change in
setting value per step

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass
Half(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup Half(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

MPT(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

MPT
Half(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass
Half(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup Half(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
[LSU Out Top B/W] [LSU Out Top 3/4]
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
Change in
setting value per step

MPT(L)

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

MPT(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.

1-3-33

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U034

Description
4. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
* : Use the cursor keys to change the decimal digits.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
Leading edge
registration
(20 1.0 mm)

Correct image

Output
example 1

Output
example 2

Figure 1-3-4
5. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Remark
When changing the setting value of [Large] each item is modified, equal to amount of the value
which is changed adds also the value of [Small] each item and is pulled.

Adjustment: Center line adjustment


1. Press the menu key.
2. Press the OK key to output a test pattern.
3. Press the menu key.
4. Select the item to be adjusted.
[LSU Out Left]
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
Change in
setting value per step

MPT

Paper feed from MP tray

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass1

Paper feed from cassette 1

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass2

Paper feed from cassette 2

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass3

Paper feed from optional cassette 3

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass4

Paper feed from optional cassette 4

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass5

Paper feed from optional cassette 5

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass6

Paper feed from optional cassette 6

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Cass7

Paper feed from optional cassette 7

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

Dup

Duplex mode (second)

-3.0 to 3.0

0.1 mm

1-3-34

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U034

Description
5. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
Center line of printing
(within 2.0 mm)

Correct image

Output
example 1

Output
example 2

Figure 1-3-5
6. Press the OK key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-35

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U037

Description
Checking the operation of the fan motors
Description
Drives each fan motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each fan motor.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the fan motor to be operated.
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Group

Fuser Cooling

Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) is turned on

DLP Rear

Exhaust motor 1and 2 (EXFM1, 2) is turned on

LSU Cooling

LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned on

Belt Cooling

Belt fan motor 1and 2 (BLFM1, 2) is turned on

Exit Cooling

Eject front fan motor (EFFM) is turned on

Toner

Toner fan motor 1and 2 (TFM1, 2) is turned on

Low Volt

Power source fan motor (PSFM) is turned on

Exit Rear Cooling

Eject rear fan motor (EFRM) is turned on

IH PWB

IH fan motor (IHFM) is turned on

IH Coil

Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM) is turned on

DLP Front

Developer fan motor 1and 2 (DEVFM1, 2) is turned on

Conv Edge

Fuser fan motor 1and 2 (FUFM1, 2) is turned on

Fuser Edge

Fuser edge fan motor 1and 2 (FUEFM1, 2) is turned on

GroupA

Fan motors of group A are turned on

GroupB

Fan motors of group B are turned on

4. To stop operation, press the Back key.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-36

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U051

Description
Adjusting the deflection in the paper
Description
Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the print image is missing or varies randomly, or if the
print paper is Z-folded.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Description

Loop Amount

Deflection adjustment

Loop Amount B/W*

Deflection adjustment in black and white mode

Loop Amount 3/4

Deflection adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed

*: 55 ppm model only.


Adjustment
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
[Paper Loop Amount]
Display

Description

Initial setting

Setting
range

45ppm

55ppm

MPT(L)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-5

-7

MPT H(L)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-1

Cass(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-5

-7

Cass H(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-1

Dup(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-5

-7

Dup H(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-1

MPT(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-5

-7

MPT H(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-1

Cass(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-6

-8

Cass H(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-1

-2

Dup(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-5

-7

Dup H(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-1

Change in value per step: 1.0 mm


(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.

1-3-37

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U051

Description
[LSU Out Top B/W]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

MPT(L)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-8

Cass(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-8

Dup(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-8

MPT(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-8

Cass(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-8

Dup(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-8

Change in value per step: 1.0 mm


(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
[LSU Out Top 3/4]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

MPT(L)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-2

-2

Cass(L)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-2

-2

Dup(L)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-2

-2

MPT(S)

Paper feed from MP tray

-30 to 20

-2

-2

Cass(S)

Paper feed from cassette

-30 to 20

-3

-3

Dup(S)

Duplex mode (second)

-30 to 20

-2

-2

Change in value per step: 1.0 mm


(L): When large size paper is used (218 mm or more in width of paper).
(S): When small size paper is used.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the deflection.

Print
example 1

Print
example 2
Figure 1-3-6

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-3-38

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U052

Description
Setting the fuser motor control
Description
Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is
replaced and performs correction processing for the fuser motor.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Set Loop S

Enter the data value for loop sensor

Adj Loop S

Perform the adjustment of the loop sensor sensitivity

Loop S Control

Set the loop sensor detection control

Set Loop S Valid

Sets the presence or absence of the loop sensor

Method: [Set Loop Sensor]


1. Select [Scanning Board1].
2. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA1 using
the numeric keys.
3. Select [Scanning Board2].
4. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA2 using
the numeric keys.
5. Press the OK key. The value is set.

How to read the sensor data value


(e.g.) 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0

3 6 4
Setting: [Loop Sensor Control]
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

ScanBoard1

Scanning Board1 adjustment

ScanBoard2

Scanning Board2 adjustment

3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.

1-3-39

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description
Setting: [Loop Sensor Control]
1. Select the item.
2. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

Initial setting

No.1

Sensor detection On/Off setting at 125 to 250 mm from


the top of paper

On

No.2

Sensor detection On/Off setting at 250 to 290 mm from


the top of paper

On

No.3

Sensor detection On/Off setting at 300 to 330 mm from


the top of paper

On

No.4

Sensor detection On/Off setting at 350 to 370 mm from


the top of paper

On

3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.


Setting: [Set Loop Sensor Valid]
1. Select On or Off.
Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-3-40

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U053

Description
Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty
images occur.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Motor1

Adjustment of drum motor K speeds

Motor2

Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,


registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds

Motor3

Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper


feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds

Motor4

Drum motor K speed adjustment in black/white mode

Motor5*

Adjustment of developer motor K, transfer motor, registration motor and


transfer cleaning motor speeds in black/white mode

Motor6*

Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper


feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
in black/white mode

Motor1 Half

Adjustment of drum motor K speeds in half speed

Motor2 Half

Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,


registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds in half speed

Motor3 Half

Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper


feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
in half speed

Motor1 3/4

Adjustment of drum motor K speeds at 3/4 times of line speed

Motor2 3/4

Adjustment of developer motor K, developer motor MCY, transfer motor,


registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds at 3/4 times of
line speed

Motor3 3/4

Adjustment of eject motor, fuser motor, BR conveying motor 1/2, paper


feed motor, JS eject motor, middle motor and duplex motor 1/2 speeds
at 3/4 times of line speed

*: 55 ppm model only.


Setting: [Motor1]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display
Drum(K)

Setting
range

Description
Drum motor K (DRM-K)

-5000 to 5000 12

1-3-41

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm
11

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U053

Description
Setting: [Motor2]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

Dev(K)

Developer motor K
(DEVM-K)

-5000 to 5000 0

Dev(CMY)

Developer motor MCY


(DEVM-MCY)

-5000 to 5000 0

Trans

Transfer motor (TRM)

-5000 to 5000 0

Regist

Registration motor (RM)

-5000 to 5000 17

15

Clean

Transfer cleaning motor


(TRCM)

-5000 to 5000 0

Setting: [Motor3]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

SB

Eject motor (EM)

-5000 to 5000 27

-18

Fixing

Fuser motor (FUM)

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg1

BR conveying motor 1
(BRCM1)

-5000 to 5000 -30

-27

Brg2

BR conveying motor 2
(BRCM2)

-5000 to 5000 -30

-27

Feed

Paper feed motor (PFM)

-5000 to 5000 82

73

JobSepa

JS eject motor (JSEM)

-5000 to 5000 0

Mid

Middle motor (MM)

-5000 to 5000 18

16

DU1

Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)

-5000 to 5000 -30

-27

DU2

Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)

-5000 to 5000 -30

-27

Brg1 DF H BR conveying motor 1


(BRCM1)

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg1 DF L

BR conveying motor 1
(BRCM1)

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg2 DF H BR conveying motor 2


(BRCM2)

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg2 DF L

-5000 to 5000 0

BR conveying motor 2
(BRCM2)

1-3-42

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U053

Description
Setting: [Motor4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting
range

Initial setting

Display

Description

Drum B/W
K

Drum motor K (DRM-K) in


black/white mode

-5000 to 5000 -

25

DrumMono K

Drum motor K (DRM-K) in


monochrome mode

-5000 to 5000 28

22

45ppm

55ppm

*: 55 ppm model only.


Setting: [Motor5]:55 ppm model only
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Dev B/W(K)

Developer motor K (DEVM-K) in black/


white mode

-5000 to 5000

Trans B/W

Transfer motor (TRM) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

Regist B/W

Registration motor (RM) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

14

Clean B/W

Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) in


black/white mode

-5000 to 5000

Setting: [Motor6]:55 ppm model only


1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

SB B/W

Eject motor (EM) in black/white mode

-5000 to 5000

-16

Fixing B/W

Fuser motor (FUM) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

Brg1 B/W

BR conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) in


black/white mode

-5000 to 5000

-25

Brg2 B/W

BR conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) in


black/white mode

-5000 to 5000

-25

Feed B/W

Paper feed motor (PFM) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

66

JobSepaB/W

JS eject motor (JSEM) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

Mid B/W

Middle motor (MM) in black/white mode -5000 to 5000

15

DU1 B/W

Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

-24

DU2 B/W

Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) in black/white


mode

-5000 to 5000

-24

1-3-43

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U053

Description
Setting: [Motor1 Half]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display
Drum(K)

Description
Drum motor K (DRM-K) in half speed

Setting
range

Initial
setting

-5000 to 5000

Setting: [Motor2 Half]


1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

Dev(K)

Developer motor K
(DEVM-K) in half speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Dev(CMY)

Developer motor MCY


(DEVM-MCY) in half
speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Trans

Transfer motor (TRM) in


half speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Regist

Registration motor (RM)


in half speed

-5000 to 5000 34

30

Clean

Transfer cleaning motor


(TRCM) in half speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Setting: [Motor3 Half]


Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

SB

Eject motor (EM) in half


speed

-5000 to 5000 54

-36

Fixing

Fuser motor (FUM) in half


speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg1

BR conveying motor 1
(BRCM1) in half speed

-5000 to 5000 -43

-38

Brdg2

BR conveying motor 2
(BRCM2) in half speed

-5000 to 5000 -43

-38

Feed

Paper feed motor (PFM)


in half speed

-5000 to 5000 164

147

JobSepa

JS eject motor (JSEM) in


half speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Mid

Middle motor (MM) in half


speed

-5000 to 5000 36

32

1-3-44

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U053
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

DU1

Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)


in half speed

-5000 to 5000 -60

-54

DU2

Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)


in half speed

-5000 to 5000 -60

-54

Setting: [Motor1 3/4]


1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display
Drum(K)

Description
Drum motor K (DRM-K) at 3/4 times of
line speed

Setting
range
-5000 to 5000

Initial
setting
0

Setting: [Motor2 3/4]


Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Dev(K)

Developer motor K (DEVM-K) at 3/4


times of line speed

-5000 to 5000

Dev(CMY)

Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) at


3/4 times of line speed

-5000 to 5000

Trans

Transfer motor (TRM) at 3/4 times of


line speed

-5000 to 5000

Regist

Registration motor (RM) at 3/4 times of


line speed

-5000 to 5000

22

Clean

Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) at 3/4


times of line speed

-5000 to 5000

1-3-45

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U053

Description
Setting: [Motor3 3/4]
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
45ppm

55ppm

SB

Eject motor (EM) at 3/4


times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 35

-26

Fixing

Fuser motor (FUM) at 3/4


times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Brg1

BR conveying motor 1
(BRCM1) at 3/4 times of
line speed

-5000 to 5000 -39

-39

Brg2

BR conveying motor 2
(BRCM2) at 3/4 times of
line speed

-5000 to 5000 -39

-39

Feed

Paper feed motor (PFM)


at 3/4 times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 106

106

JobSepa

JS eject motor (JSEM) at


3/4 times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 0

Mid

Middle motor (MM) at 3/4


times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 23

23

DU1

Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)


at 3/4 times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 -39

-39

DU2

Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)


at 3/4 times of line speed

-5000 to 5000 -39

-39

Completion
Press the Back key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-3-46

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U059

Description
Setting fan mode
Description
Specifies mode for developer fan motors.
Purpose
Handling the lowering density [to suppress thermal stresses owing to the heated toner]

Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the mode.
Display

Description

Fan

Sets threshold temperature at which developer fan motors operate.

Cooling

Sets temperature at which the developer fan motors are switched


for controlling.

Setting: [Fan]
1. Select the mode.
Display

Description

Mode1

Setting temperature:Normal

Mode2

Setting temperature:Temperature threshold is raised from mode1


(WUP, temperature at READY : mode1 temperature -7(C), Temperature at PRINT : mode1 temperature -3(C).)

Mode3

Setting temperature:Temperature threshold is raised from mode2


(WUP, temperature at READY : mode1 temperature -22(C), Temperature at PRINT : mode1 temperature -8(C).)

Auto

Starting with Mode 2 at power up or recovery from sleep mode, and


switches to Mode 3 when the termistor detects a developer temperature BK is equal to or higher than 38C. The device never reverts
from mode 2 from mode 3 while power is on.

Initial setting: Mode1


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Cooling]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Cooling Mode

Description
Amount of shift from the initial standard
temperature

Setting
range
-3 to 3 (C)

Initial
setting
0

A larger value advances the operating timing, and a smaller value slows it.
2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-3-47

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U089

Description
Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
To check machine status when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output and press the OK key.
Display

Description

Purpose

256Gradation

256-gradation PG

To check the gradation reproducibility

Color Belt

Four color belts PG

To check the developer state and the


engine section ID

Gray(C)

Cyan PG

To check the drum quality

Gray(M)

Magenta PG

To check the drum quality

Gray(Y)

Yellow PG

To check the drum quality

Gray(K)

Black PG

To check the drum quality

White

Blank paper PG

To check the drum quality

Gradation Gray

5-graduation gray PG

To check for vertical lines on the laser


scanner unit

Sample Set

Four color belts PG,


Cyan PG, Magenta PG,
Yellow PG and Black PG

Pattern output for LLU assurance


application

3. Press the menu key.


4. Press the OK key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-48

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U100

Description
Adjusting main high voltage
Description
Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential.
Purpose
To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur, etc.) occurs.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select an item and press the OK key.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Adj AC Bias

Main charger AC bias for each color

Set AC Auto Adj

Setting the AC bias auto adjustment

Set DC Bias

Main charger DC bias for each color

Adj DC Bias

Additional surface potential

Set Low Temp

Pre-charge time at power supply ON

Set Charger Freq

Setting the main charger frequency

Chk Current

Rush current display

Set AC Gain

Setting the AC Gain

Setting: [Adj AC Bias]


1. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
The values set vary depending on environments.
Display

Description

Setting range

AC(C)

Main charger AC bias for cyan

0 to 255

AC(M)

Main charger AC bias for magenta

0 to 255

AC(Y)

Main charger AC bias for yellow

0 to 255

AC(K)

Main charger AC bias for black

0 to 255

AC B/W(K)*

Main charger AC bias for black in black/white


mode

0 to 255

*: 55 ppm model only.


2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Set AC Auto Adj]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Turns auto adjustment ON

Off

Turns auto adjustment OFF

Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.

1-3-49

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U100

Description
Displaying: [Set DC Bias]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display

Description

DC1(C)

Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed)

DC1 Half(C)

Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed)

DC1(M)

Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed)

DC1 Half(M)

Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed)

DC1(Y)

Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed)

DC1 Half(Y)

Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed)

DC1(K)

Main charger DC bias for black (full speed)

DC1 Half(K)

Main charger DC bias for black (half speed)

DC1 B/W(K)*

Main charger DC bias for black in black/white mode

*: 55 ppm model only.


Setting: [Adj DC Bias]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.l
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

DC2(C)

Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2 Half(C)

Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2(M)

Main charger DC bias for magenta


(full speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2 Half(M)

Main charger DC bias for magenta


(half speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2(Y)

Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2 Half(Y)

Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed) 128 to 127 0

DC2(K)

Main charger DC bias for black (full speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2 Half(K)

Main charger DC bias for black (half speed)

128 to 127 0

DC2 B/W(K)*

Main charger DC bias for black


in black/white mode

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Set Low Temp]
1. Change the value using the numeric keys.l
Display
Set Low Temp

Description
Pre-charge time at power supply ON

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-50

Setting
range
0 to 6

Initial
setting
1

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U100

Description
Setting: [Set Charger Freq]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.ll
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Generally

Main charger frequency

7500 to
11280

8807

11022

B/W*

Main charger frequency in


black/white mode

7500 to
11280

10690

Half

Main charger frequency in


half speed

7500 to
11280

10690

10690

3/4

Main charger frequency at


3/4 times of line speed

7500 to
11280

8857

8857

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Displaying: [Chk Current]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display

Description

Cyan rush current

Magenta rush current

Yellow rush current

Black rush current

Setting: [Set AC Gain]


1. Select the item to be set.
Display
Auto
Mode1
Mode2
Mode3

Description
Automatically adjusted in accordance with the environment
(Default)
Use this setting when C220X occurs (Multiplier = 0.95)
Use this setting when charging pitch streaks (horizontal) occur
(Multiplier = 1.05)
Use this setting if C220X occurred and the charging pitch
streaks (horizontal) has been observed despite mode1 has

Initial setting: Auto


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-51

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U101

Description
Setting the voltage for the primary transfer
Description
Sets the control voltage for the primary transfer.
Purpose
To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Normal

Setting the primary transfer positive voltage

Add Color

Setting the addition value (The addition value at the surface is


referenced as standard)

Add Color 2nd

Setting the addition value for the second side

Surround Correct

Environmental correction ON/OFF setting

Setting: [Normal]
1. Select the item to be set.
1. Change the value using the numeric keys.ll
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Full

Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow (full speed)

0 to 255

126

131

Half

Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow (half speed)

0 to 255

108

110

3/4

Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow at 3/4 times of


line speed

0 to 255

118

118

B/W*

Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow in black/white


mode

0 to 255

135

*: 55 ppm model only.


2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Add Color]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.l
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Normal

Regular

-127 to 127

Heavy4/5

Heavy 4/5

-127 to 127

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-52

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U101

Description
Setting: [Add Color 2nd]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.l
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

Addition value for the second side (cyan)

-127 to 127

-3

Addition value for the second side (magenta)

-127 to 127

-3

Addition value for the second side (yellow)

-127 to 127

-2

Addition value for the second side (black)

-127 to 127

-14

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Surround Correct]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Environmental correction is not performed

Off

Environmental correction is performed

Initial setting: Off


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-53

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U106

Description
Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer
Description
Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type.
Purpose
To change the setting when any density problems, such as too dark or light, occur.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Light/Normal1

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


52 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 and 65 g/m2 to 75 g/m2

Normal2/3

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


76 g/m2 to 105 g/m2

Heavy1

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2

Heavy2

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


136 g/m2 to 163 g/m2

Heavy3

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


164 g/m2 to 220 g/m2

Heavy4

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


221 g/m2 to 256 g/m2

Heavy5

Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness


257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Bias

Transfer bias value

OHP

Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies

Setting: [Light/Normal1]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

1st

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)

2nd

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)

1st 3/4(Gloss)

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed

2nd 3/4(Gloss)

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed

1st B/W*

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white
mode

2nd B/W*

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white
mode

*: 55 ppm model only.


2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the numeric keys.
1-3-54

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U106

Description
[1st]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

143

150

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

134

139

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

128

[2nd]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

207

220

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

155

163

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

124

128

[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

131

131

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

123

123

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

120

[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

180

180

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

140

140

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

120

[1st B/W]
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial setting
55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

150

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

144

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

128

[2nd B/W]
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial setting
55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

183

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

171

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

128

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


1-3-55

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U106

Description
Setting: [Normal2/3]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

1st

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed)

2nd

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed)

1st 3/4(Gloss)

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed

2nd 3/4(Gloss)

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed

1st B/W*

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white
mode

2nd B/W*

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white
mode

*: 55 ppm model only.


2. Select the paper width to be set.
3. Change the value using the numeric keys.
[1st]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

143

150

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

134

139

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

128

[2nd]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

207

220

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

155

163

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

124

128

[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

131

131

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

123

123

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

120

1-3-56

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U106

Description
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

180

180

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

140

140

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

120

120

[1st B/W]
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

150

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

144

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

128

[2nd B/W]
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial setting
55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

183

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

171

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

128

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Heavy1]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

1st 3/4

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of
line speed

2nd 3/4

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times
of line speed

2. Select the paper width to be set.


3. Change the value using the numeric keys.l
[1st 3/4]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

133

133

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

129

129

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

124

124

1-3-57

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U106

Description
[2nd 3/4]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

155

155

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

150

150

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

124

124

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Heavy4/5]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

1st Half

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed)

2nd Half

Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed)

2. Select the paper width to be set.


3. Change the value using the numeric keys.l
[1st Half]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

126

130

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

123

127

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

119

122

[2nd Half]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

144

151

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

140

146

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

119

122

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [OHP]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Width=105

105 mm wide

0 to 255

134

139

Width=210

210 mm wide

0 to 255

129

133

Width=297

297 mm wide

0 to 255

124

128

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-58

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U106

Description
Setting: [Bias]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Reverse

Transfer reverse bias


(full speed)

0 to 255

Reverse
Half

Transfer reverse bias


(half speed)

0 to 255

Reverse
3/4

Transfer reverse bias at 3/4


times of line speed

0 to 255

Reverse
B/W*

Transfer reverse bias in


black/white mode

0 to 255

Cleaning

Cleaning control value


(full speed)

0 to 255

138

143

Cleaning
Half

Cleaning control value


(half speed)

0 to 255

126

130

Cleaning
3/4

Cleaning control value at 3/4


times of line speed

0 to 255

133

133

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-59

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U107

Description
Setting the transfer cleaning voltage
Description
Sets the cleaning control voltage for transfer belt unit.
Purpose
Change settings if an offset has occurred due to the failure of cleaning the transfer belt.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Belt(A)

Transfer belt cleaning voltage (printing)

Belt(B)

Transfer belt cleaning voltage (paper interval)

3. Select the item to be set.


4. Change the value using the numeric keys.
[Belt(A)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Full

Full speed

0 to 255

202

207

Half

Half speed

0 to 255

180

182

3/4

3/4 times of line speed

0 to 255

192

192

B/W*

Black/white mode

0 to 255

212

[Belt(B)]
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Full

Full speed

0 to 255

150

160

Half

Half speed

0 to 255

110

110

3/4

3/4 times of line speed

0 to 255

130

130

B/W*

Black/white mode

0 to 255

160

*: 55 ppm model only.


5. Press the OK key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-60

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U108

Description
Setting separation shift bias
Description
Adjusts output of separation shift bias and ON/OFF timing.
Purpose
To set when the separated malfunction of the paper occurs.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Output

Adjusting the separation shift bias output

Output 3/4

Adjusting the separation shift bias output

Output B/W*

Adjusting the separation shift bias output in black/white mode

Timing

Adjusting the ON/OFF timing with paper position

Subtraction Value
*: 55 ppm model only.
Setting: [Output]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys or numeric key.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Light 1st

Separation shift bias for the first side on


paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2

0 to 255

55

Light 2nd

Separation shift bias for the second side


on paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2

0 to 255

55

Normal 1st

Separation shift bias for the first side on


paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2

0 to 255

55

Normal 2nd

Separation shift bias for the second side


on paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2

0 to 255

55

Add Lead

Addition value for leading edge on paper


with thickness 76 to 105 g/m2

-127 to 127

Heavy/OHP

Separation shift bias for transparencies


or paper with thickness 106 to 300 g/m2

0 to 255

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-61

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U108

Description
Setting: [Output 3/4 / Output B/W]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys or numeric key.

Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting
Output
3/4

Output
B/W*

Light 1st

Separation shift bias for the first side on


paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2

0 to 255

55

20

Light 2nd

Separation shift bias for the second side


on paper with thickness 52 to 64 g/m2

0 to 255

55

20

Normal 1st

Separation shift bias for the first side on


paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2

0 to 255

55

20

Normal 2nd

Separation shift bias for the second side


on paper with thickness 65 to 75 g/m2

0 to 255

55

20

* : 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Timing]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys or numeric key.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

On Lead

Separation shift bias ON timing at leading edge of paper

-200 to 200

On Center

Separation shift bias ON timing at center


of paper

-200 to 200

Off

Separation shift bias OFF timing

-200 to 200

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

Setting: [Subtraction Value]


1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys or numeric key.
Display

Description

Value

Setting
range
-127 to 127

Initial
setting
-35

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-62

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U110

Description
Checking the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current drum counts is displayed.
Display

Description

Drum count value for cyan

Drum count value for magenta

Drum count value for yellow

Drum count value for black

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U111

Checking the drum drive time


Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting
the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Display

Description

Drum drive time for cyan

Drum drive time for magenta

Drum drive time for yellow

Drum drive time for black

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-63

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U117

Description
Checking the drum number
Description
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
To check the drum number.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The drum number is displayed.
Display

Description

Cyan drum number

Magenta drum number

Yellow drum number

Black drum number

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-64

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U118

Description
Displaying the drum history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the color to check.
Display

Description

Cyan drum past record

Magenta drum past record

Yellow drum past record

Black drum past record

3. Press the OK key.


The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three
cases.
Display

Description

Machine History1 - 3

Historical records of the machine number

Cnt History1 - 3

Historical records of drum counter

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U119

Setting the drum


Description
Sets drum sensitivity.
Purpose
To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit.
When completed, perform maintenance mode U464, Calibration.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. Drum setup is commenced.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-65

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U122

Description
Checking the transfer belt unit number
Description
Displays the number of the transfer belt unit for checking.
Purpose
To check the number of the transfer belt.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
The current number of the transfer belt is displayed.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U123

Displaying the transfer belt unit history


Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the transfer belt unit counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the transfer counter.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
The history of a machine number and a transfer belt unit counter for each color is displayed
by three cases.
Display

Description

Machine History1 - 3

Historical records of the machine number

Cnt History1 - 3

Historical records of transfer belt unit counter

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-66

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U127

Description
Checking/clearing the transfer count
Description
Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter.
Purpose
To check the count or drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Also
to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed.
Display

Description

Mid(Cnt)

Transfer belt unit count value

2nd(Cnt)

Transfer roller count value

Mid(Time)

Transfer belt unit drive time

2nd(Time)

Transfer roller drive time

Clear

The counter value is cleared

Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the OK key. The counter value is cleared.
Clears only the transfer roller. The transfer belt unit is not cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-67

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U128

Description
Setting transfer high-voltage timing
Description
Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer high-voltage output.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed. If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the
back surface occurs, change the setting.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
3. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Initial setting

Setting
range

Display

Description

On Timing
1st

Transfer ON timing adjustment value (first side)

-200 to 200

-5

-5

On Timing
2nd

Transfer ON timing adjustment value (second side)

-200 to 200

Off Timing

Transfer OFF timing adjust- -200 to 200


ment value

13

10

45ppm

55ppm

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U130

Initial setting for the developer


Description
The toner sensor control bias is adjusted so that the sensor output is set as the target value with
the initial developer.
Purpose
Automatically executed when the developer unit loaded with the initial developer is replaced.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key.
Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed.
Display

Description

Toner sensor C control voltage

Toner sensor M control voltage

Toner sensor Y control voltage

Toner sensor K control voltage

Excute

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-68

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U131

Description
Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage.
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure,
etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set or displayed.
Display

Description

Manual

Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment

Auto

Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment

Mode

Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment

Setting: [Manual]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

Control(C)

Toner sensor C control voltage

0 to 255

150

Control(M)

Toner sensor M control voltage

0 to 255

150

Control(Y)

Toner sensor Y control voltage

0 to 255

150

Control(K)

Toner sensor K control voltage

0 to 255

150

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Displaying: [Auto]
1. The current setting is displayed.
Display

Description

Default(C)

Reference value for toner sensor C control voltage

Default(M)

Reference value for toner sensor M control voltage

Default(Y)

Reference value for toner sensor Y control voltage

Default(K)

Reference value for toner sensor K control voltage

Control(C)

Toner sensor C control voltage after correction

Control(M)

Toner sensor M control voltage after correction

Control(Y)

Toner sensor Y control voltage after correction

Control(K)

Toner sensor K control voltage after correction

1-3-69

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U131

Description
Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Manual

Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment

Auto

Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment

Initial setting: Auto


2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U132

Replenishing toner forcibly


Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display

Description

Supply(C)

Toner feed start level (cyan)

Supply(M)

Toner feed start level (magenta)

Supply(Y)

Toner feed start level (yellow)

Supply(K)

Toner feed start level (black)

Sensor(C)

Toner sensor output value (cyan)

Sensor(M)

Toner sensor output value (magenta)

Sensor(Y)

Toner sensor output value (yellow)

Sensor(K)

Toner sensor output value (black)

Excute
4. To stop operation, press the Back key.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-70

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U135

Description
Checking toner motor operation
Description
Drives toner motors.
Purpose
To check the operation of toner motors.
Remarks
When driving the toner motors long time or several times, developer section becomes the toner
full and is locked.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Toner].
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display
Toner

Description
Toner motor (TM) is turned on

4. To stop the operation, press the Back key.


Completion
Press the Back key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U136

Setting toner near end detection


Description
Sets the level that indicates the number of sheets that can be printed from occurrence of toner
near end to toner empty.
Purpose
To change the setting to advance detection of near end if the interval from toner near end to toner
empty seems too short.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

CMY

Setting the level of cyan/magenta/yellow toner 0 to 9

Setting the level of black toner

0 to 9

Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer.
Decreasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty shorter.
If 0 is set, toner near end will not be detected.
4. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-71

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U139

Description
Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine
Description
Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Purpose
To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Ext/Int

Internal/External temperature (C), External humidity (%)

LSU

Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit (C)

Developing

Internal temperature around the developer section (C)

Method: [Ext/Int]
1. The current temperature and humidity are displayed.
Display

Description

Ext Temp

External temperature (C)

Ext Humidity

External humidity (%)

Int Temp

Internal temperature (C)

Method: [LSU]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display

Description

Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C (C)

Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit M (C)

Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit Y (C)

Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit K (C)

Method: [Developing]
1. The current temperature is displayed.
Display

Description

Internal temperature around the developer unit C (C)

Internal temperature around the developer unit M (C)

Internal temperature around the developer unit Y (C)

Internal temperature around the developer unit K (C)

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-72

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U140

Description
Displaying developer bias
Description
Displays and changes various developer bias value.
Purpose
To check or changes the developer bias value.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Sleeve DC

Developer sleeve roller DC bias

Sleeve AC

Developer sleeve roller AC bias

Mag DC

Developer magnet roller DC bias

Mag AC

Developer magnet roller AC bias

Sleeve Freq

Developer sleeve roller frequency

Sleeve Duty

Developer sleeve roller duty

Mag Duty

Developer magnet roller duty

AC Calib

Executing or setting the AC calibration

Setting: [Sleeve DC]


1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Developer sleeve roller DC bias


for cyan

0 to 255

84

84

Developer sleeve roller DC bias


for magenta

0 to 255

84

84

Developer sleeve roller DC bias


for yellow

0 to 255

84

84

Developer sleeve roller DC bias


for black

0 to 255

70

70

B/W*

Developer sleeve roller DC bias


in black/white mode

0 to 255

70

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-73

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U140

Description
Setting: [Sleeve AC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Developer sleeve roller AC bias


for cyan

0 to 255

155

155

Developer sleeve roller AC bias


for magenta

0 to 255

155

155

Developer sleeve roller AC bias


for yellow

0 to 255

155

155

Developer sleeve roller AC bias


for black

0 to 255

155

155

B/W*

Developer sleeve roller AC bias


in black/white mode

0 to 255

155

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Mag DC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Developer magnet roller DC bias


for cyan

0 to 255

155

155

Developer magnet roller DC bias


for magenta

0 to 255

155

155

Developer magnet roller DC bias


for yellow

0 to 255

155

155

Developer magnet roller DC bias


for black

0 to 255

155

155

B/W*

Developer magnet roller DC bias


in black/white mode

0 to 255

155

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-74

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U140

Description
Setting: [Mag AC]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Developer magnet roller AC bias


for cyan

0 to 255

200

200

Developer magnet roller AC bias


for magenta

0 to 255

200

200

Developer magnet roller AC bias


for yellow

0 to 255

200

200

Developer magnet roller AC bias


for black

0 to 255

160

160

B/W*

Developer magnet roller AC bias


in black/white mode

0 to 255

160

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Sleeve Freq]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Normal

Developer sleeve roller frequency

0 to 6200 5345

5511

B/W*

Developer sleeve roller frequency in black/white mode

0 to 6200 -

5345

Half

Developer sleeve roller frequency (half speed)

0 to 6200 5345

5345

3/4*

Developer sleeve roller fre0 to 6200 5345


quency at 3/4 times of line speed

5345

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Sleeve Duty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Normal

Developer sleeve roller duty

0 to 99

68

43

B/W*

Developer sleeve roller duty in


black/white mode

0 to 99

43

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
1-3-75

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U140

Description
Setting: [Mag Duty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Normal

Developer magnet roller duty

0 to 99

43

68

B/W*

Developer magnet roller duty in


black/white mode

0 to 99

68

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Method: [AC Calib]
1. Select the item.
Display

Description

Calibration

Executing the AC calibration (Developer AC calibration setting)


Executing timing
1. When the setup at high altitude place.
2. Execute when replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3. Execute at the time of developing leak outbreak
4. When the density of solid image is dropped after the AC calibration.

Magnification

AC calibration target bias value setting


Executing timing
1. Developing bias setting when developing leak occurs after
AC calibration practice

High Altitude

Mode setting for AC calibration bias control


Executing timing
1. In case the density of solid image levels drop is not improved
even if execute AC calibration (setting at high altitude)

Method: [Calibration]
1. Turns the items to implement to on.
Display

Description

Type

High altitude grain mode setting

Change On/Off of Cyan developer

Change On/Off of Magenta developer

Change On/Off of Yellow developer

Change On/Off of Black developer

Execute

Executing the calibration

* : When the density of solid image is dropped, select "Type" and chose "+1". (High altitude
grain mode)
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. AC calibration is executed.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : When an error occurs, an error code is displayed.
1-3-76

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U140

Description
Setting: [Type]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display

Description

Continue the present setting and execute AC calibration

+1

High altitude grain mode On and then execute AC calibration


(C, M, Y and K switches to On)

+2

High altitude grain mode Off and then execute AC calibration


(C, M, Y and K switches to Off)

* : The following are automatically changed if "+1" is set up in the Type.


If current setting is [Normal2] or [Normal3] -> changed to [Normal1]
The U161 [Grain Mode] is set to [Mode2]
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the start key.

Setting: [Magnification]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

Set it at the time of Cyan developing leak outbreak

-10 to 15

15

Set it at the time of Magenta developing leak outbreak

-10 to 15

15

Set it at the time of Yellow developing leak outbreak -10 to 15

15

Set it at the time of Black developing leak outbreak

12

-10 to1 5

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Method: [High Altitude]
1. Select Mode1 or Mode2.
Display

Description

Mode1

Execute AC calibration by normal bias control

Mode2

If print density is low in an installation at high altitude, execute


calibration by fixing the bias potential.

Initial setting: Mode1


2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
3. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-77

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U147

Description
Setting for toner applying operation
Description
Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developing unit (T7 control: Toner applying
operation). Defines the action that the toner accumulated on the developer blade is sent back in
the developer unit (done by the vibration motor).
Purpose
The setting can be changed to reduce the toner applying quantity. Performed to change the
occurrence of the control of the vibration motor.
If the charged toner stays inside the developing unit, density decreases.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Mode

Settings for toner applying operation

Upper Limit

Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying quantity with each mode

Minimum

Toner layer width when cleaning mode is selected

Interval Number

Setting the vibration motor On timing

Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the mode.
Display

Description

Mode0

Less consumption of toner than a regular toner applying operation

Mode1

Executes toner applying with the regular amount of toner

Mode2

Applying more consumption of toner than a regular toner applying


operation

Initial setting; Mode1


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Upper Limit]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Value

Description
Upper limit printing ratio of toner applying
quantity with each mode (%)

Setting
range
0 to 2.0

Initial
setting
2.0

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Minimum]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Value

Description
Toner layer width when cleaning mode is
selected (mm)

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-78

Setting
range
0 to 30

Initial
setting
10

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U147

Description
Setting: [Interval Number]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Setting
range

Description

Initial
setting

Print(Normal) During continuous printing (Normal environment)

10 to 500

250

Print(H/H)

During continuous printing (High humidity


environment)

10 to 200

100

Print End

Print completed

10 to 100

50

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U148

Setting drum refresh mode


Description
Selects the mode used in drum refreshing
Purpose
Change settings when drum refreshing is too frequently executed.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the mode.
3. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Normal

Description
Auto setting drum refresh mode

Dew Cond

Setting range

Initial setting

0 to 3

0 to 3

* : Normal 0: Off / 1: Short / 2: Standard / 3: Long


Dew Cond 0: mode1 / 1: mode2 / 2: mode2 / 3: mode3
0: Inoperable. 1 - 3: the greater the value the more refreshings to take place.
4. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-79

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U155

Description
Checking sensors for toner
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value.
Purpose
To check the output value for each color when any image problems occur.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be display.
Display

Description

Waste Toner

Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor

Toner

Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor


each color

Method: [Waste Toner]


1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Full

Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)

Near Full

Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)

Method: [Toner]
1. Check the status of sensor. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Sensor(C)

Toner sensor C output value

Sensor(M)

Toner sensor M output value

Sensor(Y)

Toner sensor Y output value

Sensor(K)

Toner sensor K output value

Supply(C)

Toner replenishment level for cyan

Supply(M)

Toner replenishment level for magenta

Supply(Y)

Toner replenishment level for yellow

Supply(K)

Toner replenishment level for black

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-80

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U156

Description
Setting the toner replenishment level
Description
Sets the toner replenishment level for each color.
Purpose
To change settings according to the original image.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Supply

Setting the toner replenishment level

Empty

Setting the toner empty level

Method: [Supply]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Toner replenishment level for cyan

0 to 900

512

Toner replenishment level for magenta

0 to 900

512

Toner replenishment level for yellow

0 to 900

512

Toner replenishment level for black

0 to 900

512

B/W*

Toner replenishment level in black/white mode 0 to 900

512

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Method: [Empty]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Increasing the setting makes toner empty appear later and decreasing it makes toner
empty appear earlier.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Toner empty level for cyan

0 to 1023

100

Toner empty level for magenta

0 to 1023

100

Toner empty level for yellow

0 to 1023

100

Toner empty level for black

0 to 1023

100

B/W*

Toner empty level in black/white mode

0 to 1023

100

*: 55 ppm model only.


3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-81

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U157

Description
Checking the developer drive time
Description
Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control.
Purpose
To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The developer drive time is displayed.
Display

Description

Developer drive time for cyan

Developer drive time for magenta

Developer drive time for yellow

Developer drive time for black

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158

Checking the developer count


Description
Displays the developer count for checking.
Purpose
To check the developer unit status.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current developer counts is displayed.
Display

Description

Developer count value for cyan

Developer count value for magenta

Developer count value for yellow

Developer count value for black

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-82

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U161

Description
Setting the fuser control temperature
Description
Changes the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper,
or solve a fuser problem on thick paper.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

WarmUp

Control temperature except at printing

Print

Control temperature during printing

LowPower Mode

Heating power reduction control

Grain Mode

Setting the grain mode

Setting: [WarmUp]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Initial setting

Setting
range

Description

45ppm

55ppm

Ready
(C)

Control temperature at dis- 130 to 200 165


playing Ready (Center)
(C)

170

Ready
(E)

Control temperature at dis- 100 to 200 140


playing Ready (Edge)
(C)

145

Ready
(P)

Control temperature at dis- 0 to 200


playing Ready (Press)
(C)

80

Drive
(C)

Stable temperature during


driving (Center)

130 to 200 170


(C)

175

Wait
(C)

Stable temperature during


halt (Center)

130 to 200 165


(C)

175

Low Power
(P)

Control temperature at low


power consumption
(Press)

0 to 200
(C)

150

150

F.S. Shift(C

Full speed shift temperature (Center)

0 to 200
(C)

50

50

Pressure(P)

Pressurizing beginning
temperature (Press)

0 to 200
(C)

155

160

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-83

80

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U161

Description
Setting: [Print]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Initial setting

Setting
range

45ppm

55ppm

F.S.Print(C)

Temperature at maximum
print speed (Center)

130 to 200 170


(C)

175

Dup Shift(C)

Temperature at duplex
printing (Center)

-20 to 20
(C)

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [LowPower Mode]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Mode0

Not used normally (use when a fusing problem has occurred at


continuous printing in mode 1, however, use caution that mode
0, when used continously, can deteriorate the durability of the
fuser rollers).

Mode1

Fuser control temperature reduction mode (For normal users)

Mode2

Large volume output mode (For users who repeatedly print


approximately 1500 sheets at a time)

Initial setting: Mode1


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Grain Mode]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Mode0

Existing level (No special treatment)

Mode1

Setting the grain mode

Mode2

More improvements

Initial setting: Mode0


Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-84

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U167

Description
Checking/clearing the fuser count
Description
Displays and clears the fuser count for checking.
Purpose
To check the fuser count or drive time after replacement of the fuser unit. Also to clear the counts
after replacing unit.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The fuser count is displayed.
Display

Description

Cnt

Fuser unit count value

Release

Fuser unit drive time (release)

Press

Fuser unit drive time (press)

Clear

Clear the fuser unit count valueis

Clearing
1. Select the [Clear].
2. Press the OK key. The count is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U169

Checking/setting the fuser power source


Description
Displays and settings the reference voltage of the fuser IH PWB.
Purpose
To check the reference voltage.
When performing U021, use the same voltage as for the IH control PWB.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the mode.
Display
Mode

Description
Reference voltage

Setting range
1 to 4

1: 100 V specifications 2: 200 V specifications 3: 120 V specifications


4: 110 V specifications
3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-85

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U199

Description
Displaying fuser heater temperature
Description
Displays the detected fuser temperature.
Purpose
To check the fuser temperature.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The fuser temperature is displayed.
Display

Description

Heat Edge1

Heat roller edge temperature (C)

Heat Edge2

Heat roller edge temperature (C)

Heat Center

Heat roller center temperature (C)

Press Center

Press roller center temperature (C)

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. is displayed.
U207

Checking the operation panel keys


Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1. Press the OK key.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-86

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U208

Description
Setting the paper size for the side deck
Description
Sets the size of paper used in side deck.
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side deck or the size of paper used in the side deck is
changed.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter).
Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)
A4 (Metric specifications)
3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

U211

Setting the presence or absence of the job separator


Description
Sets the presence or absence of the inner job separator.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if the inner job separator is installed.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Inner Job Separator].
3. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

The inner job separator is installed

Off

The inner job separator is not installed

Initial setting: Off


4. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
5. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-87

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U221

Description
Setting the USB host lock function
Description
Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be
unable to recognize the device connected to the USB host.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Host Lock].
3. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

USB host lock function ON

Off

USB host lock function OFF

Initial setting: Off


4. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
5. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
U223

Operation panel lock


Description
Sets the operation panel lock function.
Purpose
This is performed to inhibit operating and canceling the menu on the operation panel which may
be done by others then an administrator.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Unlock

Release the lock of the operation from the menu

Partial Lock

Lock the operation from the menu

Lock

Lock the operation from the menu and job cancel

Initial setting: Unlock


3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Item

Partial Lock

Lock

Entering menu

Prohibited

Prohibited

Pressing Back key

Permitted

Prohibited

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-88

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U234

Description
Setting punch destination
Description
Sets the destination of punch unit of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the destination.
Display

Description

Auto

Conforms to destination settings.

Japan Metric

Metric (Japan) specifications

Inch

Inch (North America) specifications

Europe Metric

Metric (Europe) specifications

Initial setting: Inch (Inch specifications)/Europe Metric (Metric specifications)


3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-89

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U237

Description
Setting finisher stack quantity
Description
Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 4000-sheet
finisher.
Purpose
To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Main Tray

Number of sheets of stack on the main tray

Middle Tray

Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode

Setting: [Main Tray]


1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 4000 sheets

Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 2000 sheets

Initial setting: 0
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
3. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
Setting: [Middle Tray]
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:


65 sheets

Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode:


30 sheets

Initial setting: 0
Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non-staple printing: 10 sheets
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
3. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-90

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U240

Description
Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turns each motor and solenoid of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher ON.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be checked.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Motor

Checking the motor of the document finisher

Solenoid

Checking the solenoid of the document finisher

Mail Box

Checking the motor of the mailbox

Top Mail Box

Checking the motor of the top mailbox

Booklet

Checking the motor of the center-folding unit

Method: [Motor]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Feed In(H)

DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at high speed

Feed In(L)

DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at low speed

Middle(H)

DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at high speed

Middle(L)

DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at low speed

Eject(H)

DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at high speed

Eject(L)

DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at low speed

Save(H)

DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at high speed

Save(L)

DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at low speed

Tray

DF tray motor (DFTM) is turned on

Staple Move

DF slide motor (DFSLM) is turned on

Staple

DF staple motor (DFSTM) is turned on

Width Test(A3)

DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on

Width Test(LD)

DF side registration motor 1, 2 (DFSRM1, 2) is turned on

Beat

DF paddle motor (DFPDM) is turned on

Eject Unlock(HP)

DF eject release motor (DFERM) is turned on to home position

Sort Test

DF shift motor 1, 2 (DFSFM1, 2) is turned on

EjectUnlock(30)

DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 30-sheet stack

EjectUnlock(50)

DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack

1-3-91

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U240
Display

Description

EjectUnlock(Fix)

DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position

EjectUnlock(Full)

DF eject release motor (DFERM) full-open drive position

Punch

Punch motor (PUM) is turned on

Punch Move

Punch slide motor (PUSLM) is turned on

Method: [Solenoid]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Sub Tray

DF feedshift solenoid (DFFSSOL) is turned on

Save Drum

DF drum solenoid (DFDRSOL) is turned on

Booklet

DF center fold solenoid (DFCFSOL) is turned on

Punch

Punch solenoid (PUSOL) is turned on

Three Fold

CF feedshift solenoid (CFFSSOL) is turned on

Method: [Mail Box/Top Mail Box]


1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Conv

MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at paper conveying

Branch

MB drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at feedshift operation

Method: [Booklet]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
Display

Description

Folding

CF main motor (CFMM) is turned on

Blade

CF blade motor (CFBM) is turned on

Bundle Up

CF adjustment motor 2 (CFADM2) is turned on

Bundle Down

CF adjustment motor 1 (CFADM1) is turned on

Staple

CF staple motor (CFSTM) is turned on

Width Test(A3)

CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on

Width Test(LD)

CF side registration motor 1, 2 (CFSRM1, 2) is turned on

Feed In

CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) is turned on

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-92

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U241

Description
Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet
finisher.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be checked.
3. Press the OK key
Display

Description

Finisher

Checking the switch and sensor of the document finisher

Mail Box

Checking the switch and sensor of the mailbox

Booklet

Checking the switch and sensor of the center-folding unit

Top Mail Box

Checking the motor of the top mailbox

Punch

Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit

Method: [Finisher]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch/sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch/sensor
will be 1.
Display
Switch 1

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: DF front cover switch (DFFCSW)
1

Second digit: DF eject cover switch (DFECSW)*1

Third digit: DF top cover switch (DFTCSW)*2

Fourth digit: DF tray sensor 1 (DFTS1)

Fifth: DF tray sensor 2 (DFTS2)*1

Sixth: DF tray sensor 3 (DFTS3)

1
Switch 2

Seventh: DF tray sensor 4 (DFTS4)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: DF tray sensor 5 (DFTS5)*1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Second digit: DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS)


Third digit: DF paper entry sensor (DFPES)
Fourth digit: DF sub eject sensor (DFSES)*1
Fifth: DF middle eject sensor (DFMES)
Sixth: DF drum sensor (DFDRS)*1
Seventh: DF slide sensor (DFSLS)

1-3-93

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U241
Display
Switch 3

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: DF middle tray sensor (DFMTS)
1

Second digit: DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1)

Third digit: DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2)

Fourth digit: DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS)*1

Fifth: DF adjustment sensor (DFADS)

Sixth: DF paddle sensor (DFPDS)*1

1
Switch 4

Seventh: DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: DF shift sensor 2 (DFSFS2)
1

Second digit: DF shift release sensor (DFSFRS)

Third digit: DF sub tray full sensor (DFSTFS)

Fourth digit: DF shift set sensor (DFSFSS)

* : *1: 4000-sheet finisher only. *2: 1000-sheet finisher only.

Method: [Mail Box]


1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch/sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch/sensor
will be 1.
Display
Switch 1

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: MB eject sensor (MBES)
1

Second digit: MB cover open/close switch


(MBCOCSW)

Third digit: MB overflow sensor 1 (MBOFS1)

Fourth digit: MB overflow sensor 2 (MBOFS2)

Fifth: MB overflow sensor 3 (MBOFS3)

Sixth: MB overflow sensor 4 (MBOFS4)

1
Switch 2

Seventh: MB overflow sensor 5 (MBOFS5)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: MB overflow sensor 6 (MBOFS6)
1
1

Second digit: MB overflow sensor 7 (MBOFS7)


Third digit: MB paper entry sensor (MBPES)

1-3-94

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U241

Method: [Booklet]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch/sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch/sensor
will be 1.
Display
Switch 1

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: CF paper entry sensor (CFPES)
1

Second digit: CF eject sensor (CFES)

Third digit: CF paper sensor (CFPS)

Fourth digit: CF tray full sensor (CFTFS)

Fifth: CF adjustment sensor 1 (CFADS1)

Sixth: CF adjustment sensor 2 (CFADS2)

1
Switch 2

Seventh: CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2)
1

Second digit: CF blade sensor (CFBLS)

Third digit: CF tray switch (CFTSW)

Fourth digit: CF set switch (CFSSW)

Fifth: CF left guide switch (CFLGSW)

Sixth: CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS)

Seventh: CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2)

Method: [Punch]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch/sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch/sensor
will be 1.
Display
Switch 1

Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 First digit: Punch home position sensor (PUHPS)
1
1
1
1
1
1

Second digit: Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)


Third digit: Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Fourth digit: Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Fifth: Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES)
Sixth: Punch tank set switch (PUTSSW)
Seventh: Punch tank full sensor (PUTFS)

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-95

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting the finisher
Description
Provides various settings for the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher, if furnished.
Purpose
1. Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the print paper is Z-folded in punch mode.
2. Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode
To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
3. Adjustment of center position timing in the punch mode
Adjusts the center position of a punch hole in punch mode if the position is not proper.
4. Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
5. Adjustment of front/rear shift home position
Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
6. Adjusting of front/back stapling home position
Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper.
7. Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration
guides to paper.
8. Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
9. Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
10. Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Finisher

Adjustment of 1000-sheet finisher and 4000-sheet finisher

Booklet

Adjustment of center-folding unit

Method: [Finisher]
1. Select the item to set.
Display

Description

Punch Regist

1.Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode

Punch Feed

2.Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode

Punch Width

3.Adjustment of the center position timing in punch mode

WidthFront HP

4.Adjustment of front side registration home position

WidthTail HP

4.Adjustment of rear side registration home position

ShiftFront HP

5.Adjustment of front shift home position

ShiftTail HP

5.Adjustment of rear shift home position

Staple HP

6.Adjustment of front and back stapling home position

1-3-96

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting: [Punch Regist]
1. Select [Punch Regist].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Adjustment of registration stop timing

-20 to 20

Initial
setting
0

Change in
value per step
0.25 mm

If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the setting value. If the print paper is
Z-folded (sample 2), decrease the setting value.

Sample 1

Sample 2

Figure 1-3-7
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Punch Feed]
1. Select [Punch Feed].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Adjustment of the paper stop timing

-10 to 10

Initial
setting
0

Change in
value per step
0.52 mm

If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase
the setting value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the setting value.

A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)

Figure 1-3-8
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-97

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting: [Punch Width]
1. Select [Punch Width].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4

Initial
setting
0

Change in
value per step
0.52 mm

If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine, increase the setting value. If the
punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine, decrease the setting value.

Center line
(within 0.5 mm)

Sample 1

Sample 2

Figure 1-3-9
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [WidthFront HP/WidthTail HP]
1. Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

Adjustment of front side registration home position

-15 to 15

0.19 mm

Adjustment of rear side registration home position

-15 to 15

0.19 mm

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


4. Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the middle tray will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the middle tray, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [ShiftFront HP/ShiftTail HP]
1. Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

Adjustment of front shift home position

-15 to 15

0.19 mm

Adjustment of rear shift home position

-15 to 15

0.19 mm

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


4. Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor], then [Sort Test].
6. Repeat the above adjustment until eject paper is properly in position.

1-3-98

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting: [Staple HP]
1. Select [Staple HP].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

0.19 mm

When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the
setting value. When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sample 2),
decrease the setting value.

Sample 2

Sample 1

Figure 1-3-10
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Method: [Booklet]
1. Select the item to set.
Display

Description

WidthUp HP

7.Adjustment of upper side registration home position

WidthDown HP

7.Adjustment of lower side registration home position

Staple Pos1

8.Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size

Staple Pos2

8.Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size

Staple Pos3

8.Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K


size

Booklet Pos1

9.Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size

Booklet Pos2

9.Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size

Booklet Pos3

9.Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size

Three Fold

10.Adjustment of tri-folding position

1-3-99

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting: [WidthUp HP/WidthDown HP]
1. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

Adjustment of upper side registration home position

-15 to 15

0.34 mm

Adjustment of lower side registration home position

-15 to 15

0.34 mm

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


4. Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Booklet], then [Width Test(A3)].
The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the center-folding unit, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the
guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.
Setting: [Staple Pos]
1. Select [Staple Pos1], [Staple Pos2] or [Staple Pos3].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

Adjustment of booklet stapling position for


A4/Letter size

-15 to 15

0.32 mm

Adjustment of booklet stapling position for


B4/Legal size

-15 to 15

0.32 mm

Adjustment of booklet stapling position for


A3/Ledger/8K size

-15 to 15

0.32 mm

When staples are placed too far right (sample 1), decrease the preset value. When staples
are placed too far left (sample 2), increase the preset value.
Reference value: within 2 mm
2 mm

Sample 1

Figure 1-3-11
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.

1-3-100

2 mm

Sample 2

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U246

Description
Setting: [Booklet Pos]
1. Select [Booklet Pos1], [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Initial
Change in
setting value per step

Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size

-15 to 15 0

0.32 mm

Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size

-15 to 15 0

0.32 mm

Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/


8K size

-15 to 15 0

0.32 mm

When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the
centerfold position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper 1/2 3 mm
A

Sample 1

Center line

Sample 2

Figure 1-3-12
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Setting: [Three Fold]
1. Select [Three Fold].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Description

Setting
range

Adjustment of tri-folding position

-15 to 15

Initial
setting

Change in
value per step

0.32 mm

When the tri-fold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the tri-fold
position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value A: 7.0 2 mm

Sample 1

Sample 2

Figure 1-3-13
3. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-101

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U247

Description
Setting the paper feed device
Description
Turns on motor and clutches of paper feeder device.
Purpose
To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the paper feed device.
Display

Description

2PF

Paper feeder

LCF

Large capacity feeder

Side Deck

Side deck

SMT

Side multi tray

Side 2PF

Side paper feeder

Side LCF

Side large capacity feeder

Method: [2PF/Side 2PF]


1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Motor] or [Device].
3. Select the item to be operated using the Left/Right Select keys.
Display
Motor

Device

Execute

Description

Off

PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off

On

PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on

C1 Clutch

PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on

C2 Clutch

PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on

V Feed(H) Clutch

PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on

V Feed(L) Clutch

PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on


Executing the action

4. Select [Execute].
5. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
6. To stop operation, press the Back key.

1-3-102

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U247

Description
Method: [LCF/Side LCF]
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Motor] or [Device].
1. Select the item to be operated using the Left/Right Select keys
Display
Motor

Device

Description

Off

PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off

On

PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on

C1

PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on

C2

PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on

VFeed

PF paper conveying clutch 3 (PFPCCL3) is turned on

H Feed1

PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on

H Feed2

PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on

Execute

Executing the action

2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the Back key.
Method: [Side Deck]
1. Press [Motor] or [Device] and select the item.
Display
Motor

Device

Execute

Description

Off

SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned off

On

SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned on

C1

SD paper feed clutch (SDPFCL) is turned on

Cass1

SD paper feed solenoid (SDPFSOL) is turned on


Executing the action

2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
4. To stop operation, press the Back key.

1-3-103

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U247

Description
Method: [SMT]
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Motor] or [Device].
1. Select the item to be operated using the Left/Right Select keys
Display
Motor

Device

Description

Off

SM paper feed motor (SMPFM) is turned off

On

SM paper feed motor (SMPFM) is turned on

C1

SM paper feed clutch (SMPFCL) is turned on

Feed1

SMT paper conveying clutch 1 (SMPCCL1) is turned on

Feed2

SMT paper conveying clutch 2 (SMPCCL2) is turned on

Feed3

SMT paper conveying clutch 3 (SMPCCL3) is turned on

Sepa

SM feedshift solenoid (SMFSSOL) is turned on

Execute

Executing the action

2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. The operation starts.
To stop operation, press the Back key.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U250

Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle


Description
Changes preset values for maintenance cycle.
Purpose
Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance is periodically displayed.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the Left/Right Select keys or numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting range

Initial
setting

M.Cnt A

Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit A) 0 to 9999999

600000

M.Cnt B

Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit B) 0 to 9999999

600000

M.Cnt C

Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit C) 0 to 9999999

300000

Cass1

Maintenance counter cassette1

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass2

Maintenance counter cassette2

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass3

Maintenance counter cassette3

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass4

Maintenance counter cassette4

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass5

Maintenance counter cassette5

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass6

Maintenance counter cassette6

0 to 9999999

150000

Cass7

Maintenance counter cassette7

0 to 9999999

150000

1-3-104

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U250

Description
4. Press the OK key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
* : When the firmware is upgraded in the field, the standard counter value newly added
should be set to 150000.
U251

Checking/clearing the maintenance counter


Description
Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To verify the maintenance counter count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be changed.
3. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting range

Initial
setting

M.Cnt A

Count value for maintenance cycle (kit A)

0 to 9999999

M.Cnt B

Count value for maintenance cycle (kit B)

0 to 9999999

M.Cnt C

Count value for maintenance cycle (kit C)

0 to 9999999

Cass1

Maintenance counter cassette1

0 to 9999999

Cass2

Maintenance counter cassette2

0 to 9999999

Cass3

Maintenance counter cassette3

0 to 9999999

Cass4

Maintenance counter cassette4

0 to 9999999

Cass5

Maintenance counter cassette5

0 to 9999999

Cass6

Maintenance counter cassette6

0 to 9999999

Cass7

Maintenance counter cassette7

0 to 9999999

Clear

Maintenance counter all clear

0 to 9999999

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the OK key. The setting value is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
* : When the firmware is upgraded in the field, input the counter value of U901 into the primary feed counter.
If the counter value is larger than 150000, replace the primary feed roller and input "0".

1-3-105

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U252

Description
Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before
replacement or initialization.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the destination.
Display

Description

Japan Metric

Metric (Japan) specifications

Inch

Inch (North America) specifications

Europe Metric

Metric (Europe) specifications

Asia Pacific

Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications

Australia

Australia specifications

China

China specifications

Korea

Korea specifications

3. Press the OK key.


4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.
When errors occurred, turn main power switch off then on, and execute initialization using
maintenance item U252.

1-3-106

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U253

Description
Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode.
Purpose
Used to select, according to the preference of the user, if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as
one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Full Color

Count system of full color mode

B/W

Count system of black/white mode

4. Select the count system.


Display

Description

SGL(All)

Single count for all size paper

DBL(A3/Ledger)

Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger

DBL(B4)

Double count for B4 size or larger

DBL(Folio)

Double count for Folio size or larger

Initial setting: DBL(A3/Ledger)


5. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-107

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U260

Description
Selecting the timing for print counting
Description
Changes the print count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the print count timing.
Display

Description

Feed

When secondary paper feed starts

Eject

When the paper is ejected

Initial setting: Eject


3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U265

Setting OEM purchaser code


Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-108

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U271

Description
Setting the page count
Description
Banner counting
Purpose
To change when modifying counting Banner
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Banner A

Counting for Banner A (470.1mm to


915mm/18.51 to 36)

2 to 30

Banner B

Counting for Banner B (915.1mm to


1,220mm/36.01 to 48)

2 to 30

4. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U278

Setting the delivery date


Description
Enter delivery date in month, day, and year.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Today].
3. Press the OK key. The delivery date is set.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Year], [Month] or [Day].
3. Change the setting using thenumeric keys.
4. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Clearing
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the OK key. The delivery date is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-109

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U285

Description
Setting service status page
Description
Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Displays the print coverage

Off

Not to display the print coverage

Initial setting: On
3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U323

Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning


Description
Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature
and humidity is detected.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Displays the abnormal temperature and humidity warning

Off

Not to display the abnormal temperature and humidity warning

Initial setting: On
3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-110

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U325

Description
Setting the paper interval
Description
Determines the interval between pages and the toner replenishment amount when printing pages
with high print coverage.
Purpose
Modify the settings only if a spotted background or uneven density appears when printing pages
with high print coverage.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display

Description

Interval

Paper interval control ON/OFF setting

Mode

Setting mode of the paper interval control

Setting: [Interval]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Paper interval control is performed

Off

Paper interval control is not performed

Initial setting: Off


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Mode]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Mode

Description
Paper interval control mode

Setting
range
1 to 10

Initial
setting
1

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-111

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U327

Description
Setting the cassette heater control
Description
Sets the cassette heater control.
Purpose
To change the setting according to the machine installation environment.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

Mode1

Set to On at 65% RH (during sleep mode or in ready state)

Mode2

Always on (during sleep mode or in ready state)

Off

Cassette heater OFF

Initial setting: Off


3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
* : To finalize the setting values, exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down from the
normal display, and turn the main power switch off and on again.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-112

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U332

Setting the size conversion factor


Description
Rate: Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient
set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to print the service
status page.
Mode: Make settings on the color print coverage counter displays, as well as the coverage
threshold.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display

Description

Rate

Size coefficient

Mode

Toggling full-color count and color coverage count display

Level 1

Low coverage threshold value

Level 2

Middle coverage threshold value

Setting: [Rate]
Purpose: To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to
the A4/Letter size.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
Rate

Description

Setting range

Size coefficient

0.1 to 3.0

Initial setting
1.0

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Mode]
Purpose: Make settings on the color print color/coverage counter displays.
1. Select the mode.
Display

Description

Full-color count display

Color coverage count display

Initial setting: 0
* : If 0 has been changed to 1, revert the U260 feed/eject counter switch to its initial state
(Eject).
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Level 1/2]
Purpose:Make settings on the color print coverage threshold.
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting range

Initial setting

Level 1

Low coverage threshold value

0.1 to 99.8

1.0

Level 2

Middle coverage threshold value

0.1 to 99.9

2.5

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-113

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U340

Description
Setting the applied mode
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct printing occurs.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display
Adj Memory

Description
Setting the memory allocation

Setting: [Adj Memory]


1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Image

Area temporarily used to create output


image.

0 to 400 (MB) 190

Image(Detail)

Area temporarily used to hold downloaded font and other data.

0 to 400 (MB) 1

Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage.
(recommended value)
Image : +190
Image(Detaile) : +1
2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
3. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-114

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U345

Description
Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached,
by setting the number of prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of prints of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time for maintenance due indication.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
Cnt

Setting
range

Description
Time for maintenance due indication
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle ends)

0 to 9999

Initial
setting
0

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U410

Setting a Gamma table


Description
Setting a Gamma table.
Purpose
Setting a Gamma table.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to set.
Display

Description

Table1

Gamma table1

Table2

Gamma table2

Table3

Gamma table3

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-115

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U460

Description
Adjusting the conveying sensor
Description
Compensates the threshold value of the side multi trays multi feed sensor.
Purpose
If more than one sheet is fed at a time, modify the threshold depending on the environment.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [SMT].
Display

Description

SMT

Settings of multiple feed sensor on the side multi tray

Method
1. Select the item.
Display

Description

Conveying Sensor

Multi feed sensor settings/Calibration

On/Off Config

Multi feed sensor On/Off settings

Setting: [Conveying Sensor]


1. Select the item.
Display

Description

Threshold(S)

Paper feeding threshold settings

Threshold(M)

Multi feed threshold settings

Sensor(Non-P)

Empty paper sensor display

Sensor

Displaying sensor value when paper is present

Execute

Executing the calibration

Setting: [Threshold(S)/(M)]
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Setting
range

Initial
setting

Threshold(S)

Paper feeding threshold settings

0 to 254

Threshold(M)

Multi feed threshold settings

0 to 254

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Method: [Execute]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the OK key. Calibration is executed.

1-3-116

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U460

Description
Setting: [On/Off Config]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Multi feed sensor is enabled

Off

Multi feed sensor is disabled

Initial setting: Off


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-117

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U464

Description
Setting the ID correction operation
Description
Turns ID correction (calibration) on or off. Also, this allows individual settings for calibration operation.
Purpose
Implements various settings of calibration when poor image quality is caused or to allow various
settings of calibration depending on the user preference.
To perform the calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Permission

Setting to turn calibration on/off

Time Interval

Setting the interval time of calibration after printing

Mode

Setting the color print execution mode

On/Sleep Out*

Setting execution parameters for calibration when powered up


or reverted from auto-sleep

AP/NE*

Paper interval calibration ON/OFF setting at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed

Leaving Time*

Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry


out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine
recovers from the sleep mode

Driving Time*

Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry


out paper interval calibration based on the driving time during
printing

Timing*

Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry


out calibration based on the continuous print driving time during printing

Target Value

Setting the sensor target values for toner thick layer calibration
and light amount calibration

Print Rate(B/W)*

Setting the proportion of black/white printing at which black/


white calibration is executed during color printing.

Calib

Executing the calibration

Edge Reduction

Smoothing edge settings (automatic calibration is implemented after settings are completed)

*: Enabled when Mode is set to Custom.


Setting: [Permission]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Turns calibration ON

Off

Turns calibration OFF

Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
1-3-118

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U464

Description
Setting: [Time Interval]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Time(sec)

Setting
range

Description
Setting the interval time of calibration

0 to 9999 (s)

Initial
setting
480

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Mode]
1. Select the item.
Display

Description

Short

Setting the color print execution mode: short

Normal

Setting the color print execution mode: normal

Long

Setting the color print execution mode: long

Custom

Setting the color print execution mode: custom

Auto

Setting the color print execution mode: auto

Initial setting: Normal


2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [On/Sleep Out]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Executes calibration if fuser temperature is less than 50C/


122F at power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode

Off

Not to execute calibration regardless of fuser temperature at


power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode

Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [AP/NE]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end


after toner feed is carried out

Off

Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end


after toner feed is not carried out

Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.

1-3-119

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U464

Description
Setting: [Leaving Time]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Time(min)

Description

Setting range

Setting the standard time of sleep mode

0 to 480 (min)

Initial
setting
480

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Driving Time]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Time(sec)

Description

Initial
setting

Setting range

Setting the drive standard time

300 to 3000 (s)

300

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Timing]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Time(sec)

Description

Initial
setting

Setting range

Setting the drive standard time of con- 0 to 3600 (s)


tinuous print

3600

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Setting: [Target Value]
1. Select the item.
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Initial setting

Setting
range

45ppm

55ppm

Thickness(C)

Toner thick layer calibration


(cyan)

0 to 1000 890

890

Thickness(M)

Toner thick layer calibration


(magenta)

0 to 1000 910

910

Thickness(Y)

Toner thick layer calibration


(yellow)

0 to 1000 910

910

Thickness(K)

Toner thick layer calibration


(black)

0 to 1000 760

790

Gamma(C)

Light amount calibration


(cyan)

0 to 500

320

320

Gamma(M) Light amount calibration


(magenta)

0 to 500

320

320

Gamma(Y)

Light amount calibration


(yellow)

0 to 500

300

300

Gamma(K)

Light amount calibration


(black)

0 to 500

350

350

3. Press the OK key. The value is set.


1-3-120

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U464

Description
Setting: [Print Rate(B/W)]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
Threshold

Setting
range

Description
Proportion of black/white printing

0 to 100 (%)

Initial
setting
50

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Method: [Calib]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the OK key. Calibration is executed.
* : Duplicates selecting [System Menu] - [Adjustment/Maintenance] - [Calibration].
The same operation as System menu.
Setting: [Edge Reduction]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Enable smoothing edges

Off

Disable smoothing edges

Initial setting: On
Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U465

Data reference for ID correction


Description
References the data related to ID correction.
Purpose
To check the corresponding data.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be reference.
3. Press the OK key
Display

Description

TCONT

Developer bias control value after ID correction

Laser Power

Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration

Bias Calib

Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration

T7 CTD

T7 control value

Stress

Durability

1-3-121

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U465

Description
Displaying: [TCOUNT]
Select [TCOUNT]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Before(C)

Developer bias control value for cyan before ID correction

Before(M)

Developer bias control value for magenta before ID correction

Before(Y)

Developer bias control value for yellow before ID correction

Before(K)

Developer bias control value for black before ID correction

After(C)

Developer bias control value for cyan after ID correction

After(M)

Developer bias control value for magenta after ID correction

After(Y)

Developer bias control value for yellow after ID correction

After(K)

Developer bias control value for black after ID correction

Displaying: [Laser Power]


1. Select [Laser Power]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (cyan)

Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (magenta)

Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (yellow)

Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (black)

Displaying: [Bias Calib]


1. Select [Bias Calib]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan)

Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (magenta)

Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (yellow)

Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (black)

Displaying: [T7 CTD]


1. Select [T7 CTD]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

T7 control value (cyan)

T7 control value (magenta)

T7 control value (yellow)

T7 control value (black)

1-3-122

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U465

Description
Displaying: [Stress]
1. Select [Stress]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Front

Durability of the belt (front)

Rear

Durability of the belt (rear)

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-123

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U467

Description
Setting the color registration adjustment
Description
Sets the color registration adjustment and transfer belt speed correction. Also, determines the
conditions by which color registration correction is executed depending on the LSU temperature.
Purpose
If color variance is uneven due to a sensor failure, etc., turn this off and temporarily make a manual adjustment.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display

Description

Color Regist

Setting the color registration correction operation

Timing

After the previous correction is executed, color registration is


compensated as the LSU temperature varies by the value
determined.

Setting: [Color Regist]


1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Enables the color registration correction operation.

Off

Disables the color registration correction operation.

Initial setting: On
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Timing]
1. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display
LSU Temp

Description
Conditions for execution depending on
the LSU temperature variation

Setting
range
2 to 10

Initial
setting
10

2. Press the OK key. The value is set.


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-124

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U468

Description
Checking the color registration data
Description
Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
To check the corresponding data.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item to be reference.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

V Correction

Display the transfer speed adjustment value

Auto(C)

Display the auto color registration adjustment value for cyan

Auto(M)

Display the auto color registration adjustment value for magenta

Auto(Y)

Display the auto color registration adjustment value for yellow

Manual(C)

Display the manual color registration adjustment value for cyan

Manual(M)

Display the manual color registration adjustment value for magenta

Manual(Y)

Display the manual color registration adjustment value for yellow

Displaying: [V Correction]
1. Select [V Correction]. The current value is displayed.
Display
Status

Description
transfer speed adjustment value

Displaying: [Auto(C)/Auto(M)/Auto(Y)]
1. Select [Auto(C)], [Auto(M)] or [Auto(Y)]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Main Scan

Auto color registration adjustment value of the main scanning


direction

Sub Scan

Auto color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary scanning direction

Mag

Auto color registration adjustment value of the magnification

Displaying: [Manual(C)/Manual(M)/Manual(Y)]
1. Select [Manual(C)], [Manual((M)] or [Manual((Y)]. The current value is displayed.
Display

Description

Main Scan

Manual color registration adjustment value of the main scanning direction

Sub Scan

Manual color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary


scanning direction

Mag1-6

Manual color registration adjustment value of the


magnification1-6

1-3-125

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U468

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U469

Adjusting the color registration


Description
Performs the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the transfer belt unit or laser scanner unit.
Method
* : Before excuting this mode, the U464 Calib mode must be executed.
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
3. Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Manual

Executing the manual color registration correction

Belt Initialize

Executing the transfer belt speed correction

Belt Check

Confirmation of transfer belt position

Method: [Manual]
1. Select [Print].
2. Press the OK key. A chart for adjustment is outputted.

(example)
When a red bar exactly coincides
with B, enter B as a value.

Chart for adjustment

Figure 1-3-14
3. Select [Regist].
4. Read figures at MH-1 to 7/CH-1 to 7/YH-1 to 7 and MV-3/CV-3/YV-3 of the reference chart
and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M/C/Y fine
lines, using the cursor and 10 keys.

1-3-126

2MN/2N1
Item No.

Description

U469
Codes

Description

Codes

Description

CH-1

MH-5

CH-2

MH-6

CH-3

MH-7

CH-4

MV-3

CH-5

YH-1

CH-6

YH-2

CH-7

YH-3

CV-3

YH-4

MH-1

YH-5

MH-2

YH-6

MH-3

YH-7

MH-4

YV-3

5. Press the OK key to finalize the value.


6. Press the OK key after all values have been entered. Color registration correction starts.
7. Print a chart for adjustment.
8. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A.

The scale must be corresponding


within the range of "A" from "1".
Figure 1-3-15

1-3-127

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U469

Description
Method: [Belt Initialize]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Press the OK key. Transfer belt speed correction starts.
Method:[Belt Check]
1. Select [Mode].
2. Change the setting value using the numeric keys.
Display

Description

Angle

Display of cam position

Belt Position

Display of belt position

Mode

Operational mode

Excute

Execution of belt position confirmation

3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the OK key. Transfer belt position confirmation starts, and the value is displayed.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U474

Checking LSU cleaning operation


Description
Provides cleaning LSU by means of the LSU cleaning motor. Also, the cleaning cycle can be
adjusted.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Execute

Executing the cleaning operation

Cycle

Setting the cleaning cycle

Method: [Execute]
1. Press the OK key. Cleaning the LSU slit glass.
Setting: [Cycle]
1. Change the setting value using numeric keys.
Display
Cnt

Description
Cleaning cycle

Setting
range
0 to 5000

Initial
setting
1000

The setting can be changed by 1000 per step.


2. Press the OK key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-128

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U485

Description
Setting the color table
Description
Modify and install the color table.
Purpose
Perform the procedure to modify the color table.
Method.
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Press the OK key.
Display

Description

Color Table 1(Prn)

Setting the printer color table (Default)

Color Table 2(Prn)

Setting the printer color table (Custom)

Install

Install the printer color table

Uninstall

Uninstall the printer color table

Setting: [Color Table 1(Prn)],[Color Table 2(Prn)]


1. Default/Custom printer color tables are shown.
2. Select the target color tables for switching
3. Press the OK key.
Setting: [Install]
* : Before proceeding, make sure that the USB flash device that contains the color table files
is inserted.
The color table files must be placed in the root of the USB flash device.
1. Press the Excute button.
2. Press the OK key.
3. Installation is completed when [OK] is displayed.
Setting: [Uninstall]
1. The color table currently being installed is displayed.
2. Select the color table you want to uninstall, then press the OK key.

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-129

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U486

Description
Setting color/black and white operation mode
Description
When color and B/W documents are mixed, sets operation mode after a color document is
detected.
Purpose
Mode:To ensure productivity when printing color and B/W documents in ACS mode, select
Mode3. However, selecting Mode3 will increase the maintenance count for cyan, magenta, and
yellow color developer units even when there is a B/W printing after a color printing.
Permission: During monochrome half-speed printing, which is color printing mode at hald
speed, the color background problem may occur when printing on envelopes.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Mode

Setting color/black and white operation

Permission

Allowing black and white half speed mode

Setting: [Mode]
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the mode.
Display
Mode1

Description
A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is minimum.
Once diverted to color printing mode, the subsequent black and white printing is executed in the same linear velocity as in color printing with other processings switched on the fly.

Mode2

A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is maximum.
Printing in color mode resumes up to 9 pages in a row even an interrupt is
made to switch to black and white mode, until printing is diverted to black and
white mode from color mode at the 10th page (color processing is terminated).

Mode3

A mode suited for the user with high black-and-white usage in which the
occurrence of color printing during continuous printing is maximum.
Mode suited for high color printing volume
Once diverted to color mode, the black and white printings are executed in
color processing mode (including the linear velocity).

Auto

Mode that allows to select from modes 1 through 3 depending on the usage.
Mode is selected from three modes depending on the percentage of color
and black and white printings in the total number of print pages during a predetermined period.

Initial setting: Mode2


3. Press the OK key. The setting is set.

1-3-130

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U486

Description
Setting: [Permission]
1. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Black and white printing (3 colors are released)*

Off

Color printing (4 colors are latched in)

Initial setting: Off


* : Enable this setting if color background printing has occurred when printing on
envelopes.Note jitter could result.
2. Press the OK key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Details on the modes

Figure 1-3-16

1-3-131

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U901

Description
Checking print counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations.
Performs backup when the counters on the engine PWB and PF main PWB do not match.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Backup the counter values after completing changing the PF main PWB and the paper feed unit.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display

Description

MPT

MP tray

Cassette1

Cassette 1

Cassette2

Cassette 2

Cassette3

Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)

Cassette4

Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)

Cassette5

Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)

Cassette6

Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)

Cassette7

Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)

Duplex

Duplex unit

* : When an optional paper feed unit is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared.
[Cassette3], [Cassette4], [Cassette5], [Cassette6] and [Cassette7] cannot be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [Clear].
3. Press the OK key. The counts is cleared.
Back up
If the paper feeding counters of the engine and the paper feeder do not match, the following message will be displayed.
The back up destination will be shown on the list items and 'engine (fixed value)' <-> None <->
'PF (fixed PF value) are displayed.
1. Press the OK key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display

Description

Cassette3

Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)

Cassette4

Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)

Cassette5

Cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck)

Cassette6

Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)

Cassette7

Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)

Duplex

Duplex unit

1-3-132

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description

U901

1. Select the paper feed location.


2. Select engine counter values when changing the PF main PWB.
Backup the engine counter values to PF.
Select PF counter values when changing the paper feed unit.
Backup the PF counter values to engine.
3. Select [Execute].
4. Press the start key. Back up the counter values.
5. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
* : The values of cassette 4 counter vary in accordance with the cassette 3 counter.
The values of cassette 7 counter vary in accordance with the cassette 6 counter.
Select [None] if the counter values are not backed up.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-133

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U903

Description
Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Cnt

Displays/clears the jam counts

Total Cnt

Displays the total jam counts

Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count of jam code by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the count value for jam code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the OK key. The counter value is cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.

How to display the history of paper jams


[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of paper jams as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of paper jams before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
1. Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of paper
jams after firmware upgrade was done.

1-3-134

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U903

Description
Detail of history of paper jams

Maintenance Report
Printer

17/Apr/2011 08:40

Firmware version 2MN_2000.000.000 2011.04.17

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Machine No.: SPXXX00001

(a) Paper Jam Log


JAM0000
JAM0100
JAM0101
JAM0110
JAM0111
JAM0112
JAM0131
JAM0210

Life Count : 001234

(b) 2011.12.12

(c)

1
0
0
0
1
0
5
2

10
2
2
2
2
1
89
7

(d)

Figure 1-3-17

No.

Description

Paper jam numbers

Date of clearing counter records

Occurrences of paper jams after clearing the paper jam counts

Total number of paper jams

Method: [Total Cnt]


1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-135

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U904

Description
Checking/clearing the call for service counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types.
Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Cnt

Displays/clears the call for service counts

Total Cnt

Displays the total call for service counts

Method: [Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt]. The count for service call detection by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the count value for service call code and press [Clear].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the OK key. The counter value is cleared.
Method: [Total Cnt]
1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.

How to display the history of service counts


[Function]
To check the variation in the occurrences of service calls as a consequence of firmware upgrade.
[Procedure]
1. Retrives versions of system and engine software at the timing of clearing.
2. Displays comparison of the occurrences of service calls before and after firmware upgrades.
3. Displays the date of clearing.
[Method]
At firmware upgrade
1. Perform clearance of the counter following the above before performing firmware upgrade.
2. Clearing the counter records the date of clearing.
3. Perform firmware upgrade.
At performing service
1. Print a maintenance report using mode U000 and check the variance of occurrence of service calls after firmware upgrade was done.

1-3-136

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U904

Description
Detail of history of service counts

Maintenance Report
Printer

17/Apr/2011 08:40

Firmware version 2MN_2000.000.000 2011.04.17

[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Machine No.: SPXXX00001

Life Count : 001234

Paper Jam Log

2011.12.12
10
1

JAM0000

(a) Service Call Log


C0630
C1000
C1950
C2840
C4300
C9000
C9060
C9080

(b) 2011.12.12

(c)

1
0
0
3
1
0
5
2

1
50
1
17
2
1
20
1

(d)

Figure 1-3-18

No

Description

Service call numbers

Date of clearing counter records

Occurrences of paper jams after clearing the service call counts

Total number of service calls

Method: [Total Cnt]


1. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-137

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U905

Description
Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked.
3. Press the OK key.
The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display
DF

Description
Counts of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher

Method: [DF]
Display

Description

Sorter

No. of prints that has passed

Staple

Frequency the stapler has been activated

Punch

Frequency the punch has been activated

Stack*

Frequency the main tray eject has been activated

Saddle*

Frequency the saddle eject has been activated

Fold*

Frequency the center folding has been activated

Three Fold*

Frequency the tri-folding has been activated

* : 4000-sheet finisher only


Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-138

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U906

Description
Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sections, and the related parts are serviced.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the OK key to reset partial operation control.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

U908

Checking the total counter value


Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The total count value is displayed.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U910

Clearing the print coverage data


Description
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as
shown on the service status report).
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. The print coverage data is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-139

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U911

Description
Checking print counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Display
(metric)

Description

Display
(inch)

Description

A3

Paper feed counts for A3

Ledger

Paper feed counts for Ledger

B4

Paper feed counts for B4

Legal

Paper feed counts for Legal

A4

Paper feed counts for A4

Letter

Paper feed counts for Letter

B5

Paper feed counts for B5

Statement

A5

Paper feed counts for A5

Paper feed counts for Statement

Folio

Paper feed counts for Folio

ETC

ETC

Paper feed counts for other


size

Paper feed counts for other


size

Clearing
1. Select the paper size of counts to be cleared.
2. Press the OK key. The counts is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-140

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U917

Description
Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB
memory to the machine.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the HDD.
Method
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off (see page p.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
Wait for 10 seconds to allow the machine to recognize the USB memory.
4. Enter maintenance item U917.
5. Select [Import] or [Export].
Display

Description

Import

Writing data from the USB memory to the machine

Export

Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory

6. Select the item.


Display

Description

Depending data

Job Account

Job accounting

User

User managements

Job accounting

Document Box

Document box information

Job accountings and user managements

* : Since data are dependent with each other, data other than those assigned are also
retrieved or written in.
7. Press the OK key. Starts reading or writing.
The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed.
8. When normally completed, [Finish] is displayed.
9. Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].

1-3-141

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U917

Description
Error Codes
Codes

Description

Codes

Description

e002

Parameter error

e31e

User managements error

e003

File write error

e31f

User managements open error

e004

File initialization error

e320

User managements error

e005

File error

e321

User managements open error

e006

Processing error

e322

User managements list error

e010

Address book clear error (contact)

e324

Shortcut open error

e011

Address book open error (contact)

e325

Shortcut list error

e012

Address book list error (contact)

e410

Box file open error

e013

Address book list error (contact)

e411

Box error in writing

e014

Address book clear error (group)

e412

Box error in reading

e015

Address book open error (group)

e413

Box list error

e016

Address book list error (group)

e414

Box list error

e017

Address book list error (group)

e415

Box error

e110

Job accounting clear error

e416

Box error

e111

Job accounting open error

e417

Box open error

e112

Job accounting open error

e418

Box close error

e113

Job accounting error in writing

e419

Box creation error

e114

Job accounting list error

e41a

Box creation error

e115

Job accounting list error

e41b

Box deletion error

e210

One-touch open error

e41c

Box movement error

e211

One-touch list error

e510

Program error in writing

e212

One-touch list error

e511

Program error in reading

e310

User managements backup error

e610

Shortcut error in writing

e311

User managements clear error

e611

Shortcut error in reading

e312

User managements open error

e710

Fax memory open error

e313

User managements open error

e711

Fax memory initialization error

e314

User managements open error

e712

Fax memory list error

e315

User managements error in writing

e713

Fax memory error

e316

User managements list error

e714

Fax memory error

e317

User managements list error

e715

Fax memory mode error

e318

User managements list error

e716

Fax memory error

e319

User managements list error

e717

Fax memory error

e31a

User managements open error

e718

Fax memory mode error

e31b

User managements error

e910

File reading error

e31c

User managements error

e911

File writing error

e31d

User managements open error

e912

Data mismatch

1-3-142

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U917

Description
Error Codes
Codes

Description

Codes

Description

e913

Log file open error

d009

File open error

e914

Log file error in writing

d00a

File close error

e915

Directory open error

d00b

File reading error

e916

Directory error in reading

d00c

File writing error

e917

Synchronization error

d00d

File copy error

e918

Synchronization error

d00e

File compressed error

d000

Unspecified error

d00f

File decompressed error

d001

HDD unavailable

d010

Directory open error

d002

USB memory is not inserted

d011

Directory creation error

d003

File for writing is not found in the USB

d012

File writing error

d004

File for reading is not found in the HDD

d013

File reading error

d005

USB error in writing

d014

File deletion error

d006

USB error in reading

d015

File copy error to the USB

d007

USB unmount error

d016

File compatibility error

d008

File rename error

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-143

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U920

Description
Checking the print counts
Description
Checks the print counts.
Purpose
To check the print counts.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current counts are displayed.
Display

Description

ColorPrn H

Count value of full color print (coverage: high)

ColorPrn M

Count value of full color print (coverage: middle)

ColorPrn L

Count value of full color print (coverage: low)

B/W Prn

Count value of black/white print

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U927

Clearing the all print counts and machine life counts (one time only)
Description
Resets all of the counts back to zero.
Supplement
The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. All print counts and machine life counts are cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-144

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U928

Description
Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current machine life counts is displayed.
Display
Cnt

Description
Machine life counts

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U930

Checking/clearing the charger roller count


Description
Displays the counts of the charger roller counter for checking or clearing.
Purpose
To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit. To clear the counter value when
replacing the charger roller unit.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed.
Display

Description

Count value of cyan charger roller

Count value of magenta charger roller

Count value of yellow charger roller

Count value of black charger roller

Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [Clear].
3. Press the OK key. The counts is cleared.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-145

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U952

Description
Maintenance mode workflow
Description
The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be
executed in succession.
Purpose
This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template.
Setting
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the item.
Display

Description

Continue

Restarting an abandoned workflow

Exec(USB)

Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device

Exec

Executes a workflow stored in the machine

Entry(USB)

Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine

Entry

Assigns a workflow in the machine manually

Log

Displays a list of workflows recently executed

Method: [Exec]
1. Select [Execute].
2. Select the workflow.
Display
Data1 - 6

Description
The area to store workflows in the machine

3. Press the OK key.


Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
Method: [Entry]
1. Select [Entry].
2. Select the area to store workflow.
Display
Data1 - 6

Description
The area to store workflows in the machine

3. Press the numeric keys to assign a maintenance Nbr. into a workflow.


Display
Flow1 - 14

Description
Assign a maintenance Nbr.

4. Press the OK key. The setting is set.


5. Press the OK key.
Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.

1-3-146

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U952

Description
Method: [Exec(USB)]
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U952.
5. Select [Execute(USB)].
6. Select the workflow.
Display
Data01 - 06

Description
Workflow data in the USB flash device

7. Press the OK key.


Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in succession.
Method: [Entry(USB)]
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off (see page p.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U952.
5. Select [Entry(USB)].
6. Select the workflow.
Display
Data01 - 06

Description
Workflow data in the USB flash device

7. Select the work flow save area.


Display
Data1 - 6

Description
The area to store workflows in the machine

8. Select [Execute].
Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine.

Example
Registration is feasible when a USB flash device that stores the commands and text/maintenance ID (editable) is inserted.
File Format: xxx.mwf
1.SET UP, 464, 469, 000, 927, 278
2.WARRANTY, 089, 000
3.MK-A, 119, 930, 140, 469, 127, 464, 469, 464, 251
4.MK-B, 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 464, 251
5.MK-C, 167, 464, 469, 251

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-147

2MN/2N1-3
Item No.
U964

Description
Checking of log
Description
Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunctions.
Method
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U964.
Display

Description

Execute

Transer the Log file which is stored into HDD into the USB
memory

Jam Log

Exchange the Log acquision function when JAM occures

5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the OK key.
Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory.
Processing is displayed for approximately 3 to 5 minutes.
7. When normally completed, [Completed] is displayed.
8. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.
If a problem occurs during auto correction, error code is displayed.
Setting: [Jam Log]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select On or Off.
Display

Description

On

Acquire the Log when JAM occurs

Off

Do not acquire the Log when JAM occurs

Initial setting: Off


3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
* : When U964 JAM setting turns ON, please explain the user make sure to turn OFF/ON the
main power switch when the Log has been acuired completely after clearing jammed
paper when JAM occures.
* : When U964 JAM setting turns ON, the service call may appear wrongly due to malfunction if the main power switch is not turned OFF/ON after clearing jammed paper.

1-3-148

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.

Description
Error codes
Error codes

U969

Error name

Description

No Usb Storage

USB memory is not inserted

No File

File is not found

Mount Error

USB memory mount error

File Delete Error

File deletion error

Copy Error

File copy error

Unmount Error

USB memory unmount error

Other Error

Other error

Checking of toner area code


Description
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
To check the toner area code.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The toner area code is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-149

2MN/2N1-1
Item No.
U977

Description
Data capture mode
Description
Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory.
Purpose
In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine.
Method
1. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off(see page P.1-2-19).
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter maintenance item U977.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the OK key.
7. Send the print data to the machine.
Once the print data is stored into USB memory, [OK] will be displayed.
Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Error codes
Error codes

U984

Description

The removable memory has been crushed or removed or


write-protected

The removable memory is full

Other errors have occurred

Checking the developer unit number


Description
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
To check the developer unit number.
Method
1. Press the OK key. The developer unit number for each color is displayed.
Display

Description

Cyan developer unit number

Magenta developer unit number

Yellow developer unit number

Black developer unit number

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-150

2MN/2N1
Item No.
U985

Description
Displaying the developer unit history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select the color to check.
Display

Description

Cyan developer unit past record

Magenta developer unit past record

Yellow developer unit past record

Black developer unit past record

The history of a machine number and a developer counter for each color is displayed by
three cases.
Display

Description

Machine History1 - 3

Historical records of the machine number

Cnt History1 - 3

Historical records of developer counter

Completion
Press the Back key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U989

HDD Scan disk


Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the
hard disk drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method
1. Press the OK key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the OK key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.
4. Exit the maintenance mode, perform shut-down, and turn the main power switch to off and on
again. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

1-3-151

2MN/2N1

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-3-152

2MN/2N1

1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection


1-4 Troubleshooting

(1) Paper misfeed indication


When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed message on the operation panel. To remove paper misfeed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the paper
conveying unit or paper conveying cover.

I
H
H

E
F
D

A
E
B
C
E
C

J
K

Figure 1-4-1 Paper misfeed indication

A. Misfeed in cassette 1
B. Misfeed in cassette 2
C. Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4 (option)
D. Misfeed in the MP tray
E. Misfeed in paper conveying unit, paper conveying
cover or PF paper conveying cover
F. Misfeed in the duplex section
G. Misfeed in bridge unit (option)
H. Misfeed in document finisher (option)
I. Misfeed in cassette 5 (option)
J. Misfeed in cassette 6 or 7 (option)

1-4-1

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Paper misfeed detection condition


Machine
EFS2

SBS
EFS1

DUS1
FUES

LPS
DUS2
RS
MS
FS1
PCS1
FS2

PCS2

Figure 1-4-2 Paper jam location

1-4-2

MPFS

2MN/2N1
* : This model does not support the following codes:
0132 /0505 /0515 /9030
Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

0000

Initial jam

The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying system is on.

0100

Secondary paper feed


request time out

Secondary paper feed request given by the controller


is unreachable.

0101

Waiting for process


package to become
ready

Process package wont become ready.

0102

Waiting for toner package to become ready

Toner package wont become ready.

0103

Waiting for the imagesustaining package to


become ready

The image-sustaining package wont become ready.

0104

Waiting for conveying


package to become
ready

Conveying package wont become ready.

0106

Paper feeding request


for duplex printing time
out

Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by the


controller is unreachable.

0107

Waiting for fuser package to become ready

Fuser package wont become ready.

0108

Waiting for option package to become ready

Option package wont become ready.

0110

Paper conveying unit


open

The paper conveying unit is opened during printing.

0111

Front cover open

The front cover is opened during printing.

0112

Duplex cover open

The duplex cover is opened during printing.

0113

Paper conveying cover


open

The paper conveying cover is opened during printing.

0114

BR conveying unit open

The BR conveying unit is opened during printing.

0115

BR eject cover open

The BR eject cover is opened during printing.

0131

MP lift sensor upper limit


detection

MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of the MP lift plate rising.

0200

Machine sequence error

A sequence error has caused.

0210

PF paper conveying
cover open

The PF paper conveying cover is opened during printing.

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-3

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

0211

SM paper conveying
cover open

The SM paper conveying cover is opened during printing.

0212

SM top cover open

The SM top cover is opened during printing.

0213

SD cover open

The SD cover is opened during printing.

0214

PF paper conveying
cover (side) open

The PF paper conveying cover (side) is opened during


printing.

0215

Side multi tray release

The side multi tray is released during printing.

0300

Ejection uncompleted

An ejection-completed error has occurred.

0501

No paper feed from cassette 1

Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

0502

No paper feed from cassette 2

Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

0503

No paper feed from cassette 3

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

0504

No paper feed from cassette 4

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

0505

No paper feed from cassette 5

SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

0506

No paper feed from cassette 6

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).

0507

No paper feed from cassette 7

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).

0508

No paper feed from


duplex section

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from duplex section.

0509

No paper feed from MP


tray

MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

0511

Multiple sheets in cassette 1

Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 1.

0512

Multiple sheets in cassette 2

Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 2.

0513

Multiple sheets in cassette 3

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

0514

Multiple sheets in cassette 4

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-4

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

0515

Multiple sheets in cassette 5

SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

0516

Multiple sheets in cassette 6

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).

0517

Multiple sheets in cassette 7

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).

0518

Multiple sheets in duplex


section

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from duplex section.

0519

Multiple sheets in MP
tray

MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn off during paper


feed from MP tray.

0523

No paper feed from cassette 3

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder).

0524

No paper feed from cassette 4

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder).

0525

No paper feed from cassette 5

SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

0526

No paper feed from cassette 6

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity
feeder).

0527

No paper feed from cassette 7

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity
feeder).

0533

Multiple sheets in cassette 3

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder).

0534

Multiple sheets in cassette 4

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder).

0535

Multiple sheets in cassette 5

SM feed sensor (SMFS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

0536

Multiple sheets in cassette 6

PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity
feeder).

0537

Multiple sheets in cassette 7

PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity
feeder).

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-5

2MN/2N1
Jam
location*

Code

Contents

Conditions

0545

No paper feed from side


deck

SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from side deck.

0555

Multiple sheets in side


deck

SD feed sensor (SDFS) does not turn off during paper


feed from side deck.

1301

Middle sensor non arrival


jam

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 1.

1302

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 2.

1303

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1304

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1305

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

1306

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

1307

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 1.

1312

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 2.

1313

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1314

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1315

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

1316

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

1317

Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

1311

Middle sensor stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-6

2MN/2N1
Jam
location*

Code

Contents

Conditions

1502

Paper conveying sensor


non arrival jam

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 2.

1503

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1504

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 2.

1513

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1514

Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

1703

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

1704

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

1713

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

1714

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

1904

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

1914

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

2106

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper
feeder).

2107

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).

2116

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper
feeder).

2117

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).

2307

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).

1512

Paper conveying sensor


stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-7

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

2317

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper
feeder).

2603

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity
feeder).

2604

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).

2606

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).

2607

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

2613

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity
feeder).

2614

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).

2616

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).

2617

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

2704

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).

2707

PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

2714

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity
feeder).

2717

PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-8

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

3106

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).

3107

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

3116

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn
sor 1 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large
capacity feeder).

3117

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn


off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

3307

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 non arrival jam
on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

3317

PF paper conveying sen- PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn
sor 2 stay jam
off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large
capacity feeder).

3405

SM paper conveying
sensor 1 non arrival jam

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3406

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3407

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3416

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3417

SM paper conveying sensor 1 (SMPCS1) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

3415

SM paper conveying
sensor 1 stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-9

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

3505

SM paper conveying
sensor 2 non arrival jam

Conditions

Jam
location*

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3506

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3507

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3516

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3517

SM paper conveying sensor 2 (SMPCS2) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3606

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3607

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi
tray).

3616

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side multi
tray).

3617

SM paper conveying sensor 3 (SMPCS3) does not


turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side multi
tray).

3515

3605

3615

SM paper conveying
sensor 2 stay jam

SM paper conveying
sensor 3 non arrival jam

SM paper conveying
sensor 3 stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-10

2MN/2N1

Code
3705

Contents

Jam
location*

SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

3706

SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).

3707

SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side multi tray).

3715

SM eject sensor stay jam SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray).

3716

SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side multi tray).

3717

SM eject sensor (SMES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side multi tray).

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

4002

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4003

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4004

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4005

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4006

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4007

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4009

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

4001

SM eject sensor non


arrival jam

Conditions

Registration sensor non


arrival jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-11

2MN/2N1
Jam
location*

Code

Contents

Conditions

4011

Registration sensor stay


jam

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 1.

4012

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4013

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4014

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4015

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4016

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4017

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4019

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper


feed from MP tray.

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 1.

4102

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 2.

4103

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4104

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4105

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4106

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

4107

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

4108

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from duplex section.

4109

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed


from MP tray.

4101

Loop sensor non arrival


jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-12

2MN/2N1

Code
4111

Contents
Loop sensor stay jam

Conditions

Jam
location*

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 1.

4112

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 2.

4113

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4114

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4115

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4116

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

4117

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity
feeder).

4118

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from duplex section.

4119

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed
from MP tray.

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-13

2MN/2N1

Code
4201

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 1.

4202

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 2.

4203

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4204

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4205

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4206

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4207

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4208

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from duplex section.

4209

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during


paper feed from MP tray.

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 1.

4212

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 2.

4213

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4214

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4215

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4216

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4217

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4218

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from duplex section.

4219

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during


paper feed from MP tray.

4211

Fuser eject sensor non


arrival jam

Fuser eject sensor stay


jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-14

2MN/2N1

Code
4301

Contents
Duplex sensor 1 non
arrival jam

Conditions

Jam
location*

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

4302

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4303

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4304

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4305

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4306

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4307

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4309

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

4311

Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 1.

4312

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4313

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4314

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4315

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4316

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4317

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4319

Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper


feed from MP tray.

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-15

2MN/2N1

Code
4401

Contents
Duplex sensor 2 non
arrival jam

Conditions

Jam
location*

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

4402

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4403

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4404

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4405

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4406

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4407

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4409

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

4411

Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 1.

4412

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4413

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4414

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4415

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4416

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4417

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4418

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from duplex section.

4419

Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper


feed from MP tray.

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-16

2MN/2N1

Code
4601

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

4602

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

4603

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4604

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4605

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4606

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4607

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4608

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from duplex section.

4609

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

4611

Eject full sensor stay jam Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 1.

4612

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 2.

4613

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4614

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

4615

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4616

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4617

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

4618

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from duplex section.

4619

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper
feed from MP tray.

Eject full sensor non


arrival jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-17

2MN/2N1

Code
4701

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 1.

4702

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 2.

4703

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4704

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4705

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4706

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4707

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4708

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from duplex section.

4709

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during


paper feed from MP tray.

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 1.

4712

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 2.

4713

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4714

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder).

4715

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

4716

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4717

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4718

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from duplex section.

4719

Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during


paper feed from MP tray.

4711

Switchback sensor non


arrival jam

Switchback sensor stay


jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-18

2MN/2N1

Code
4901

Contents

Jam
location*

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1.

4902

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2.

4903

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

4904

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

4905

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).

4906

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4907

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4908

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section.

4909

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray.

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1.

4912

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2.

4913

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

4914

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

4915

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).

4916

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4917

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

4911

BR conveying sensor 1
non arrival jam

Conditions

BR conveying sensor 1
stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-19

2MN/2N1

Code
4918

Contents
BR conveying sensor 1
stay jam

Conditions

Jam
location*

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section.

BR conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray.

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1.

5002

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2.

5003

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

5004

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

5005

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).

5006

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

5007

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

5008

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section.

5009

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray.

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1.

5012

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2.

5013

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

5014

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large
capacity feeder).

5015

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side
deck).

4919
5001

5011

BR conveying sensor 2
non arrival jam

BR conveying sensor 2
stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-20

2MN/2N1

Code
5016

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

5017

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side
large capacity feeder).

5018

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section.

5019

BR conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray.

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 1.

5102

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 2.

5103

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

5104

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

5105

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

5106

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

5107

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

5108

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from duplex section.

5109

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper


feed from MP tray.

5101

BR conveying sensor 2
stay jam

BR eject sensor non


arrival jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-21

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

5111

BR eject sensor stay jam BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper
feed from cassette 1.

5112

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 2.

5113

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

5114

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity
feeder).

5115

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 5 (side multi tray/side deck).

5116

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

5117

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large
capacity feeder).

5118

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from duplex section.

5119

BR eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper


feed from MP tray.

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before the


eject signal is output from the machine (4000-sheet finisher).

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before the


eject signal is output from the machine (1000-sheet finisher).

DF front upper cover is opened during operation


(4000-sheet finisher).

DF front cover is opened during operation (1000-sheet


finisher).

6000

DF paper entry error

6001

6020

DF front cover open

6021
6041

DF top cover open

DF top cover is opened during operation (1000-sheet


finisher).

6050

CF eject cover open

CF eject cover is opened during operation (4000-sheet


finisher).

6060

MB cover open

MB cover is opened during operation (4000-sheet finisher).

6070

Center folding unit open

Center folding unit is opened during operation (4000sheet finisher).

6080

CF left guide open

CF left guide is opened during operation (4000-sheet


finisher).

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-22

2MN/2N1

Code
6100

Contents
DF paper entry sensor
non arrival jam

6101

6110

DF paper entry sensor


stay jam

6111

Conditions

Jam
location*

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned on even


if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject
signal was received (4000-sheet finisher).

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned on even


if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject
signal was received (1000-sheet finisher).

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned off within


specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet finisher).

DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned off within


specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher).

6200

DF sub eject sensor non


arrival jam

DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turn on within


specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on.

6210

DF sub eject sensor stay


jam

DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) is not turned off within


specified time of its turning on.

6300

DF middle eject sensor


non arrival jam

DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn on


within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher).

DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn on


within specified time of DF paper entry sensor
(DFPES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher).

DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off


within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet finisher).

DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off


within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher)

6301

6310

6311

DF middle eject sensor


stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).
1-4-23

2MN/2N1

Code
6400

Contents
DF tray upper surface
sensor non arrival jam

6401

6410

DF tray upper surface


sensor stay jam

6411

Conditions

Jam
location*

DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not turn


on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor
(DFMES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher).

DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not turn


on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor
(DFMES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher).

DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not turned


off within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet
finisher).

DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not turned


off within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet
finisher).

6500

DF bundle discharge
sensor non arrival jam

DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) does not turn on


within specified time of DF middle eject sensor
(DFMES) turning on.

6510

DF bundle discharge
sensor stay jam

DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not turned off


since the bundle discharge starts (4000-sheet finisher).

DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not turned off


since the bundle discharge starts (1000-sheet finisher).

6511
6600

DF drum sensor non


arrival jam

DF drum sensor (DFDRS) does not turn on within


specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on.

6610

DF drum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.

6710

Center folding unit stay


jam

During paper conveying to center folding unit, DF drum


sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within specified time
of its turning on.

6810

DF side registration sensor 1 stay jam

DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not turned


off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (DFSRM1) (4000-sheet finisher).

DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not turned


off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (DFSRM1) (1000-sheet finisher).

DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not turned


off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (DFSRM2) (4000-sheet finisher).

DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not turned


off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (DFSRM2) (1000-sheet finisher).

6811

6910

6811

DF side registration sensor 2 stay jam

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-24

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Conditions

Jam
location*

7000

DF staple operation error DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within


specified time after driving the DF staple motor
(DFSTM) (4000-sheet finisher).

7001

DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within


specified time after driving the DF staple motor
(DFSTM) (1000-sheet finisher).

7100

CF paper entry sensor


non arrival jam

CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned on even


if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject
signal was received.

7110

CF paper entry sensor


stay jam

CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned off within


specified time of its turning on.

7200

CF eject sensor non


arrival jam

CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within specified time since centerfold operation starts.

7210

CF eject sensor stay jam During centerfold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) is
not turned off within specified time of its turning on.

7300

CF eject sensor non


arrival jam

7310

CF eject sensor stay jam During three fold operation, CF eject sensor (CFES) is
not turned off within specified time of its turning on.

7400

CF side registration sensor 2 non arrival jam

CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) is not turned


on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 2 (CFSRM2).

7500

CF side registration sensor 1 non arrival jam

CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1) is not turned


on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 1 (CFSRM1).

7600

CF staple operation error CF staple sensor (CFSTS) is not turned on within


specified time after driving the CF staple motor
(CFSTM).

7700

CF paper conveying sen- CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not turned on


sor non arrival jam
even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine
eject signal was received.

7710

CF paper conveying sen- CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) is not turned off
sor stay jam
within specified time of its turning on.

7800

MB eject sensor non


arrival jam

MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned on even if a


specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received.

7810

MB eject sensor stay jam MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.

7950

Paper interval error jam

An illegal inter-page or inter-print interval has occurred


(4000-sheet finisher).

An illegal inter-page or inter-print interval has occurred


(1000-sheet finisher).

7951

CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within specified time since three fold operation starts.

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).

1-4-25

2MN/2N1-1

1-4-2 Self-diagnostic function


(1) Self-diagnostic function
This machine is equipped with self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops printing and display an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting
a contact to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of the error.

Machine failure.
Call service.
C####

Error occurred.
Turn the main power
switch off and on.
C####
Figure 1-4-3

1-4-26

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Self diagnostic codes


If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Code
0100

Contents
Backup memory device
error

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective
EEPROM.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

Defective main
PWB.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

MAC address data error


For data in which the MAC
address is invalid.

Defective
EEPROM.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Backup memory read/write


error (engine PWB)
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated 5 times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
2 locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Improper installation EEPROM.

Check the installation of the EEPROM and


remedy if necessary.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Device damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

0160

Backup memory data error


(engine PWB)
Reading data from EEPROM
is abnormal.

Data damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

0170

Billing counting error


A checksum error is detected
in the main and engine
backup memories for the billing counters.

Data damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

Defective PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB or the engine


PWB and check for correct operation. (see
page 1-5-47,1-5-52)

0120

0150

0180

Machine number mismatch


Machine number of main and
engine does not match.

Data damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

0640

Hard disk error


The hard disk cannot be
accessed.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.

Defective hard
disk.

Run U024 (HDD formatting) without turning


the power off to initialize the hard disk.
Replace the hard disk drive and check for
correct operation if the problem is still
detected after initialization.

Defective main
PWB.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

1-4-27

2MN/2N1-1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

0800

Image processing error


JAM010X is detected twice.

Defective main
PWB.

0840

Faults of RTC
The time is judged to go back
based on the comparison of
the RTC time and the current
time or five years or more
have passed.

The battery is dis- Check visually and remedy if necessary


connected from the
main PWB.
Defective main
PWB.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-47).

* : Once detected, turning the main power switch off and on


lets the machine in disconnection mode, displaying Maintenance T.Execute U906 to reset.
0970

12 V power down detect


Power is disconnected during
sleepingDetection of the temporary blackout during sleeping (24V is off, 23V is on, only
the controller software is running).

Defective power
source PWB.

Replace the power source PWB and check


for correct operation.

0980

24 V power down detect


24V disconnection signal is
detected for 1 s and 12V
disconnection signal is not
detected.

Defective power
source PWB.

Replace the power source PWB and check


for correct operation.

1000

MP lift motor error


After the MP lift motor is
driven, the ON status of MP lift
sensors 1 and 2 cannot be
detected for 3 s.

Defective MP plate
elevation mechanism.

Check to see if the MP plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective MP lift
motor.

Replace the MP lift motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-28

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

1010

Lift motor 1 error


After cassette 1 is inserted, lift
sensor 1 does not turn on
within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
The lock signal of the motor is
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 5 times
successively.

1020

Lift motor 2 error


After cassette 2 is inserted, lift
sensor 2 does not turn on
within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
The lock signal of the motor is
detected continuously for 1 s.
This error is detected 5 times
successively.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Lift motor 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective lift motor


1.

Replace the lift motor 1.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Lift motor 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective lift motor


2.

Replace the lift motor 2.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-29

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

1030

PF lift motor 1 error


(paper feeder)
After cassette 3 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
on within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
1 s or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1 s
after motor is turned on is
excluded from detection.

1040

1050

PF lift motor 2 error


(paper feeder)
After cassette 4 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 2 does not turn
on within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
1 s or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1 s
after motor is turned on is
excluded from detection.

SM lift motor error


(side multi tray)
[45 ppm/55 ppm model]
After cassette 5 is inserted,
SM lift sensor does not turn
on within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.)
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
1 s or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1 s
after motor is turned on is
excluded from detection.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 1.

Replace the PF lift motor 1.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 2.

Replace the PF lift motor 2.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM lift motor and SM main PWB (YC5)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective SM lift
motor.

Replace the SM lift motor.

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

1-4-30

2MN/2N1

Code
1060

Contents
PF lift motor 1 error
(side paper feeder)
After cassette 6 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
on within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.)
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
1 s or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1 s
after motor is turned on is
excluded from detection.
*:The software over-current
protection monitor signal has
been detected for 200ms or
longer where LFC is installed.

1070

PF lift motor 2 error


(side paper feeder)
After cassette 7 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 2 does not turn
on within 12 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.)
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
1 s or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1 s
after motor is turned on is
excluded from detection.
*:The software over-current
protection monitor signal has
been detected for 200ms or
longer where LFC is installed.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 1.

Replace the PF lift motor 1.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective bottom
plate elevation
mechanism in the
cassette.

Check to see if the bottom plate can move


smoothly and repair it if any problem is
found.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 2.

Replace the PF lift motor 2.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

1-4-31

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

1100

PF lift motor 1 error


(large capacity feeder)
After cassette 3 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 1 does not turn
on within 23 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.)
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
200 ms or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1
s after PF lift motor 1 is turned
on is excluded from detection.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 1.

Replace the PF lift motor 1.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

PF lift motor 2 error


(large capacity feeder)
After cassette 4 is inserted,
PF lift sensor 2 does not turn
on within 23 s. This error is
detected 5 times successively.
(Time to detect is 2 seconds
at the second time and later.)
During driving the motor, the
lift overcurrent protective
monitor signal is detected for
200 ms or more 5 times successively. However, the first 1
s after PF lift motor 2 is turned
on is excluded from detection.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF lift
motor 2.

Replace the PF lift motor 2.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

SD lift motor error


(side deck)
After cassette 5 is inserted,
SD lift sensor does not turn on
within 30 s.
The lock signal of the motor is
detected continuously for 200
ms.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SD lift motor and SD main PWB (YC8)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective SD lift
motor.

Replace the SD lift motor.

Defective SD main
PWB.

Replace the SD main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

1110

1140

1-4-32

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

1250

SM multi feed sensor communication error (side multi


tray)

Improper installation side multi tray.

Follow installation instruction carefully again.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM main PWB (YC1) and engine PWB
(YC19)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB a1-5-52nd check


for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM multi feed sensor and SM main PWB
(YC11)

Defective SM multi
feed sensor.

Replace the SM multi feed sensor.

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM multi feed sensor and SM main PWB
(YC11)

Defective SM multi
feed sensor.

Replace the SM multi feed sensor.

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Improper installation paper feeder.

Follow installation instruction carefully again.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF main PWB (YC13) and engine PWB
(YC19)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

A communication error is
detected 3 times in succession.

1350

SM multi feed sensor error


(side multi tray)
The SM multi feed sensor has
detected multi feeding 5 times
successively.

1450

SM multi feed sensor


backup error
(side multi tray)
When writing the data, read
and write data does not match
3 times in succession.
Deleting a block has failed
three times in a row.
Writing wont complete in 200
ms after writing has commenced.

1800

Paper feeder communication error


A communication error from
paper feeder is detected 10
times in succession.

1-4-33

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

1810

Side multi tray communication error

Improper installation side multi tray.

Follow installation instruction carefully again.

A communication error from


paper feeder is detected 10
times in succession.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM main PWB (YC1) and engine PWB
(YC19)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

1820

1900

1910

Side paper feeder communi- Improper installation side paper


cation error
feeder.
A communication error from
Defective connecpaper feeder is detected 10
tor cable or poor
times in succession.
contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF main PWB (YC13) and SM main PWB
(YC4)
SM main PWB (YC1) and engine PWB
(YC19)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Paper feeder EEPROM error


When writing the data, read
and write data does not match
3 times in succession.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Device damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

Side multi tray EEPROM


error

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Device damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Device damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

When writing the data, read


and write data does not match
3 times in succession.
1920

Follow installation instruction carefully again.

Side paper feeder EEPROM


error
When writing the data, read
and write data does not match
3 times in succession.

1-4-34

2MN/2N1-1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

1950

Transfer belt unit EEPROM


error
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated 5 times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
2 locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective transfer
belt unit.

Replace the transfer belt unit and check for


correct operation (see 1-5-37).

Developer motor K error


After developer motor K is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 5 s.
After developer motor K is stabilized, the ready signal is at
the H level for 5 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer motor K and motor control PWB
(YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective developer motor K.

Replace the developer motor K.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer motor MCY and motor control
PWB (YC7)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective developer motor MCY.

Replace the developer motor MCY.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2101

2103

Developer motor MCY error


After developer motor MCY is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 5 s.
After developer motor MCY is
stabilized, the ready signal is
at the H level for 5 s continuously.

1-4-35

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2201

Drum motor K steady-state


error
After drum motor K is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 5 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor K and motor control PWB (YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor K.

Replace the drum motor K.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor C and motor control PWB (YC4)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor C.

Replace the drum motor C.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2202

Drum motor C steady-state


error
After drum motor C is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 5 s continuously.

1-4-36

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2203

Drum motor M steady-state


error

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor M and motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor M.

Replace the drum motor M.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor Y and motor control PWB (YC4)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor Y.

Replace the drum motor Y.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

After drum motor M is stabilized, the ready signal is at the


H level for 5 s continuously.

2204

Drum motor Y steady-state


error
After drum motor Y is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 5 s continuously.

1-4-37

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2211

Drum motor K startup error


Drum motor K is not stabilized
within 5 s since the motor is
activated.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor K and motor control PWB (YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor K.

Replace the drum motor K.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor C and motor control PWB (YC4)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor C.

Replace the drum motor C.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2212

Drum motor C startup error


Drum motor C is not stabilized
within 5 s since the motor is
activated.

1-4-38

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2213

Drum motor M startup error

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor M and motor control PWB
(YC5)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor M.

Replace the drum motor M.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum motor Y and motor control PWB (YC4)
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective drum
motor Y.

Replace the drum motor Y.

Defective Motor
control PWB.

Replace the Motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser motor and feed PWB 1 (YC18)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective fuser
motor.

Replace the fuser motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Drum motor M is not stabilized


within 5 s since the motor is
activated.

2214

Drum motor Y startup error


Drum motor Y is not stabilized
within 5 s since the motor is
activated.

2300

Fuser motor error


After fuser motor is driven, the
ready signal does not turn to L
within 2 s.
After fuser motor is stabilized,
the ready signal is at the H
level for 1 s continuously.

1-4-39

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2500

Paper feed motor error


After paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.
After paper feed motor is stabilized, the ready signal is at
the H level for 1 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Paper feed motor and feed PWB 2 (YC2)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective paper
feed motor.

Replace the paper feed motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

2600

PF paper feed motor error


(large capacity feeder)
After PF paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor.


feed motor.

2610

PF paper feed motor error


(paper feeder)
After PF paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor.


feed motor.
Defective PF main
PWB.

1-4-40

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

2MN/2N1

Code
2640

Contents
SD paper feed motor error
(side deck)
After SD paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

2650

SM paper feed motor error


(side multi tray)
After SM paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

2660

PF paper feed motor error


(side large capacity feeder)
After PF paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SD paper feed motor and SD main PWB
(YC16)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective SD
paper feed motor.

Replace the SD paper feed motor.

Defective SD main
PWB.

Replace the SD main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
SM paper feed motor and SM main PWB
(YC5)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective SM
paper feed motor.

Replace the SM paper feed motor.

Defective SM main
PWB.

Replace the SM main PWB (Refer to the


service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor.


feed motor.
Defective PF main
PWB.

1-4-41

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

2MN/2N1-1

Code
2670

Contents
PF paper feed motor error
(side paper feeder)
After PF paper feed motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB
(YC16)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor.


feed motor.

2700

2730

Color release motor error


When the color release motor
is driven, the color release
sensor does not turn on/off for
5 s.

Transfer release motor error


When the transfer release
motor is driven, the transfer
release sensor does not turn
on/off for 5 s.

Defective PF main
PWB.

Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the transfer belt unit connector if


necessary.Check for continuity within the
harness and, if none, replace the harness.
Color release motor and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Replace the transfer belt unit.

Defective color
release motor.

Replace the transfer belt unit.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer release motor and relay PWB
(YC14)
Relay PWB (YC14) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective transfer
release motor.

Replace the transfer release motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-42

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2760

Transfer motor startup error


Transfer motor is not stabilized within 5 s since the
motor is activated.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer motor and feed PWB 1 (YC13)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective transfer
motor.

Replace the transfer motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Improper installation transfer belt


unit.

Reinstall the transfer belt unit.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective transfer
skew sensor.

Replace the transfer belt unit.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective transfer
skew sensor.

Replace the transfer belt unit.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer skew motor and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective transfer
skew motor.

Replace the transfer skew motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2770

2780

2790

Transfer skew error


An abnormal value is detected
to transfer skew sensor.

Transfer skew sensor error


An abnormal value is detected
to transfer skew sensor.

Transfer skew motor error


When the transfer skew motor
is driven, timeouts (300 ms)
were detected twice in a row.

1-4-43

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

2810

Waste toner motor error


Initialized when an error is
constantly observed for 2 s
after the waste toner motor is
activated. An error is constantly observed for 2.5 s after
rebooting.
The lock detect signal wont
be H level three times in a row
within 200 ms at 1.25 ms
cycles after the waste toner
motor has been driven.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Waste toner motor and front PWB (YC16)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective waste
toner motor.

Replace the waste toner motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Transfer motor steady-state


error
After transfer motor is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 5 s continuously.
The counter value obtained by
timer capture is lower than
2200 for 10 times in a row.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer motor and feed PWB 1 (YC13)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective transfer
motor.

Replace the transfer motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer cleaning motor and engine PWB
(YC3)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective transfer
cleaning motor.

Replace the transfer cleaning motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2820

2840

Transfer cleaning motor


error
After transfer cleaning motor
is driven, the ready signal
does not turn to L within 2 s.
After transfer cleaning motor
is stabilized, the ready signal
is at the H level for 1 s continuously.

1-4-44

2MN/2N1

Code
2850

2860

2950

4001

Contents
Transfer belt motor sensor
error
The signal is not received for
100 ms in succession.

Transfer belt sensor error


The signal is not received for
100 ms in succession.

Motor control PWB communication error


A communication error from
the motor control PWB is
detected 10 times in succession.

Polygon motor K synchronization error


After polygon motor K is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 30 s.
The polygon motor speed
wont stabilize within 10 s.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer motor and feed PWB (YC13)
Feed PWB (YC1) to engine PWB(YC6)

Defective transfer
motor.

Replace the transfer motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Transfer belt sensor and engine PWB (YC3)

Defective transfer
belt sensor.

Replace the transfer belt sensor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC9)

Defective motor
control PWB.

Replace the motor control PWB and check


for correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB (YC4)
LSU relay PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-45

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

4002

Polygon motor C synchronization error


After polygon motor C is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 30 s.
The polygon motor speed
wont stabilize within 10 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB (YC9)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB (YC7)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB
(YC11)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB (YC4)
LSU relay PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

4003

4004

4011

Polygon motor M synchronization error


After polygon motor M is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 30 s.
The polygon motor speed
wont stabilize within 10 s.

Polygon motor Y synchronization error


After polygon motor Y is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 30 s.
The polygon motor speed
wont stabilize within 10 s.

Polygon motor K steadystate error


After polygon motor K is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 15 s continuously.

1-4-46

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

4012

Polygon motor C steadystate error


After polygon motor C is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 15 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB (YC9)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB (YC7)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB
(YC11)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective polygon
motor Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

4013

4014

4101

Polygon motor M steadystate error


After polygon motor M is stabilized, the ready signal is at
the H level for 15 s continuously.

Polygon motor Y steadystate error


After polygon motor Y is stabilized, the ready signal is at the
H level for 15 s continuously.

BD initialization error K
After polygon motor K is
driven, the BD signal is not
detected for 1 s.

1-4-47

2MN/2N1

Code
4102

4103

4104

4201

Contents
BD initialization error C
After polygon motor C is
driven, the BD signal is not
detected for 1 s.

BD initialization error M
After polygon motor M is
driven, the BD signal is not
detected for 1 s.

BD initialization error Y
After polygon motor Y is
driven, the BD signal is not
detected for 1 s.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

BD steady-state error K
Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. tor cable or poor
contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-48

2MN/2N1

Code
4202

4203

4204

4300

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

BD steady-state error C
Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. tor cable or poor
contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

BD steady-state error M
Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. tor cable or poor
contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

BD steady-state error Y
Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. tor cable or poor
contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective PD PWB
Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective laser
scanner unit.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Polygon motor phase error


ASIC wont settle in completion of phase adjustment for 2
s after a BD signal is
detected.

1-4-49

2MN/2N1

Code
4600

5101

Contents
LSU cleaning motor error
After LSU cleaning motor is
driven, the ready signal does
not turn to L within 2 s.
After LSU cleaning motor is
stabilized, the ready signal is
at the H level for 1 s continuously.

Main high-voltage error K


Measure the inflowing current
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps
and verify if the difference of
the currents of 0 and step 2 is
less than 42 (51 if lower highvoltage board).

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
LSU cleaning motor and engine PWB
(YC21)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective LSU
cleaning motor.

Replace the LSU cleaning motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Improper installation charger roller


unit K.

Reinstall the charger roller unit K.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC17)

Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check
age PWB 1.
for correct operation (see page 1-5-57).

5102

Main high-voltage error C


Measure the inflowing current
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps
and verify if the difference of
the currents of 0 and step 2 is
less than 42 (51 if lower highvoltage board).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Improper installation charger roller


unit C.

Reinstall the charger roller unit C.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB
(YC16)

Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check
age PWB 1.
for correct operation (see page 1-5-57).
Defective engine
PWB.

1-4-50

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

5103

Main high-voltage error M


Measure the inflowing current
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps
and verify if the difference of
the currents of 0 and step 2 is
less than 42 (51 if lower highvoltage board).

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Improper installation charger roller


unit M.

Reinstall the charger roller unit M.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC17)

Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check
age PWB 1.
for correct operation (see page 1-5-57).

5104

Main high-voltage error Y


Measure the inflowing current
when Vpp is varied in 3 steps
and verify if the difference of
the currents of 0 and step 2 is
less than 42 (51 if lower highvoltage board).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Improper installation charger roller


unit Y.

Reinstall the charger roller unit Y.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB
(YC16)

Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check
age PWB 1.
for correct operation (see page 1-5-57).

6000

6020

Broken fuser heater wire


Fuser thermistor 1 does not
reach 100 C/212 F even
after 60 s during warming up.
The detected temperature of
fuser thermistor 1 does not
reach the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) for 420 s in warming up
after reached to 100 C/212
F.

Abnormally high fuser


thermistor 1 temperature
Fuser thermistor 1 detects a
temperature higher than
240C/464F for 1 s.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Power source PWB (YC3) and fuser IH PWB
(YC1)
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Fuser thermostat
triggered.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Shorted fuser
thermistor 1.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-51

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

6030

Broken fuser thermistor 1


wire
Input from fuser thermistor 1
is 984 or more (A/D value)
continuously for 1 s.
Verify if A/D read in the differential output wont change by
4 or more when it was turned
on for 10 seconds in a lowtemperature environment.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Broken fuser
thermistor 1 wire.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Fuser thermostat
triggered.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Broken fuser
thermistor 1 wire.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Abnormally low fuser


thermistor 1 temperature
Fuser thermistor 1 detects a
temperature lower than
100C/212F for 1 s after
warming up, during ready or
during print.
Fuser thermistor 1 detects a
temperature lower than 70C/
158F for 1 s during low
power mode.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser
thermistor 1.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Abnormally high fuser


thermistor 4 temperature
Fuser thermistor 4 detects a
temperature higher than
190C/374F for 1 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Shorted fuser
thermistor 4.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

6040

6050

6120

Fuser heater error


Input from fuser thermistor 1
is abnormal value continuously for 1 s.

1-4-52

2MN/2N1

Code
6130

6150

6200

6220

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Broken fuser
thermistor 4 wire.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser
thermistor 4.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Broken fuser edge heater


wire
Fuser thermistor 2 does not
reach 100 C/212 F even
after 60 s during warming up.
The detected temperature of
fuser thermistor 2 does not
reach the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) for 420 s in warming up
after reached to 100 C/212
F.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Power source PWB (YC3) and fuser IH
PWB (YC1)
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Fuser thermostat
triggered.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Abnormally high fuser


thermistor 2 temperature
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a
temperature higher than
245C/473F for 1 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Shorted fuser
thermistor 2.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Contents
Broken fuser thermistor 4
wire
Input from fuser thermistor 4
is 992 or more (A/D value)
continuously for 60 s.

Abnormally low fuser


thermistor 4 temperature
Fuser thermistor 4 detects a
temperature lower than 30C/
86F for 1 s after warming up.

1-4-53

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

6230

Broken fuser thermistor 2


wire
The Input signal from the
fuser thermistor 2 is 992 or
more (A/D value) continuously
for 1 s when the temperature
at the fuser thermistor 1 is
greater than 100C/212F
during warming up.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Broken fuser
thermistor 2 wire.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Fuser thermostat
triggered.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Abnormally low fuser


thermistor 2 temperature
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a
temperature lower than
100C/212F for 1 s during
ready or print.
Fuser thermistor 2 detects a
temperature lower than 50C/
122F for 1 s during warming
up.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser
thermistor 2.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Abnormally high fuser


thermistor 3 temperature
Fuser thermistor 3 detects a
temperature higher than
205C/401F for 1 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Shorted fuser
thermistor 3.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Broken fuser
thermistor 3 wire.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Fuser thermostat
triggered.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective fuser IH.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

6250

6320

6330

Broken fuser thermistor 3


wire
Fuser thermistor 3 detects a
temperature lower than 20C/
68F continuously for 1 s

1-4-54

2MN/2N1-1

Code
6600

Contents
Fuser belt rotation error
A belt rotating pulse is not
received for 1 s.
(Engine CPU)

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser belt Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).
sensor.

6610

6710

6720

Fuser release motor error


When the fuser release motor
is driven, the fuser release
sensor does not turn on/off for
5 s.

Fuser IH PWB CPU reset


error
Watch doc timer has been
overflowed.

Fuser IH belt rotation error


A belt rotating pulse is not
received for 2 s.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective drive
transmission system of motor.

Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not,


grease the bushes and gears. Check for
broken gears and replace if any.

Defective fuser
release motor.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser belt Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).
sensor.
Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-55

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

6730

Abnormally high fuser IH


PWB temperature 1
The input detect temperature
is greater than 105C/221 F.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

6740

6750

6760

6770

Abnormally high fuser IH


PWB temperature 2
The input detect temperature
is greater than 105C/221 F.

Fuser IH output over-current error


The output current is greater
than 90A for 10 ms in succession.

Fuser IH input over-current


error
The input current is greater
than 20A(100V/120V),
10A(200V) for 100 ms in succession.

Fuser IH low electric power


error
The preset power is less than
0.6 times of it for 120 ms in
succession.

1-4-56

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

6900

Fuser belt cooling fan error


When the fuser edge fan
motor 1 , 2 is driven, alarm
signal is detected for 5 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Check procedures/
corrective measures
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser edge fan motor 1 and front PWB
(YC26)
Fuser edge fan motor 2 and fuser PWB
(YC2)
Fuser PWB (YC1) and engine PWB (YC26)

6910

6920

6930

6940

Defective fuser
edge fan motor 1
or 2.

Replace the fuser edge fan motor 1 or 2.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Engine software ready error


The device wont engage in
ready state in 60 minutes after
warming-up has began.

Defective engine
software.

Install the engine software.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation(see page 1-5-52).

Fuser front fan motor error


When the fuser front fan
motor is driven, alarm signal is
detected for 5 s continuously.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser front fan motor and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser
front fan motor.

Replace fuser front fan motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
Fuser rear fan motor and fuser PWB (YC2)
Fuser PWB (YC1) and engine PWB (YC26)

Defective fuser
rear fan motor.

Replace fuser rear fan motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
IH fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC11)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

Defective IH fan
motor.

Replace the IH fan motor.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Fuser rear fan motor error


When the fuser rear fan motor
is driven, alarm signal is
detected for 5 s continuously.

IH fan motor error


When the IH fan motor is
driven, the alarm signal is
detected for 5 s continuously.

1-4-57

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

6950

Fuser IH PWB communication error


No response is received in 30
ms since a command is sent
to IHCPU.
A checksum error is detected
10 times in succession.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC26)

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).
Replace the current PWB and check for correct operation.

6960

Current PWB error


Less than 1A is continuously
observed for 5 s.

Defective current
PWB.

6990

Fuser power supply incompatibility


Information wont match
between the engine backup
and the fuser IH PWB.

Differences in set- When this has happened after initialization


tings after initializa- using U201, make settings identical with the
tion
voltages on the IH PWB using U169.

7001

7002

Defective fuser IH
PWB.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Data damage of
EEPROM.

Contact the Service Administrative Division.

Toner motor K error


When the toner motor K is
driven, the pulse sensor is not
detected for 15 times in 200
ms intervals has occurred in
15 times.
During the toner motor is
driven, an event in which
TMOT_LOCK turns to H
(locked) 5 times has occurred
in 15 sets.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner motor K and engine PWB (YC27)

Defective screw
sensor K.

Replace the screw sensor K.

Defective toner
motor K.

Replace the toner motor K.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Toner motor C error


When the toner motor K is
driven, the pulse sensor is not
detected for 15 times in 200
ms intervals has occurred in
15 times.
During the toner motor is
driven, an event in which
TMOT_LOCK turns to H
(locked) 5 times has occurred
in 15 sets.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner motor C and engine PWB (YC27)

Defective screw
sensor C.

Replace the screw sensor C.

Defective toner
motor C.

Replace the toner motor C.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-58

2MN/2N1-1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

7003

Toner motor M error


When the toner motor K is
driven, the pulse sensor is not
detected for 15 times in 200
ms intervals has occurred in
15 times.
During the toner motor is
driven, an event in which
TMOT_LOCK turns to H
(locked) 5 times has occurred
in 15 sets.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner motor M and engine PWB (YC27)

Defective screw
sensor M.

Replace the screw sensor M.

Defective toner
motor M.

Replace the toner motor M.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Toner motor Y error


When the toner motor K is
driven, the pulse sensor is not
detected for 15 times in 200
ms intervals has occurred in
15 times.
During the toner motor is
driven, an event in which
TMOT_LOCK turns to H
(locked) 5 times has occurred
in 15 sets.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner motor Y and engine PWB (YC27)

Defective screw
sensor Y.

Replace the screw sensor Y.

Defective toner
motor Y.

Replace the toner motor Y.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Toner sensor K error


Sensor output value of 60 or
less or 944 or more continued
for 3 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner sensor K and front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective toner
sensor K.

Replace developer unit K (see page 1-5-31).

7004

7101

Failure of locking
Check whether the developer waste slot has
the developer
been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
waste slot at setup. page 1-2-14).
Defective engine
PWB.

1-4-59

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2MN/2N1-1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

7102

Toner sensor C error


Sensor output value of 60 or
less or 944 or more continued
for 3 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner sensor C and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective toner
sensor C.

Replace developer unit C (see page 1-5-31).

Check whether the developer waste slot has


Failure of locking
been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
the developer
waste slot at setup. page 1-2-14).

7103

Toner sensor M error


Sensor output value of 60 or
less or 944 or more continued
for 3 s.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner sensor M and front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective toner
sensor M.

Replace developer unit M (see page 1-531).

Failure of locking
Check whether the developer waste slot has
the developer
been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
waste slot at setup. page 1-2-14).

7104

Toner sensor Y error


Sensor output value of 60 or
less or 944 or more continued
for 3 s.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Toner sensor Y and front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective toner
sensor Y.

Replace developer unit Y (see page 1-5-31).

Check whether the developer waste slot has


Failure of locking
been unlocked and unlock if necessary (see
the developer
waste slot at setup. page 1-2-14).
Defective engine
PWB.

1-4-60

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

2MN/2N1

Code
7200

7210

7221

Contents
Broken outer temperature
sensor 2 wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Short-circuited outer temperature sensor 2


The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Broken LSU thermistor K


wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Outer temperature sensor 2 and front PWB
(YC19)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective outer
temperature sensor 2.

Replace outer temperature sensor 2.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Outer temperature sensor 2 and front PWB
(YC19)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective outer
temperature sensor 2.

Replace outer temperature sensor 2.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-61

2MN/2N1

Code
7222

7223

7224

7231

Contents
Broken LSU thermistor C
wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Broken LSU thermistor M


wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Broken LSU thermistor Y


wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Short-circuited LSU thermistor K


The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-62

2MN/2N1

Code
7232

7233

7234

7241

Contents
Short-circuited LSU thermistor C
The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Short-circuited LSU thermistor M


The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Short-circuited LSU thermistor Y


The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Broken developer thermistor K wire


The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB
(YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB
(YC12)

Defective LSU
thermistor Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor K.

Replace developer unit K (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-63

2MN/2N1

Code
7242

7243

7244

7251

Contents
Broken developer thermistor C wire
The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Broken developer thermistor M wire


The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Broken developer thermistor Y wire


The sensor input sampling is
greater than 230.

Short-circuited developer
thermistor K
The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor C.

Replace developer unit C (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor M.

Replace developer unit M (see page 1-531).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor Y.

Replace developer unit Y (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor K.

Replace developer unit K (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-64

2MN/2N1

Code
7252

7253

7254

7401

7402

Contents
Short-circuited developer
thermistor C
The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Short-circuited developer
thermistor M
The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Short-circuited developer
thermistor Y wire
The sensor input sampling is
less than 69.

Developer unit K type mismatch error


Absence of the developer unit
K is detected.

Developer unit C type mismatch error


Absence of the developer unit
C is detected.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor C.

Replace developer unit C (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor M.

Replace developer unit M (see page 1-531).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer thermistor Y.

Replace developer unit Y (see page 1-5-31).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Different type of
the developer unit
is installed.

Install the correct developer unit.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Different type of
the developer unit
is installed.

Install the correct developer unit.

1-4-65

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

7403

Developer unit M type mismatch error


Absence of the developer unit
M is detected.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Different type of
the developer unit
is installed.

Install the correct developer unit.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Different type of
the developer unit
is installed.

Install the correct developer unit.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
ID sensor 1 and feed PWB 1 (YC10)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
ID sensor 2 and feed PWB 1 (YC10)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

7404

7601

Developer unit Y type mismatch error


Absence of the developer unit
Y is detected.

ID sensor 1 error
An abnormal value is detected
in the input data to ID sensor
1.
Dark potential error
FrontDarkP and FrontDarkS
are greater than 0.80V.
Light potential error
FrontBrightS is smaller than
FrontDarkS.
FrontBrightP is smaller than
FrontDarkP + 0.5V.

7602

ID sensor 2 error
Dark potential error
RearDarkP and RearDarkS
are greater than 0.80V.
Light potential error
RearBrightS is smaller than
RearDarkS.
RearBrightP is smaller than
RearDarkP + 0.5V.

1-4-66

2MN/2N1

Code
7800

Contents
Broken outer temperature
sensor 1 wire

7902

7903

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Outer temperature sensor 1 and front PWB
(YC16)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective outer
temperature sensor 1.

Replace outer temperature sensor 1.

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Drum K EEPROM error


No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum PWB K and front PWB (YC7)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective drum
PWB K.

Replace the drum unit K (see page 1-5-31).

Drum C EEPROM error


No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum PWB C and front PWB (YC12)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective drum
PWB C.

Replace the drum unit C (see page 1-5-31).

Drum M EEPROM error


No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum PWB M and front PWB (YC10)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective drum
PWB M.

Replace the drum unit M (see page 1-5-31).

The device did not respond for


more than 5 ms during
reading, in 5 times.

7901

Causes

1-4-67

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

7904

Drum Y EEPROM error


No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Drum PWB Y and front PWB (YC14)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective drum
PWB Y.

Replace the drum unit Y (see page 1-5-31).

Developer unit K EEPROM


error
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer unit K.

Replace the developer unit K (see page 1-531).

Developer unit C EEPROM


error
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer unit C.

Replace the developer unit C (see page 1-531).

7911

7912

1-4-68

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

7913

Developer unit M EEPROM


error
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer unit M.

Replace the developer unit M (see page 1-531).

Developer unit Y EEPROM


error
No response is issued from
the device in reading/writing
for 5 ms or more and this
problem is repeated five times
successively.
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

Defective developer unit Y.

Replace the developer unit Y (see page 1-531).

Laser scanner unit K


EEPROM error

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
APC PWB K and LSU relay PWB (YC5)
LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB
(YC11)

Defective APC
PWB K.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
APC PWB C and LSU relay PWB (YC10)
LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB
(YC11)

Defective APC
PWB C.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

7914

7941

Mismatch of reading data from


two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

7942

Laser scanner unit C


EEPROM error
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

1-4-69

2MN/2N1

Code
7943

Contents
Laser scanner unit M
EEPROM error
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

7944

Laser scanner unit Y


EEPROM error
Mismatch of reading data from
two locations occurs 8 times
successively.
Mismatch between writing
data and reading data occurs
8 times successively.

8010

Punch motor error 1


When the punch motor is
driven, punch home position
sensor does not turn on within
200 ms.

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
APC PWB M and LSU relay PWB (YC8)
LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB
(YC11)

Defective APC
PWB M.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
APC PWB Y and LSU relay PWB (YC12)
LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB
(YC11)

Defective APC
PWB Y.

Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-19).

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch home position sensor and punch
PWB (YC8)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch home position sensor and punch
PWB (YC8)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Replace the punch home position sensor.


Defective punch
home position sensor.
Defective punch
motor.

Replace the punch motor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB


and check for correct operation.

1-4-70

2MN/2N1-1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

8020

Punch motor error 2


Home position is not obtained
in 3 s after home position is
initialized or in standby.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Defective punch
motor.

Replace the punch motor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB


and check for correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Defective punch
motor.

Replace the punch motor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB


and check for correct operation.

When the mailbox


is installed in both
the main unit and
the finisher.

Uninstall either of the mailboxes.

8030

8040

Punch motor error 3


Home position does not turn
from On to Off in 50 ms after
home position has been initialized.

Abnormal simultaneous
connection of mailbox
When the mailbox is installed
in both the main unit and the
finisher.

1-4-71

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8090

DF paddle motor error


When the DF paddle motor is
driven, DF paddle sensor
does not turn on within 1 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF paddle motor and DF main PWB (YC15)
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
(YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF paddle motor and DF main PWB (YC11)
DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB
(YC20)

Defective DF paddle sensor.

Replace the DF paddle sensor.

Defective DF paddle motor.

Replace the DF paddle motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF eject release motor and DF main PWB
(YC12)
DF bundle discharge sensor and DF main
PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF eject release motor and DF main PWB
(YC10)
DF bundle discharge sensor and DF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective DF bundle discharge sensor.

Replace the DF bundle discharge sensor.

Defective DF eject
release motor.

Replace the DF eject release motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8100

DF eject release motor error


When the DF eject release
motor is driven, DF bundle
discharge sensor does not
turn on within 1 s.

1-4-72

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8110

DF shift motor 1 error


(4000-sheet finisher)
When the DF shift motor 1 is
driven, DF shift sensor 1 does
not turn on within 160 ms.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF shift motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF shift sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC23)

Defective DF shift
sensor 1.

Replace the DF shift sensor 1.

Defective DF shift
motor 1.

Replace the DF shift motor 1.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF shift motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF shift sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC23)

Defective DF shift
sensor 2.

Replace the DF shift sensor 2.

Defective DF shift
motor 2.

Replace the DF shift motor 2.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF shift release motor and DF main PWB
(YC14)
DF shift release sensor and DF main PWB
(YC23)

Defective DF shift
release sensor.

Replace the DF shift release sensor.

Defective DF shift
release motor.

Replace the DF shift release motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8120

8130

DF shift motor 2 error


(4000-sheet finisher)
When the DF shift motor 2 is
driven, DF shift sensor 2 does
not turn on within 160 ms.

DF shift release motor error


(4000-sheet finisher)
When the DF shift release
motor is driven, DF shift
release sensor does not turn
on within 1 s.

1-4-73

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8140

DF tray motor error 1


When the main tray has
started ascending, DF tray
sensor 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn on
within 20 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16)
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main
PWB (YC21, YC13)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main
PWB (YC18)

Defective sensor.

Replace DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper


surface sensor.

Defective DF tray
motor.

Replace the DF tray motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16)
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main
PWB (YC21, YC13)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20)
DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main
PWB (YC18)

Defective sensor.

Replace DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper


surface sensor.

Defective DF tray
motor.

Replace the DF tray motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8150

DF tray motor error 2


When the main tray has
descended, DF tray sensor 1
or DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn off within
5 s.

1-4-74

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

8160

DF tray motor error 3


When the main tray has
descended, DF tray sensor 3
does not turn on within 20 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16)
DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC23)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC20)

Defective DF tray
sensor 3.

Replace DF tray sensor 3.

Defective DF tray
motor.

Replace the DF tray motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC15)
DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC11)
DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective DF side
registration sensor
1.

Replace DF side registration sensor 1.

Defective DF side
registration motor
1.

Replace DF side registration motor 1.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8170

DF side registration motor 1


error 1
When initial operation, DF
side registration sensor 1
does not turn on within 3 s.

1-4-75

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8180

DF side registration motor 1


error 2
JAM6810 is detected twice.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC15)
DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC11)
DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective DF side
registration sensor
1.

Replace DF side registration sensor 1.

Defective DF side
registration motor
1.

Replace DF side registration motor 1.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC15)
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC11)
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective DF side
registration sensor
2.

Replace DF side registration sensor 2.

Defective DF side
registration motor
2.

Replace DF side registration motor 2.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8190

DF side registration motor 2


error 1
When initial operation, DF
side registration sensor 2
does not turn on within 3 s.

1-4-76

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8200

DF side registration motor 2


error 2
JAM6910 is detected twice.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC15)
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF side registration motor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC11)
DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective DF side
registration sensor
2.

Replace DF side registration sensor 2.

Defective DF side
registration motor
2.

Replace DF side registration motor 2.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF slide motor and DF main PWB (YC12)
DF staple sensor and DF main PWB (YC22)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF slide motor and DF main PWB (YC10)
DF staple sensor and DF main PWB (YC20)

Defective DF staple sensor.

Replace the DF staple sensor.

Defective DF slide
motor.

Replace the DF slide motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8210

DF slide motor error


When initial operation, DF staple sensor does not turn on
within 3 s.

1-4-77

2MN/2N1

Code
8230

Contents
DF staple motor error 1
Staple JAM (DF) has been
detected twice in a row. (The
home position could not be
detected in 600 ms since the
motor was driven after jam
was detected twice.)

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC11)

Defective DF staple sensor.

Replace the staple unit.

Defective DF staple motor.

8240

8250

DF staple motor error 2


Staple JAM (DF) has been
detected twice in a row.
(The second JAM detection
condition fullfilled with a lock
detection signal maintained 1
V for 500 ms continuously,
while the stapler motor was
driven.)

DF tray motor error 4


The lock signal of the motor is
detected continuously for
10 s.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC11)

Defective DF staple motor.

Replace the staple unit.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16)
DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC23)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14)
DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC20)

Defective DF tray
motor.

Replace the DF tray motor.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

1-4-78

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8300

Center-folding unit communication error


(4000-sheet finisher)
Communication with the center-folding unit is not possible.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
(YC9)

Defective CF set
sensor.

Replace the CF set sensor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB or the DF main


PWB and check for correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF side registration motor 2 and CF main
PWB (YC10)
CF side registration sensor 2 and CF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective CF side
registration sensor
2.

Replace CF side registration sensor 2.

Defective CF side
registration motor
2.

Replace CF side registration motor 2.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF adjustment motor 1, 2 and CF main PWB
(YC10)
CF adjustment sensor 1, 2 and CF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective CF
adjustment sensor
1, 2.

Replace CF adjustment sensor 1, 2.

Defective CF
adjustment motor
1, 2.

Replace CF adjustment motor 1, 2.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

8310

8320

CF side registration motor 2


error
(4000-sheet finisher)
When initial operation, CF
side registration sensor 2
does not turn on within 1 s.

CF adjustment motor error


(4000-sheet finisher)
When initial operation, CF
adjustment sensor does not
turn on within 2.5 s.

1-4-79

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8330

CF blade motor error


(4000-sheet finisher)
When initial operation, CF
blade sensor does not turn on
within 3 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF blade motor and CF main PWB (YC15)
CF blade sensor and CF main PWB (YC20)

Defective CF blade
sensor.

Replace the CF blade sensor.

Defective CF blade
motor.

Replace the CF blade motor.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF staple unit and CF main PWB (YC13)

Defective CF staple sensor.

Replace the CF staple unit.

8340

8350

8360

CF staple motor error 1


(4000-sheet finisher)
Staple JAM (center-folding
unit) has been detected twice
in a row. (The home position
could not be detected in 600
ms since the motor was driven
after jam was detected twice.)

CF side registration motor 1


error
(4000-sheet finisher)
When initial operation, CF
side registration sensor 1
does not turn on within 1 s.

CF main motor error


(4000-sheet finisher)
During driving the motor, lock
signal is detected for 1 s continuously.

Defective CF staple motor.


Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF side registration motor 1 and CF main
PWB (YC10)
CF side registration sensor 1 and CF main
PWB (YC20)

Defective CF side
registration sensor
1.

Replace CF side registration sensor 1.

Defective CF side
registration motor
1.

Replace CF side registration motor 1.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF main motor and CF main PWB (YC16)

Defective CF main
motor.

Replace the CF main motor.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

1-4-80

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

Check procedures/
corrective measures

8370

CF staple motor error 2


(4000-sheet finisher)
Staple JAM (DF) has been
detected twice in a row.
(The second JAM detection
condition fullfilled with a lock
detection signal maintained 1
V for 1000 ms continuously,
while the stapler motor was
driven.)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF staple unit and CF main PWB (YC13)

Defective CF staple motor.

Replace the CF staple unit.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Punch slide motor error 1


The punch slide sensor wont
turn On when home position
has been moved by 30 mm.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3)
Punch slide sensor and punch PWB (YC6)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3)
Punch slide sensor and punch PWB (YC6)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Defective slide
sensor.

Replace the punch slide sensor.

Defective punch
slide motor.

Replace the punch slide motor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB


and check for correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3)
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Defective punch
slide motor.

Replace the punch slide motor.

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB


and check for correct operation.

8410

8420

Punch slide motor error 2


In detection of paper edges,
the paper edge cannot be
detected in 30 mm move.

1-4-81

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8430

Punch unit communication


error
Communication failed to be
established after the punch
unit was hooked up.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8)

Defective PWB.

Replace the punch PWB or the DF main


PWB and check for correct operation.

Mailbox communication
error
(4000-sheet finisher)
Communication failed to be
established after the mailbox
was hooked up.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
MB main PWB (YC3) and DF main PWB
(YC6)

Defective PWB.

Replace the MB main PWB or the DF main


PWB and check for correct operation.

MB conveying motor error 1


(4000-sheet finisher)
When initial operation, MB
home position sensor does
not turn on within 5 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
MB conveying motor and MB main PWB
(YC5)
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)

8500

8510

Replace the MB home position sensor.


Defective MB
home position sensor.
Defective MB conveying motor.

Replace the MB conveying motor.

Defective MB main
PWB.

Replace the MB main PWB and check for


correct operation.

1-4-82

2MN/2N1

Code

Contents

Causes

8520

MB conveying motor error 2


(4000-sheet finisher)
When standby operation, MB
home position sensor does
not turn off within 1 s.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Check procedures/
corrective measures
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
MB conveying motor and MB main PWB
(YC5)
MB home position sensor and MB main
PWB (YC2)

Replace the MB home position sensor.


Defective MB
home position sensor.

8800

8900

Document finisher main


program error
Document finisher main program error at power up.

Document finisher backup


error
Read and write data does not
match 3 times in succession.

Defective MB conveying motor.

Replace the MB conveying motor.

Defective MB main
PWB.

Replace the MB main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF main PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC18)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF main PWB (YC7) and engine PWB
(YC18)

Defective PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB or the engine


PWB and check for correct operation.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (4000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF main PWB (YC4) and engine PWB
(YC18)

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector (1000-sheet
finisher).

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
DF main PWB (YC7) and engine PWB
(YC18)

Improper installation EEPROM.

Check the installation of the EEPROM and


remedy if necessary.

Defective DF main
PWB.

Replace the DF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

1-4-83

2MN/2N1
Check procedures/
corrective measures

Code

Contents

Causes

8930

Center-folding unit backup


error
(4000-sheet finisher)
Read and write data does not
match 3 times in succession.

Defective connector cable or poor


contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB
(YC9)

Improper installation EEPROM.

Check the installation of the EEPROM and


remedy if necessary.

Defective CF main
PWB.

Replace the CF main PWB and check for


correct operation.

Defective main
PWB.

Turn the main power switch off/on to restart


the machine. If the error is not resolved,
replace main PWB (see page 1-5-47).

Defective operation PWB.

Replace the operation PWB and check for


correct operation.

F000

Communication error
between main PWB and
operation PWB

F010

Main PWB checksum error

Defective main
PWB.

Turn the main power switch off/on to restart


the machine. If the error is not resolved,
replace main PWB (see page 1-5-47).

F040

Communication error
between main PWB and
print engine

Defective main
PWB.

Turn the main power switch off/on to restart


the machine. If the error is not resolved,
replace main PWB (see page 1-5-47).

Defective engine
PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

Defective engine
software.

Install the engine software.

Defective engine
PWB.

Turn the main power switch off/on to restart


the machine. If the error is not resolved,
replace engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

The main power


switch was turned
off before the
machine was shutdown, or a power
failure has
occurred.

Turn on power.
(To switch off power, after confirming the
data lamp is turned off, perform shut-down
on the operation panel, turn power off.)

F050

F278

Print engine ROM checksum error

Power supply in drive system error

1-4-84

2MN/2N1-3

1-4-3 Image formation problems


If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
(3) Image is too
(2) No image
(1) No image
light.
appears (entirely
appears (entirely
black).
white).

See page 1-4-87

See page 1-4-87

(7) Streaks are


(6) Black streaks
are printed vertiprinted horizoncally.
tally.

See page 1-4-89

See page 1-4-89

(10)The leading
edge of the
image is consistently misaligned with the
original.

(11) The leading


edge of the
image is sporadically misaligned with the
original.

See page 1-4-90

See page 1-4-90

(15)Fusing is loose. (16)Image is out of


focus.

See page 1-4-92

See page 1-4-92

See page 1-4-88


(8) Spots are
printed.

See page 1-4-90


(12)Paper is wrinkled.

See page

(4) The background is colored.

(5) White streaks


are printed vertically.

See page 1-4-88


(9) mage is blurred.

See page 1-4-89


I

See page 1-4-90


(13)Offset occurs.

See page 1-4-91

(14)Part of image is
missing.

See page 1-4-91

(17)Image center
does not align
with the original
center.

(18)Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in


the printed objects. Colored spots in
the printed objects.

See page 1-4-92

See page 1-4-92

1-4-85

2MN/2N1-3

(19)Grainy image.

See page 1-4-87

1-4-86

2MN/2N1

(1) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects. Colored spots in the
printed objects.
Print example

Causes
Defective
transfer
bias output.

Defective
developer
bias output.

No LSU
laser is output.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective connector cable


or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB
(YC8)

Defective high voltage PWB


2.

Replace the high voltage PWB 2


(see page 1-5-58).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Defective connector cable


or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC1, 2) and engine
PWB (YC16)
High voltage PWB 1 (YC3, 4) and engine
PWB (YC17)

Defective high voltage PWB


1.

Replace the high voltage PWB 1


(see page 1-5-57).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Defective laser scanner


unit.

Replace the laser scanner unit


(see page 1-5-19).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

(2) No image appears (entirely black).


Print example

Causes
No main
charging.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective connector cable


or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none,
replace the cable.
High voltage PWB 1 (YC1, 2) and engine
PWB (YC16)
High voltage PWB 1 (YC3, 4) and engine
PWB (YC17)

Defective charger roller unit. Replace the charger roller unit


(see page 1-5-34).

The laser is
activated
simultaneously for all
colors.

Defective high voltage PWB


1.

Replace the high voltage PWB 1


(see page 1-5-57).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Defective laser scanner


unit.

Replace the laser scanner unit


(see page 1-5-19).

1-4-87

2MN/2N1-1

(3) Image is too light.


Print example

Causes
Defective
developer
bias output.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective developer unit.

Run maintenance mode U089 to output fourcolor bar PG, check the output status of the
four colors, and replace the developer unit for
any faulty color (see page 1-5-31).

Defective high voltage PWB


1.

Replace the high voltage PWB 1


(see page 1-5-57).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Dirty drum unit.


Defective
transfer
bias output.

Perform the drum refresh.

Defective high voltage PWB


2.

Replace the high voltage PWB 2


(see page 1-5-58).

Defective transfer belt unit.

Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-537).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Defective color calibration.

Perform the tone curve adjustment (Refer to


operation guide).

Insufficient toner.

If the display shows the message requesting


toner replenishment, replace the container.

Insufficient agitation of toner container.

Shake the toner container vertically approximately 10 times.

Paper damp.

Check the paper storage conditions, replace


the paper.

(4) The background is colored.


Print example

Causes
Defective
developer
bias output.

Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective developer unit.

Run maintenance mode U089 to output fourcolor bar PG, check the output status of the
four colors, and replace the developer unit for
any faulty color (see page 1-5-31).

Defective high voltage PWB


1.

Replace the high voltage PWB 1


(see page 1-5-57).

Defective engine PWB.

Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-52).

Defective color calibration.

Perform the calibration (Refer to operation


guide).
Perform the tone curve adjustment (Refer to
operation guide).

1-4-88

2MN/2N1

(5) White streaks are printed vertically.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Foreign object in one of the


developer units.

Run maintenance mode U089 to output four-color bar PG,


check the output status of the four colors, and replace the
developer unit for any faulty color (see page 1-5-31).

Dirty transfer belt.

Clean the transfer belt. Replace the transfer belt unit if it is


extremely dirty (see page 1-5-37).

Dirty transfer roller.

Clean the transfer roller. Replace the transfer roller if it is


extremely dirty (see page 1-5-41).

Dirty LSU slit glasses.

Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

(6) Black streaks are printed vertically.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty or flawed drum.

Perform the drum refresh (Refer to operation guide).


Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Deformed or worn cleaning


blade in the drum unit.

Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Defective transfer belt cleaning.

Clean the cleaning pre brush. Replace the cleaning pre


brush if it is extremely dirty (see page 1-5-39).

Worn transfer belt.

Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-37).

Defective transfer roller.

Replace the transfer roller (see page 1-5-41).

(7) Streaks are printed horizontally.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty or flawed drum.

Perform the drum refresh (Refer to operation guide).


Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Dirty developer section.

Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developer


section.

Poor contact of grounding ter- Check the installation of the drum unit. If it operates incorminal of drum unit.
rectly, replace it (see page 1-5-31).

1-4-89

2MN/2N1-1

(8) Spots are printed.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty or flawed drum.

Perform the drum refresh (Refer to operation guide).


Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Deformed or worn cleaning


blade in the drum unit.

Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Flawed developer roller.

Replace the developer unit (see page 1-5-31).

Defective transfer belt cleaning.

Replace the cleaning pre brush (see page 1-5-39).

Dirty heat roller and press


roller.

Clean the heat roller and press roller.

(9) mage is blurred.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Deformed press roller.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Paper conveying section drive


problem.

Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.

(10) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.
Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Misadjusted leading edge reg- Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge
istration.
registration (see page 1-3-32).
Misadjusted the deflection in
the paper.

Run maintenance mode U051 to readjust the deflection in


the paper (see page 1-3-37).

(11) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original.
Print example

Causes
Paper feed clutch, middle
motor, registration motor or
duplex motor operating incorrectly.

Check procedures/corrective measures


Check the installation of the clutch or motor. If it operates
incorrectly, replace it.

1-4-90

2MN/2N1-1

(12) Paper is wrinkled.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Paper curled.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Paper damp.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Faulty width adjusting cursor


settings at loading paper.

Check how the cursor is set according to the width.(The


gap between the paper and the cursor should be 1mm or
less.)

Unbalanced spring pressures


at the left and right registration
transporting.

Measure the spring pressures.

Defective pressure springs.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

(13) Offset occurs.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Deformed or worn cleaning


blade in the drum unit.

Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Faulty cleaning bias output


voltage

Verify the cleaning bias output.If no voltage is indicated,


replace the high-voltage PWB 2.

Defective transfer belt cleaning.

Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-37).

Defective fuser unit.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Wrong types of paper.

Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper.

(14) Part of image is missing.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Paper damp.

Check the paper storage conditions.

Paper creased.

Replace the paper.

Drum condensation.

Perform the drum refresh (Refer to operation guide).

Dirty or flawed drum.

Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-31).

Dirty transfer belt.

Clean the transfer belt. Replace the transfer belt unit if it is


extremely dirty (see page 1-5-37).

Dirty transfer roller.

Clean the transfer roller. Replace the transfer roller if it is


extremely dirty (see page 1-5-41).

1-4-91

2MN/2N1-3

(15) Fusing is loose.


Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Wrong types of paper.

Check if the paper meets specifications, replace paper.

Faulty media type settings.

Verify the media type accords with the weight of the paper
used.

Flawed heat roller or press


roller.

Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-43).

Defective pressure springs.


Defective fuser IH.

(16) Image is out of focus.


Print example

Causes
Drum condensation.

Check procedures/corrective measures


Perform the drum refresh (Refer to operation guide).

(17) Image center does not align with the original center.
Print example

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

Misadjusted image center


line.

Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of


image printing (see page 1-3-32).

Paper is not placed correctly.

Place the paper correctly.

(18) Unevenly repeating horizontal streaks in the printed objects. Colored spots in
the printed objects.

Print example

Causes
The device is installed in an
altitude greater than 1500 m
sea level.

Check procedures/corrective measures


If the device is installed in an altitude higher than 1500 m
sea level, perform the following.
1. Press maintenance mode U140 and execute AC
Calib and Calibration with the applicable colors (see
page 1-3-73).
2. Execute maintenance mode U140 and select AC
Calib, later Maginification in order to lower the
setting value.
(Initial setting CMY:15, K:12)

1-4-92

2MN/2N1-3

(19) Grainy image.

Print example

Causes
The device is installed in an
altitude greater than 1500 m
sea level.

Check procedures/corrective measures


If the device is installed in an altitude higher than 1500 m
sea level, perform the following.
1. After switching from "0" to "+1" in "Type" (AC
CalibCalibration), select "Execute" and press the
start key (see page 1-3-73).
2. When lighter image density does not improve even if
following the above procedure, change setting of "High
Altitude " in Mode2.

1-4-93

2MN/2N1

1-4-4 Electric problems


If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms.
Problem

Causes

(1)
The machine does
not operate when
the main power
switch is turned on.

1. No electricity at the
power outlet.

Measure the input voltage.

2. The power cord is


not plugged in properly.

Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.

3. Broken power cord.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.

4. Defective main
power switch.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace


the main power switch.

5. Defective power
source PWB.

Replace the power source PWB (see page 1-5-54).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

(2)
MP lift motor does
not operate.

Check procedures/corrective measures

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.

(3)
Registration motor
does not operate.

3. Defective motor.

Replace the MP lift motor.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Registration motor and feed PWB 1 (YC25)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.

(4)
Middle motor does
not operate
.

3. Defective motor.

Replace the registration motor.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor.

Replace the middle motor.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).
1-4-94

2MN/2N1
Problem
(5)
Eject motor does
not operate.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Eject motor and front PWB (YC5)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.

(6)
Duplex motor 1
does not operate.

3. Defective motor.

Replace the eject motor.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Duplex motor 1 and relay PWB (YC16)
Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.

(7)
Duplex motor 2
does not operate.

3. Defective motor.

Replace the duplex motor 1.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Duplex motor 2 and relay PWB (YC7)
Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.

(8)
Toner fan motor 1,
2 does not operate.

3. Defective motor.

Replace the duplex motor 2.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Toner fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the toner fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation


(see page 1-5-52).

1-4-95

2MN/2N1
Problem

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

(9)
Developer fan
motor 1, 2 does not
operate.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Developer fan motor 1, 2 and front PWB (YC6)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the developer fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Exhaust fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the exhaust fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation


(see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
LSU fan motor and front PWB (YC16)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the LSU fan motor.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Belt fan motor 1, 2 and engine PWB (YC19)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the belt fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation


(see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Fuser fan motor 1, 2 and relay PWB (YC16)
Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the fuser fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Eject fan motor 1, 2 and relay PWB (YC11)
Relay PWB (YC13) and feed PWB 1 (YC23)
Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the eject fan motor 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

(10)
Exhaust fan motor
1, 2 does not operate.

(11)
LSU fan motor
does not operate.

(12)
Belt fan motor 1, 2
does not operate.

(13)
Fuser fan motor 1,
2 does not operate.

(14)
Eject fan motor 1,
2 does not operate.

1-4-96

2MN/2N1
Problem
(15)
Eject front fan
motor does not
operate.

(16)
Eject rear fan
motor does not
operate.

(17)
Power source fan
motor does not
operate.

(18)
Controller fan
motor does not
operate.

(19)
Paper feed clutch
1, 2 does not operate.

(20)
Assist clutch 1, 2
does not operate.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Eject front fan motor and front PWB (YC4)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the eject front fan motor.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Eject rear fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC19)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the eject rear fan motor.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Power source fan motor and engine PWB (YC22)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the power source fan motor.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation


(see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Controller fan motor and main PWB (YC23)

2. Defective motor.

Replace the controller fan motor.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation


(see page 1-5-47).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper feed clutch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC4)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective clutch.

Replace the paper feed clutch 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Assist clutch 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC10)
Assist clutch 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC12)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective clutch.

Replace the assist clutch 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-97

2MN/2N1-3
Problem
(21)
Paper conveying
clutch does not
operate.

(22)
MP paper feed
clutch does not
operate.

(23)
Feedshift solenoid
does not operate.

(24)
Cleaning solenoid
does not operate.

(25)
The message
requesting paper to
be loaded is shown
when paper is
present on the cassette.

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper conveying clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC5)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective clutch.

Replace the paper conveying clutch.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
MP paper feed clutch and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Defective clutch.

Replace the MP paper feed clutch.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Feedshift and front PWB (YC5)
Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7)

2. Defective solenoid.

Replace the feedshift solenoid 1 or 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the front PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Cleaning solenoid and feed PWB 1 (YC10)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective solenoid.

Replace the cleaning solenoid.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper sensor 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Deformed actuator.

Check visually and replace if necessary.

3. Defective sensor.

Replace the paper sensor 1 or 2.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1-4-98

2MN/2N1
Problem

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

(26)
The message
requesting paper to
be loaded is shown
when paper is
present on the MP
tray.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
MP paper sensor and relay PWB (YC3)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Deformed actuator.

Check visually and replace if necessary.

3. Defective sensor.

Replace the MP paper sensor.

4. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper length switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Paper width switch 1, 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the paper length switch 1, 2 or paper width switch


1, 2.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the feed PWB 2 or engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
MP paper length switch and relay PWB (YC2)
MP paper width switch and relay PWB (YC2)
Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the MP paper length switch or MP paper width


switch.

3. Defective PWB.

Replace the relay PWB, feed PWB 1 or engine PWB and


check for correct operation (see page 1-5-52).

1. A piece of paper torn


from paper is caught
around feed sensor
1, 2, MP feed sensor,
middle sensor, paper
conveying sensor,
registration sensor,
loop sensor, fuser
eject sensor, duplex
sensor 1, 2, eject full
sensor or switchback sensor.

Check visually and remove it, if any.

2. Defective sensor.

Replace the feed sensor 1, 2, MP feed sensor, middle sensor, paper conveying sensor, registration sensor, loop sensor, fuser eject sensor, duplex sensor 1, 2, eject full sensor
or switchback sensor.

(27)
The size of paper
on the cassette is
not displayed correctly.

(28)
The size of paper
on the MP tray is
not displayed correctly.

(29)
A paper jam in the
paper feed, paper
conveying or eject
section is indicated when the
main power switch
is turned on.

1-4-99

2MN/2N1
Problem

Causes

Check procedures/corrective measures

(30)
A message indicating cover open is
displayed when the
front cover is
closed.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Front cover switch and front PWB (YC16)
Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the front cover switch.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 (YC15)
Feed PWB 1 (YC4) and power source PWB (YC12)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the paper conveying unit switch.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Duplex cover switch and relay PWB (YC7)
Relay PWB (YC1) and feed PWB 1 (YC14)
Feed PWB 1 (YC1)and engine PWB (YC6)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the duplex cover switch.

1. Defective connector
cable or poor contact in the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the


connector cable. If none, replace the cable.
Paper conveying cover switch and feed PWB 2 (YC6)
Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and power source PWB (YC4)

2. Defective switch.

Replace the paper conveying cover switch.

(31)
A message indicating unit open is displayed when the
paper conveying
unit is closed.
(32)
A message indicating cover open is
displayed when the
duplex cover is
closed.
(33)
A message indicating cover open is
displayed when the
paper conveying
cover is closed.

1-4-100

2MN/2N1

1-4-5 Mechanical problems


If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
Problem
(1)
No primary paper
feed.

Causes/check procedures

Corrective measures

Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
ers are dirty with paper powder.
Forwarding pulley
Paper feed pulley
MP paper feed pulley
Check if the following rollers is deformed. Check visually and replace any
deformed (see page 1-5-7, 1-5-14.
Forwarding pulley
Paper feed pulley
MP paper feed pulley
Defective paper feed clutch 1, 2 or MP
paper feed clutch installation.

(2)
No secondary paper
feed.

Check visually and remedy if necessary.

Check if the surfaces of the following roll- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
ers are dirty with paper powder.
Right registration roller
Left registration roller
Defective registration motor installation.
(45 ppm/55 ppm model)
Defective registration clutch installation.
(30 ppm/35 ppm model)

Check visually and remedy if necessary.

(3)
Skewed paper feed.

Paper width guide in a cassette installed


incorrectly.

Check the paper width guide visually


and remedy or replace if necessary.

(4)
Multiple sheets of
paper are fed.

Check if the paper is excessively curled.

Change the paper.

Paper is loaded incorrectly.

Load the paper correctly.

Check if the separation pulley is worn.

Replace the separation pulley if it is


worn (see page 1-5-7, 1-5-14).

Check if the paper is excessively curled.

Change the paper.

Check if the contact between the right


and left registration rollers is correct.

Check visually and remedy if necessary.

Check if the heat roller or press roller is


extremely dirty or deformed.

Check visually and replace the fuser


unit (see page 1-5-43).

(5)
Paper jams.

(6)
Check if the drum unit or developer unit
Toner drops on the
is extremely dirty.
paper conveying path.
(7)
Abnormal noise is
heard.

Check if the rollers, pulleys and gears


operate smoothly.
Check if the following clutches are
installed correctly.
Paper feed clutch 1, 2
Assist clutch 1, 2
Paper conveying clutch
MP paper feed clutch

1-4-101

Clean the drum unit or developer unit.

Grease the bushes and gears.

2MN/2N1

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-4-102

2MN/2N1-1

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly


1-5 Assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, after confirming the data lamp is turned off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the power receptacle(see page 1-2-19).
When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands.
The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.

(2) Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20C/-4F and 40C/104F and at a relative humidity not
higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

(3) Toner
Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Avoid direct light and high humidity.

1-5-1

2MN/2N1

(4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera toner container


As a means of brand protection, the Kyocera toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable
visual validation. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this.
Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container. Through
each window of the validation viewer, the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows:
A black-colored band when seen through the left side window (

A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window (

The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera branded toner container, otherwise, it is a
counterfeit.
See through the left window
( marking)

See through the right window


( marking)
Validation viewer

Validation viewer

Brand
protection
seal

Brand
protection
seal

A black-colored band when


seen through the left side window

A shiny or gold-colored band when


seen through the right side window

Figure 1-5-1
The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.

Incision
Cut

Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2

2MN/2N1

1-5-2 Paper feed section


(1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit
Procedure
Detaching remove the primary paper feed
unit
1. Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out
completely.
2. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
3. Open the right lower cover.
4. Remove the strap and then remove the
right lower cover.

Strap

Paper conveying
unit

Right lower cover

Figure 1-5-3

1-5-3

2MN/2N1-1

5. Remove the rear upper cover and the


rear lower cover (see page 1-5-59).
6. Remove three screws B and then
remove the right lower rear cover.

Right lower
rear cover
Screws
Figure 1-5-4

7. Open the handle cover.


8. Remove three screws.
9. Unhook the hook and then remove the
right lower front cover.

Right lower
front cover

Hook
Screws

Right lower
front cover
Screw

Handle cover

Figure 1-5-5

1-5-4

2MN/2N1

10. Remove two connectors.

Connector
Connector

Figure 1-5-6
11. Remove two screws each from primary
paper feed unit.
12. Remove the primary paper feed unit.

Primary paper
feed unit

Screws

Primary paper
feed unit

Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-5-7

1-5-5

2MN/2N1-3

13. Check or replace the primary paper


feed unit and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refit the primary paper feed unit,
you must confirm the inserted pin to the
driving coupler.
14. When the primary paper feed unit is
replaced, perform maintenance mode
U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see
page 1-3-134).
Execute Maintenance Counter - Cassette - Counter Clear of U251 (Maintenance counter limits/clear).(see page 13-105)

Pin
Driving coupler
Primary paper
feed unit

Primary paper
feed unit

Primary paper
feed unit

Figure 1-5-8

1-5-6

2MN/2N1-3

(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation
pulley.
Procedure
1. Pull the cassette 1 completely.
2. Pull up the cassette.

Cassette

Figure 1-5-9

3. Remove the cassette 2 in the same


manner as above.

Cassette 2
Figure 1-5-10

1-5-7

2MN/2N1-3

4. Remove the hook and remove the forward roller from the axle.
5. Remove the hook and remove the feed
roller from the axle.

Hook

Paper feed
pulley
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-5-11

6. Unhook the two hooks and then


remove the cover.

Hooks

Cover

Figure 1-5-12
1-5-8

2MN/2N1-3

7. Remove the hook and remove the separation roller from the axle.
*: Confirm that the nipping between the
feed roller and separation roller is
released.
8. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley,
paper feed pulley and separation pulley.
9. Refit the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley and separation pulley to the primary paper feed unit.
*: Make sure that the collars are properly
installed by checking its color.
Forwarding pulley (Collar is white.)
Paper feed pulley (Collar is white.)
Sparation pulley (Collar is black.)
10. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed
pulley or separation pulley is replaced,
perform maintenance mode U903
(clearing the jam counter) (see page 13-134).
Execute Maintenance Counter - Cassette
- Counter Clear of U251 (Maintenance
counter limits/clear) (see page 1-3-105).

Hook

Separation pulley

Figure 1-5-13

1-5-9

2MN/2N1

(3) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit


Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
2. Remove screw.
3. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
right cover.
4. Remove the right front cover.
(see page 1-5-35)
5. Remove two screws and then remove
the right middle cover.

Right middle cover


Conveying rear
cover

Hooks

Screw
middle
Screws Right
cover

Paper conveying unit

Figure 1-5-14

1-5-10

2MN/2N1-1

6. Open the MP tray.


7. Remove four screws.

Screw

Screw

Paper
conveying unit

MP tray
Figure 1-5-15

Right cover

8. Unhook eight hooks and then remove


the right cover and DU cover assembly.

Hooks
Hook

Hooks

DU cover
assembly
Figure 1-5-16

1-5-11

Right cover

2MN/2N1

9. Remove two connectors.


10. Release the wire saddle.
11. Remove the wire saddle.
*: To refit the wire saddle, be sure to fit in
the positioning hole that was previously
used.

Connector

Wire
saddle

Connector

Installation
hole

Wire
saddle

Figure 1-5-17
12. Remove the MP tray.
*: When refitting the MP tray, insert it in
the MP tray paper feed unit side by
turning the lift arm.

MP tray

Lift arm

MP tray paper feed unit


Figure 1-5-18

1-5-12

MP tray

2MN/2N1

13. Remove two screws.


14. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit.

*: To reinstall the MP tray feed unit, align it


with the opening in the front left bottom
frame of the feed unit, install the MP
tray feed unit, and raise it so that it is
correctly seated.

Screw

MP tray
paper feed unit
Screw

MP tray
paper feed unit
Figure 1-5-19

1-5-13

2MN/2N1

(4) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP
separation pulley
Procedure
1. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit
(see page 1-5-10).

DU lower guide

Detaching forwarding pulley and paper feed


pulley
2. Unhook three hooks and then remove
the Du lower guide.
*: Remove the DU lower guide easy by
bending the top base that the hook is
hooking because the hook of the DU
lower guide lacks flexibility.

Hooks

Hook

MP tray
paper feed unit
Top base

Figure 1-5-20
3. Remove the stop ring A and then slide
the driving joint.
4. Slide the bush A.
5. Remove the stop ring B and then
remove the bush B.

Stop ring A

Driving joint
Bush A

Bush B
Stop ring B
Figure 1-5-21
1-5-14

2MN/2N1

6. Unhook the hook of the feed holder


assembly.
7. Remove the spring and the feed holder
assembly from the top base.

Spring
Hook
Feed holder assembly

Top base

Top base

Spring
Hook

Figure 1-5-22
8. Remove two stop rings.
9. Pull the feed MPF shaft out.
10. Remove two bushes, one way gear
Z30R and MP paper feed pulley.
*: To refit the one-way gear Z30R, mount
the gear in the correct direction as
shown.

Oneway gear
Z30R

MP paper feed pulley


Oneway gear
Z30R

Oneway
clutch

Stop ring

Bush

Bush
Stop ring
Feed MFP shaft

Figure 1-5-23
1-5-15

2MN/2N1

11. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the


axis holes of feed MPF holder.
12. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP forwarding pulley out from the pickup MFP
shaft.

Pickup MFP shaft


MP forwarding pulley
Pickup gear Z30R
Feed gear Z26H

Axis hole

Feed MPF holder


Axis hole
Figure 1-5-24

Detaching the MP separation pulley


13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
middle guide.

Hook

Hook

Middle guide

Figure 1-5-25

1-5-16

2MN/2N1-1

14. Remove the spring.


15. Release the uniting of joint by sliding
the retard holder assembly.

Joint
Retard holder
assembly

Spring

Figure 1-5-26

16. Remove the retard holder assembly by


turning it as shown.

Retard holder
assembly

Figure 1-5-27

1-5-17

2MN/2N1-1

17. Remove two stop rings.


18. Remove two bushes.
19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then
remove the torque limiter and the MP
separation pulley.
20. Clean or replace the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley.
21. Refit the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley and MP separation
pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit.
22. When the MP forwarding pulley, MP
paper feed pulley or MP separation pulley is replaced, perform maintenance
mode U903 (clearing the jam counter)
(see page 1-3-134).

Retard MPF shaft

Torque limiter
MP separation
pulley

Bush

Stop ring

Retard holder
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-28

1-5-18

2MN/2N1

1-5-3 Optical section


(1) Detaching and refitting the LSU
Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see
page 1-5-35).
2. Remove the left upper cover (see page
1-5-47).
3. Remove the toner filter.
4. Remove the left filter cover and the left
filter.
5. Remove two transfer belt filters.
6. Remove the left cover lid.
7. Open the front cover and remove screw
A.
8. Remove four screws B and then
remove the left cover.

Transfer belt filters

Screw A

Toner filter

Screws

Screw B
Left cover
Left cover lid
Left filter cover
Left filter
Figure 1-5-29

1-5-19

2MN/2N1

9. Remove four screws and then remove


the LSU retainer.

Screws

LSU retainer
Screws

Figure 1-5-30
10. Remove two screws and then remove
the middle feed plate and middle feed
plate B.
11. Remove two LSU retainer pins and two
springs.

Springs
LSU retainer pins

Screw
Middle feed plate B
Screw
Middle feed plate
Figure 1-5-31
1-5-20

2MN/2N1

12. Pull the LSU out a little.


13. Remove the following connector from
the LSU.
30 ppm model/35 ppm model:
FFC connector with a lock: 1pcs
Connector: 2pcs
45 ppm model/55 ppm model:
FFC connector with a lock: 2pcs
Connector: 2pcs

LSU

*: When remove the FFC from the FFC


connector with a lock, removing it after
release the lock by lifting the lock lever
up.

Connectors
FFC connector
with a lock
FFC
FFC connector
with a lock
FFC
Figure 1-5-32
14. Pull the LSU out from the body of the
machine.

LSU
Figure 1-5-33

1-5-21

2MN/2N1

15. Remove seven screws and then


remove the LSU mount lid.

Screws

Screws

Screws

LSU mount lid


Screw

Figure 1-5-34

16. Remove the screw.


17. Unhook four hooks and then remove
the LSU relay PWB cover.

Screw

Hooks
LSU relay PWB cover
Hooks
Figure 1-5-35

1-5-22

2MN/2N1

18. Remove all the connectors and the FFC


connectors with a lock.
*: When remove the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, removing it after
release the lock by lifting the lock lever
up.
19. Remove the electric wire from the electric wire support portion.
20. Remove the FFC from the FFC support
potion.

FFC support portions


Electric wire
support portion

FFC

FFC connector
with a lock

Connector

Figure 1-5-36

1-5-23

2MN/2N1-1

21. Remove the LSU retainer pins and the


springs.
22. Remove two screws each and then
remove the LSU front holder.

Screw

Spring
LSU retainer pin

LSU front holder


Screw

Figure 1-5-37

1-5-24

2MN/2N1

23. Wrap an antistatic discharging belt


around your wrist to prevent damage to
the LSU.
*: Do not touch terminals and FFC contacts in the APC PWB of the LSU.
24. Remove four LSUs, following the precautions and instructions below.
(1) Lift the far end of the LSU.
(2) Unhook the protrusions at the front
of the LSU.
*: Be sure to handle the front and rear
handholds when handling the LSU.
*: Do not get the LSU in direct contact
with the holding frame subsequently
applying shocks to the polygon motor
inside.

LSU (rear side)

LSU (front side)


Support
portions

Support portions
LSU(Y)

25. Check or replace the LSU and refit all


the removed parts.
*: When reconnecting FFCs, be sure to
insert the FFC all the way in with the
FFC connector.This is to avoid a
lengthy servicing due to a possible error
which could cause re-disassembly and
-assembly.

LSU(Y)
LSU(C)
LSU(M)
LSU(K)

26. When replacing the new LSU, proceed


as follows:
1)Performs maintenance mode U469
(Color registration correction) (see
page 1-3-126).
2)Performs maintenance mode U119
(Setting the drum) (see page 1-3-65).
3)Performs maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).

LSU support frame


LSU (rear side)

LSU (front side)

(1)

(2)

Bos

LSU(C)
LSU(M)
LSU(K)

Figure 1-5-38
1-5-25

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Color registration adjustment


Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit.
Procedure
1. Press the menu key.
2. Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
3. Select [Adjustment/Maintenance], [Color Registration], [Detail], [Chart printing] and then press the OK
key. In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] ([Left select key]). A chart is printed.
4. Select [Adjustment/Maintenance], [Color Registration], [Detail], [Magenta registration] and then press the
OK key.
5. Read figures at H-1 to 7 and V-3 of the reference chart and enter the figure marked at the scale which
the BK fine line is in line with the magenta fine lines, using the up/down keys.
6. Press OK key. A preset value is saved.
7. Select [Cyan registration] or [Yellow registration] and then repeat steps 3 through 5.

(example)
When a red bar exactly coincides
with B, enter B as a value.

Chart for adjustment


Figure 1-5-39

8. Output the chart by Procedure 2 again.


9. Verify that each scale is within the
range of 1to A. If they are within the
range, proceed to step 9.
If scales are out of range, repeat steps
3 through 6.

The scale must be corresponding


within the range of "A" from "1".

Figure 1-5-40

1-5-26

2MN/2N1

10. Verify that scales of MV-1,2,4,5/CV1,2,4,5/YV-1,2,4,5 coincide within the


range of 1 to A.
If they are within the range, adjustment
is complete.
If they are out of range, proceed to step
10.

Chart for adjustment


Figure 1-5-41

If manual color registration has failed:


11. If the balance between V-1 and V-5 is more than 2 scales (sample 1) or less than -2 scales (sample 2),
perform the following steps:

Sample 1

V-1

Sample 2

V-2

V-3

V-4

V-5

V-1
Figure 1-5-42

1-5-27

V-2

V-3

V-4

V-5

2MN/2N1

12. Open the front cover and then pull out the waste toner box tray (see page 1-5-29).
13. Rotate the adjustment knob using a 5 mm hex wrench.
Direction of rotation
(V-1 - V-5) >= 2 scales (sample 1): rotate counterclockwise.
(V-1 - V-5) <= -2 scales (sample 2): rotate clockwise.
Number of rotation
(V-1- V-5) x 4 clicks
14. Refit the waste toner box tray as before and then close the front cover.
15. Perform shut-down on the operation panel, turn power off (see page p.1-2-19).
Correction automatically starts.
16. Print a reference chart and verify the result.
Caution
After the adjustment for the abgle of the mirror has been made, run the maintenance mode U464
(Calibration). (see page 1-3-118)

Hexagon socket

Allen wrench

Hexagon socket

Hexagon socket

Figure 1-5-43

1-5-28

Hexagon socket

2MN/2N1-3

1-5-4 Image formation section


(1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit
Procedure
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove all toner container each.
3. Remove the waste toner box tray by lifting upwards and from the right side.

Waste toner
box tray

1
2

Figure 1-5-44

4. Remove the screw and then open the


connector cover.
5. Remove the connector.
*: Remove the seal behind that connector
is recessed.
6. Remove four fixed screws of inner unit.
*: Remove the seal behind that the screwB is recessed.
7. Replace the seal in position.

Seal

Inner unit

Connector
Screw
Connector
cover
Inner unit

Seal

Screw A
Screw A

Screw B
Screw A

1-5-29

2MN/2N1
Figure 1-5-45
8. Release the lock by pushing the fixed
levers at the right and left of inner unit.
9. Remove the inner unit.

Inner unit

Fixed lever

Figure 1-5-46

1-5-30

2MN/2N1

(2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit
Detaching example: Developer unit Y and Drum unit Y
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-543).
2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see
page 1-5-37).
3. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-529).
4. Close the toner supply shutter.
5. Remove two connectors.

Connectors

Toner supply shutter

Developer unit
Figure 1-5-47
6. Pull out as one body the developer unit
and the drum unit.
(The developer unit becomes basic and
the drum units are combined.)
7. Detach the developer unit while supporting bottom.

Developer unit

Drum unit

Drum unit

Developer unit
Figure 1-5-48

1-5-31

2MN/2N1-3

8. Remove the drum unit from the developer unit.

Drum unit

Developer unit

Figure 1-5-49
*: When a new development unit is
installed, the developing roller protective sheet must be removed.

Developer roller
protection seat

Figure 1-5-50
9. Check or replace the drum unit and the
developer unit and refit all the removed
parts.
*: To install the drum unit onto the developer unit, insert the front end first, then
the rear end of the unit.

Drum unit

Developer unit

Figure 1-5-51
1-5-32

2MN/2N1
10. When replacing the new developer unit, proceed as follows:
1) Performs maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) (see page 1-3-73).
2)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
3)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-126).
11. When replacing the new drum unit, proceed as follows:
1) Performs maintenance mode U119 (drum setup) (see page 1-3-65).
2) Performs maintenance mode U930 (checking/clearing the charger roller count) and checking the
counter value (see page 1-3-145).
3) Performs maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) (see page 1-3-73).
4)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
5)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-126).
6)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).

1-5-33

2MN/2N1

(3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit


Detaching example: Charger roller unit Y
Procedure
1. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-529).
2. Pull out the charger roller unit by picking and releasing the MC lock lever.
3. Check or replace the charger roller unit
and refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the charger roller unit,
that must hook the hook certain by
operating the MC lock lever after inserting the charger roller unit until bumping.
4. When replacing the new charger roller
unit, proceed as follows:
Performs maintenance mode U930
(clearing the charger roller count) (see
page 1-3-145).

Charger roller unit

Hook

MC lock lever

Figure 1-5-52

1-5-34

2MN/2N1

1-5-5 Transfer section


(1) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit
Procedure
1. Pull the paper conveying unit out.
2. Remove four screws.
3. Unhook three hooks and then remove
the right front cover.

Paper conveying unit


Right front cover
Screws

Hook
1

2
Hook

Right front
cover
Screws

Figure 1-5-53

4. Unhook two hooks and then remove the


conveying inner cover from the paper
conveying unit.

Paper
conveying unit

Hook

Hook
Conveying inner cover

Figure 1-5-54
1-5-35

Hook

2MN/2N1

5. Remove four screws.


6. Remove the paper conveying unit by
lifting upward.

Paper conveying unit

Screws

Screws

Paper
conveying
unit

Figure 1-5-55

1-5-36

2MN/2N1

(2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit


Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see
page 1-5-35).
2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-543).
3. Remove the connector.

Connector
Figure 1-5-56

4. Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up


both ends.

Transfer belt unit

Figure 1-5-57

1-5-37

2MN/2N1

5. Remove the transfer belt unit.


6. Check or replace the transfer belt unit
and refit all the removed parts.

Transfer belt unit


*: When refitting the new transfer belt
unit, set the projected part aligned with
the rail entrance.
7. When replacing the new transfer belt
unit, proceed as follows:
1) Performs maintenance mode U469
(Transfer belt speed correction) (see
page 1-3-126).
2)Performs maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
3)Performs maintenance mode U469
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-126).

Transfer belt unit

Rail entrance
Projection
part

Rail entrance

Projection
part
Transfer belt unit

Transfer belt unit


Figure 1-5-58

1-5-38

2MN/2N1

(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning pre brush


Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt unit (see page
1-5-37).
2. Unhook the front and back springs from
the hooks.

Spring

Spring

Transfer
belt unit

Figure 1-5-59

3. Unhook two hooks and then remove the


cleaning cover.

Hook

Hook

Cleaning cover

Figure 1-5-60
1-5-39

2MN/2N1

4. Remove the cleaning pre brush by turning it as shown.


5. Check or replace the cleaning pre brush
and refit all the removed parts.

Cleaning pre brush

2
1

Figure 1-5-61

*: Hook the springs back in place onto the


cleaning pre brush when installing.

Spring
Spring

Figure 1-5-62

1-5-40

2MN/2N1

(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller


Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.

Paper conveying
unit
Figure 1-5-63
2. Loosen two fixed screws on the TC
guide.
3. Remove the stop ring.
4. Unhook the hook and remove the TC
gear Z29R.
5. Remove two bearings.
6. Remove the transfer roller.

Transfer roller (shaft)


Bearing

Hook

TC gear Z29R

Bearing
Stop ring

Transfer roller (shaft)

Transfer roller

TC guide

Screw
TC guide
TC guide

Screw

Figure 1-5-64

1-5-41

2MN/2N1

7. Check or replace the transfer roller and


refit all the removed parts.
*: When refitting the transfer roller, confirm that the terminal of the ground plate
is in contact with the ground plate in the
frame.
8. When replacing the new transfer roller,
proceed as follows:
1) Performs maintenance mode U127
(clearing the transfer counter) (see
page 1-3-67).
2)Performs maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
3)Performs maintenance mode U469
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-126).

Ground plate

Ground plate
(terminal)
Figure 1-5-65

1-5-42

Ground plate
(frame)

2MN/2N1

1-5-6 Fuser section


(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit
Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the screw and then the fuser
wire cover.
3. Remove two connectors

Connector

Connector

Fuser wire cover


Screw

Paper conveying
unit
Figure 1-5-66

1-5-43

2MN/2N1-1

4. Remove four screws (M4 10) and


then remove the fuser unit.
5. Check or replace the fuser unit and refit
all the removed parts.

Fuser unit
Screws
(M410)

6. When replacing the new fuser unit, proceed as follows:


1) Performs maintenance mode U167
(clearing the fuser count) (see page
1-3-85).
2)Performs maintenance mode U464
(Calibration) (see page 1-3-118).
3)Performs maintenance mode U469
(Auto color registration correction)
(see page 1-3-126).

Screws
(M410)

Figure 1-5-67

1-5-44

2MN/2N1-1

(2) Detaching and refitting fuser IH unit


Procedure
1. Remove the left upper cover.
2. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-59).
3. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-543).
4. Remove the right upper cover (see
page 1-5-59).
5. Remove the tray rear cover.
6. Remove the right middle rear cover
(see page 1-5-59).
7. Remove four screws and then remove
the fuser IH PWB cover (see page 1-559).
8. Remove the IH electric wire cover (see
page 1-5-59).
9. Remove the top cover.
10. Remove the wire holder.
11. Release the wire saddle.
12. Remove two connectors from the fuser
IH PWB according to the following
notes.
*: Confirm the power plug is removed
from the outlet without fail when you
remove the connector because a high
current is supplied to fuser IH unit by
this connector.
*: Confirm the connected connector was
surely locked when you connect this
connector again.

Fuser IH PWB

Wire holder

Wire saddle

Connector

Fuser IH PWB

Figure 1-5-68

1-5-45

2MN/2N1-1

13. Remove two screws.


14. Unhook the hook by lifting up the fuser
IH unit a little and then remove it.

Fuser IH unit
Screw

Screw

Hook

Hook

Fuser IH unit

Figure 1-5-69

1-5-46

2MN/2N1

1-5-7 PWBs
(1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB
Procedure
1. Remove two screws.
2. Unhook three hooks and then remove
the left upper cover.
3. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-59).

Hooks

Hook

Left upper cover

Screws
Left upper cover

Figure 1-5-70

4. Release five wire saddles on the controller box.

Wire saddles

Wire saddles

Controller box

Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-71

1-5-47

2MN/2N1-1

5. Remove the following connectors that


connected to the main PWB from the
outside of the control box.
YC24
YC3 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC21 (WH)
YC12

Controller box
*: When removing the FFC from the FFC
connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever
(see figure a and b).
*: When connecting an FFC furnished
with the protrusions at both ends,
address the side with a blue-colored
tape towards the locking lever, insert
the FFC into the connector until the protrusions are recessed, and raise the
lock lever to lock the FFC
(see figure c).

Main PWB
YC16

YC21

YC22
YC12

12

25
50

13

26

10

14

YC5

1
11
B1 B4
11 12

YC20

YC7

B2 B3

1 2

YC23

YS4

3
1

YS2

YC27
YC32

U6

YC1

YC24
1

7
15

YC9

YC8

YC3

41

YC18
1

40

YC14

48

Main PWB

YS1

U1

FFC connector with a lock

[State of lock]

[Lock release/FFC detaching]


FFC

2
Lock lever

Lock lever

[State of lock]

[Lock release/FFC detaching]

Lock lever

Lock lever

FFC

[FFC connection/Lock]

Lock lever

Projection

2
1

Projection

FFC
Figure 1-5-72

1-5-48

2MN/2N1-1

6. Remove five screws.


7. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
controller box.

Controller box
Hook
Hook

Screws

Screws

Screw

Figure 1-5-73

Main PWB
8. Remove the following connectors that
connected to the main PWB.
YC23
YC27
YC8 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC9
YC1 [BLACK] (with a lock)

YC16
2

YC12

12

25
50

13

26

11 12

YC7
1 2

*: When removing the FFC from the FFC


connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever (see page 1-5-48)

YC23

YS4

3
1

YC27
U1

YC32
8

U6
YC1

YC24
15
1

YC8

YC9
1

YC3

41

7
40

48

FFC connector with a lock


Main PWB

Controller box
Figure 1-5-74
1-5-49

2MN/2N1

9. Release the wire saddle.


10. Remove two wire holders.
11. Remove two screws.
12. Remove the fan motor holder.

Wire holder

Wire holder

Fan mootor holder

Screws

Controller box
Wire saddle
Figure 1-5-75

13. Remove five screws from the main


PWB.

Screws

Main PWB
Screws

Screw

Main PWB

Figure 1-5-76

1-5-50

2MN/2N1

14. Remove the main PWB by releasing the


projection of ground plate in the network connector.
15. Check or replace the main PWB and
refit all the removed parts.

Network connector

*: When replacing the main PWB, remove


the following devices from the main
PWB and then reattach it to the new
main PWB. (see page 1-6-3)
EEPROM (YC14)
Code DIMM (YS4)
Memory DDR (YS1)

Projections
for ground
Network connector
Main PWB

*: Exchange EEPROM (YC14) and code


DIMM (YC4) by the set.

Main PWB
YC16
YC22

YC21

YC12
YC5

YC7

YS4

YC23

Code DIMM
(YS4)
YS2

YC27

Memory
DDR
(YS1)

YC20

YS1

YC32
YC1

YC24
YC9

YC3

YC14

YC8

Figure 1-5-77

1-5-51

YC18

EEPROM
(YC14)

2MN/2N1

(2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB

Engine PWB

FFC connector with a lock


1

YC7

B16

YC6

24
1

YC27
A20

A16

YC3

B1

A1

1 YC1
13
12
B1

10

64

YC4

YC13

YC5

50

YC10

YC26

A1

B20

40

YC25
A1
4

1
12 6

1
2 1
20

YC49

U1

YC23 YC22
YC21

12

YC8

YC20

1 B19

A1

YC46 40

YC19

U8

64

YC12

60

YC15

22
1
28

Engine PWB

YC16

12
14
7
15

B1

YC11

YC17 11

A19

1-5-52

B1

11

12

YC24

U4

YC9

A10

B10

22

*: When removing the FFC from the FFC


connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever (see page 1-5-48)
*: When removing the FFC from the YC46, remove the FFC after released by
lifting up the lock lever.
*: When connecting an FFC furnished
with the protrusions at both ends,
address the side with a blue-colored
tape towards the locking lever, insert
the FFC into the connector until the protrusions are recessed, and raise the
lock lever to lock the FFC
(see page 1-5-48)

1 50

YC2

50

Procedure
1. Remove the controller box (see page 15-47).
2. Remove twenty two connectors of following from the engine PWB.
YC1
YC2
YC3
YC4
YC5 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC6 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC7 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC10 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC26
YC9
YC8
YC46 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC11 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC12 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC15
YC16
YC18
YC17
YC19
YC20
YC21
YC22

YC18

2MN/2N1
Figure 1-5-78
3. Remove six screws.
4. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
engine PWB.
5. Check or replace the engine PWB and
refit all the removed parts.

Hook

Hook
Engine PWB

Engine PWB

*: When replacing the engine PWB,


remove the EEPROM (U100) from the
engine PWB and then reattach it to the
new engine PWB.

Screws
Screws

Engine PWB
Screws

Engine PWB

U100

EEPROM
(U100)

Figure 1-5-79

1-5-53

2MN/2N1-1

(3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB


Procedure
1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-59).
2. Release three wire saddles.
3. Remove four connectors.

Connector
Connector

Connectors

Wire saddle
Wire saddle
Waire saddle

Figure 1-5-80
4. Release six wire saddles.
5. Remove the following eleven connectors and three tabs from the power
source PWB.
YC3
YC1
TB1
TB2
TB5
YC7
YC8
YC17
YC14
YC12
YC16
YC13
YC10
YC11

Wire saddle
Power source
assembly
2-pin relay
connector

Wire saddles
Wire saddles

Power source PWB

6. Remove 2-pin relay connector.

Power source PWB


Figure 1-5-81

1-5-54

2MN/2N1

7. Release the wire saddle.


8. Remove the connector from the coin
vender plate.

Connctor

Wire saddle

Coin vender
plate
Figure 1-5-82

9. Remove screw.
10. Remove cooling duct1.
11. Remove two screws.
12. Remove the power source assembly.

Screw

Screw
Screw
Power source
assembly
Cooling duct1
Figure 1-5-83

1-5-55

2MN/2N1

13. Release wire saddle.


14. Remove 2-pin relay connector.
15. Remove screw.
16. Remove cooling duct2.
17. Remove eight screws.
18. Remove the power source PWB.
19. Check or replace the power source
PWB and refit all the removed parts.

2-pin relay connector


Wire saddles

Screw
Cooling duct2
Screws
Screws

Screw

Power source PWB


Screw

Board support

Figure 1-5-84

1-5-56

2MN/2N1

(4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1


Procedure
1. Remove the power source PWB (see
page 1-5-54).
2. Remove the main drive unit (see page
1-5-69).
3. Remove six connectors from high voltage PWB.

High voltage
PWB 1

Connectors
YC6

YC4
YC3

Connectors
YC5
YC2
YC1

High voltage
PWB 1
Connector
Figure 1-5-85

4. Remove eight screws.


5. Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and
then remove the high voltage PWB 1.
6. Check or replace the high voltage PWB
1 and refit all the removed parts.

Screws

Screw

Screws
Screw

PWB spacer
Screws

High voltage PWB 1

Figure 1-5-86

1-5-57

2MN/2N1

(5) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2


Procedure
1. Remove the main drive unit (see page
1-5-69).
2. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see
page 1-5-37).
3. Remove two connectors from the high
voltage PWB 2 assembly.

High voltage
PWB 2 assembly

Connectors High voltage


PWB 2 assembly
Figure 1-5-87
4. Remove two screws.
5. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
high voltage PWB 2.
6. Check or replace the high voltage PWB
2 and refit all the removed parts.

Hook

Hook

Screws
High voltage
PWB 2 assembly
Figure 1-5-88

1-5-58

2MN/2N1

(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB


Procedure
1. Remove eight screws and then remove
the rear upper cover.

Rear upper cover

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screw
Figure 1-5-89

2. Remove eight screws.


3. Release two hanging parts and then
remove the rear lower cover.
4. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-543).

Screw

Screw
Screws

Rear lower cover


Screws
Figure 1-5-90

1-5-59

2MN/2N1

5. Remove two screws and then remove


the ISU right cover.
6. Remove the screw and five hooks and
then remove the right upper cover.

Right upper cover

Screw

Screw

Paper conveying unit


Figure 1-5-91

7. Remove the screw.


8. Unhook two hooks and then remove the
right middle rear cover.

Right middle rear cover

Screw

Figure 1-5-92

1-5-60

2MN/2N1

9. Remove four screws and the remove


the fuser IH PWB cover.
10. Remove the IH electric wire cover.

IH electric wire cover

Screw

Screws

Screw
Fuser IH PWB cover

Figure 1-5-93

11. Release two wire saddles.


12. Remove four connectors from the fuser
IH PWB.

Wire saddle

Connector

Connectors
Fuser IH PWB

Connector

Wire saddle

Figure 1-5-94

1-5-61

2MN/2N1

13. Remove two wire holders.


14. Remove the connector (YC27) from
feed PWB 1.

Connector
(YC27)
Feed PWB 1
Wire holder

Wire holder
Figure 1-5-95

15. Remove three screws.


16. Unhook two hooks and then remove IH
box assembly.

IH box assembly

Screw
Hook

Screws

Hook

IH box assembly

Figure 1-5-96

1-5-62

2MN/2N1

17. Remove two connectors.


18. Remove six screws.
19. Unhook the hook of the PWB spacer
and then remove the fuser IH PWB.
20. Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and
refit all the removed parts.

Screws

Screws
Connector
Screws

Connector

Fuser IH PWB
PWB spacer

IH box assembly
Figure 1-5-97

1-5-63

2MN/2N1

1-5-8 Drive section


(1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY
Procedure
Detaching the drum drive unit K
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-59).
2. Remove the connector.
3. Release the wire saddle.

Connector

Wire saddle

Figure 1-5-98

4. Remove three screws.


5. Remove the drum drive unit K.
*: Do not have a shaft part alone when
you carry drum drive unit K. (Have the
housing.)
*: Put support on the tip of the shaft so
that the shaft may become the horizontal when you put drum drive unit K on
the table etc.

Screw

Screws

Screw
(Shaft portion)
Screws

Drum drive unit K


(housing portion)
Figure 1-5-99
1-5-64

2MN/2N1-3

Detaching the drum motor K


1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-59).
2. Remove the connector.
3. Release the wire saddle.

Connector

Wire saddle

Figure 1-5-100
4. Remove three screws.
5. Remove the drum motor unit K.

Screw

Screws

Screw

Screws

Drum motor unit K


Figure 1-5-101

Drum motor K

6. Remove two screws.


7. Remove the drive mounting bracket K.

Drive mounting bracket

Screws
Figure 1-5-102
1-5-65

2MN/2N1
Detaching the drum drive unit MCY
1. Remove the left upper cover (see page
1-5-47).
2. Remove the left cover (see page 1-519).
3. Remove the connector.
4. Remove the screw.

Connector

Screw

Figure 1-5-103

5. Remove as one body the toner unit


duct, the toner fan motor 1 and the
toner fan motor 2.

Screw

Toner fan
motor 2
Screw
Toner fan motor 1

Toner unit duct

Figure 1-5-104

1-5-66

2MN/2N1

6. Release wire saddles.


30ppm model/35ppm model: 1
45ppm model/55ppm model: 2
7. Remove connectors.
30ppm model/35ppm model: 1
45ppm model/55ppm model: 3

Connector
Wire saddle
Connector
Wire saddle
Connector
Figure 1-5-105

8. Remove five screws and then remove


the drum drive unit MCY.
*: Do not have a shaft part alone when
you carry drum drive unit MCY. (Have
the housing.)
*: Put support on the tip of the shaft so
that the shaft may become the horizontal when you put drum drive unit MCY
on the table etc.
9. Check or replace the drum drive unit K
and the drum drive unit MCY and refit
all the removed parts.

(Shaft portion)

(Shaft portion)
Drum drive
unit MCY
(housing portion)

Screw

Screw

Screws

Screw

Figure 1-5-106

1-5-67

2MN/2N1-3
Detaching the drum motor MCY
Perform steps 1 through 5 of removing the
drum drive unit MCY.
1. Release the wire saddle of the motor to
remove. (See page 1-5-66.)
*: For the drum moros M, C, and MCY
only.
2. Remove the connector from the motor
to remove.
Drum motor unit M Drum motor unit C Drum motor unit Y

Screws

Screws

Screws

Figure 1-5-107

3. Remove three screws


4. Remove the drum motor unit.

Screw

Drum motor unit C

Screws

Figure 1-5-108

5. Remove two screws


6. Remove the drive mounfing bracket.

Drive mounting bracket

*: Remove the drum motor M in the same


way.

Drum motor CMY


Drum motor C,M*
Figure 1-5-109

1-5-68

Screws

2MN/2N1

(2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit


Procedure
1. Remove the drum drive unit K and the
drum drive unit MCY (see page 1-5-64).
2. Release three wire saddles on the main
drive unit.
3. Remove two connectors.

Main drive unit

Connector

Wire saddle

Connector

Main drive unit


Wire saddles
Figure 1-5-110
4. Remove five screws.
5. Remove the main drive unit.
6. Check or replace the main drive unit
and refit all the removed parts.

Main drive unit

Screw
Screw
Screw

Screw

Figure 1-5-111

1-5-69

Screw

2MN/2N1

(3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit
Procedure
Detaching the fuser drive unit
1. Remove the rear upper cover and the
rear lower cover (see page 1-5-59).
2. Remove five wire holders of feed PWB
1 assembly.
3. Release the wire saddle.

Feed PWB 1
assembly

Feed PWB 1
assembly
Wire holder
Wire holder
Wire saddle
Wire holder

Wire holder

Wire holder
Figure 1-5-112
YC20

YC27

YC26

Feed PWB 1
YC1

YC18

YC3

YC17
YC2

FFC connector
with a lock

YC4

YC12

YC13
YC15

YC16

YC10

YC14

*: When removing the FFC from the FFC


connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever (see page 1-5-48).

YC19

4. Remove the following twenty connectors from the feed PWB 1.


YC18, YC19
YC20, YC27
YC26, YC3
YC17, YC14
YC10, YC16
YC13, YC12
YC23, YC25
YC15, YC11
YC5, YC4
YC1 (FFC connector with a lock)
YC2 (FFC connector with a lock)

YC23
YC25

YC11 YC5

Figure 1-5-113

1-5-70

2MN/2N1

5. Remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock (YC4) on the engine
PWB.
Remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock (YC1) on the feed PWB
2.

Engine PWB
FFC connector
with a lock (YC4)

*: When removing the FFC from the FFC


connector with a lock, remove the FFC
after released by lifting down the lock
lever (see page 1-5-48).

FFC

FFC connector
with a lock (YC1)
Feed PWB 2
Figure 1-5-114
6. Remove three screws.
7. Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly.

Feed PWB 1 assembly


Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw
Screw
Feed PWB 1 assembly
Figure 1-5-115
1-5-71

2MN/2N1

8. Remove the connector.


9. Remove three screws.
10. Remove the fuser drive unit.

Fuser drive unit

Screw

Fuser drive unit

Connector

Screw

Screw
Figure 1-5-116

Detaching the transfer drive unit


11. Pull out the transfer belt unit a little (see
page 1-5-37).
12. Release the clamp.
13. Remove the connector.
14. Remove three screws.
15. Remove the transfer drive unit.

Transfer drive unit

Screw

Transfer drive unit

Clamp
Connector
Screws

Figure 1-5-117
1-5-72

2MN/2N1
Detaching the feed drive unit
16. Remove three wire holders from the
feed 2 FFC guide.

Wire holder

Feed 2
FFC guide

Wire holders

Figure 1-5-118
17. Remove two screws and then remove
the feed 2 FFC guide.

Feed 2
FFC guide

Screw

Screw

Screw

Feed 2
FFC guide
Screw
Figure 1-5-119
1-5-73

2MN/2N1

18. Remove the following nine connectors


from the feed PWB 2.
YC10
YC11
YC7
YC8
YC3
YC5
YC6
YC13
YC12

YC10

Feed PWB 2

Figure 1-5-120
19. Remove three screws.
20. Remove the feed drive unit.

Feed drive unit


Screw

Screw

Screw
Screw

Screw

Screw

Figure 1-5-121
1-5-74

YC12

YC13

Feed PWB 2

YC6

YC5

YC8

YC3

YC7

YC11

2MN/2N1

21. Check or replace the feed drive unit and


refit all the removed parts.
*: Connect the connector (yellow) to the
connector of paper feed clutch 1 on
stamp [YELLOW] side as before, when
removing the connector of the paper
feed clutch as the check of the feed
drive unit etc.

Feed drive unit

Paper feed
clutch 1

Marking
[YELLOW]

Connector
Connector
(Yellow)
Paper feed clutch 2

Figure 1-5-122

1-5-75

2MN/2N1-3

(4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2


Procedure
1. Remove the rear lower cover (see page
1-5-59).
2. Remove the power source assembly
(see page 1-5-54).
3. Remove the connector each.
4. Remove two screws each.
5. Remove the lift motor 1 and 2.
6. Check or replace the lift motor and refit
all the removed parts.

Lift motor1
Lift motor2

Lift motor1
Connector
(white)

Screws
Lift motor2
Connector
(Gray)

Screws

Figure 1-5-123

1-5-76

2MN/2N1

1-5-9 Others
(1) Detaching the eject filter
Procedure
1. Unhook the hook each and remove two
eject filter units.
2. Remove the eject filter from the eject
cover.
3. Clean or replace the eject filter and refit
the filter.

Eject filter units

Eject filter

Hook
Hook
Eject cover

Figure 1-5-124

1-5-77

2MN/2N1

(2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter


Procedure
1. Remove the toner filter unit while gripping the levers.
2. Clean or replace the toner filter unit and
refit the filter.

Toner
filter unit

Levers

Toner
filter unit

Figure 1-5-125

1-5-78

2MN/2N1-1

(3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter


Procedure
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the fan filter by releasing the
lever.
3. Clean the fan filter.
4. Refit the fan filter.

Front cover

Fan filter

Lever

Fan filter
Figure 1-5-126

1-5-79

2MN/2N1-1

(4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filter


Procedure
1. Remove two transfer belt filters by
releasing the lever.
2. Clean the transfer belt filter.
3. Refit the transfer belt filter.

Lever
Transfer belt filter
Lever

Transfer belt filters

Figure 1-5-127

1-5-80

2MN/2N1-1

(5) Detaching and refitting the left filter


Procedure
1. Remove the left filter cover by releasing
the lever.
2. Remove the left filter.
3. Clean or replace the left filter and refit
the filter.

Left filter
Lever

Left filter
cover

Figure 1-5-128

1-5-81

2MN/2N1

(6) Detaching and refitting the developer filter


Procedure
1. Remove the developer filter cover by
releasing the lever.
2. Remove the developer filter.
3. Clean the developer filter and refit the
filter.

Lever

Developer filter
Developer filter cover

Figure 1-5-129

1-5-82

2MN/2N1

(7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit


Procedure
1. Perform maintenance mode U917
(backup data reading) (see page 1-3141).
2. Remove the rear upper cover (see page
1-5-59).
3. Release the wire saddle.
4. Remove two screws.

Screws

Wire saddle

Figure 1-5-130

5. Unhook two hooks and pull out the


HDD bracket a little.

Hook

Hook

HDD bracket

Figure 1-5-131

1-5-83

2MN/2N1

6. Remove two connectors from the hard


disk unit while pushing the lock lever.
Number of hard disk unit equipmentl: 1

Hard disk
unit

Lever

Lever

Connector
Connector

Figure 1-5-132

7. Remove four screws and then remove


the hard disk unit from the HDD
bracket.
8. Replace the hard disk unit and refit all
the removed parts.
9. Perform maintenance mode U024
(HDD formatting) (see page 1-3-27).
10. Install the firmwares by the following
procedure.
1)Connects to the machine the USB
memory that preserved Software
LANGUAGE BR, JP (Opt Font,Opt
Msg), and the PDF1.7 resource.
The firmware is installed by switching
the main power switch to ON/OFF.

Screw

HDD bracket

Screws

Screw
Screw

11. Perform maintenance mode U917


(backup data writing) (see page 1-3141).

Screws

Hard disk unit

Figure 1-5-133

1-5-84

2MN/2N1

(8) Detaching and refitting the eject unit


Procedure
1. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
2. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-543).
3. Remove the connector.
4. Remove four screws and then remove
the eject unit.
5. Check or replace the eject unit and refit
all the removed parts.

Connector

Eject unit

Screw

Screw

Screws

Figure 1-5-134

Actuator
Cautions on installing the eject unit
When an additional actuator is installed at the
upper actuator while installing the bridge unit,
inserting the eject unit into the device, use care
that the eject unit does not get in contact with
the eject guide, by keeping its actuator lifted
while inserting.

Figure 1-5-135

1-5-85

Eject guides

2MN/2N1

(9) Direction of installing the principal fan motors


When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).

Developer fan motor 1


(Rating label:outside)

Eject front fan motor


(Rating label:inside)

LSU fan motor


(Rating label:inside)

Fuser edge
fan motor 2
(Rating label:inside)

Eject front fan motor2


(Rating label:inside)

Eject fan motor 2


(Rating label:inside)
Eject fan motor 1
(Rating label:inside)

IH fan motor
(Rating label:inside)
Fuser front fan motor
(Rating label:outside)
Fuse edge
Developer fan motor 2
fan motor 1
(Rating label:outside)
(Rating label:inside)
Fuse fan motor 1
(Rating label:inside)

Eject rear fan motor


(Rating label:outside)

Fuser rear fan motor


(Rating label:outside)

Belt fan motor 1


(Rating label:inside)

Belt fan motor 2


(Rating label:inside)

Toner fan motor 2


(Rating label:outside)

Controller fan motor


(Rating label:inside)

Exhaust fan motor 2


(Rating label:outside)
Power source fan motor
(Rating label:inside)

Toner fan motor 1


(Rating label:outside)

Exhaust fan motor 1


(Rating label:outside)

Figure 1-5-136
1-5-86

Fuser fan motor 2


(Rating label:inside)

2MN/2N1-3

(10) Skewed paper feeding check/adjustment


At the paper feed source which a sheet of wrinkled paper has caused, check how the paper is fed askew.
Run U051 to reduce the curvature of paper at the regist roller and measure how the paper is fed askew.
1. Print a maintenance report and note the
U051 value.
2. Reduce the value by 10 for the paper
source in question.(See page -1-5-49.)

%$

3. Press the system menu button to print a


test chart.
Check the skew value (balance of left and
right, B-A).
Less than 1mm: OK
1mm or more:
Correct the skew by using the paper angle
adjusting mechanism (in cassette) that modifies the angle of the paper width guides.

Figure 1-5-137
Procedure
1. Unsecure the fixing screws (screw 1 to 4)
and adjust the angle of the paper width
guide by the skew feed adjustment
screw.
If the B-A is negative, rotate clockwise.
If the B-A is positive, rotate counter-clockwise.
2. Tighten the four screw.
*: Secure the screws in the order of
screws 1, 2, 3, then 4.
3. Run U051 and reset the curvature the regist roller.

1-5-87

2MN/2N1-3

%$>@

%$>@

Figure 1-5-138

1-5-88

2MN/2N1-1

1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware


1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, engine PWB, fuser IH PWB, motor control
PWB, PDF Resource, optional language, color table and optional devices.
Preparation
Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB flash device.
Procedure
1. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check U019
ROM version.
2. After confirming the data lamp is turned
off, perform shut-down on the operation
panel, turn power off, and unplug the
power receptacle (see page P.1-2-19).
3. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware has been written into a notch
hole of the machine.
4. Turn the main power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts (blinking the memory
LED).
Caution:
Never turn off the power switch or
remove the USB flash device during
upgrading.
5. [ROM version] is displayed on the touch
panel when upgrading is complete.

USB flash device

Figure 1-6-1
6. Perform shut-down, and turn the main
power switch to off.
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the USB flash device from the
machine.
8. Turn the main power switch on.
9. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check that
U019 ROM version has been upgraded.

1-6-1

2MN/2N1-3
Emergency-UPDATE
If the device is accidentally switched off and upgrading was incomplete, upgrade becomes impossible from a
USB flash device.
In that case, retry upgrading after recovering the software by following the procedure below.
Preparation
The CF memory card must be formatted in FAT or FAT32 in advance.
Extract the main firmware to download from the file.
Rename the file which was extracted from the archive. [DL_CTRL.2MN] to [KM_EMRG.2MN]
Copy the all extracted files to the root of the CF memory.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Install the CF memory card which contains the firmware onto the main PWB.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Rewriting of the PWB software will start
for restoration.
The Data and Attention LEDs will be
blinking.
5. Only the Data LED will be blinking when
rewriting is successful.
* : Only the Attention LED will be blinking
when rewriting is failed.
6. Turn the main power switch off.
7. Wait for several seconds and then
remove the CF memory from the main
PWB.
8. Extract the firmware to download from
the archive and copy to the root of the
USB flash device.
9. Insert the USB flash device in which the
firmware was copied into the slot on the
machine.
10. Perform steps 4 to 7 on the previous
page.

CF memory

Main PWB

Figure 1-6-2
11. Turn the main power switch on.
12. Perform maintenance item U000 (Print
a maintenance report) to check that the
version of ROM U109 has been
upgraded.

1-6-2

2MN/2N1-1

1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement


When replacing the main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YC14) and code DIMM (YS4) from the main PWB that
has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB.

Main PWB
EEPROM

YC14

Figure 1-6-3
When refitting DIMM, check CODE marked on the PWB and refit them to the original position.
Main PWB

CODE FLS

YS4

DIMM

Figure 1-6-4
If the code DIMM (YS4) was replaced with a service supplied part, perform the following.
1. Insert the USB flash device in which the latest firmware was copied, into the slot on the machine and turn
power on.(see page P.1-6-1)
2. Referring to the U000 maintenance report printed previously, enter the following values.
U278 Setting the delivery date
U952 Maintenance mode workflow
3. Reset machine settings.(Resets system menu settings modified at setup to their defaults.)
Main items for settings
[Date Setting] - Date and time settings.
[User/Job accounting] - Defaults for user authentication and job accounting only.
Resettings are not required as the data are stored in harddisk.
[Network] - Network settings (IP address)
[Adjustment/Maintenance] - Silent Mode setting

1-6-3

2MN/2N1
4. Run the maintenance mode for image adjustments which follows.
1. Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page P.1-3-118).
2. Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page P.1-3-126).

1-6-4

2MN/2N1

1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement


When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed
and then reattach it to the new engine PWB.

Engine PWB

EEPROM
U100

Figure 1-6-5

1-6-5

2MN/2N1

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-6-6

2MN/2N1

2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section


2-1 Mechanical Construction

Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP
tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray, and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed
paper to the transfer/separation section.

(1) Cassette paper feed section


Cassette paper feed section consists of the paper holder with the cassette operation plate activated by lift
motor 1 and 2, and the pulleys, such as the forwarding pulley, the paper feed pulley and the separation pulley,
for extracting and conveying the paper. Paper is fed out of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley,
paper feed pulley and separation pulley.

11

21

13

12

10

23

15

17
3

9
4

22

24
7

16
1

14
20

8
6

18
9

10

19
Figure 2-1-1 Cassette paper feed section
1. Cassette base
2. Cassette operation plate
3. Cassette
4. Forwarding pulleys
5. Paper feed pulleys
6. Separation pulleys
7. Assist rollers
8. Assist pulleys
9. Paper conveying roller
10. Paper conveying pulley
11. Paper sensor 1 (PS1)

12. Paper sensor 2 (PS2)


13. Lift sensor 1 (LS1)
14. Lift sensor 2 (LS2)
15. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U)
(PGS1(U))
16. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L)
(PGS1(L))
17. Actuator
(Paper gauge sensor 1)
18. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U)
(PGS2(U))
2-1-1

19. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L)


(PGS2(L))
20. Actuator
(Paper gauge sensor 2)
21. Feed sensor 1 (FS1)
22. Feed sensor 2 (FS2)
23. Paper conveying sensor
(PCS)
24. Actuator
(Paper conveying sensor)

2MN/2N1-3

YC2-2
YC2-3
YC2-4
YC2-5
YC10-1
YC4-1
YC8-11

FEED_MOT_DIR

6
5
4
3

FEED_MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_CLK
FEED_MOT_REM

PFM

ASIST_CL1
FEED_CL1_REM

ASCL1

PFCL1

CAS1_P0_SENS

FS1
YC8-6
YC8-9
YC3-13
YC3-14
YC3-19
YC3-22
YC8-23

CAS1_EMPTY_SENS

PS1

CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS
LIFT_MOT1_RET
LIFT_MOT1_DR

LS1

PCCL

LM1

CAS1_QUANT1

PGS1(U)

CAS1_QUANT2

PGS1(L)

PCS

ASCL2

PFCL2

CAS2_P0_SENS

FS2
YC8-18
YC8-21
YC3-15
YC3-16
YC3-25
YC3-28
YC4-3
YC12-1
YC6-3
YC5-3

CAS2_EMPTY_SENS

PS2

CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS
LIFT_MOT2_RET
LIFT_MOT2_DR

LS2
LM2

CAS2_QUANT1

PGS2(U)

CAS2_QUANT2

PGS2(L)

FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2
FEED2_SENS
V-FEED_CL

FPWB2
YC1

YC4

EPWB

Figure 2-1-2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram

2-1-2

2MN/2N1

(2) MP tray paper feed section


Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter.

9
2

11

12

15

10

13

Figure 2-1-3 MP tray paper feed section

10. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2)


11. MP paper length switch
(MPPLSW)
12. Actuator
(MP paper length switch)
13. MP paper width switch
(MPPWSW)
14. MP tray switch (MPTSW)
15. MP feed sensor (MPFS)

1. MP forwarding pulley
2. MP paper feed pulley
3. MP separate pulley
4. MP table
5. MP support Tray
6. MP lift base
7. MP paper sensor (MPPS)
8. Actuator (MP paper sensor)
9. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1)

2-1-3

14

2MN/2N1

RYPWB

YC3-5

YC3-3

YC3-13

YC3-8
YC3-11

YC3-16
YC3-15
YC2-7
YC2-5
YC2-4
YC2-2
YC2-9

YC12

MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS

MPLS1

MPF_PPR_SET

MPPS
MP
PFCL

MPF_CL_REM

MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
MPF_JAM_SENS

MPF_LIFT_DR_B
MPF_LIFT_DR_A

MPLS2

MPPWSW

MPPLSW MPTSW

MPFS

MPLM

MPF_WID1
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3
MPF_LNG
MPF_TABLE

YC17

YC1
FPWB1

YC6
EPWB

Figure 2-1-4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram

2-1-4

2MN/2N1-3

(3) Paper conveying section


The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cassette or MP tray, or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to
the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on, and then sent to the transfer/separation section
by the right registration roller and left registration roller.

4
3

5
7
2

1
6

Figure 2-1-5 Paper conveying section

6. Middle sensor (MS)


7. Registration sensor (RS)

1. Middle roller
2. Middle pulley
3. Left registration roller
4. Right registration roller
5. Paper conveying pulley

2-1-5

2MN/2N1-3

REG_MOT_B/
REG_MOT_A/
REG_MOT_B
REG_MOT_A

FPWB2

RM
YC7-12

YC7-9
YC7-1
YC7-2
YC7-3
YC7-4
YC2-2
YC2-3
YC2-4
YC2-5

YC1

REG_SENS

FFED1_SENS
MID_B/
MID_A/
MID_B
MID_A

YC25-1
YC25-2
YC25-3
YC25-4

RS

MS

FPWB1

MM

FEED_MOT_DIR
FEED_MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_CLK

6
5
4
3

FEED_MOT_REM

YC4

EPWB

PFM

YC5-42

Figure 2-1-6 Paper conveying section block diagram

2-1-6

YC2-9

2MN/2N1

2-1-2 Drum section


The drum section consists of the charger roller unit, drum and cleaning section. The drum is electrically
charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. The cleaning section
consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after
transfer. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main
charging.

10

6
8
2
9

5
4

Figure 2-1-7 Drum section

6. Cleaning blade
7. Cleaning roller
8. Control roller
9. Drum screw
10. Cleaning lamp (CL)

1. Drum
2. Charger roller
3. Charger cleaning roller
4. Charger case
5. Drum frame

2-1-7

MCPWB

DRM-C

DRM-M

Figure 2-1-8 Drum section block diagram

2-1-8

DRPWB-M
DRPWB-K

EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM

DRM-K

ERS_K_REM

DRPWB-C

YC7-8

EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1

DRPWB-Y

YC5-7

YC7-2
YC7-3

ERS_M_REM

EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1

Main chager
High voltage M

Main chager
High voltage K

CL-M

YC5-3
YC5-5

YC9

YC10-8

YC10-2
YC10-3

ERS_C_REM

EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1

Drum
unit M

YC5-1

YC3

EPWB

YC5-6
YC5-8

YC5-2
YC5-4

YC12-8

YC12-2
YC12-3

Main chager
High voltage C

CL-C

DRM_M_
CW/CCW
DRM_M_LD
DRM_M_CLK
DRM_M_S/S

YC4-1
YC4-3
YC4-5
YC4-7

YC2

ERS_Y_REM

EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1

Drum
unit C

DRM_BK_
CW/CCW
6
DRM_BK_LD
5
DRM_BK_CLK
4
DRM_BK_S/S
3

6
5
4
3

DRM-Y
FRPWB

YC10

YC14-8

YC14-2
YC14-3
CL-Y

DRM_C_
CW/CCW
DRM_C_LD
DRM_C_CLK
DRM_C_S/S

YC4-4
YC4-6
YC4-8

YC4-2

Main chager
High voltage Y
Drum
unit Y

6
5
4
3

4
3

6
5

DRM_Y_
CW/CCW
DRM_Y_LD
DRM_Y_CLK
DRM_Y_S/S

2MN/2N1

HVPWB1
Drum
unit K
CL-K

2MN/2N1

2-1-3 Developer section


The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush, the magnet roller, the developer blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Also, the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not
toner remains in the developer unit.

2
8
6
5

3
4
7

Figure 2-1-9 Developer section

6. Developer case
7. Developer cover
8. Magnet cover
9. Toner sensor (TS)

1. Sleeve roller
2. Magnet roller
3. Developer screw A
4. Developer screw B
5. Developer blade

2-1-9

YC7-1
YC7-2
YC7-3
YC7-4

MCPWB

DRM-MCY

Figure 2-1-10 Developer section block diagram

2-1-10

YC7-9
YC7-10

EPWB

YC7-7
YC7-8

VM-M

DEVM-K

YC9-12 VIB_MOT

TS-M

TPD_TEMP_BK
DLP_VCONT_BK_1
TPD_BK_1
TN_CLK_BK
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1

Developer
unit M

YC9-1
YC9-2
YC9-3
YC9-4
YC9-8
YC9-9

TS-C

YC11-12 VIB_MOT

TPD_TEMP_M
DLP_VCONT_M_1
TPD_M_1
TN_CLK_M
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1

TS-Y

YC11-1
YC11-2
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-8
YC11-9

Developer
unit C

YC9

TPD_TEMP_C
DLP_VCONT_C_1
TPD_C_1
TN_CLK_C
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1

Developer
unit Y

YC13-12 VIB_MOT

YC13-1
YC13-2
YC13-3
YC13-4
YC13-8
YC13-9
VM-C

YC3

YC2

FRPWB

YC10

YC15-12 VIB_MOT

TPD_TEMP_Y
DLP_VCONT_Y_1
TPD_Y_1
TN_CLK_Y
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
VM-Y

DLP_BK_
CW/CCW
6
DLP_BK_LD
5
DLP_BK_CLK
4
DLP_BK_S/S
3

6
5
4
3

DLP_M_
CW/CCW
DLP_M_LD
DLP_M_CLK
DLP_M_S/S

YC15-1
YC15-2
YC15-3
YC15-4
YC15-8
YC15-9

Sleeve bias K

Magnet bias K

Sleeve bias M

Magnet bias M

Sleeve bias C

Magnet bias C

Sleeve bias Y

Magnet bias Y

2MN/2N1

HVPWB

VM-K

Developer
unit K
TS-K

2MN/2N1

2-1-4 Laser scanner section


The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. The laser
beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses
and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit, adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focalize it at the
drum surface. Also the LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the
LSU dust shield glass.

Figure 2-1-11 Laser scanner section

5. f- lens B
6. Mirror C
7. LSU dust shield glass
8. LSU spiral

1. Polygon motor (PM)


2. f- lens A
3. Mirror A
4. Mirror B

2-1-11

2MN/2N1

YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-9
YC5-25
YC5-26
YC5-28
YC5-29
YC4-3
YC4-4
YC4-5

BD_Bk
LSU_TH_Bk
LDD_CS_Bk
DATA_1N_Bk
DATA_1P_Bk
DATA_2N_Bk
DATA_2P_Bk
REM_Bk
LOCK_Bk
CLK_Bk

YC1-29
YC1-28
YC1-22
YC1-6
YC1-5
YC1-3
YC1-2

YC8-2
YC8-3
YC8-9
YC8-25
YC8-26
YC8-28
YC8-29
YC7-3
YC7-4
YC7-5

BD_M
LSU_TH_M
LDD_CS_M
DATA_1N_M
DATA_1P_M
DATA_2N_M
DATA_2P_M
REM_M
LOCK_M
CLK_M

YC1-29
YC1-28
YC1-22
YC1-6
YC1-5
YC1-3
YC1-2

YC10-2
YC10-3
YC10-9
YC10-25
YC10-26
YC10-28
YC10-29
YC9-3
YC9-4
YC9-5

BD_C
LSU_TH_C
LDD_CS_C
DATA_1N_C
DATA_1P_C
DATA_2N_C
DATA_2P_C
REM_C
LOCK_C
CLK_C

YC1-29
YC1-28
YC1-22
YC1-6
YC1-5
YC1-3
YC1-2

YC12-2
YC12-3
YC12-9
YC12-25
YC12-26
YC12-28
YC12-29
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-5

BD_Y
LSU_TH_Y
LDD_CS_Y
DATA_1N_Y
DATA_1P_Y
DATA_2N_Y
DATA_2P_Y
REM_Y
LOCK_Y
CLK_Y

YC1-29
YC1-28
YC1-22
YC1-6
YC1-5
YC1-3
YC1-2

TH
BD

PDPWB-K

APC
PWB-K

Laser
scanner
unit K
3
2
1

TH
BD

PM-K

PDPWB-M

APC
PWB-M

Laser
scanner
unit M
3
2
1

PM-M

LSURPWB

YC2
YC3

TH
BD

PDPWB-C

APC
PWB-C

Laser
scanner
unit C
3
2
1

TH
BD

PDPWB-Y

APC
PWB-Y

Laser
scanner
unit Y
3
2
1

YC11
YC12

EPWB

CW
YC21-1
CCW
YC21-2

Figure 2-1-12 Laser scanner unit block diagram


2-1-12

PM-C

PM-Y

LSU
CM

2MN/2N1

2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section


The transfer/separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer
roller section.

(1) Intermediate transfer unit section


The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt, and the four primary transfer rollers for respective color drums, and forms a full-color toner image by superimposing and
transferring single-color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt. Also with the ID sensors
(IDS) mounted on the machine frame, the toner density on the transfer belt is measured.
The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it
as waste toner to the waste toner box.

18

17

16

10

11

13

15

19
20
2

14 12 9

Figure 2-1-13 Intermediate transfer unit section

11. Color release sensor (CRS)


12. Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS)
13. Transfer skew sensor (TRSS)
14. Transfer edge sensor (TRES)
15. Transfer skew motor (TRSM)
16. Cleaning pre brush
17. Cleaning fur brush
18. Cleaning roller
19. Cleaning blade
20. Cleaning screw

1. Drive roller
2. Backup roller
3. Primary transfer roller K
4. Primary transfer roller M
5. Primary transfer roller C
6. Primary transfer roller Y
7. Tension roller
8. Transfer belt
9. ID sensor (IDS)
10. Color release motor (CRM)

2-1-13

2MN/2N1

TRSS

Primary transfer bias K

Primary transfer bias M

Primary transfer bias C

Primary transfer bias Y

Cleaning bias

HVPWB2

Transfer
belt unit
TRES

CRS
TRPWB

YC3-B5

EPWB

YC10-6
YC10-7

REG_SENS_F_P
REG_SENS_F_S

IDS1

YC10-11
YC10-12

REG_SENS_R_P
REG_SENS_R_S

IDS2

YC10-14

CLN_SOL_REM

YC13-1
YC13-2
YC13-3
YC13-4
YC13-5

CLSOL
TRANS_MOT_BRK
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_REM

7
6
5
4
3

Figure 2-1-14 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram


2-1-14

TRM

ZIG_REV
YC3-B8

BELT_SPEED

EEP_SDA2
YC3-B13

ZIG_MOT_DR_CCW
ZIG_MOT_DR_CW

ZIG_SENS

EEP_SCL2
YC3-B12

YC3-A10
YC5
YC2

YC3-B2

RLS_SENS

RLS_MOT_DR

ICL_MOT_REM
ICL_MOT_CLK
ICL_MOT_RDY
ICL_MOT_DIR
YC3-A3
YC3-A4
YC3-A5
YC3-A6

YC3-A7
YC6
YC1
FPWB1

TRBLS

DCM

YC3-A12
YC3-A13

CRM

3
4
5
6

TRCM

2MN/2N1

(2) Secondary transfer roller section


The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying
unit and the separation brush. To the secondary transfer roller, DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB
2 (HVPWB2). The toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the potential difference and the paper is separated by curvature separation.

5
1
6
3
4

Figure 2-1-15 Secondary transfer roller section

1. Secondary transfer roller


2. Separation brush
3. Secondary transfer frame
4. Transfer guide
5. Transfer release sensor (TRRS)
6. Transfer release motor (TRRM)

2-1-15

2MN/2N1

EPWB

HVPWB2
Separation brush

Separation bias

YC1-8

Secondary transfer bias

YC1-7

SP_REM
T2_REM

YC8-5
YC8-6

TRRS

Secondary
transfer roller

RYPWB

YC-14-2 PRESS_RLS_SENS

YC-14-4 PRESS_RLS_REM1
YC-14-5 PRESS_RLS_REM2

TRRM

FPWB1
YC1-16
YC1-15
YC1-14

YC1

PRESS_RLS_
MOT_REM1
PRESS_RLS_
MOT_REM2
PRESS_RLS_
SENS

YC14

Figure 2-1-16 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram

2-1-16

YC6-49
YC6-50
YC6-51

2MN/2N1

2-1-6 Fuser section


The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller.
The heat roller (fuser belt) is heated by the fuser IH (FIH), and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and
fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring. The surface temperature of
heat roller and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor (FTH) and controlled by the engine PWB
(EPWB).

16

4
3
6

15

14

13
11

12
10

Figure 2-1-17 Fuser section


9. Fuser eject roller
10. Loop sensor (LPS)
11. Fuser belt sensor (FUBLS)
12. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1)
13. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2)
14. Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3)
15. Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4)
16. Fuser eject sensor (FUES)

1. Heat roller (Fuser belt)


2. Press roller
3. IH coils
4. Side core
5. Arch core
6. Separators
7. Right fuser cover
8. Fuser eject pulley

2-1-17

2MN/2N1

YC26-B9
YC26-A13
YC26-A10
YC26-A11
YC26-A16

PRESS_TH
FSR_SIZE_SENS

FUES
Fuser unit

FSR_RLS_DR_CCW
FSR_RLS_DR_CW

FURM

FSR_RLS_SENS
FURS
YC9
FIHPWB

FTS

FTH3

FTH2

YC26-B16,17
YC26-B15
YC26-B11

FSR_BLT_PLS

FUBLS

MAIN_TH1,2

YC1-5,6

GUIDE_TH2

YC1-7

EDGE_TH

YC1-9

FUPWB

YC27
YC6-21
YC6-20
YC6-19
YC6-18

FSR_MOT_DIR
FSR_MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_CLK
FSR_MOT_REM

YC1-44
YC1-45
YC1-46
YC1-47

YC18-2
YC18-3
YC18-4
YC18-5

6
5
4
3

FUM

FPWB1

Figure 2-1-18 Fuser section block diagram

2-1-18

GUIDE_TH

YC26-A19

FTH1

YC4-1

+15V1
+15V2

MAIN_TH1,2

YC6-1
YC6-2

COIL_COM

YC3-2,3

YC10
YC4
YC8

EDGE_TH

YC26

FTH4

YC5-1

EPWB

VS

2MN/2N1

2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section


The paper eject/feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the
fuser section to the top tray, duplex conveying section or job separator.

13 5

10
15

14

16
4
3
17

18

11

12

Figure 2-1-19 Eject/Feed shift section

10. Upper change guide


11. Eject full sensor 1 (EFS1)
12. Actuator (eject full sensor 1)
13. Eject full sensor 2 (EFS2)
14. Actuator (eject full sensor 2)
15. Switchback sensor (SBS)
16. Actuator (switchback sensor)
17. Eject roller C
18. Eject pulley C

1. Middle pulley
2. Eject roller
3. Eject pulley
4. Eject roller B
5. Eject pulley B
6. Upper duplex roller
7. Duplex pulley
8. Lower duplex roller
9. Lower change guide

2-1-19

2MN/2N1

YC5-6

YC5-19
YC5-20
YC5-13

YC5-16

EXIT_SUB_SENS

EFS2

JUNC_SOL_KYU
JUNC_SOL_FUK

FSSOL

EXIT_FEED_SENS

EXIT_MAIN_SENS

SBS

EFS1

FRPWB
YC5-8
YC5-9
YC5-10
YC5-11

YC3

SB_MOT_B/
SB_MOT_A/
SB_MOT_B
SB_MOT_A

YC7

EM

EPWB

Figure 2-1-20 Eject/Feed shift section block diagram

2-1-20

2MN/2N1

2-1-8 Duplex conveying section


The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject/feedshift
section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing.

6
7

1
4

9
5

Figure 2-1-21 Duplex conveying section


6. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1)
7. Actuator (duplex sensor 1)
8. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2)
9. Actuator (duplex sensor 2)

1. Upper duplex roller


2. Middle duplex roller
3. Lower duplex roller
4. Duplex pulleys A
5. Duplex pulleys B
2-1-21

2MN/2N1

YC23-1

YC13-12

YC11-2

YC23-6
YC23-7
YC23-8
YC23-9

YC13-7
YC13-6
YC13-5
YC13-4

YC16-1
YC16-2
YC16-3
YC16-4

FPWB1

YC14-14
YC14-15
YC14-16
YC14-17

YC1-5
YC1-4
YC1-3
YC1-2

YC7-5
YC7-6
YC7-7
YC7-8

YC2

YC9-2

YC5

YC1-14

YC1

DU1_B/
DU1_A/
DU1_B
DU1_A

DUS1

DUM1

RYPWB

YC14-5

YC6

DU_ENTER_SENS

DU_SENS
DU2_B/
DU2_A/
DU2_B
DU2_A

EPWB

Figure 2-1-22 Duplex conveying section block diagram

2-1-22

DUS2

DUM2

2MN/2N1-1

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout


2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

(1) PWBs

6
1

2
29

27

8
28
7
26

5
24
16
20

23
15

19

12
18

22
14

25

21
13

10

17
9

11

Machine front
Machine inside

30

Machine rear

Figure 2-2-1 PWBs

1. Main PWB (MPWB) .............................. Controls the software such as the print data processing and
provides the interface with computers.
2. Engine PWB (EPWB)............................ Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output control, paper conveying system control, and fuser temperature control, etc.
3. Power source PWB (PSPWB) .............. After full-wave rectification of AC power source input, switching
for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output.
4. High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) ........... Generates main charging and developer bias.
5. High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2) ........... Generates transfer bias and separation bias.
6. Operation PWB (OPWB)....................... Controls keys and LCD indication.
7. Front PWB (FRPWB) ............................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum
units, developer units, eject unit.
8. Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and fuser
drive unit, relay PWB.

2-2-1

2MN/2N1
9. Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2).......................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and paper
conveying section, drive section.
10. Relay PWB (RPWB) ............................. Consists of wiring relay circuit between feed PWB 1 and paper
conveying unit.
11. Motor control PWB (MCPWB)............... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum
motors, developer motors.
12. LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB)................ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and laser
scanner unit.
13. APC PWB K (APCPWB-K) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (black).
14. APC PWB M (APCPWB-M) .................. Generates and controls the laser beam (magenta).
15. APC PWB C (APCPWB-C) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (cyan).
16. APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y) ................... Generates and controls the laser beam (yellow).
17. PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) ........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (black).
18. PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) ....................... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (magenta).
19. PD PWB C (PDPWB-C)........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (cyan).
20. PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y) ........................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (yellow).
21. Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K) .................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
22. Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M) ................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
23. Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C).................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
24. Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y) .................... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage.
25. Transfer PWB (TRPWB) ....................... Transfer belt individual information in EEPROM storage.
26. Fuser PWB (FUPWB) ........................... Relays wirings from electrical components on the fuser unit.
27. Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB)...................... Controls the fuser IH.
28. RFID PWB (RFPWB) ............................ Reads the container information.
29. Interface PWB (IFPWB) ........................ Consists of wiring relay circuits between main PWB and Fax control PWB.
30. Current PWB (CRPWB) ........................ Changes and outputs the AC current input to an analog signal.

2-2-2

2MN/2N1-1
List of correspondences of PWB names
No.

Name used in service manual

Name used in parts list

Main PWB (MPWB)

PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP

Engine PWB (EPWB)

PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP

Power source PWB (PSPWB)

PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP

High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1)

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP

High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2)

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER SP

Operation PWB (OPWB)

PARTS PWB PANEL ASSY SP

Front PWB (FRPWB)

PARTS PWB FRONT CLR ASSY SP

Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)

PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP

Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2)

PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP

10

Relay PWB (RPWB)

PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP

11

Motor control PWB (MCPWB)

PARTS PWB MOTOR CONTROL ASSY SP

12

LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB)

PARTS PWB LSU JUNC CLR ASSY SP

13

APC PWB K (APCPWB-K)

14

APC PWB M (APCPWB-M)

15

APC PWB C (APCPWB-C)

16

APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y)

17

PD PWB K (PDPWB-K)

18

PD PWB M (PDPWB-M)

19

PD PWB C (PDPWB-C)

20

PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y)

21

Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K)

22

Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M)

23

Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C)

24

Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y)

25

Transfer PWB (TRPWB)

26

Fuser PWB (FUPWB)

27

Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB)

28

RFID PWB (RFPWB)

PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP

29

Interface PWB (IFPWB)

PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP

30

Current PWB (CRPWB)

PARTS PWB CURRENT AVE ASSY SP

2-2-3

2MN/2N1-3

(2) Switches and sensors


51
52
50

53
49

30

29

28

27
46
43

37

39

33

32

31

38

26
3
5

11

12

7
8

4
6

14

55
41
54
58 19
24

57

13

47
45
42

40
35,36

34

48

44

56
15
17

25

20

18

22

21 23

59

16

9
10

Machine front

60

Machine inside
Machine rear

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. Main power switch (MSW) .................... Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.
2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ................ Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.
3. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 1).
4. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) ........................... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 2).
5. Lift sensor 1 (LS1)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 1).
6. Lift sensor 2 (LS2)................................. Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 2).
7. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (PGS1(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
8. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) (PGS1(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1).
9. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (PGS2(U))... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
10. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L)).... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2).
11. Paper length switch 1 (PLSW1) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 1).
12. Paper length switch 2 (PLSW2) ............ Detects the length of paper (cassette 2).
13. Paper width switch 1 (PWSW1) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 1).
14. Paper width switch 2 (PWSW2) ............ Detects the width of paper (cassette 2).
15. Feed sensor 1 (FS1) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 1).
16. Feed sensor 2 (FS2) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 2).
17. Paper conveying sensor (PCS)............. Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section.
2-2-4

2MN/2N1-3
18. MP paper sensor (MPPS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper (MP tray).
19. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) ...................... Detects activation of upper limit of the MP plate.
20. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2) ...................... Detects activation of lower limit of the MP plate.
21. MP paper length switch (MPPLSW)...... Detects the length of paper (MP tray).
22. MP paper width switch (MPPWSW)...... Detects the width of paper (MP tray).
23. MP tray switch (MPTSW)...................... Detects the MP tray extension is extend.
24. MP feed sensor (MPFS) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the MP paper feed section.
25. Middle sensor (MS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the paper conveying section.
26. Registration sensor (RS)....................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
27. Screw sensor K (SRS-K) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container K.
28. Screw sensor M (SRS-M) ..................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container M.
29. Screw sensor C (SRS-C) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container C.
30. Screw sensor Y (SRS-Y) ...................... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container Y.
31. Toner sensor K (TS-K) .......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit K.
32. Toner sensor M (TS-M) ......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit M.
33. Toner sensor C (TS-C).......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit C.
34. Toner sensor Y (TS-Y) .......................... Detects the toner density in the developer unit Y.
35. ID sensor 1 (IDS1) ................................ Measures image density for color calibration.
36. ID sensor 2 (IDS2) ................................ Measures image density for color calibration.
37. Color release sensor (CRS).................. Detects separation of primary transfer rollers M, C, and Y.
38. Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS) ............... Detects positioning of transfer belt rotation.
39. Transfer skew sensor (TRSS)............... Detects skew of transfer belt center position.
40. Transfer edge sensor (TRES) ............... Detects edge position of the transfer belt.
41. Transfer release sensor (TRRS) ........... Detects separation of secondary transfer roller.
42. Loop sensor (LPS) ................................ Detects a paper misfeed. Controls the fuser motor by detecting
deflection in the paper.
43. Fuser belt sensor (FUBLS) ................... Detects positioning of fuser belt rotation.
44. Fuser release sensor (FURS) ............... Detects fuser pressure release setting (envelope mode).
45. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature.
46. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature.
47. Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3) .................... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature.
48. Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4) .................... Detects the press roller temperature.
49. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) ................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section.
50. Eject full sensor 1 (EFS1) ..................... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject section. Detects when the
main tray is full.
51. Eject full sensor 2 (EFS2) ..................... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject section. Detects when the
sub tray is full.
52. Switchback sensor (SBS) ..................... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject and switchback sections.
53. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
54. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.
55. Duplex cover switch (DUCSW) ............. Detects the opening and closing of the duplex cover.
56. Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)............... Detects when the waste toner box is full.
57. Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2)............... Detects when the waste toner box is near end.
58. Paper conveying unit switch
(PCUSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying unit.
59. Paper conveying cover switch
(DUCSW) .............................................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying cover.
60. Outer temperature sensor
(OTEMS)............................................... Detects the outside temperature and humidity.

2-2-5

2MN/2N1

(3) Motors

34
35
18

17

15

16

32
33

29

28
26

30

20
24

23
14

25
8

22
13

19

27
21

12
6

31

9
1

11
5

10

36
4

2
Machine front
Machine inside

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Paper feed motor (PFM) ....................... Drives the paper feed section.
2. Lift motor 1 (LM1).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1).
3. Lift motor 2 (LM2).................................. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2).
4. MP lift motor (MPLM) ............................ Operates the MP plate.
5. Polygon motor K (PM-K) ....................... Drives the polygon mirror K.
6. Polygon motor M (PM-M)...................... Drives the polygon mirror M.
7. Polygon motor C (PM-C)....................... Drives the polygon mirror C.
8. Polygon motor Y (PM-Y) ....................... Drives the polygon mirror Y.
9. Registration motor (RM)........................ Drives the registration section.
10. Middle motor (MM)................................ Drives the paper conveying section.
11. Drum motor K (DRM-K) ........................ Drives the drum unit K.
12. Drum motor M (DRM-M) ....................... Drives the drum unit M.
13. Drum motor C (DRM-C) ........................ Drives the drum unit C.
14. Drum motor Y (DRM-Y) ........................ Drives the drum unit Y.
15. Toner motor K (TM-K) ........................... Replenishes toner to the developer unit K.
16. Toner motor M (TM-M) .......................... Replenishes toner to the developer unit M.
17. Toner motor C (TM-C)........................... Replenishes toner to the developer unit C.
2-2-6

Machine rear

2MN/2N1
18. Toner motor Y (TM-Y) ........................... Replenishes toner to the developer unit Y.
19. Developer motor K (DEVM-K)............... Drives the developer unit K.
20. Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) ... Drives the developer units M, C and Y.
21. Vibration motor K (VM-K) ...................... Toner lump in the developer unit K vibrates.
22. Vibration motor M (VM-M)..................... Toner lump in the developer unit M vibrates.
23. Vibration motor C (VM-C) ..................... Toner lump in the developer unit C vibrates.
24. Vibration motor Y (VM-Y) ...................... Toner lump in the developer unit Y vibrates.
25. LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) .............. Drives LSU dust shield glass cleaning system.
26. Waste toner motor (WTM)..................... Drives waste toner system.
27. Transfer motor (TRM) ........................... Drives the transfer section.
28. Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) .......... Drives the transfer cleaning section.
29. Color release motor (CRM)................... Drives separation of primary transfer rollers M, C, and Y.
30. Transfer skew motor (TRSM)................ Drives skew of transfer tension roller.
31. Transfer release motor (TRRM) ............ Drives separation of secondary transfer roller.
32. Fuser motor (FUM) ............................... Drives the fuser section.
33. Fuser release motor (FURM) ................ Drives fuser pressure release.
34. Eject motor (EM) ................................... Drives the eject section.
35. Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) ........................ Drives the duplex section.
36. Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) ........................ Drives the duplex section.

2-2-7

2MN/2N1

(4) Fan motors

16
14

15

23
13
12
1

8,9

18

19

20

17

10,11

4
7

17,18
19,20

21

Machine front

22

Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Motors

1. Toner fan motor 1 (TFM1) ..................... Cools the toner container section.
2. Toner fan motor 2 (TFM2) ..................... Cools the toner container section.
3. Developer fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) ........ Cools the developer section.
4. Developer fan motor 2 (DEVFM2) ........ Cools the developer section.
5. Exhaust fan motor 1 (EXFM1) .............. Cools the machine inside.
6. Exhaust fan motor 2 (EXFM2) .............. Cools the machine inside.
7. LSU fan motor (LSUFM) ....................... Cools the laser scanner unit section.
8. Belt fan motor 1 (BLFM1)...................... Cools the transfer belt section.
9. Belt fan motor 2 (BLFM2)...................... Cools the transfer belt section.
10. Fuser edge fan motor 1 (FUEFM1)....... Cools the fuser section (edge).
11. Fuser edge fan motor 2 (FUEFM2)....... Cools the fuser section (edge).
12. Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM)............. Cools the fuser section (front side).
13. Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) ............. Cools the fuser section (rear side).
14. Eject front fan motor 1 (EFFM1) ........... Cools the eject section (front side).
15. Eject front fan motor 2 (EFFM2) ........... Cools the eject section (front side).
16. Eject rear fan motor (ERFM)................. Cools the eject section (rear side).
2-2-8

2MN/2N1
17. Fuser fan motor 1 (FUFM1) .................. Cools the fuser section.
18. Fuser fan motor 2 (FUFM2) .................. Cools the fuser section.
19. Eject fan motor 1 (EFM1)...................... Cools the eject section.
20. Eject fan motor 2 (EFM2)...................... Cools the eject section.
21. IH fan motor (IHFM) .............................. Cools the fuser IH PWB.
22. Power source fan motor (PSFM) .......... Cools the power source section.
23. Controller fan motor (CONFM).............. Cools the controller section.

2-2-9

2MN/2N1-3

(5) Others

17
7
16

13
14

12

11

10
8

6
1
3
5

2
4

Machine front
Machine inside

15

Machine rear

Figure 2-2-5 Others


1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 1.
2. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ................ Primary paper feed from cassette 2.
3. Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1) ........................ Controls the drive of the assist roller.
4. Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2) ........................ Controls the drive of the assist roller.
5. Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)............ Controls the drive of vertical conveying section.
6. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) .......... Controls primary paper feed from the MP tray.
7. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL).................. Controls the feedshift guide.
8. Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) .................. Controls the ID sensor cleaning.
9. Cleaning lamp K (CL-K) ........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (black).
10. Cleaning lamp M (CL-M)....................... Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum
(magenta).
11. Cleaning lamp C (CL-C)........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (cyan).
12. Cleaning lamp Y (CL-Y) ........................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (yellow).
13. Fuser IH (FIH) ....................................... Heats the heat roller (fuser belt).
14. Fuser thermostat (FTS)......................... Prevents overheating of the heat roller (fuser belt).
15. Cassette heater (CH) ............................ Dehumidifies the cassette section (option).
16. Hard disk (HDD).................................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
17. LCD back light (LCDBL)........................ Back lighting of LCD.
2-2-10

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-1 Main PWB


2-3 Operation of the PWBs

YC16

YC21

YC22
2

YC12

12

25
50

13

26

10

14

YC5

1
11
B1 B4
11 12

YC20

YC7

B2 B3

1 2

YC23

YS4

3
1

YS2

YC27
U1

YC32
8

U6

YC1

YC24
7
15
1

YC8

YS1

YC9
1

1
41

YC3

7
40

YC18
1

YC2
YC14

48
7

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph
2-3-1

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC1

GND

Ground

Connected to
hard disk

SATATXDP_C2H

HDD data signal

SATATXDN_C2H

HDD data signal

GND

Ground

SATARXDN_H2C

HDD data signal

SATARXDP_H2C

HDD data signal

GND

Ground

YC3

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

EGSCLK

0/3.3 V DC

Clock signal

EGSI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

EGSDIR

0/3.3 V DC

Engine communication direction signal

EGSBSY

0/3.3 V DC

Engine busy signal

EGSO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

EGSIRN

0/3.3 V DC

Engine interrupt signal

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

10

HOLD_ENG

0/3.3 V DC

Engine hold signal

11

SLEEP

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep signal

12

HSYNDD_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

13

HSYNDD_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

14

HSYNCC_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

15

HSYNCC_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

16

HSYNCB_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

17

HSYNCB_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

18

HSYNCA_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

19

HSYNCA_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

20

VSYNDD_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

21

VSYNDD_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

22

VSYNCD_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

VSYNCD_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

23

VSYNCB_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

24

VSYNCB_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

25

VSYNCA_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

26

VSYNCA_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

27

GND

Ground

2-3-2

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC3

28

TCLKP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

Connected to
engine PWB

29

TCLKN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

30

GND

31

TCP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

32

TCN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

33

GND

34

TBP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

35

TBN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

36

GND

37

TAP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

38

TAN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

39

GND

Ground

40

SGND

Ground

YC5

TD1+

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

Connected to
ethernet

TD1-

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

TD2+

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

TD2-

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

CT1

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

CT2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

TD3+

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

TD3-

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

TD4+

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

10

TD4-

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data

11

GRLED_A1

0/3.3 V DC

LED emitter signal

12

GRLED_K1

0/3.3 V DC

LED emitter signal

13

YWLED_A2

0/3.3 V DC

LED emitter signal

14

YWLED_K2

0/3.3 V DC

LED emitter signal

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-3

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC8

RESET0

0/3.3 V DC

Reset signal

Connected to
interface
PWB

WAKEUP0

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

AUDIO0

Analog

Audio signal

GND

Ground

USB_DP0

I/O

USB data signal

USB_DN0

I/O

USB data signal

VBUS0

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to IFPWB

GND

Ground

RESET1

0/3.3 V DC

Reset signal

10

WAKEUP1

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

11

AUDIO1

Analog

Audio signal

12

GND

Ground

13

USB_DP1

I/O

USB data signal

14

USB_DN1

I/O

USB data signal

15

VBUS1

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to IFPWB

YC9

GND

Ground

Connected to
interface
PWB

5V_CUT0

0/3.3 V DC

5 V DC cut signal

GND

Ground

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to IFPWB

GND

Ground

5V_CUT1

0/3.3 V DC

5 V DC cut signal

YC12

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power output

Connected to
operation
PWB

LED

Not used

GND

Ground

C2P_SDAT

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) OPWB transmission signal

WETCLK

P2C_SDAT

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) OPWB received signal

AIRWET

Not used

C2P_MODE1

0/3.3 V DC

LCD control signal

AIRTEMP

Not used

10

C2P_MODE2

0/3.3 V DC

Buzzer control signal

11

P2C_OK_KEY

0/3.3 V DC

OK key signal

12

PRESTN

0/3.3 V DC

Reset signal

13

3.3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power output

Not used

2-3-4

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

YC16

GND

Connected to
CF card

D3

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

D4

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

D5

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

D6

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

D7

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

/CE1

0/3.3 V DC

A10

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

/OE

0/3.3 V DC

10

A9

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

11

A8

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

12

A7

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

13

VCC

0/3.3 V DC

14

A6

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

15

A5

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

16

A4

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

17

A3

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

18

A2

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

19

A1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

20

A0

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal

21

D0

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

22

D1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

23

D2

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

24

WP

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

25

/CD2

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

26

/CD1

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

27

D11

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

28

D12

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

29

D13

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

30

D14

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

31

D15

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

32

/CE2

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

33

/VS1

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

34

/IORD

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

35

/IOWD

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

36

/WE

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

37

RDY/BSY

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

Voltage
-

Description
Ground

2-3-5

Control signal

Control signal

Control signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC16

38

VCC

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

Connected to
CF card

39

CSEL

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

40

VS2

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

41

RESET

0/3.3 V DC

Reset signal

42

/WAIT

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

43

INPACK

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

44

/REG

0/3.3 V DC

REG signal

45

BVD2

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

46

BVD1

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

47

D8

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

48

D9

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

49

D10

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

50

GND

Ground

YC20

D1

VBUS

5 V DC

5 V DC power output

Connected to
USB

D2

D-_D

I/O

USB data signal

D3

D+_D

I/O

USB data signal

D4

GND

Ground

H1

GND_D

Ground

H2

VBUS_H

5 V DC

5 V DC power output

H3

D-_H

I/O

USB data signal

H4

D+_H

I/O

USB data signal

YC21

VBUS

5 V DC

5 V DC power output

Connected to
USB host

DATA -

I/O

USB data signal

DATA +

I/O

USB data signal

ID

Not used

GND

Ground

YC23

SPEED_CONTR
OL

0/5 V DC

CONFM: On/Off

Connected to
controller fan
motor

GND

Ground

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power output to CONFM

2-3-6

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC24

+12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from PSPWB

Connected to
power source
PWB

+12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from PSPWB

+12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from PSPWB

+12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from PSPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC27

GND

Ground

Connected to
hard disk

+5V_HDD

5 V DC

5 V DC power to HDD1

GND

Ground

2-3-7

Description

2MN/2N1-1

YC18

1
1

YC20

A1

YC19

A19

YC49

U4

YC16

U1

15

YC23 YC22
YC21

YC24

28

B1

YC15

YC25

B1

12
14
7

B10

1 B19

20

22

2 1

YC17 11

YC12

21

64

YC48
22

11

YC10
50

40

YC9

12

12

YC11

50

YC7

YC8

YC50 40

YC46 40

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-8

YC47 40

40

U8

YC5

20

64

1 50

YC4

YC6

60

YC13

12 6

B20

A1

A1

YC26

A10

YC3

10

YC2

B16

B1

A1

A16

1 YC1
13
12
B1

YC27

A20

24
1

2-3-2 Engine PWB

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power from FPWB1

GND

Ground

12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from FPWB1

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from FPWB1

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from FPWB1

YC2

GND

Ground

Connected to
front PWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

+24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FRPWB

+24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FRPWB

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FRPWB

+3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to FRPWB

10

+3.3V1

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to FRPWB

YC3

A1

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TRCM

Connected to
transfer belt
unit

A2

GND

Ground

A3

ICL_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM: On/Off

A4

ICL_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal

A5

ICL_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM ready signal

A6

ICL_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM drive switch signal

A7

RLS_MOT_DR

0/24 V DC

CRM: On/Off

A8

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CRM

A9

GND

Ground

A10 RLS_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

CRS: On/Off

A11 5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to CRS

A12 ZIG_MOT_DR_C
CW

0/24 V DC

TRSM: On/Off (CCW)

A13 ZIG_MOT_DR_C
W

0/24 V DC

TRSM: On/Off (CW)

A14 GND

Ground

A15 BLT_INDEX

Not used

2-3-9

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector
YC3
Connected to
transfer belt
unit

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

A16 5V

Ground

B1

GND

Ground

B2

ZIG_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

TRSS: On/Off

B3

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to TRSS

B4

GND

Ground

B4

GND

Ground

B5

BLT_SPEED

0/3.3 V DC

TRBLS: On/Off

B6

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to TRBLS

B7

TEMP

Analog

TEMP signal

B8

ZIG_REV_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

TRES: On/Off

B9

GND

Ground

B10 5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to TRES

B11 3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to TRPWB

B12 EEP_SCL2

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

B13 EEP_SDA2

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

B14 GND

Ground

B15 A0

Not used

B16 A1

Not used

YC4

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 2

FEED_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

PFM: On/Off

FEED_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal

FEED_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

PFM ready signal

FEED_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

PFM drive switch signal

FEED_CL1_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL1: On/Off

FEED_CL2_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL2: On/Off

ASIST_CL2

0/24 V DC

ASCL2: On/Off

LIFT_MOT2_REM

0/24 V DC

LM2: On/Off

10

GND

Ground

11

LIFT_MOT1_REM
1

0/24 V DC

LM1: On/Off

12

CAS2_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW2: On/Off

13

CAS2_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

14

CAS2_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

15

CAS2_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

16

CAS1_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW1: On/Off

2-3-10

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC4

17

CAS1_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

Connected to
feed PWB 2

18

CAS1_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

19

CAS1_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

20

GND

Ground

21

CAS2_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(L): On/Off

22

CAS2_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(U): On/Off

23

CAS1_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(L): On/Off

24

CAS1_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(U): On/Off

25

LIFT_MOT1_LOC
K

0/3.3 V DC

LM1 lock signal

26

LIFT_MOT2_LOC
K

0/3.3 V DC

LM2 lock signal

27

CURRENT_SIG

0/3.3 V DC

Current signal

28

V-FEED_CL

0/24 V DC

PCCL: On/Off

29

COVER_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PCCSW: On/Off

30

FEED2_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

PFPCS1: On/Off

31

CAS1_P0

0/3.3 V DC

FS1: On/Off

32

CAS1_LIFT_UP

0/3.3 V DC

LS1: On/Off

33

GND

Ground

34

CAS1_EMPTY

0/3.3 V DC

PS1: On/Off

35

PICK_SOL1_RET

0/24 V DC

PUSOL1: On/Off (RET)

36

PICK_SOL1_REM

0/24 V DC

PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT)

37

CAS2_P0

0/3.3 V DC

FS2: On/Off

38

CAS2_LIFT_UP

0/3.3 V DC

LS2: On/Off

39

CAS2_EMPTY

0/3.3 V DC

PS2: On/Off

40

PICK_SOL2_RET

0/24 V DC

PUSOL2: On/Off (RET)

41

PICK_SOL2_REM

0/24 V DC

PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT)

42

GND

Ground

43

REG_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

RS: On/Off

44

FEED1_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

PCS: On/Off

45

BEND_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

RDS: On/Off

46

MID_MOT_PH

0/3.3 V DC

MM control signal

47

MID_MOT_REM(
ROL_CL)

0/3.3 V DC

MM/MCL: On/Off

48

MID_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal

49

MID_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

MM control signal

50

ASIST_CL1

0/24 V DC

ASCL1: On/Off

2-3-11

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC5

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

M_TEMP

Not used

LOOP_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LPS: On/Off

GND

Ground

EDGE_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

FUFM: On/Off

DU1_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

DUM1 control signal

DU1_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal

DU1_MOT_REM(
CL_H)

0/3.3 V DC

DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off

GND

Ground

10

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFM: On/Off

11

DU_ENTER_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

DUS1: On/Off

12

TCON_SET

Not used

13

GND

Ground

14

TRANS_REM

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM: On/Off

15

TRANS_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal

16

TRANS_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM ready signal

17

TRANS_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM drive switch signal

18

TRANS_BRK

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM break signal

19

GND

Ground

20

DRM_BK_REM

Not used

21

DRM_BK_RDY

Not used

22

DRM_BK_DIR

Not used

23

DRM_BK_BRK

Not used

24

GND

Ground

25

DLP_BK_REM

Not used

26

DLP_BK_CLK

Not used

27

DLP_BK_RDY

Not used

28

DLP_BK_DIR

Not used

29

GND

Ground

30

DRM_CLR_REM

Not used

31

DRM_BK_CLR_C
LK

Not used

32

DRM_CLR_RDY

Not used

33

DRM_CLR_DIR

Not used

34

GND

Ground

35

DLP_CLR_REM

Not used

2-3-12

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC5

36

DLP_CLR_CLK

Not used

Connected to
feed PWB 1

37

DLP_CLR_RDY

Not used

38

DLP_CLR_DIR

Not used

39

GND

Ground

40

REG_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

RM control signal

41

REG_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal

42

REG_MOT_REM(
CL)

0/3.3 V DC

RM/RCL: On/Off

43

GND

Ground

44

IH_FAN_L

0/24 V DC

IHFM: On/Off

45

IH_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

IHFM: On/Off

46

IH_PWB_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

IHFM alarm signal

47

POWER_OFF

0/3.3 V DC

Power off signal

48

DRM_HEAT

Not used

49

IH_PWB_FAN_AL
M(U)

Not used

50

GND

Ground

YC6

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

MAIL_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL serial communication data signal

NC

MAIL_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL clock signal

MAIL_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL serial communication data signal

MAIL_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

MAIL ready signal

MAIL_SEL

0/24 V DC

MAIL select signal

GND

Ground

MAIN_HEAT

Not used

10

SUB_HEAT

Not used

11

ZEROC

Not used

12

FSR_RELAY

0/3.3 V DC

Fuser relay signal

13

PRESS_REM

Not used

14

EXIT_REAR_FAN
_L

0/24 V DC

ERFM: On/Off

15

EXIT_REAR_FAN
_H

0/24 V DC

ERFM: On/Off

16

GND

Ground

Not used

2-3-13

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC6

17

FSR_CL_REM

Not used

Connected to
feed PWB 1

18

FSR_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

FUM: On/Off

19

FSR_MOT_CLK

20

FSR_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

FUM ready signal

21

FSR_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

FUM drive switch signal

22

FSR_MOT_BRK

0/3.3 V DC

FUM break signal

23

GND

Ground

24

MPF_TABLE

0/3.3 V DC

MPTSW: On/Off

25

MPF_WID1

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

26

MPF_WID2

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

27

MPF_WID3

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

28

MPF_LNG

0/3.3 V DC

MPPLSW: On/Off

29

GND

Ground

30

MPF_PPR

0/3.3 V DC

MPPS: On/Off

31

MPF_UP

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS1: On/Off

32

MPF_DOWN

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS2: On/Off

33

MPF_JAM

0/3.3 V DC

MPFS: On/Off

34

MPF_CL

0/24 V DC

MPPFCL: On/Off

35

MPF_LIF2

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

36

MPF_LIFT1

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

37

GND

Ground

38

TC_MOT_LOCK

Not used

39

TC_TONER_LED

Not used

40

TONER_FULL

Not used

41

TC_TONER_VCO
NT

Not used

42

INTER_LOCK

Not used

43

DU2_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

DUM2 control signal

44

DU2_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal

45

DU2_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off

46

GND

Ground

47

DU_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

DUCSW: On/Off

48

DU_FAN

Not used

49

PRESS_MOT_RE
M1

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

50

PRESS_MOT_RE
M2

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

51

PRESS_RLS_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

TRRS: On/Off

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal

2-3-14

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC6

52

DU_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

DUS2: On/Off

Connected to
feed PWB 1

53

BELT_JAM_SENS

Not used

54

GND

Ground

55

CLN_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (RET)

56

CLN_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)

57

REG_SENS_R_S

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

58

REG_SENS_R_P

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

59

REG_R_LED

Analog

IDS2 control signal

60

GND

Ground

61

REG_SENS_F_S

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

62

REG_SENS_F_P

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

63

REG_F_LED

Analog

IDS1 control signal

64

GND

Ground

YC7

GND

Ground

Connected to
front PWB

WTNR_SET

Not used

INTER_LOCK

Not used

IH_CORE_SENS

Not used

IH_CORE_MOT_
REM

Not used

IH_CORE_CLK

Not used

WTNR_LED

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal

IH_COIL_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

FUFFM alarm signal

IH_COIL_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

FUFFM: On/Off

10

IH_COIL_FAN_L

0/24 V DC

FUFFM: On/Off

11

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFFM: On/Off

12

VIB_MOT_REM

0/24 V DC

VM: On/Off

13

JUNC_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)

14

JUNC_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (RET)

15

GND

Ground

16

EXIT_MAIN_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

EFS1: On/Off

17

EXIT_FEED_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

SBS: On/Off

18

SB_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

EM: On/Off

19

SB_MOT_PH

0/3.3 V DC

EM control signal

20

SB_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal


2-3-15

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC7

21

SB_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

EM control signal

Connected to
front PWB

22

SB_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

EM drive switch signal

23

GND

Ground

24

WTNR_FULL

Analog

WTS1 detection signal

25

THOP_DIR

Not used

26

DLP_FAN_CLR_
H

0/24 V DC

DEVFM1: On/Off

27

DLP_FAN_CLR_L

0/24 V DC

DEVFM1: On/Off

28

WTNR_SET

Analog

WTS2 detection signal

29

WTNR_NEAR(M)

Analog

WTS2 detection signal

30

WTNR_NEAR_V
CONT

0/3.3 V DC

WTS2 control signal

31

GND

Ground

32

ROT_MOT_REM

Not used

33

ROT_MOT_CLK

Not used

34

ROT_MOT_PD

Not used

35

ROT_MOT_DIR

Not used

36

ROT_SUB_SENS

Not used

37

THOP_MOT_Bk

Not used

38

THOP_MOT_M

Not used

39

THOP_MOT_C

Not used

40

THOP_MOT_Y

Not used

41

GND

Ground

42

ENCODE_ Bk

Not used

43

ENCODE_M

Not used

44

ENCODE_C

Not used

45

ENCODE_Y

Not used

46

THOP_ Bk

Not used

47

THOP_M

Not used

48

THOP_C

Not used

49

THOP_Y

Not used

50

GND

Ground

2-3-16

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC8

SGND

Ground

Connected to
high voltage
PWB 2

SGND

Ground

SP_CNT

Analog

Separation bias control voltage

T2_CNT

Analog

Secondary transfer bias control voltage

T2_OFF_REM

0/3.3 V DC

Separation bias: On/Off

T_REM

0/3.3 V DC

Secondary transfer bias: On/Off

FB_CONT

0/3.3 V DC

Primary transfer cleaning bias: On/Off

T1_CONT_Bk

Analog

Primary transfer bias K control voltage

T1_CONT_M

Analog

Primary transfer bias M control voltage

10

T1_CONT_C

Analog

Primary transfer bias C control voltage

11

T1_CONT_Y

Analog

Primary transfer bias Y control voltage

12

T1_CLR_OFF_RE
M

0/3.3 V DC

Primary transfer control signal

YC9

MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal

Connected to
motor control PWB

MOT_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data


signal

MOT_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

MOT_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data


signal

MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB ready signal

EMERGENCY

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

BLT_SPEED

0/3.3 V DC

TBLS: On/Off

BLT_INDEX

Not used

DRM_INDEX_BK

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-K control signal

10

DRM_INDEX_M

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-M control signal

11

DRM_INDEX_C

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-C control signal

12

DRM_INDEX_Y

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Y control signal

13

GND

Ground

14

GND

Ground

15

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MCPWB

16

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MCPWB

17

BLT_BRAKE

Not used

18

BLT_VM

Not used

2-3-17

Description

MCPWB select signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

YC9

19

BLT_REM

Not used

Connected to
motor control PWB

20

MOT_DATA_SET

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

21

DRM_ON

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

22

BLT_FG

Not used

YC10

GND

Ground

Connected to
front PWB

DRM_INDEX_Bk

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-K control signal

ERS_Bk

0/24 V DC

CL-K: On/Off

TPD_Bk_1

Analog

TS-K detection signal

DLP_VCONT_Bk
_1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-K control signal

TPD_TEMP_Bk

Analog

Developer thermistor K detection signal

GND

Ground

DRM_INDEX_M

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-M control signal

ERS_M

0/24 V DC

CL-M: On/Off

10

TPD_M_1

Analog

TS-M detection signal

11

DLP_VCONT_M_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-M control signal

12

TPD_TEMP_M

Analog

Developer thermistor M detection signal

13

GND

Ground

14

DRM_INDEX_C

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-C control signal

15

ERS_C

0/24 V DC

CL-C: On/Off

16

TPD_C_1

Analog

TS-C detection signal

17

DLP_VCONT_C_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-C control signal

18

TPD_TEMP_C

Analog

Developer thermistor C detection signal

19

GND

Ground

20

TN_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

21

GND

22

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

23

GND

24

EEP_SDA1

25

GND

Ground

26

TPD_Y_1

Analog

TS-Y detection signal

27

DLP_VCONT_Y_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-Y control signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

Ground

Ground

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

2-3-18

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

YC10

28

TPD_TEMP_Y

Analog

Developer thermistor Y detection signal

Connected to
front PWB

29

ERS_Y

0/24 V DC

CL-Y: On/Off

30

DRM_INDEX_Y

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Y control signal

31

FRONT_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

FRCSW: On/Off

32

GND

Ground

33

I2C_SCL

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

34

GND

35

I2C_SDA

36

GND

Ground

37

LSU_FAN

0/24 V DC

LSUFM: On/Off

38

CLEAN_MOT_LO
CK

0/3.3 V DC

WTM lock signal

39

CLEAN_MOT_RE
M

0/24 V DC

WTM: On/Off

40

GND

Ground

YC11

GND

Ground

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

DATA_2PBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

DATA_2NBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

GND

Ground

GAIN_FIX_BK

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

PARA_SIG_P2_B
K

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

PARA_SIG_P1_B
K

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

PARA_SIG_P0_B
K

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

INT_ST_1_BK

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

10

INT_ST_2_BK

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

11

PARA_SIG_P3_2
BK

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

12

GND

Ground

13

DATA_4PBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

14

DATA_4NBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

I/O

Voltage

Description

Ground

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

2-3-19

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC11

15

GND

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

16

DATA_3PBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

17

DATA_3NBK(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

18

GND

19

DATA_2P_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

20

DATA_2N_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

21

GND

Ground

22

GAIN_FIX_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

23

PALA_STG_P2_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

24

PALA_STG_P1_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

25

PALA_STG_P0_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

26

INT_ST_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

27

GND

Ground

28

DATA_2P_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

29

DATA_2N_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

30

GND

Ground

31

GAIN_FIX_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

32

PALA_STG_P2_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

33

PALA_STG_P1_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

34

PALA_STG_P0_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

35

INT_ST_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

36

GND

Ground

37

DATA_2P_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

38

DATA_2N_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

39

GND

Ground

40

GAIN_FIX_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

41

PALA_STG_P2_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

42

PALA_STG_P1_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

43

PALA_STG_P0_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

44

INT_ST_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

45

GND

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-20

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC11

46

EEPROM_CS_1_
BK

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

47

IDD_CS_1_BK

0/3.3 V DC

48

EEPROM_CS_2_
BK

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal

49

IDD_CS_2_BK

0/3.3 V DC

50

EEPROM_CS_M

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal

51

IDD_CS_M

0/3.3 V DC

52

EEPROM_CS_C

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal

53

IDD_CS_C

0/3.3 V DC

54

EEPROM_CS_Y

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal

55

IDD_CS_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

56

SGND

Ground

57

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

58

SGND

Ground

59

SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

60

SGND

61

SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

62

SGND

63

CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

64

SGND

Ground

YC12

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

LOCK_BK

0/3.3 V DC

PM-K lock signal

REM_BK

0/24 V DC

PM-K: On/Off

GND

Ground

DATA_1PBK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

DATA_1NBK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

GND

SDCLK_BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal

GND

Ground

10

PARA_SIG_P4_B
K

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

11

PARA_SIG_P3_B
K

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

12

CUALM_BK

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K alarm signal

APCPWB-K control signal

APCPWB-K control signal

APCPWB-M control signal

APCPWB-C control signal

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-21

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC12

13

LSU_TH_BK

Analog

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

14

BD_BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K

15

GND

16

CLK_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal

17

LOCK_M

0/3.3 V DC

PM-M lock signal

18

REM_M

0/24 V DC

PM-M: On/Off

19

GND

Ground

20

DATA_1P_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

21

DATA_1N_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

22

GND

23

SDCLK_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal

24

SGND

Ground

25

PARA_SIG_P4_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

26

PARA_SIG_P3_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

27

CUALM_M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M alarm signal

28

LSU_TH_M

Analog

LSU thermistor M detection signal

29

BD_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M

30

GND

31

CLK_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal

32

LOCK_C

0/3.3 V DC

PM-C lock signal

33

REM_C

0/24 V DC

PM-C: On/Off

34

GND

Ground

35

DATA_1P_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

36

DATA_1N_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

37

GND

38

SDCLK_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal

39

GND

Ground

40

PARA_SIG_P4_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

41

PARA_SIG_P3_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

42

CUALM_C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C alarm signal

43

LSU_TH_C

Analog

LSU thermistor C detection signal

44

BD_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C

45

GND

46

CLK_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal

47

LOCK_Y

0/3.3 V DC

PM-Y lock signal

48

REM_Y

0/24 V DC

PM-Y: On/Off

49

GND

Ground

LSU thermistor K detection signal

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-22

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC12

50

DATA_1P_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

51

DATA_1N_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

52

GND

53

SDCLK_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal

54

GND

Ground

55

PARA_SIG_P4_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

56

PARA_SIG_P3_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

57

CUALM_Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y alarm signal

58

LSU_TH_Y

Analog

LSU thermistor Y detection signal

59

BD_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y

60

GND

Ground

YC13

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

GND

Ground

3.3V3

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from FPWB1

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from FPWB1

YC15

GND

Ground

Connected to
the LSU relay
PWB

+3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to LSURPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

+5V_AN

5 V DC

5 V DC power to LSURPWB

+5V_AN

5 V DC

5 V DC power to LSURPWB

Ground

2-3-23

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC16

GND

Connected to
high voltage
PWB 1

AC_MAIN_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC charger roller Y clock signal

DC_MAIN_REM

0/3.3 V DC

DC main charger Y: On/Off

DC_MAIN_CNT_
Y

PWM

DC charger roller Y control signal

MAIN_IDC_Y

PWM

DC charger roller Y control signal

AC_SLV_CLK_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias Y clock signal

DC_SLV_CNT_Y

PWM

DC sleeve bias Y control voltage

DC_MAG_CNT_Y

PWM

DC magnet bias Y control voltage

AC_SLV_CNT_Y

PWM

AC sleeve bias Y control voltage

10

AC_MAIN_CNT_
Y

PWM

AC charger roller Y control signal

11

DISCHARGE_Y

PWM

Main charger Y control signal

12

AC_MAG_CNT_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y control voltage

13

AC_MAG_CLK_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y clock signal

14

DC_REC_CNT

PWM

DC bias Y control voltage

15

N.C

Not used

16

DC_REC_REM

PWM

DC bias C control voltage

17

AC_MAG_CLK_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C clock signal

18

AC_MAG_CNT_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C control voltage

19

DISCHARGE_C

PWM

Main charger C control signal

20

AC_MAIN_CNT_
C

PWM

AC charger roller C control signal

21

AC_SLV_CNT_C

PWM

AC sleeve bias C control voltage

22

DC_MAG_CNT_C

PWM

DC magnet bias C control voltage

23

DC_SLV_CNT_C

PWM

DC sleeve bias C control voltage

24

AC_SLV_CLK_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias C clock signal

25

DC_MAG_REM

0/3.3 V DC

DC main charger C: On/Off

26

MAIN_IDC_C

PWM

DC charger roller C control signal

27

DC_MAIN_CNT_
C

PWM

DC charger roller C control signal

28

GND

Ground

Ground

2-3-24

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC17

GND

Ground

Connected to
high voltage
PWB 1

DC_MAIN_CNT_
M

PWM

DC charger roller Y control signal

MAIN_IDC_M

PWM

DC charger roller M control signal

AC_SLV_CLK_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias M clock signal

DC_SLV_CNT_M

PWM

DC sleeve bias M control voltage

DC_MAG_CNT_
M

PWM

DC magnet bias M control voltage

AC_SLV_CNT_M

PWM

AC sleeve bias M control voltage

AC_MAIN_CNT_
M

PWM

AC charger roller M control signal

DISCHARGE_M

PWM

Main charger M control signal

10

AC_MAG_CNT_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M control voltage

11

AC_MAG_CLK_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M clock signal

12

AC_MAG_CLK_B
k

PWM

DC charger roller K control signal

13

AC_MAG_CNT_B
k

PWM

DC charger roller K control signal

14

DISCHARGE_Bk

PWM

Main charger K control signal

15

AC_SLV_CNT_Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias K clock signal

16

DC_MAG_CNT_B
k

PWM

DC sleeve bias K control voltage

17

DC_SLV_CNT_Bk

PWM

DC magnet bias K control voltage

18

AC_SLV_CLK_Bk

PWM

AC sleeve bias K control voltage

19

AC_MAIN_CNT_
Bk

PWM

AC charger roller K control signal

20

MAIN_IDC_Bk

PWM

DC charger roller K control signal

21

DC_MAIN_CNT_
Bk

PWM

DC charger roller K control signal

22

GND

Ground

YC18

DF_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB clock signal

Connected to
1000-sheet/
4000-sheet
finisher

DF_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data


signal

DF_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

DF_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data


signal

DF_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

DFMPWB ready signal

DF_DET

0/3.3 V DC

DFMPWB detection signal

GND

Ground

2-3-25

Description

DFMPWB select signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC19

A1

PF_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal

Connected to
paper feeder/
large capacity feeder,
toner fan
motor 1/2,
belt fan
motor 1/2
and exhaust
fan motor 1/2

A2

PF_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data


signal

A3

PF_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

A4

PF_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data


signal

A5

PF_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB ready signal

A6

PF_PAUSE

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB pause signal

A7

PF_CAS1_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB control signal

A8

PF_CAS2_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB control signal

A9

3.3V4

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB

A10 GND

Ground

A11 GND

Ground

A12 TN_FAN1

0/24 V DC

TFM1: On/Off

A13 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TFM1

A14 TN_FAN2

0/24 V DC

TFM2: On/Off

A15 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TFM2

A16 LVU_FAN1

Not used

A17 24V1

Not used

A18 LVU_FAN2

Not used

A19 24V1

Not used

B1

SIDE_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal (side)

B2

SIDE_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data


signal (side)

B3

SIDE_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

B4

SIDE_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data


signal (side)

B5

SIDE_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB ready signal (side)

B6

SIDE_PAUSE

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB pause signal (side)

B7

CAS1_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB control signal (side)

B8

CAS2_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB control signal (side)

B9

MULTI_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PFMPWB control signal (side)

B10 3.3V4

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB (side)

B11 GND

Ground

B12 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BLFM1

2-3-26

Description

PFMPWB select signal

PFMPWB select signal (side)

2MN/2N1
Connector
YC19
Connected to
paper feeder/
large capacity feeder,
toner fan
motor 1/2,
belt fan
motor 1/2
and exhaust
fan motor 1/2

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

B13 BELT_FAN1

0/24 V DC

BLFM1: On/Off

B14 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BLFM2

B15 BELT_FAN2

0/24 V DC

BLFM2: On/Off

B16 DLP_FAN1

0/24 V DC

EXFM1: On/Off

B17 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EXFM1

B18 DLP_FAN2

0/24 V DC

EXFM2: On/Off

B19 24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EXFM2

YC20

DECAL_HP

Not used

Connected to
bridge unit

GUIDE_REM

Not used

GUIDE_CLK

Not used

GUIDE_PD

Not used

GUIDE_DIR

Not used

DECAL_REM

Not used

DECAL_PH

Not used

DECAL_CLK

Not used

DECAL_PD

Not used

10

DECAL_DIR

Not used

11

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BRSOL

12

MAIL_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

BRSOL: On/Off (ACT)

13

MAIL_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

BRSOL: On/Off (RET)

14

GND

Ground

15

EXIT_COV_OPE
N

0/3.3 V DC

BRECSW: On/Off

16

GND

Ground

17

EXIT_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

BRES: On/Off

18

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to BRES

19

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to BRES

20

BRIDGE2 REM

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM2: On/Off

21

BRIDGE2 PH

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM2 control signal

22

BRIDGE2 CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM2 clock signal

23

BRIDGE2 PD

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM2 control signal

24

BRIDGE2 DIR

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM2 drive switch signal

25

BRIDGE1 REM

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM2: On/Off

26

BRIDGE1 PH

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM1 control signal

27

BRIDGE1 CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM1 clock signal

28

BRIDGE1 PD

0/3.3 V DC

2-3-27

BRCM1 control signal

2MN/2N1-1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC20

29

BRIDGE1 DIR

0/3.3 V DC

BRCM1 drive switch signal

Connected to
bridge unit

30

BRIDGE_SENS 2

0/3.3 V DC

BRCS2: On/Off

31

BRIDGE_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

BRCSW: On/Off

32

BRIDGE_SENS 1

0/3.3 V DC

BRCS1: On/Off

33

GND

Ground

34

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to BRPWB

35

GND

Ground

36

GND

Ground

37

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BRPWB

38

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BRPWB

YC21

CCW

0/24 V DC

LSUCM: On/Off (CCW)

Connected to
LSU cleaning motor

CW

0/24 V DC

LSUCM: On/Off (CW)

YC22

LVU_FAN

0/24 V DC

PSFM: On/Off

Connected to
power source
fan motor

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PSFM

YC26

A1

EDGE_FAN_ALM
(F)

0/3.3 V DC

FUEFM2 alarm signal

Connected to
fuser unit and
fuser IH PWB

A2

GND

Ground

A3

EDGE_FAN

0/24 V DC

FUEFM2: On/Off

A4

EDGE_FAN_ALM
(R)

0/3.3 V DC

FUEFM1 alarm signal

A5

GND

Ground

A6

EDGE_FAN

0/24 V DC

FUEFM1: On/Off

A7

FSR_FAN_ALM

0/3.3 V DC

FURFM alarm signal

A8

GND

Ground

A9

FSR_FAN

0/24 V DC

FURFM: On/Off

A10 FSR_RLS_DR_C
CW

0/24 V DC

FURM: On/Off (CCW)

2-3-28

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector
YC26

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

A11 FSR_RLS_DR_C
W

0/24 V DC

FURM: On/Off (CW)

Connected to A12 GND


fuser unit and A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS
fuser IH PWB
A14 +5V

Ground

0/3.3 V DC

FUES: On/Off

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FUES

A15 GND

Ground

A16 FSR_RLS_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

FURS: On/Off

A17 +5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FURS

A18 GND

Ground

A19 FSR_BLT_PLS

0/3.3 V DC

FUBLS: On/Off

A20 +5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FUBLS

B1

PRESS_HEART_
REM

Not used

B2

IH_RXD

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

B3

IH_TXD

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

B4

ROTATION

0/3.3 V DC

FIH control signal

B5

IH_HEAT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

FIH: On/Off

B6

+3.3V2

3.3 V DC

5 V DC power to FIH

B7

GND

Ground

B8

GND

Ground

B9

PRESS_TH

Analog

FTH4 detection signal

B10 GND

Ground

B11 EDGE_TH

Analog

FTH2 detection signal

B12 GND

Ground

B13 GUIDE_TH1

Not used

B14 GND

Ground

B15 GUIDE_TH2

Analog

FTH3 detection signal

B16 MAIN_TH2

Analog

FTH1 detection signal

B17 MAIN_TH1

Analog

FTH1 detection signal

B18 GND

Ground

B19 +24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to BRFM

B20 BRIDGE_FAN

0/24 V DC

BRFM: On/Off

Ground

YC27

GND

Connected to
RFID PWB,
toner motor
K/M/C/Y and
screw sensor K/M/C/Y

SDA

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

SCL

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to RFPWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TM-Y

2-3-29

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC27

TMOT_Y_DR

0/24 V DC

TM-Y: On/Off

Connected to
RFID PWB,
toner motor
K/M/C/Y and
screw sensor K/M/C/Y

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TM-C

TMOT_C_DR

0/24 V DC

TM-C: On/Off

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TM-M

10

TMOT_M_DR

0/24 V DC

TM-M: On/Off

11

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TM-K

12

TMOT_K_DR

0/24 V DC

TM-K: On/Off

13

GND

Ground

14

ENCODE_Y

0/3.3 V DC

SRS-Y: On/Off

15

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to SRS-Y

16

GND

Ground

17

ENCODE_C

0/3.3 V DC

SRS-C: On/Off

18

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to SRS-C

19

GND

Ground

20

ENCODE_M

0/3.3 V DC

SRS-M: On/Off

21

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to SRS-M

22

GND

Ground

23

ENCODE_K

0/3.3 V DC

SRS-K: On/Off

24

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to SRS-K

YC46

SLLEP_INT

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep signal

Connected to
main PWB

G6_EG_SCLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine clock signal

G6_EG_SI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

G6_EG_SDIR

0/3.3 V DC

Engine communication direct signal

G6_EG_SBSY

0/3.3 V DC

Engine busy signal

G6_EG_SO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

G6_EG_IRN

0/3.3 V DC

I2C_SCL

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

I2C_SDA

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

10

HLD_ENG

0/3.3 V DC

Engine hold signal

11

SLEEP_ENG

0/3.3 V DC

Engine sleep signal

12

HSYNC_DP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

13

HSYNC_DN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

14

HSYNC_CP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

15

HSYNC_CN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

16

HSYNC_BP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

17

HSYNC_BN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

2-3-30

Description

Engine interrupt signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC46

18

HSYNC_AP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

Connected to
main PWB

19

HSYNC_AN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

20

VSYNC_DP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

21

VSYNC_DN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

22

VSYNC_CP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

23

VSYNC_CN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

24

VSYNC_BP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

25

VSYNC_BN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

26

VSYNC_AP

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

27

VSYNC_AN

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

28

GND

29

SAR_VCLK_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

30

SAR_VCLK_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

31

GND

32

SAR_CH3_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

33

SAR_CH3_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

34

GND

35

SAR_CH2_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

36

SAR_CH2_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

37

GND

38

SAR_CH1_P

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

39

SAR_CH1_N

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal

40

GND

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-31

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-3 Power source PWB


l
YC17

YC3
3

TB4

4 3 18

1
1

YC15 YC14

YC12

6 16

YC16

YC13

YC10

YC11

YC2

TB3
2

YC1
TB5

TB1 TB2

YC5
4

YC18
YC7
1

YC4

1
1

YC9

YC8

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-32

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

TB

LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power input

Connected to
AC inlet and
main power
switch

NEUTRAL

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power input

LIVE

Not used

NEUTRAL

Not used

DH_LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power input

YC1

MSW_OUT

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to MSW

Connected to
main power
switch

MSW_IN

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power input from MSW

YC3

IH_NEUTRAL

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to FIHPWB

Connected to
fuser IH PWB

NC

Not used

IH_LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to FIHPWB

YC8

DH_LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to CH

Connected to
cassette
heater

DH_LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to CH

NC

Not used

NC

Not used

DH_NEUTRAL

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to CH

DH_NEUTRAL

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to CH

YC9

DH_LIVE

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to PFCH

Connected to
paper feeder/
large capacity feeder

DH_NEUTRAL

120 V AC
220-240 V AC

AC power output to PFCH

YC10

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to LSURPWB

Connected to
LSU relay
PWB

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to LSURPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

2-3-33

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC11

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MCPWB

Connected to
motor control PWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MCPWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MCPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC12

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB1

Connected to
feed PWB 1

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB1

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB1

12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power to FPWB1

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC13

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to paper feeder/large


capacity feeder

Connected to
paper feeder/
large capacity feeder,
1000-sheet/
4000-sheet
finisher and
ISC PWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to paper feeder/large


capacity feeder

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to ISCPWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to ISCPWB

24V1

Not used

24V1

Not used

GND

Ground

10

GND

Ground

11

GND

Ground

12

GND

Ground

13

GND

Ground

14

GND

Ground

15

GND

Ground

16

GND

Ground

2-3-34

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC16

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to HVPWB1

Connected to
high voltage
PWB 1

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to HVPWB1

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to HVPWB1

PGND

Ground

PGND

Ground

PGND

Ground

YC17

POWER_OFF

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep mode signal: On/Off

Connected to
feed PWB 1

DRUM_HEAT_RE
M

0/3.3 V DC

FH: On/Off

GND

Ground

FSR_RELAY_RE
M

Not used

2-3-35

Description

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-4 Front PWB


12

12

YC16

YC15

12

YC20

12

YC18

7 8
11 12

54
19 20

12

YC14
11 12

12

YC13
11 12

YC1

1 2

YC12
10

11 12

YC2

1 2

YC11

40

39

11 12

50
1 2

49

YC3

YC10

11 10

1 2

YC17
1

YC9
9
11 12

1
3

YC7

11

1 2

YC4

9
1

YC19

8
2

YC5

YC8
10
2
1
39
40

10

YC6

20
19
19 20
22 21

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-4 Front PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph
2-3-36

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC1

+3.3V1

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from EPWB

Connected to
engine PWB

+3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from EPWB

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power from EPWB

+24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power from EPWB

+24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power from EPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

10

GND

Ground

YC2

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

DRM_INDEX_Bk

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-K control signal

ERS_Bk_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-K: On/Off

TPD_ Bk_1

Analog

TS-K detection signal

DLP_VCONT_Bk
_1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-K control signal

TPD_TEMP_Bk

Analog

Developer thermistor K detection signal

GND

Ground

DRM_INDEX_M

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-M control signal

ERS_ M_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-M: On/Off

10

TPD_M_1

Analog

TS-M detection signal

11

DLP_VCONT_M_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-M control signal

12

TPD_TEMP_M

Analog

Developer thermistor M detection signal

13

GND

Ground

14

DRM_INDEX_C

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-C control signal

15

ERS_C_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-C: On/Off

16

TPD_C_1

Analog

TS-C detection signal

17

DLP_VCONT_C_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-C control signal

18

TPD_TEMP_C

Analog

Developer thermistor C detection signal

19

GND

Ground

20

TN_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

21

GND

22

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

Ground

2-3-37

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

YC2

23

GND

Connected to
engine PWB

24

EEP_SDA1

25

GND

Ground

26

TPD_Y_1

Analog

TS-Y detection signal

27

DLP_VCONT_Y_
1

0/3.3 V DC

TS-Y control signal

28

TPD_TEMP_Y

Analog

Developer thermistor Y detection signal

29

ERS_Y_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-Y: On/Off

30

DRM_INDEX_ Y

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Y control signal

31

FRONT_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

FRCSW: On/Off

32

GND

Ground

33

I2C_SCL

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

34

GND

35

I2C_SDA

36

GND

Ground

37

LSU_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

LSUFM: On/Off

38

CLEAN_MOT_LO
CK

0/3.3 V DC

WTM lock signal

39

CLEAN_MOT_RE
M

0/24 V DC

WTM: On/Off

40

GND

Ground

YC3

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

WTNR_SET

Not used

INTER_LOCK

Not used

IH_CORE_SENS

Not used

IH_CORE_MOT_
REM

Not used

IH_CORE_CLK

Not used

WTNR_LED

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal

IH_COIL_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

FUFFM alarm signal

IH_COIL_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

FUFFM: On/Off

10

IH_COIL_FAN_L

0/24 V DC

FUFFM: On/Off

11

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFFM: On/Off

12

VIB_MOT__FAN

0/24 V DC

VM: On/Off

13

JUNC_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)

14

JUNC_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (RET)

I/O

I/O

Voltage
-

Description
Ground

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

Ground

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

2-3-38

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC3

15

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

16

EXIT_MAIN_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

EFS1: On/Off

17

EXIT_FEED_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

SBS: On/Off

18

SB_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

EM: On/Off

19

SB_MOT_PH

0/3.3 V DC

EM control signal

20

SB_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal

21

SB_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

EM control signal

22

SB_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

EM drive switch signal

23

GND

Ground

24

WT_VCONT_FUL
L

0/3.3 V DC

WTS1 control signal

25

THOP_DIR

Not used

26

DLP_FAN_CLR_
H

0/24 V DC

DEVFM1: On/Off

27

DLP_FAN_CLR_L

0/24 V DC

DEVFM1: On/Off

28

WTNR_FULL

Analog

WTS1 detection signal

29

WTNR_NEAR

Analog

WTS2 detection signal

30

WTNR_VCONT

0/3.3 V DC

WTS2 control signal

31

GND

Ground

32

WTNR_LED

0/3.3 V DC

WTS1 control signal

33

THOP_MOT_Y_D
IR

Not used

34

THOP_MOT_C_D
IR

Not used

35

THOP_MOT_BK_
DIR

Not used

36

EXIT_SUB_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

EFS2: On/Off

37

THOP_MOT_Bk_
REM

Not used

38

THOP_MOT_M_R
EM

Not used

39

THOP_MOT_C_R
EM

Not used

40

THOP_MOT_Y_R
EM

Not used

41

GND

Ground

42

ENCODE_ Bk

Not used

43

ENCODE_M

Not used

2-3-39

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC3

44

ENCODE_C

Not used

Connected to
engine PWB

45

ENCODE_Y

Not used

46

THOP_ Bk

Not used

47

THOP_M

Not used

48

THOP_C

Not used

49

THOP_Y

Not used

50

GND

Ground

YC4

5V

Not used

Connected to
fuser front
fan motor
and eject
front fan
motor

LED1

Not used

5V

Not used

LED2

Not used

IH_COIL_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

FUFFM alarm signal

GND

Ground

IH_COIL_FAN

0/24 V DC

FUFFM: On/Off

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EFFM

EXIT FAN

0/24 V DC

EFFM: On/Off

YC5

ROT_CORE A

Not used

Connected to
eject unit

ROT_CORE B

Not used

ROT_CORE A/

Not used

ROT_CORE B/

Not used

GND

Ground

EXIT_SUB_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

EFS2: On/Off

5V

DC5V

5V DC power to EFS2

SB_MOT B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

EM drive control signal

SB_MOT A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

EM drive control signal

10

SB_MOT B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

EM drive control signal

11

SB_MOT A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

EM drive control signal

12

GND

Ground

13

EXIT_FEED_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

SBS: On/Off

14

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to SBS

15

GND

Ground

16

EXIT_PAPER_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

EFS1: On/Off

2-3-40

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC5

17

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to EFS1

Connected to
eject unit

18

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FSSOL

19

JUNC_SOL_KYU

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (ACT)

20

JUNC_SOL_FUK

0/24 V DC

FSSOL: On/Off (RET)

YC6

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DEVFM2

Connected to
developer
fan motor 1/2

DLP_FAN_Bk

0/24 V DC

DEVFM2: On/Off

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DEVFM1

DLP_FAN_M

0/24 V DC

DEVFM1: On/Off

YC7

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-K

Connected to
drum unit K

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

GND

Ground

DRM_ADR0_Bk

Not used

DRM_ADR1_Bk

Not used

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CL-K

ERS_Bk_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-K: On/Off

YC8

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to WTS1

Connected to
waste toner
sensor 1/2

WTNR_FULL

Analog

WTS1 detection signal

WTNR_LED

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal

5V_LED

5 V DC

5 V DC power to WTS1

GND

Ground

WTNR_NEAR

Analog

WTS2 detection signal

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to WTS2

WTNR_SP

Not used

WTNR_LED

Not used

10

5V_LED

Not used

2-3-41

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC9

TPD_TEMP_BK

Analog

Developer thermistor K detection signal

Connected to
developer
unit K

DLP_VCONT_BK
_1

0/3.3 V DC

DEVPWB-K control signal

TPD_BK_1

Analog

DEVPWB-K detection signal

TN_CLK_BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

GND

Ground

DLP_ADR1_BK

Not used

DLP_ADR0_BK

Not used

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

10

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to TS-K

11

3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to VM-K

12

VIB_MOT

0/24 V DC

VM-K: On/Off

YC10

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-M

Connected to
drum unit M

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

GND

Ground

DRM_ADR0_M

Not used

DRM_ADR1_M

Not used

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CL-M

ERS_M_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-M: On/Off

YC11

TPD_TEMP_M

Analog

Developer thermistor M detection signal

Connected to
developer
unit M

DLP_VCONT_M_
1

0/3.3 V DC

DEVPWB-M control signal

TPD_M_1

Analog

DEVPWB-M detection signal

TN_CLK_M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

GND

Ground

DLP_ADR1_M

Not used

DLP_ADR0_M

Not used

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

10

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to TS-M

11

3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to VM-M

12

VIB_MOT

0/24 V DC

VM-M: On/Off

2-3-42

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC12

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

Connected to
drum unit C

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

GND

Ground

DRM_ADR0_C

Not used

DRM_ADR1_C

Not used

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CL-C

ERS_C_REM

0/24 V DC

CL-C: On/Off

YC13

TPD_TEMP_C

Analog

Developer thermistor C detection signal

Connected to
developer
unit C

DLP_VCONT_C_
1

0/3.3 V DC

DEVPWB-C control signal

TPD_C_1

Analog

DEVPWB-C detection signal

TN_CLK_C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

GND

Ground

DLP_ADR1_C

Not used

DLP_ADR0_C

Not used

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

10

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to TS-C

11

3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to VM-C

12

VIB_MOT

0/24 V DC

VM-C: On/Off

YC14

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-Y

Connected to
drum unit Y

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

GND

Ground

DRM_ADR0_ Y

Not used

DRM _ADR1_ Y

Not used

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CL-Y

ERS_ Y _REM

0/24 V DC

CL-Y: On/Off

2-3-43

Description
3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-C

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC15

TPD_TEMP_Y

Analog

Developer thermistor Y detection signal

Connected to
developer
unit Y

DLP_VCONT_Y_
1

0/3.3 V DC

DEVPWB-Y control signal

TPD_Y_1

Analog

DEVPWB-Y detection signal

TN_CLK_Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

GND

Ground

DLP_ADR1_Y

Not used

DLP_ADR0_Y

Not used

EEP_SDA1

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

EEP_SCL1

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

10

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to TS-Y

11

3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to VM-Y

12

VIB_MOT

0/24 V DC

VM-Y: On/Off

YC16

NC

Not used

Connected to
outer temperature sensor
1, front cover
switch, LSU
fan motor
and waste
toner motor

NC

Not used

NC

Not used

NC

Not used

FRONT_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

FRCSW: On/Off

GND

Ground

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to LSUFM

LSU_FAN_OUT

DC0V/24V

LSUFM: On/Off

CL_MOT1

DC0V/24V

WTM: On/Off

10

CL_MOT2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to WTM

11

GND

Ground

YC17

GND

Not used

Connected to
eject front fan
motor 2

LED1

Not used

5V

Not used

LED2

Not used

IH_COIL_FAN_AL
M

Not used

GND

Not used

IH_COIL_FAN

Not used

24V

DC24V

24 V DC power to EFFM2

EXIT_FAN

DC0V/24V

EFFM2: On/Off

2-3-44

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC19

3.3V1

3.3 V DC

Connected to
outer temperature sensor
2

I2C_SDA

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal

GND

I2C_SCL

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal

3.3 V DC power to OTEMS2

Ground

2-3-45

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-5 Feed PWB 1

YC12

YC19

20

18

YC18

YC17

YC14

7
2

YC15

1
6

YC9

12
1

YC13

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-5 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-46

YC8

YC20

YC10

11

15

YC11
1
4

YC23

YC16

YC27

9 4

YC3
8
1

YC4

YC2

YC26 1

50

YC5

YC1

YC22 YC25

64

10

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

REG_F_LED

Analog

IDS1 control signal

REG_SENS_F_P

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

REG_SENS_F_S

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

GND

Ground

REG_R_LED

Analog

IDS2 control signal

REG_SENS_RP(
BK)

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

REG_SENS_RS(
BK)

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

CLN_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)

10

CLN_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (RET)

11

GND

Ground

12

BELT_JAM_SENS

Not used

13

DU_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

DUS2: On/Off

14

PRESS_RLS_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

TRRS: On/Off

15

PRESS_MOT_RE
M2

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

16

PRESS_MOT_RE
M1

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

17

DU_FAN

Not used

18

DU_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

DUCSW: On/Off

19

GND

Ground

20

DU2_REM(CL_L
OW)

0/3.3 V DC

DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off

21

DU2_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal

22

DU2_PD

0/3.3 V DC

DUM2 control signal

23

INTER_LOCK

Not used

24

GND

Not used

25

GND

Not used

26

GND

Not used

27

GND

Not used

28

GND

Ground

29

MPF_LIFT1

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

30

MPF_LIF2

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

31

MPF_CL

0/24 V DC

MPPFCL: On/Off

32

MPF_JAM

0/3.3 V DC

MPFS: On/Off

2-3-47

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

33

MPF_DOWN

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS2: On/Off

Connected to
engine PWB

34

MPF_UP

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS1: On/Off

35

MPF_PPR

0/3.3 V DC

MPPS: On/Off

36

GND

Ground

37

MPF_LNG

0/3.3 V DC

MPPLSW: On/Off

38

MPF_WID3

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

39

MPF_WID2

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

40

MPF_WID1

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

41

MPF_TABLE

0/3.3 V DC

MPTSW: On/Off

42

GND

Ground

43

FSR_MOT_BRK

0/3.3 V DC

FUM break signal

44

FSR_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

FUM drive switch signal

45

FSR_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

FUM ready signal

46

FSR_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal

47

FSR_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

FUM: On/Off

48

GND

Ground

49

GND

Ground

50

EXIT_REAR_FAN
_H

0/24 V DC

ERFM: On/Off

51

EXIT_REAR_FAN
_L

0/24 V DC

ERFM: On/Off

52

PRESS_REM

Not used

53

FSR_RELAY

0/3.3 V DC

Fuser relay signal

54

ZEROC

Not used

55

SUB_HEAT_REM

Not used

56

MAIN_HEAT_RE
M

Not used

57

GND

Ground

58

JOB_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

JSFSSOL: On/Off

59

JOB_OPEN_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

JSOCS: On/Off

60

JOB_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

JSEM drive switch signal

61

JOB_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JSEM clock signal

62

JOB_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

JSEM: On/Off

63

JOB_SET

0/3.3 V DC

Job separator set signal

64

GND

Ground

2-3-48

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC2

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

GND

Ground

DRM_HEAT_REM

Not used

POWER_OFF

0/3.3 V DC

Power off signal

IH_PWB_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

IHFM alarm signal

IH_PWB_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

IHFM: On/Off

IH_PWB_FAN_L

Not used

GND

Ground

REG_MOT_REM(
CL)

0/3.3 V DC

RM/RCL: On/Off

10

REG_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal

11

REG_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

RM control signal

12

GND

Ground

13

DLP_MOT_CLR_
DIR

Not used

14

DLP_MOT_CLR_
RDY

Not used

15

DLP_MOT_CLR_
CLK

Not used

16

DLP_MOT_CLR_
REM

Not used

17

GND

Ground

18

DRM_MOT_CLR_
DIR

Not used

19

DRM_MOT_CLR_
RDY

Not used

20

DRM_MOT_BK_C
LR_CLK

Not used

21

DRM_MOT_CLR_
REM

Not used

22

GND

Ground

23

DLP_MOT_BK_DI
R

Not used

24

DLP_MOT_BK_R
DY

Not used

25

DLP_MOT_BK_C
LK

Not used

26

DLP_MOT_BK_R
EM

Not used

2-3-49

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC2

27

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

28

DRM_MOT_BK_B
RK

Not used

29

DRM_MOT_BK_D
IR

Not used

30

DRM_MOT_BK_R
DY

Not used

31

DRM_MOT_BK_R
EM

Not used

32

GND

Ground

33

TRANS_MOT_BR
K

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM break signal

34

TRANS_MOT_DI
R

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM drive switch signal

35

TRANS_MOT_RD
Y

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM ready signal

36

TRANS_MOT_CL
K

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal

37

TRANS_MOT_RE
M

0/3.3 V DC

TRCM: On/Off

38

GND

Ground

39

TCON_SET

Not used

40

DU_ENTER_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

DUS1: On/Off

41

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFM: On/Off

42

GND

Ground

43

DU1_MOT_REM(
CL_H)

0/3.3 V DC

DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off

44

DU1_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal

45

DU1_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

DUM1 control signal

46

EDGE_FAN_H

0/24 V DC

FUFM: On/Off

47

GND

Ground

48

LOOP_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LPS: On/Off

49

M_TEMP

Not used

50

GND

Ground

2-3-50

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC3

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EPWB

Connected to
engine PWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power to EPWB

GND

Ground

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to EPWB

GND

Ground

YC4

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

Connected to
power source
PWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

12V

12 V DC

12 V DC power from PSPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC5

GND

Ground

Connected to
power source
PWB

DRM_HEAT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

FH: On/Off

POWER_OFF

0/3.3 V DC

Sleep mode signal: On/Off

YC10

GND

Ground

Connected to
ID sensor1/2
and cleaning
solenoid

M_TEMP

Not used

3.3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to IDS1

REG_F_LED

Analog

IDS1 control signal

GND

Ground

REG_SENS_F_P

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

REG_SENS_F_S

Analog

IDS1 detection signal

3.3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to IDS2

REG_R_LED

Analog

IDS2 control signal

10

GND

Ground

11

REG_SENS_R_P

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

12

REG_SENS_R_S

Analog

IDS2 detection signal

13

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to CLSOL

14

CLN_SOL_REM

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (ACT)

15

CLN_SOL_RET

0/24 V DC

CLSOL: On/Off (RET)

2-3-51

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC11

IH_PWB_FAN

0/24 V DC

IHFM: On/Off

Connected to
IH fan motor

GND

Ground

IH_PWB_FAN_AL
M

0/3.3 V DC

IHFM alarm signal

YC12

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB2

Connected to
feed PWB 2

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB2

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FPWB2

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC13

TRANS_MOT_BR
K

0/3.3 V DC

TRM break signal

Connected to
transfer
motor

TRANS_MOT_DI
R

0/3.3 V DC

TRM drive switch signal

TRANS_MOT_RD
Y

0/3.3 V DC

TRM ready signal

TRANS_MOT_CL
K

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal

TRANS_MOT_RE
M

0/24 V DC

TRM: On/Off

GND

Ground

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to TRM

GND

Not used

24V2

Not used

10

TANK_SET

Not used

YC14

REG_BK_LED

Not used

Connected to
relay PWB

REG_BK_SENS1
_P

Not used

REG_BK_SENS1
_S

Not used

BELT_JAM_SENS

Not used

DU_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

DUS2: On/Off

PRESS_RLS_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

TRRS: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to RYPWB

PRESS_RLSMOT
1

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

PRESS_RLSMOT
2

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

2-3-52

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC14

10

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to RYPWB

Connected to
relay PWB

11

DU_FAN

Not used

12

DU_CL_LOWER_
REM

0/24 V DC

DUCL2: On/Off

13

DU_OPEN_SW

0/3.3 V DC

DUCSW: On/Off

14

DU2_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

15

DU2_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

16

DU2_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

17

DU2_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

18

GND

Not used

YC15

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PCUSW

Connected to
paper conveying unit
switch

N.C

Not used

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PCUSW

YC16

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to HVPWB2

Connected to
high voltage
PWB 2

GND

Ground

YC17

GND

Ground

Connected to
relay PWB

GND

Ground

CLN_SOL_REM

Not used

24V2

Not used

MPF_LIFT_MOT_
B

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

MPF_LIFT_MOT_
A

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to RYPWB

MPF_CL_REM

0/24 V DC

MPPFCL: On/Off

MPF_JAM_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPFS: On/Off

10

MPF_LIFT_DOW
N_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS2: On/Off

11

MPF_LIFT_UP_S
ENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS1: On/Off

12

MPF_PPR_SET

0/3.3 V DC

MPPS: On/Off

13

LED_3.3V3

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to RYPWB

14

MPF_LNG

0/3.3 V DC

MPPLSW: On/Off

2-3-53

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC17

15

MPF_WID3

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

Connected to
relay PWB

16

MPF_WID2

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

17

MPF_WID1

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

18

MPF_TABLE

0/3.3 V DC

MPTSW: On/Off

19

GND

Ground

20

GND

Ground

YC18

FSR_MOT_BRK

0/3.3 V DC

FUM break signal

Connected to
fuser motor

FSR_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

FUM drive switch signal

FSR_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

FUM ready signal

FSR_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal

FSR_MOT_REM

0/24 V DC

FUM: On/Off

GND

Ground

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FUM

YC19

EXIT_REAR_FAN

0/24 V DC

ERFM: On/Off

Connected to
eject rear fan
motor

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to ERFM

YC20

MAIL_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL serial communication data

Connected to
job separator

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

NC

Not used

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MAIL

MAIL_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL clock signal

5V

5 V DC

MAIL_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MAIL serial communication data

MAIL_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

MAIL ready signal

10

MAIL_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

MAIL select signal

11

NC

Not used

2-3-54

Description

5 V DC power to MAIL

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC23

DU_ENTER_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

DUS1: On/Off

Connected to
relay PWB

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFM: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to RYPWB

DU_CL_UPPER_
REM

0/24 V DC

DUCL1: On/Off

GND

Ground

DU1_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

10

EDGE_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

FUFM: On/Off

11

LOOP_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LPS: On/Off

12

3.3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to RYPWB

YC25

REG_MOT_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

RM drive control signal

Connected to
registration
motor

REG_MOT_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

RM drive control signal

REG_MOT_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

RM drive control signal

REG_MOT_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

RM drive control signal

YC26

3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to EPWB

Connected to
engine PWB

3.3V3

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to EPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

YC27

MAIN_HEAT_RE
M

Not used

Connected to
fuser IH PWB

SUB_HEAT_REM

Not used

24V2

Not used

ZEROC

Not used

GND

Not used

GND

Ground

FSR_RELAY

0/3.3 V DC

Fuser relay signal

24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to IHPWB

PRESS_REM

Not used

2-3-55

Description

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-6 Feed PWB 2

13

24

YC10
50

YC5
5

12

YC8

YC7

15

YC3

28

YC4
14

YC12

YC2

15
1

YC11

YC13
3

YC1

YC6

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-6 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-56

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

GND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

FEED_MOT_REM

0/3.3 V DC

PFM: On/Off

FEED_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal

FEED_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

PFM ready signal

FEED_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

PFM drive switch signal

FEED_CL1_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL1: On/Off

FEED_CL2_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL2: On/Off

ASIST_CL2

0/24 V DC

ASCL2: On/Off

LIFT_MOT2_REM

0/24 V DC

LM2: On/Off

10

GND

Ground

11

LIFT_MOT1_REM
1

0/24 V DC

LM1: On/Off

12

CAS2_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW2: On/Off

13

CAS2_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

14

CAS2_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

15

CAS2_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

16

CAS1_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW1: On/Off

17

CAS1_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

18

CAS1_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

19

CAS1_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

20

GND

Ground

21

CAS2_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(L): On/Off

22

CAS2_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(U): On/Off

23

CAS1_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(L): On/Off

24

CAS1_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(U): On/Off

25

LIFT_MOT1_LOC
K

0/3.3 V DC

LM1 lock signal

26

LIFT_MOT2_LOC
K

0/3.3 V DC

LM2 lock signal

27

CURRENT_SIG

0/3.3 V DC

Current signal

28

V-FEED_CL

0/24 V DC

PCCL: On/Off

29

COVER_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

PCCSW: On/Off

30

FEED2_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

PFPCS1: On/Off

31

CAS1_P0

0/3.3 V DC

FS1: On/Off

32

CAS1_LIFT_UP

0/3.3 V DC

LS1: On/Off

33

GND

Ground

34

CAS1_EMPTY

0/3.3 V DC

PS1: On/Off

2-3-57

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

35

PICK_SOL1_RET

0/24 V DC

PUSOL1: On/Off (RET)

Connected to
engine PWB

36

PICK_SOL1_REM

0/24 V DC

PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT)

37

CAS2_P0

0/3.3 V DC

FS2: On/Off

38

CAS2_LIFT_UP

0/3.3 V DC

LS2: On/Off

39

CAS2_EMPTY

0/3.3 V DC

PS2: On/Off

40

PICK_SOL2_RET

0/24 V DC

PUSOL2: On/Off (RET)

41

PICK_SOL2_REM

0/24 V DC

PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT)

42

GND

Ground

43

REG_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

RS: On/Off

44

FEED1_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

PCS: On/Off

45

BEND_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

RDS: On/Off

46

MID_MOT_PH

0/3.3 V DC

MM control signal

47

MID_MOT_REM(
ROL_CL)

0/3.3 V DC

MM/MCL: On/Off

48

MID_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal

49

MID_MOT_PD

0/3.3 V DC

MM control signal

50

ASIST_CL1

0/24 V DC

ASCL1: On/Off

YC2

FEED_MOT_GAI
N

Not used

Connected to
paper feed
motor

FEED_MOT_DIR

0/3.3 V DC

PFM drive switch signal

FEED_MOT_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

PFM ready signal

FEED_MOT_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal

FEED_MOT_REM

0/24 V DC

PFM: On/Off

GND

Ground

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PFM

YC3

CAS1_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

Connected to
paper length
switch 1/2,
paper width
switch 1/2, lift
motor 1/2,
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/
(L) and paper
gauge sensor 2(U)/(L)

CAS1_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

GND

Ground

CAS1_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW1: On/Off

CAS1_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW1: On/Off

GND

Ground

CAS2_LNG1

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

CAS2_LNG2

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

GND

Ground

10

CAS2_LNG3

0/3.3 V DC

PLSW2: On/Off

11

CAS2_WID

0/3.3 V DC

PWSW2: On/Off

2-3-58

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC3

12

GND

Ground

Connected to
paper length
switch 1/2,
paper width
switch 1/2, lift
motor 1/2,
paper gauge
sensor 1(U)/
(L) and paper
gauge sensor 2(U)/(L)

13

LIFT_MOT1_RET

0/24 V DC

LM1: On/Off

14

LIFT_MOT1_DR

0/24 V DC

LM1: On/Off

15

LIFT_MOT2_RET

0/24 V DC

LM2: On/Off

16

LIFT_MOT2_DR

0/24 V DC

LM2: On/Off

17

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PGS1(U)

18

GND

Ground

19

CAS1_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(U): On/Off

20

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PGS1(L)

21

GND

Ground

22

CAS1_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS1(L): On/Off

23

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PGS2(U)

24

GND

Ground

25

CAS2_QUANT1

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(U): On/Off

26

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PGS2(L)

27

GND

Ground

28

CAS2_QUANT2

0/3.3 V DC

PGS2(L): On/Off

YC4

FEED_CL1_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL1: On/Off

Connected to
paper feed
clutch 1/2

24V2

24 V DC

PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1

FEED_CL2_REM

0/24 V DC

PFCL2: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PFCL2

YC5

NC

Not used

Connected to
paper conveying clutch

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PCCL

V-FEED_CL

0/24 V DC

PCCL: On/Off

YC6

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PCS

Connected to
paper conveying sensor and
paper conveying cover
switch

GND

Ground

FEED2_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

PCS: On/Off

FEED_COVER_O
PEN

0/3.3 V DC

PCCSW: On/Off

GND

Ground

2-3-59

Description

2MN/2N1-3
Connector

Pin

YC7

Connected to
middle motor,
regist deflection sensor,
middle sensor and registration
sensor

Signal

I/O

Voltage

MID_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

MM drive control signal

MID_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

MM drive control signal

MID_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

MM drive control signal

MID_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

MM drive control signal

BEND_SENS

Not used

GND

Not used

5V

Not used

GND

Ground

FEED1_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MS: On/Off

10

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MS

11

GND

Ground

12

REG_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

RS: On/Off

13

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to RS

14

MID_CL_REM

0/24 V DC

MCL: On/Off

15

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MCL

YC8

24V2

Not used

Connected to
primary
paper feed
unit

PICK_SOL1_REM

Not used

PICK_SOL1_RET

Not used

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PS1

GND

Ground

CAS1_EMPTY_S
ENS

0/3.3 V DC

PS1: On/Off

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to LS1

GND

Ground

CAS1_LIFT_UP_
SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LS1: On/Off

10

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FS1

11

CAS1_P0_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

FS1: On/Off

12

GND

Ground

13

24V2

Not used

14

PICK_SOL2_REM

Not used

15

PICK_SOL2_RET

Not used

16

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to PS2

17

GND

Ground

18

CAS2_EMPTY_S
ENS

0/3.3 V DC

PS2: On/Off

19

LED_5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to LS2

2-3-60

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC8

20

GND

Ground

Connected to
primary
paper feed
unit

21

CAS2_LIFT_UP_
SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LS2: On/Off

22

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FS2

23

CAS2_P0_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

FS2: On/Off

24

GND

Ground

YC10

ASIST_CL1

0/24 V DC

ASCL1: On/Off

Connected to
assist clutch
1

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to ASCL1

YC11

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to FPWB1

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB1

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FPWB1

YC12

ASIST_CL2

0/24 V DC

ASCL2: On/Off

Connected to
assist clutch
2

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to ASCL2

YC13

CURRENT_SIG

0/3.3 V DC

Current signal

Connected to
current PWB

GND

Ground

5V1

5 V DC

5 V DC power from CRPWB

2-3-61

Description

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-7 Relay PWB

YC6

YC5

10

9
2
1

YC15

YC2
1
1

YC12

YC3
16
20

1
8

YC4

YC7
1

YC1

YC8
1 6
3
1

YC9

YC14

18

12

11

YC13

YC10
1
1

YC16
8

YC11
9

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-7 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-62

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC1

GND

Not used

Connected to
feed PWB 1

DU2_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU_OPEN_SW

0/3.3 V DC

DUCSW: On/Off

DU_CL_LOWER_
REM

0/24 V DC

DUCL2: On/Off

DU_FAN

Not used

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power from FPWB1

10

PRESS_RLS_RE
M2

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

11

PRESS_RLS_RE
M1

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

12

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power from FPWB1

13

PRESS_RLS_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

TRRS: On/Off

14

DU_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

DUS2: On/Off

15

BELT_JAM_SENS

Not used

16

REG_BK_SENS1
_S

Not used

17

REG_BK_SENS1
_P

Not used

18

REG_BK_LED

Not used

YC2

GND

Ground

Connected to
MP tray unit

MPF_LNG

0/3.3 V DC

MPPLSW: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MPPLSW

MPF_WID3

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

MPF_WID2

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

GND

Ground

MPF_WID1

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

GND

Ground

MPF_TABLE

0/3.3 V DC

MPTSW: On/Off

2-3-63

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC3

LED_3.3V3

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW

Connected to
MP tray unit

GND

Ground

MPF_PPR_SET

0/3.3 V DC

MPPS: On/Off

GND

Ground

MPF_LIFT_UP_S
ENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS1: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MPLS1

GND

Ground

MPF_LIFT_DOW
N_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS2: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MPLS1

10

GND

Ground

11

MPF_JAM_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPFS: On/Off

12

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MPFS

13

MPF_CL_REM

0/24 V DC

MPPFCL: On/Off

14

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to MPPFCL

15

MPF_LIFT_DR_A

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

16

MPF_LIFT_DR_B

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

YC7

24V2

Not used

Connected to
duplex clutch
2, duplex
cover switch
and duplex
motor 2

DU_CL2_REM

Not used

DU_OPEN

0/3.3 V DC

DUCSW: On/Off

GND

Ground

DU2_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

DU2_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM2 drive control signal

YC9

GND

Ground

Connected to
duplex sensor 2

DU_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

DUS2: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to DUS2

2-3-64

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC10

LOOP_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LPS: On/Off

Connected to
loop sensor

GND

Ground

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to LPS

3.3V

Not used

REG_BK_LED

Not used

GND

Not used

REG_BK_SENS1
_P

Not used

REG_BK_SENS1
_S

Not used

GND

Not used

10

BELT_JAM_SENS

Not used

11

5V

Not used

YC11

GND

Ground

Connected to
duplex sensor 1, eject
fan motor
and duplex
clutch 1

DU_ENTER_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

DUS1: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to DUS1

EXIT_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

EFM1: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EFM1

EXIT_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

EFM2: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to EFM2

24V2

Not used

DU_CL_UPPER_
REM

Not used

YC12

GND

Ground

Connected to
feed PWB 1

GND

Ground

MPF_TABLE

0/3.3 V DC

MPTSW: On/Off

MPF_WID1

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

MPF_WID2

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

MPF_WID3

0/3.3 V DC

MPPWSW: On/Off

MPF_LNG

0/3.3 V DC

MPPLSW: On/Off

LED_3.3V3

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from FPWB1

MPF_PPR_SET

0/3.3 V DC

MPPS: On/Off

10

MPF_LIFT_UP_S
ENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS1: On/Off

2-3-65

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC12

11

MPF_LIFT_DOW
N_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPLS2: On/Off

Connected to
feed PWB 1

12

MPF_JAM_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

MPFS: On/Off

13

MPF_CL_REM

0/24 V DC

MPPFCL: On/Off

14

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power from FPWB1

15

MPF_LIFT_MOT_
A

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

16

MPF_LIFT_MOT_
B

0/24 V DC

MPLM: On/Off

17

24V2

Not used

18

ID_SOL_ACT

Not used

19

GND

Not used

20

GND

Not used

YC13

3.3V

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from FPWB1

Connected to
feed PWB 1

LOOP_SENS

0/3.3 V DC

LPS: On/Off

EDGE_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

FUFM: On/Off

DU1_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

GND

Ground

DU_CL_UPPER_
REM

0/24 V DC

DUCL1: On/Off

10

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power from FPWB1

11

EXIT_FAN

0/24 V DC

EFM: On/Off

12

DU_ENTER_SEN
S

0/3.3 V DC

DUS1: On/Off

YC14

GND

Ground

Connected to
transfer
release sensor and
transfer
release
motor

PRESS_RLS_SE
NS

0/3.3 V DC

TRRS: On/Off

5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to TRRS

PRESS_RLS_RE
M1

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

PRESS_RLS_RE
M2

0/24 V DC

TRRM: On/Off

NC

Not used

2-3-66

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

YC16

Connected to
duplex motor
1 and fuser
fan motor 1/2

Signal

I/O

Voltage

DU1_B/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_A/

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_B

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

DU1_A

0/24 V DC (pulse)

DUM1 drive control signal

EDGE_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

FUFM1: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FUFM1

EDGE_FAN_REM

0/24 V DC

FUFM2: On/Off

24V2

24 V DC

24 V DC power to FUFM2

2-3-67

Description

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-8 Motor control PWB

YC5
11
12

1
2

1
2

12

YC3

YC7

16
17

YC1
1

11
12
2

YC4
YC2

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-8 Motor control PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-68

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC2

PGND

Ground

Connected to
power source
PWB

PGND

Ground

PGND

Ground

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

YC3

BLT_SPEED

0/3.3 V DC

TBLS: On/Off

Connected to
engine PWB

EMERGENCY

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

ENG_RDY

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB ready signal

ENG_SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data


signal

ENG_SEL

0/3.3 V DC

ENG_SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data


signal

ENG_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal

BLT_FG

Not used

MOT_ON

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

10

MOT_DATA_SET

0/3.3 V DC

MCPWB control signal

11

BLT_REM

Not used

12

BLT_VM

Not used

13

BLT_BRAKE

Not used

14

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MCPWB

15

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to MCPWB

16

SGND

Ground

17

SGND

Ground

2-3-69

Description

MCPWB select signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC4

DRM_C_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DRM-C: On/Off

Connected to
drum motor
C/Y

DRM_Y_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DRM-Y: On/Off

DRM_C_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-C control signal

DRM_Y_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Y control signal

DRM_C_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-C clock signal

DRM_Y_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-Y clock signal

DRM_C_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-C control signal

DRM_Y_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Y control signal

PGND

Ground

10

PGND

Ground

11

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DRM-C

12

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DRM-Y

YC5

DRM_BK_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DRM-Bk: On/Off

Connected to
drum motor
K/M

DRM_M_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DRM-M: On/Off

DRM_BK_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Bk control signal

DRM_M_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-M control signal

DRM_BK_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-Bk clock signal

DRM_M_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-M clock signal

DRM_BK_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-Bk control signal

DRM_M_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DRM-M control signal

PGND

Ground

10

PGND

Ground

11

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DRM-K

12

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DRM-M

2-3-70

Description

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

YC7

DLP_CL_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DEVM-CL: On/Off

Connected to
developer
motor CL/BK

DLP_CL_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DEVM-CL control signal

DLP_CL_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-CL clock signal

DLP_CL_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DEVM-CL control signal

PGND

Ground

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DEVM-CL

DLP_BK_CW/
CCW

0/24 V DC

DEVM-BK: On/Off

DLP_BK_LD

0/3.3 V DC

DEVM-BK control signal

DLP_BK_CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-BK clock signal

10

DLP_BK_Start/
Stop

0/3.3 V DC

DEVM-BK control signal

11

PGND

Ground

12

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power to DEVM-BK

2-3-71

Description

2MN/2N1-1

2-3-9 LSU relay PWB

29

30

YC5
YC6

1
9

2
10

2
5

YC4

29

30

YC8
1

YC7

29

30

YC10
2

1
5

YC9

29

30

YC12
1

2
5

YC11
63

YC2

60

64
59

1
1

YC3

10

YC1

* : Refer to the picture.


Figure 2-3-9 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram and photograph

2-3-72

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

YC1

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

Connected to
power source
PWB and
engine PWB

+24V1

24 V DC

24 V DC power from PSPWB

PGND

Ground

PGND

Ground

+5V1

5 V DC

5 V DC power from EPWB

+5V1

5 V DC

5 V DC power from EPWB

GND

Ground

GND

Ground

+3.3V2

3.3 V DC

3.3 V DC power from EPWB

10

PGND

Ground

YC2

SGND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

CLK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal

SGND

SDI

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

SGND

SDO

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

SGND

Ground

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

Control signal

SGND

Ground

10

LDD_CS Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

11

EEPROM CS Y

12

LDD_CS C

13

EEPROM CS C

14

LDD_CS M

15

EEPROM CS M

16

LDD_CS 2 Bk

17

EEPROM CS 2 Bk

18

LDD_CS 1 Bk

19

EEPROM CS 1 Bk

20

SGND

Ground

21

INT_ST Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

22

PALA_SIG P0 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

23

PALA_SIG P1 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

24

PALA_SIG P2 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

25

GAIN FIX Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

26

SGND

Ground

I/O
I
I/O
I
I/O
I
I/O
I
I/O

Voltage

Description

Ground

Ground

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal


0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal


0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal


0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal


0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal

2-3-73

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC2

27

DATA_2N_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

Connected to
engine PWB

28

DATA_2P_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

29

SGND

Ground

30

INT_ST 1 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

31

PALA_SIG P0 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

32

PALA_SIG P1 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

33

PALA_SIG P2 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

34

GAIN FIX C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

35

SGND

Ground

36

DATA_2N_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

37

DATA_2P_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

38

SGND

Ground

39

INT_ST M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

40

PALA_SIG P0 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

41

PALA_SIG P1 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

42

PALA_SIG P2 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

43

GAIN FIX M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

44

SGND

Ground

45

DATA_2N_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

46

DATA_2P_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

47

SGND

48

DATA_3NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

49

DATA_3PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

50

SGND

51

DATA_4NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

52

DATA_4PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

53

SGND

Ground

54

PALA_SIG
P3_2Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-74

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC2

55

INT_ST 2 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

Connected to
engine PWB

56

INT_ST 1 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

57

PALA_SIG P0 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

58

PALA_SIG P1 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

59

PALA_SIG P2 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

60

GAIN FIX Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

61

SGND

Ground

62

DATA_2NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

63

DATA_2PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

64

SGND

Ground

YC3

SGND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

BD Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y

LSU_TH Y

Analog

LSU thermistor Y detection signal

CUALM Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y alarm signal

PALA_SIG P3 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

PALA_SIG P4 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

SGND

Ground

SDCLK Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal

SGND

10

DATA_1N_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

11

DATA_1P_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

12

SGND

Ground

13

REM Y

0/24 V DC

PM-Y: On/Off

14

LOCK Y

0/3.3 V DC

PM-Y lock signal

15

CLK Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal

16

SGND

17

BD C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C

18

LSU_TH C

Analog

LSU thermistor C detection signal

19

CUALM C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C alarm signal

20

PALA_SIG P3 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

21

PALA_SIG P4 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

22

SGND

Ground

23

SDCLK C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-75

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC3

24

SGND

Connected to
engine PWB

25

DATA_1N_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

26

DATA_1P_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

27

SGND

Ground

28

REM C

0/24 V DC

PM-C: On/Off

29

LOCK C

0/3.3 V DC

PM-C lock signal

30

CLK C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal

31

SGND

32

BD M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M

33

LSU_TH M

Analog

LSU thermistor M detection signal

34

CUALM M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M alarm signal

35

PALA_SIG P3 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

36

PALA_SIG P4 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

37

SGND

Ground

38

SDCLK M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal

39

SGND

40

DATA_1N_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

41

DATA_1P_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

42

SGND

Ground

43

REM M

0/24 V DC

PM-M: On/Off

44

LOCK M

0/3.3 V DC

PM-M lock signal

45

CLK M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal

46

SGND

47

BD Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K

48

LSU_TH Bk

Analog

LSU thermistor K detection signal

49

CUALM Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K alarm signal

50

PALA_SIG P3 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

51

PALA_SIG P4 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

52

SGND

Ground

53

SDCLK Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal

54

SGND

55

DATA_1NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

56

DATA_1PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

2-3-76

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC3

57

SGND

Ground

Connected to
engine PWB

58

REM Bk

0/24 V DC

PM-K: On/Off

59

LOCK Bk

0/3.3 V DC

PM-K lock signal

60

CLK Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal

YC4

+24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PM-K

Connected to
polygon
motor K

PGND

Ground

P_REM Bk

0/24 V DC

PM-K: On/Off

P_LOCK Bk

0/3.3 V DC

PM-K lock signal

P_CLK Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal

YC5

SGND

Connected to
APC PWB K

BD Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K

LSU_TH Bk

Analog

LSU thermistor K detection signal

PALA_SIG
P3_2Bk

Not used

LDD_CS 2 Bk

Not used

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-K

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-K

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-K

LDD_CS 1 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

10

SDI1 BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

11

SDO1 BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

12

CLK1 BK

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal

13

EEPROM CS 1 Bk

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal

14

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

15

CUALM Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K alarm signal

16

INT_ST 2 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

17

INT_ST 1 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

18

PALA_SIG P0 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

19

PALA_SIG P1 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

20

PALA_SIG P2 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

21

PALA_SIG P3 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

22

PALA_SIG P4 Bk

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-K control signal

23

SDCLK Bk

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal

24

GAIN FIX Bk

0/3.3 V DC

Ground

2-3-77

APCPWB-K control signal

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC5

25

DATA_1NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

Connected to
APC PWB K

26

DATA_1PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

27

SGND

28

DATA_2NBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N)

29

DATA_2PBk(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P)

30

SGND

Ground

YC7

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PM-M

Connected to
polygon
motor M

PGND

Ground

P_REM M

0/24 V DC

PM-M: On/Off

P_LOCK M

0/3.3 V DC

PM-M lock signal

P_CLK M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal

YC8

SGND

Connected to
APC PWB M

BD M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M

LSU_TH M

Analog

LSU thermistor M detection signal

Not used

Not used

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-M

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-M

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-M

LDD_CS M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

10

SDI M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

11

SDO M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

12

CLK M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal

13

EEPROM CS 0 M

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal

14

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

15

CUALM M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M alarm signal

16

17

INT_ST M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

18

PALA_SIG P0 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

19

PALA_SIG P1 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

20

PALA_SIG P2 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-78

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC8

21

PALA_SIG P3 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

Connected to
APC PWB M

22

PALA_SIG P4 M

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-M control signal

23

SDCLK M

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal

24

GAIN FIX M

0/3.3 V DC

25

DATA_1N_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

26

DATA_1P_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

27

SGND

28

DATA_2N_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N)

29

DATA_2P_M(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P)

30

SGND

Ground

YC9

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PM-C

Connected to
polygon
motor C

PGND

Ground

P_REM C

0/24 V DC

PM-C: On/Off

P_LOCK C

0/3.3 V DC

PM-C lock signal

P_CLK C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal

YC10

SGND

Connected to
APC PWB C

BD C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C

LSU_TH C

Analog

LSU thermistor C detection signal

Not used

Not used

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-C

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-C

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-C

LDD_CS C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

10

SDI C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

11

SDO C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

12

CLK C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal

13

EEPROM CS 0 C

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal

14

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

15

CUALM C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C alarm signal

APCPWB-M control signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-79

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC10

16

Connected to
APC PWB C

17

INT_ST C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

18

PALA_SIG P0 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

19

PALA_SIG P1 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

20

PALA_SIG P2 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

21

PALA_SIG P3 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

22

PALA_SIG P4 C

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-C control signal

23

SDCLK C

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal

24

GAIN FIX C

0/3.3 V DC

25

DATA_1N_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

26

DATA_1P_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

27

SGND

28

DATA_2N_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N)

29

DATA_2P_C(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P)

30

SGND

Ground

YC11

24V

24 V DC

24 V DC power to PM-Y

Connected to
polygon
motor Y

PGND

Ground

P_REM Y

0/24 V DC

PM-Y: On/Off

P_LOCK Y

0/3.3 V DC

PM-Y lock signal

P_CLK Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal

YC12

SGND

Connected to
APC PWB Y

BD Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y

LSU_TH Y

Analog

LSU thermistor Y detection signal

Not used

Not used

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y

+5V

5 V DC

5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y

LDD_CS Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

10

SDI Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

APCPWB-C control signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-80

2MN/2N1
Connector

Pin

Signal

I/O

Voltage

Description

YC12

11

SDO Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

Connected to
APC PWB Y

12

CLK Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal

13

EEPROM CS Y

I/O

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal

14

MSET_N

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

15

CUALM Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y alarm signal

16

17

INT_ST Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

18

PALA_SIG P0 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

19

PALA_SIG P1 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

20

PALA_SIG P2 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

21

PALA_SIG P3 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

22

PALA_SIG P4 Y

0/3.3 V DC

APCPWB-Y control signal

23

SDCLK Y

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal

24

GAIN FIX Y

0/3.3 V DC

25

DATA_1N_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

26

DATA_1P_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

27

SGND

28

DATA_2N_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N)

29

DATA_2P_Y(LVD
S)

0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P)

30

SGND

APCPWB-Y control signal

Ground

Ground

2-3-81

2MN/2N1

This page is intentionally left blank.

2-3-82

2MN/2N1-3

2-4-1 Appendixes
2-4 Appendixes

(1) List of maintenance parts


Maintenance part name

Alternative
part No.

Paper feed pulley

Name used in parts list


PULLEY FEED

Part No.
302N406030

2N406030

Separation pulley

PULLEY RETARD

302N406040

2N406040

Forwarding pulley

PULLEY PICKUP

302N406030

2N406030

Lower duplex roller

PARTS ROLLER DU LOW SP

302K994470

2K994470

Middle duplex roller

PARTS ROLLER DU MID SP

302K994480

2K994480

Upper duplex roller

PARTS ROLLER DU UP SP

302K994491

2K994491

Eject roller

PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP

302MN94140

2MN94140

Eject roller B

PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP

302MN94140

2MN94140

Fan filter

PARTS FILTER FAN ASSY(V) SP

302LC94170

2LC94170

Developer filter

FILTER DLP COOLING

302LC33500

2LC33500

Transfer belt filter

PARTS FILTER BELT UNIT(V) SP

302LC94130

2LC94130

Toner filter

FILTER LEFT SIDE

302LC33370

2LC33370

Left filter

FILTER LEFT SIDE

302LC33370

2LC33370

Eject filter

PARTS FILTER EXIT UNIT SP

302K994101

2K994101

Name used in service manual

2-4-1

2MN/2N1-3

(2) Maintenance kits


Maintenance part name
Name used in service

Name used in parts list

MK-8505A/Maintenance kit
(600,000 pages)

MK-8505A/MAINTENANCE KIT

Parts No.

Alternative
part No.

1702LC0UN0

072LC0UN

Drum unit K

DK-8505 (K)

Developer unit K

DV-8505K

Transfer belt unit

TR-8505

Transfer roller

PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY


TRANSFER SP

1702LC0UN1

072LC0U1

MK-8505B/Maintenance kit
(600,000 pages)

MK-8505B/MAINTENANCE KIT

Drum unit C

DK-8505 (C)

Drum unit M

DK-8505 (M)

Drum unit Y

DK-8505 (Y)

Developer unit C

DV-8505C

Developer unit M

DV-8505M

Developer unit Y

DV-8505Y

1702LC0UN2

072LC0U2

MK-8505C/Maintenance kit
(300,000 pages)

MK-8505C/MAINTENANCE KIT

Fuser unit

FK-8500

Eject filter

PARTS FILTER EXIT UNIT SP

Toner filter / Left filter

FILTER LEFT SIDE

2-4-2

2MN/2N1-2

(3) Periodic maintenance procedures


Section
Test print

Section
Paper feed
,conveyingsection

Section
Transfer
section

Maintenance
part/location
Perform at the maximum print size

User
call
Test
print

300K/600K/
900K/1200K
Test print

Points and cautions

Maintenance
part/location
Paper feed pulley

User
call
Check
Clean

Separation pulley

Check
Clean

Check
Replace

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.


CH:performing U901 and check
feeding count: Target to replace at
150K.

P.1-5-7

Forwarding pulley

Check
Clean

Check
Replace

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.


CH:performing U901 and check
feeding count: Target to replace at
150K.

P.1-5-7

Guides

Clean

Clean

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

User
call
-

600K/1200K
Replace

Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-37

Replace

Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-41

Maintenance
part/location
Transfer belt unit
Transfer roller

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Check
Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Replace
CH:performing U901 and check
feeding count: Target to replace at
150K.

Page

2-4-3

Points and cautions

Page
P.1-5-7

Page

2MN/2N1-2

Section
Developer
section

Section
Drum
section

Section
Fuser section

Maintenance
part/location
Developer unit K

User
call
Clean

600K/1200K
Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Developer unit C

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Developer unit M

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Developer unit Y

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Maintenance
part/location
Drum unit K

User
call
Clean

600K/1200K
Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Drum unit C

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Drum unit M

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Drum unit Y

Clean

Replace

Vacuum.
Every 600k Replace.

P.1-5-31

Maintenance
part/location
Fuser unit

User
call
-

Points and cautions

Points and cautions

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Replace
Every 300k Replace.

2-4-4

Page

Page

Page
P.1-5-43

2MN/2N1

Maintenance
part/location
Eject,Duple Lower duplex roller
x section
Middle duplex roller
Section

Section
Outer,
Cover

Section
Driving,
Other

User
call
-

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Clean
Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Clean

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Upper duplex roller

Clean

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Eject roller

Clean

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page

Maintenance
part/location
Outer Covers, Tray

User
call
-

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Clean
Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

Page

Maintenance
part/location
Fan filter

User
call
Clean

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Clean
Vacuum. 1pcs

Page

Developer filter

Clean

Clean

Vacuum. 1pcs

P.1-5-82

Transfer belt filter

Clean

Clean

Vacuum. 2pcs

P.1-5-80

Toner filter
Left filter

Replace

Replace

Every 300k Replace. (MK KIT)


2pcs

P.1-5-78
P.1-5-81

Eject filter

Replace

Replace

Every 300k Replace. (MK KIT)


2pcs

P.1-5-77

Each Clutches

Check
Replace

Check

Check the image registration and


paper feed conveying condition
on paper feed conveying (registration) part.

Sensors

Check

Check

Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.


(lighting part and light reception
part.)

Image quality

Check
Adjust

Check
Adjust

2-4-5

P.1-5-79

2MN/2N1

Section
Option

Maintenance
part/location
Duct unit

User
call
Clean

300K/600K/
Points and cautions
900K/1200K
Clean
Vacuum.

* : Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.

2-4-6

Page

2MN/2N1-3

(4) Repetitive defects gauge

First occurrence of defect

37.5 mm/1 1/2"


39 mm/1 9/16"

Carger roller
Magnet roller
Sleeve roller

57 mm/2 1/4"

Right registration roller

63 mm/2 1/2"

Left registration roller

75 mm/2 15/16"

Transfer roller

94 mm/3 11/16"

Drum

109.9 mm/4 5/16" Press roller

127.5 mm/5"

Heat roller

936 mm/36 7/8"

Transfer belt

* : The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.

2-4-7

2MN/2N1-1

(5) Firmware environment commands


The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. There parameters may be changed permanently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.

Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware


The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameter, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter
values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the
FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:
!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PCL6
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Item
Top margin

FRPO

Setting values

Factory
setting

A1

Integer value in inches

A2

Fraction value in 1/100 inches

A3

Integer value in inches

A4

Fraction value in 1/100 inches

A5

Integer value in inches

17

A6

Fraction value in 1/100 inches

30

A7

Integer value in inches

17

A8

Fraction value in 1/100 inches

30

Default pattern resolution

B8

0: 300 dpi
1: 600 dpi

Page orientation

C1

0: Portrait
1: Landscape

Default font No. *

C2

Middle two digits of power-up font

C3

Last two digits of power-up font

C5

First two digits of power-up font

PCL font switch

C8

0: HP compatibility mode
32: Conventional compatibility mode

Total host buffer size

H8

0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5

Form feed time-out value

H9

Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99)

Duplex mode

N4

0: Off
1: Long edge binding
2: Short edge binding

Sleep timer time-out time

N5

Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240)

60

Left margin

Page length

Page width

2-4-8

6(30s)

2MN/2N1

Item

FRPO

Setting values

Factory
setting

Ecoprint level

N6

0: Off
2: On

Default emulation mode

P1

6: PCL 6
9: KPDL

Carriage-return action

P2

0: Ignores
1: Carriage-return
2: Carriage-return + linefeed

Linefeed action

P3

0: Ignores
1: Linefeed
2: Linefeed + carriage-return

Automatic emulation switching

P4

0: AES disabled
1: AES enabled

Alternative emulation
(For KPDL3)

P5

Same as the P1 values except that 9 is


ignored.

Automatic emulation switching


trigger

P7

0: Page eject commands


1: None
2: Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands
3: Prescribe EXIT commands
4: Formfeed (^L) commands
6: Prescribe EXIT and formfeed commands
10: Page eject commands; if AES fails,
resolves to KPDL

Command recognition character

P9

ASCII code of 33 to 126

Default stacker

R0

1 (inner tray)

2-4-9

120V: 9
220-240V: 6

120V: 1
220-240V: 0
6
120V: 11
220-240V: 10

82 (R)
1

2MN/2N1-3

Item

Factory
setting

FRPO

Setting values

Default paper size

R2

0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.)


1: Monarch (3-7/8 7-1/2 inches)
2: Business (4-1/8 9-1/2 inches)
3: International DL (11 22 cm)
4: International C5 (16.2 22.9 cm)
5: Executive (7-1/4 10-1/2 inches)
6: US Letter (8-1/2 11 inches)
7: US Legal (8-1/2 14 inches)
8: A4 (21.0 29.7 cm)
9: JIS B5 (18.2 25.7 cm)
10: A3 (29.7 42 cm)
11: B4 (25.7 36.4 cm)
12: US Ledger (11 17 inches)
13: ISO A5
14: A6 (10.5 14.8 cm)
15: JIS B6 (12.8 18.2 cm)
16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 8-7/8 inches)
17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 6-1/2 inches)
18: ISO B5 (17.6 25 cm)
19: Custom (11.7 17.7 inches)
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
30: C4 (22.9 32.4 cm)
31: Hagaki (10 14.8 cm)
32: Ofuku-hagaki (14.8 20 cm)
33: Officio II
38:
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5 13.5 inches
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei 2
53: Youkei 4

Default cassette

R4

0: MP tray
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
6: Cassette 6
7: Cassette 7

MP tray paper size

R7

Same as the R2 values except: 0

Sorter full action

S3

0: Stop operation with detecting tray-full


1: Switching to the eject-able destinations
when bin becomes tray full

2-4-10

8 (A4)
0

2MN/2N1

Item

FRPO

Setting values

Factory
setting

A4/letter equation

S4

0: Off
1: On

Host buffer size

S5

0: 10 KB
1: 100 KB
2: 1024 KB

Wide A4

T6

0: Off
1: On

Line spacing *

U0

Lines per inch (integer value)

U1

Lines per inch (decimal value)

U2

Characters per inch (integer value)

10

U3

Characters per inch (decimal value)

Country code

U6

0: US-ASCII
1: France
2: Germany
3: UK
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US Legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
50 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding

41

Code set at power up in


daisywheel emulation

U7

0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1)


1: IBM
6: PCL
7 - 99: HP PCL symbol set coding

53

Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable


font *

U8

Default font pitch (integer value)

10

U9

Default font pitch (decimal value)

Font height for the default scalable font *

V0

Integer value in 100 points: 0 to 9

V1

Integer value in points: 0 to 99

12

V2

decimal value in 1/100 points: 0, 25, 50, 75

Character spacing *

2-4-11

2MN/2N1

Item

Factory
setting

FRPO

Setting values

Default scalable font *

V3

Name of typeface of up to 32 characters,


enclosed with single or double quotation marks

Default weight
(courier and letter Gothic)

V9

0: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular

Color mode

W1

0: Black & white


1: Color

Gloss mode

W6

0: Low (normal)
1: High

Paper type for the MP tray

X0

1: Plain
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Label
5: Bond
6: Recycle
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Cardstock
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8

2-4-12

Courier

2MN/2N1-3

Setting values

Factory
setting

Item

FRPO

Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2

X1
X2

1: Plain
3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8

Paper type for optional cassettes


3 to 7

X3
X4
X5
X6
X10

1: Plain
3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom1 to 8

PCL paper source

X9

0: Paper selection depending on an escape


sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si.
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000.

Automatic continue for Press


GO

Y0

0: Off
1: On

Automatic continue timer

Y1

Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99)

Error message for device error

Y3

0: Not detect
64: Detect

64

Duplex operation for specified


paper type
(Prepunched, Preprintedand Letterhead)

Y4

0: Off
1: On

2-4-13

6 (30 s)

2MN/2N1

Item

Factory
setting

FRPO

Setting values

Default operation for PDF direct


printing

Y5

0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the


current paper size. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
1: Through the image. Loads paper which is
the same size as the image.
2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
3: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
8: Through the image. Loads paper from the
current paper cassette.
9: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.
10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the
current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 size
paper depending on the image size.

e-MPS error

Y6

0: Does not print the error report and display


the error message.
1: Prints the error report.
2: Displays the error message.
3: Prints the error report and displays the error
message.

*: Ignored in some emulation modes.

2-4-14

2MN/2N1

This page is intentionally left blank.

2-4-15

2MN/2N1-2

(6) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline


The document is subscribed to describe the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in
the
service manual. Please utilize it to refer to checking the factors.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on
or it frequently occurs.
It may be from the hardware factor while the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
Please initially check the following.
Check the DDR2 memory and neighboring parts:
Check the contact of YS1 or YS2 with the memory. Replace the memory if the error repeats.
Check the HDD if the error repeats after replacing the main board.
Take care, however, of handling the data when formatting or replacing the HDD.
Check the HDD : Replace the HDD if the error repeats after formatting the HDD.

2-4-16

2MN/2N1-2
No.

F000

Content

Check procedure & check point

Remark 1

1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD) and
connectors and check function.
2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check function.
replace it if available and check function.
Lock-up at Welcome display
3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
(TASKalfa/Ecosys)
(The display unchages after a 4) Execute the U021Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
certain time (Note 1: ***
5) Replace the panelmain board and check function.
seconds))
6) Replace the main board and check function.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at OS or
some of device drivers.

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Scan control section

1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F13X

An error is detected at the


Panel control section

1) Check connection of the harness (Panel - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the panel board and check function. (*2)
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
(*2) For the model separating the main/panel PWBs.

F14X

1) Check connection of the harness (FAX - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check function. (*3)
An error is detected at the FAX
(Take cae of the received data since it is cleared)
control section
5) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function.
6) Replace the FAX board and check function.
7) Replace the main board and check function.
8) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
(*3) For the models using the main PWB with the flash for the FAX data.

F11X

An error is detected at the


authentication device control
section

1) Check connection of the harness (Authentication device - Main board) and


connectors and check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the main board and check function.
5) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F16X

An error is detected at the


KMAS control section

1) Check connection of the harness (KMAS - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.(*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F17X

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the print
3) Replace the main board and check function.
data control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F15X

2-4-17

[Main-Panel Interface]
Main board: YC12
Panel board: YC1
[Main-HDD]
Main board: YC1
(Note 1) 60 seconds.

1) Check connection of the harness (Panel to Main board), (Main board to HDD) and
connectors and check function.
2) Check contact of the DDR memory by detaching and reattaching. and check function.
CF000 appears in a certain
replace it if available and check function.
time (Note 2: *** seconds) after
3) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
the Welcome display continues
4) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
PanelMain board
5) Replace the main board and check function.
communication error
6) Replace the panelmain board and check function.
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F10X

F12X

*User data and installed


software is deleted if
executing the U024.
Reinstallation is required.

FS-C8650DN,
FS-C8600DN

[Main-Panel Interface]
Main board: YC12
Panel board: YC1
(Note 2) 60 seconds.

[Main-Panel Interface]
Main board: YC12
Panel board: YC1

Authentication device: Card


Reader, etc.

2MN/2N1-2

No.

F18X

F19X

F1AX

F1BX

F1CX

F1DX

F1EX
F1FX
F20X

Content

An error is detected at the


Video control secion

Check procedure & check point

Remark 1

1) Check connection of the harness (Engine - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the engine board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Image processing section

1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function.


2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the main board and check function.
5) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F24X

An error is detected at the


System management section

1) Check contact of the DDR memory and check function.


2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the main board and check function.
5) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F25X

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the
3) Replace the main board and check function.
Network management section
4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
(or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F23X

An error is detected at the


System management section

F2AX

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F2BX
F2CX
F2DX
F2EX
F2FX
F30X
F31X
F32X

An error is detected at the


Network control section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administratuve Division.
(or retrieve the packet capture data depending on the reult of analysis)
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F26X
F27X
F28X

*The F1C4 error appears


with the HDD security kit at
work.

*The F1D4 error is RAM


allocation error.
1. Check it with the U340
2. Initialize the setting
valued with the U021

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the OS
3) Replace the main board and check function.
or some of device drivers
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F21X

F22X

[Main-ENGINE Interface]
Main board: YC3
Engine board: YC46or
YC50

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the OS
3) Replace the main board and check function.
or some of device drivers
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the
3) Replace the main board and check function.
Security management section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the File
3) Replace the main board and check function.
System management section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
An error is detected at the
check function.
Image memory management 3) Replace the main board and check function.
section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F29X

2-4-18

FS-C8650DN,
FS-C8600DN

*The F248 eror is printer


process error. if it repeats
with a certain print data,
retrieve the capture data and
USBLOG.

*This may be owing to the


users network environment.

2MN/2N1-2

No.

Content

Check procedure & check point

Remark 1

An error is detected at the


Scan management section

1) Check connection of the harness (Scan/DP board - main board) and connectors and
check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the Scan/DP board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F34X

An error is detected at the


Panel management section

1) Check connection of the harness (Panel board - main board) and connectors and
check function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
4) Replace the panel board and check function. (*2)
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
(*2) For the models separating the panel/main PWBs.

F35X

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Print
3) Replace the main board and check function.
control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F36X

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Print
3) Replace the main board and check function.
management section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F37X

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Execute the U671 Clear FAX back up data (FAX DIMM clear) and check function. (*3)
(Take cae of the received data since it is cleared)
An error is detected at the FAX
4) Replace the FAX_DIMM and check function.
management section
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
7) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
(*3) For the models using the main PWB with the flash for the FAX data.

F33X

An error is detected at the


Authentication/permit
management section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


KMAS control section

1) Check connection of the harness (KMAS - Main board) and connectors and check
function.
2) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
3) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function.(*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F3AX
F3BX
F3CX
F3DX
F3EX
F3FX
F40X
F41X
F42X
F43X
F44X
F45X

An error is detected at the


Entity management section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F46X

1) Replace the main board and check function.


An error is detected at the Print
2) Retrieve the USBLOG
image process section
(or retrieve the print capture data by case)

F38X

F39X

F47X
F48X
F49X

An error is detected at the


Image edit process control
section

*The F46F is printer process


error. If it repeats with a
certain print data, retrieve
the capture data and
USBLOG.

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

2-4-19

FS-C8650DN,
FS-C8600DN

2MN/2N1-2

No.

F4AX

F4CX

Content

An error is detected at the


Entity control section
F4EX

F50X

F51X
F52X
F53X
F55X
F56X
F57X
F58X
F59X
F5AX
F5BX
F5CX
F5DX
F5EX

F5FX

F60X

F61X

F62X

F63X

F64X
F65X
F66X
F67X

Remark 1

FS-C8650DN,
FS-C8600DN

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Print
3) Replace the main board and check function.
image process section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F4DX

F4FX

Check procedure & check point

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Job
3) Replace the main board and check function.
control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the FAX
3) Replace the main board and check function.
control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Job
3) Replace the main board and check function.
execution section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Service management section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Service execution section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Maintenance mode
management section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Report compiling section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


Service execution section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the
3) Replace the main board and check function.
Device control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.
1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the Print
3) Replace the main board and check function.
image process section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

2-4-20

2MN/2N1-2

No.

F68X

Content

F6BX

An error is detected at the


HyPAS control section

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
3) Replace the main board and check function.
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

An error is detected at the


External Server management
section

1) Check the external server and check function.


2) Chekc the connection to the external server and check function.
3) Check the network settings and check function.
4) Replace the bridge board and check function.
5) Replace the main board and check function.
6) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.

F6CX
F6DX
F6EX
F6FX
F70X
F71X
F72X
F73X
F74X
F75X

Remark 1

1) Format the HDD and check function. (U024 FULL formatting) (*1)
2) Execute the U021 Memory initializing to initialize the controller backup memory and
check function.
An error is detected at the
3) Replace the main board and check function.
Storage device control section
4) Replace the HDD and check function. (*1)
5) Retrieve the USBLOG and contact the Service Administrative Division.
(*1) For the HDD standard model only.

F69X
F6AX

Check procedure & check point

2-4-21

FS-C8650DN,
FS-C8600DN

*F684 is overwrite error with


the HDD security kit

*FieryOption related

2MN/2N1

(7) Wiring diagram


No.1)

YC18

MESOL

RET
ACT
COM

3
2
1

Relay

3
2
1

1
2
3

Relay

1
2
3

3
2
1

Relay

DF_CLK
DF_SDO
DF_SEL
DF_SDI
DF_RDY
DF_DET
GND

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10

YC20

Mail box (option)

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

5V
5V
EXIT_SENS
GND
EXIT_COV_OPEN
GND
MAIL_SOL_RET
MAIL_SOL_REM
24V1

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DECAL_DIR
DECAL_PD
DECAL_CLK
DECAL_PH
DECAL_REM
GUIDE_DIR
GUIDE_PD
GUIDE_CLK
GUIDE_REM
DECAL_HP

38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30

+24V1
+24V1
GND
GND
5V
GND
BRIDGE_SENS 1
BRIDGE_OPEN
BRIDGE_SENS 2

29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20

BRIDGE1 DIR
BRIDGE1 PD
BRIDGE1 CLK
BRIDGE1 PH
BRIDGE1 REM
BRIDGE2 DIR
BRIDGE2 PD
BRIDGE2 CLK
BRIDGE2 PH
BRIDGE2 REM

From PSPWB (3)

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10

DFMPWB

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

BRPWB

Paper feeder (option)

From PSPWB (2)

YC49
24VC
GND
SIG

GND
Vout
5V

3
2
1

3
2
1

1
2
3

1
2
3

GND
BRIDGE_SENS2
+5V

BRCS2

GND
Vout
5V

3
2
1

3
2
1

1
2
3

1
2
3

GND
BRIDGE_SENS 1
5V

BRCSW

1
2

1
2

4
5
6
7

4
5
6
7

GND
OPEN_SENS
5V
NC

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11

Relay

2
1

EPWB

YC7

BRCM1

/B
/A
B
A

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

BRIDGE1_B/
BRIDGE1_A/
BRIDGE1_B
BRIDGE1_A

BRCM2

/B
/A
B
A

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

5
6
7
8

5
6
7
8

BRIDGE2_B/
BRIDGE2_A/
BRIDGE2_B
BRIDGE2_A

NC
GND
DECAL_HP_SENS
5V

YC5
1
2
3
4

DECAL_B/
DECAL_A/
DECAL_B
DECAL_A

5
6
7
8

GUIDE_B/
GUIDE_A/
GUIDE_B
GUIDE_A

1
2

A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

A12
A13

A12
A13

TN_FAN2
24V1

A14
A15

A14
A15

LVU_FAN1
24V1

A16
A17

A16
A17

MOT_FAN2
24V1

A18
A19

A18
A19

SIDE_CLK
SIDE_SDO
SIDE_SEL
SIDE_SDI
SIDE_RDY
SIDE_PAUSE
CAS1_OPEN
CAS2_OPEN
MULTI_OPEN
3.3V4
GND

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11

24V1
BELT_FAN1

B12
B13

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11

5
4

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

Relay

1
2

TFM1

TFM2

2
1

3
4
5

2
1

Relay

1
2

1
2

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

BLFM1

3
4

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

BLFM2

3
2
1

4
3

PFMPWB

1
2

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11

Relay

Relay

YC8
1
2
3
4

PFCH

1
2

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11

TN_FAN1
24V1

YC6

1
2

From PSPWB (1)

1
2

YC19
PF_CLK
PF_SDO
PF_SEL
PF_SDI
PF_RDY
PF_PAUSE
_
PF CAS1_OPEN
PF_CAS2_OPEN
3.3V4
GND
GND

YC4

BRCS1

1
2
3

Relay

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

Connector holder

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Connector holder

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Relay

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector holder

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Connector holder

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Relay

BRIDGE1_SENS
BRIDGE OPEN
BRIDGE2_SENS
BRIDGE1 DIR
BRIDGE1 PD
BRIDGE1 CLK
BRIDGE1 MODE
BRIDGE1 REM
BRIDGE2 DIR
BRIDGE2 PD
BRIDGE2 CLK
BRIDGE2 MODE
BRIDGE2 REM

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

YC3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6

Relay

1
2
3
4
5
6

Connector holder

YC1
+24V1
+24V1
GND
GND
+5V
GND

Document finisher (option)

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Connector holder

YC2
DECAL DIR
DECAL PD
DECAL CLK
DECAL MODE
DECAL REM
GUIDE DIR
GUIDE PD
GUIDE CLK
GUIDE REM
DECAL_HP_SENS

Bridge unit (option)

2-4-22

+24V1
BELT_FAN2

B14
B15

B14
B15

DLP_FAN1
24V1

B16
B17

B16
B17

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

EXFM1

DLP_FAN2
24V1

B18
B19

B18
B19

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

EXFM2

2
1

2MN/2N1

No.2
YC11
SGND
CLK
SGND
SDI
SGND
SDO
SGND
MSET_N
SGND
IDD_CS_Y
EEPROM_CS_Y
IDD_CS_C
EEPROM_CS_C
IDD_CS_M
EEPROM_CS_M
IDD_CS_2_BK
EEPROM_CS_2_BK
IDD_CS_1_BK
EEPROM_CS_1_BK
GND
INT_ST_Y
PALA_STG_P0_Y
PALA_STG_P1_Y
PALA_STG P2_Y
GAIN_FIX_Y
GND
DATA_2N_Y(LVDS)
DATA_2P_Y(LVDS)
GND
INT_ST_ C
PALA_STG_P0_C
PALA_STG_P1_C
PALA_STG_P2_C
GAIN_FIX_C
GND
DATA_2N_C(LVDS)
DATA_2P_C(LVDS)
GND
INT_ST_M
PALA_STG_P0_M
_
PALA STG_P1_M
PALA_STG_P2_M
GAIN_FIX_M
GND
DATA_2N_M(LVDS)
DATA_2P_M(LVDS)
GND
DATA_3N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_3P_BK(LVDS)
GND
DATA_4N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_4P_BK(LVDS)
GND
PARA_SIG_P3_2_BK
INT_ST_2_BK
INT_ST_1_BK
PARA_SIG_P0_BK
PARA_SIG_P1_BK
PARA_SIG_P2_BK
GAIN_FIX_BK
GND
DATA_2N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS)
GND

YC2
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

EPWB

YC12
GND
BD_Y
LSU_TH_Y
CUALM_Y
PARA_SIG_P3_Y
PARA_SIG_P4_Y
GND
SDCLK_Y
GND
DATA_1N_Y
DATA_1P_Y
GND
REM_Y
LOCK_Y
CLK_Y
GND
BD_C
LSU_TH_C
CUALM_C
PARA_SIG_P3_C
PARA_SIG_P4_C
GND
SDCLK_C
GND
DATA_1N_C
DATA_1P_C
GND
REM_C
LOCK_C
CLK_C
SGND
BD_M
LSU_TH_M
CUALM_M
PARA_SIG_P3_M
PARA_SIG_P4_M
SGND
SDCLK_M
GND
DATA_1N_M
DATA_1P_M
GND
REM_M
LOCK_M
CLK_M
GND
BD_BK
LSU_TH_BK
CUALM_BK
PARA_SIG_P3_BK
PARA_SIG_P4_BK
GND
SDCLK_BK
GND
DATA_1N_BK
DATA_1P_BK
GND
REM_BK
LOCK_BK
-

SGND
CLK
SGND
SDI
SGND
SDO
SGND
MSET_N
SGND
IDD_CS_Y
EEPROM_CS_Y
IDD_CS_C
EEPROM_CS_C
IDD_CS_M
EEPROM_CS_M
IDD_CS_2_BK
EEPROM_CS_2_BK
IDD_CS_1_BK
EEPROM_CS_1_BK
SGND
INT_ST 1 Y
PALA_STG_P0_Y
PALA_STG_P1_Y
PALA_STG P2_Y
GAIN_FIX_Y
SGND
DATA_2N_Y(LVDS)
DATA_2P_Y(LVDS)
SGND
INT_ST 1 C
PALA_STG_P0_C
PALA_STG_P1_C
PALA_STG_P2_C
GAIN_FIX_C
SGND
DATA_2N_C(LVDS)
DATA_2P_C(LVDS)
SGND
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_STG_P0_M
_
PALA STG_P1_M
PALA_STG_P2_M
GAIN_FIX_M
SGND
DATA_2N_M(LVDS)
DATA_2P_M(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_3N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_3P_BK(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_4N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_4P_BK(LVDS)
SGND
PARA_SIG_P3_2 BK
INT_ST 2 BK
INT_ST 1 BK
PARA_SIG_P0_BK
PARA_SIG_P1_BK
PARA_SIG_P2_BK
GAIN_FIX_BK
SGND
DATA_2N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS)
SGND

YC3
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

SGND
BD_Y
LSU_TH_Y
CUALM_Y
PARA_SIG_P3_Y
PARA_SIG_P4_Y
SGND
SDCLK_Y
SGND
DATA_1N_Y(LVDS)
DATA_1P_Y(LVDS)
SGND
REM_Y
LOCK_Y
CLK_Y
SGND
BD_C
LSU_TH_C
CUALM_C
_
PARA SIG_P3_C
PARA_SIG_P4_C
SGND
SDCLK_C
SGND
DATA_1N_C(LVDS)
DATA_1P_C(LVDS)
SGND
REM_C
LOCK_C
CLK_C
SGND
BD_M
LSU_TH_M
CUALM_M
PARA_SIG_P3_M
PARA_SIG_P4_M
SGND
SDCLK_M
SGND
DATA_1N_M(LVDS)
DATA_1P_M(LVDS)
SGND
REM_M
LOCK_M
CLK_M
SGND
BD_BK
LSU_TH_BK
CUALM_BK
PARA_SIG_P3_BK
PARA_SIG_P4_BK
SGND
SDCLK_BK
SGND
DATA_1N_BK(LVDS)
DATA_1P_BK(LVDS)
SGND
REM_BK
LOCK_BK
CLK_BK

YC1

YC5
SGND
BD Bk
LSU_TH Bk
PALA_SIG P3_2Bk
LDD_CS 2 Bk
+5V
+5V
+5V
LDD_CS 1 Bk
SDI_1_Bk
SDO_1_Bk
CLK_1_Bk
EEPROM CS 1 O Bk
MSET_N
CUALM Bk
INT_ST 2 Bk
INT_ST 1 Bk
PALA_SIG P0 Bk
PALA_SIG P1 Bk
PALA_SIG P2 Bk
PALA_SIG P3 Bk
PALA_SIG P4 Bk
SDCLK Bk
GAIN FIX Bk
DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS)
DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS)
DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS)
SGND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

GND
PD
TH
+5V1
+5V1
+5V1
CSI 1
DIO 1
DOI 1
SKOI 1
CSO 1
MSET_N
CUAL M
GND
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_SIG P0 M
PALA_SIG P1 M
PALA_SIG P2 M
PALA_SIG P3 M
PALA_SIG P4 M
SDCLK
GAIN FIX
DATAN1
DATAP1
GND
DATAN2
DATAP2
GND

YC3
1
2
3
4

GND
TH
PD
+5V2

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

GND
TH
PD
+5V

PDPWB-K

APCPWB-K

YC6
SDI_2_Bk
SDO_2_Bk
CLK_2_Bk
EEPROM CS 2_O_Bk
SGND
DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS)
DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS)
DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

YC1

YC8
SGND
BD M
LSU_TH M
+5V
+5V
+5V
LDD_CS M
SDI1_M
SDO1_M
CLK1_M
EEPROM CS _O_M
MSET_N
CUALM M
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_SIG P0 M
_
PALA SIG P1 M
PALA_SIG P2 M
PALA_SIG P3 M
PALA_SIG P4 M
SDCLK M
GAIN FIX M
DATA_1N_M(LVDS)
DATA_1P_M(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_2N_M(LVDS)
DATA_2P_M(LVDS)
SGND

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

GND
PD
TH
+5V1
+5V1
+5V1
CSI 1
DIO 1
DOI 1
SKOI 1
CSO 1
MSET_N
CUAL M
GND
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_SIG P0 M
PALA_SIG P1 M
PALA_SIG P2 M
PALA_SIG P3 M
PALA_SIG P4 M
SDCLK
GAIN FIX
DATAN1
DATAP1
GND
DATAN2
DATAP2
GND

+24V
GND
START/STOP
LOCKED
EXT.CLOCK

YC2

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

YC12

GND
TH
PD
+5V2

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

GND
TH
PD
+5V

PDPWB-M

APCPWB-M

GND
PD
TH
+5V1
+5V1
+5V1
CSI 1
DIO 1
DOI 1
SKOI 1
CSO 1
MSET_N
CUAL M
GND
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_SIG P0 M
PALA_SIG P1 M
PALA_SIG P2 M
PALA_SIG P3 M
PALA_SIG P4 M
SDCLK
GAIN FIX
DATAN1
DATAP1
GND
DATAN2
DATAP2
GND

YC2
GND
TH
PD
+5V2

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

GND
TH
PD
+5V

PDPWB-C

APCPWB-C

+24V
GND
START/STOP
LOCKED
EXT.CLOCK

PM-C

SGND
BD Y
LSU_TH Y
5V
5V
5V
LDD_CS 1 Y
SDI1
SDO1
CLK1
EEPROM CS Y
MSET_N
CUALM Y
INT_ST 1 Y
PALA_SIG P0 Y
PALA_SIG P1 Y
PALA_SIG P2 Y
PALA_SIG P3 Y
PALA_SIG P4 Y
SDCLK Y
GAIN FIX Y
DATA_1N_Y(LVDS)
DATA_1P_Y(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_2N_Y(LVDS)
DATA_2P_Y(LVDS)
SGND

YC1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

GND
PD
TH
+5V1
+5V1
+5V1
CSI 1
DIO 1
DOI 1
SKOI 1
CSO 1
MSET_N
CUAL M
GND
INT_ST 1 M
PALA_SIG P0 M
PALA_SIG P1 M
PALA_SIG P2 M
PALA_SIG P3 M
PALA_SIG P4 M
SDCLK
GAIN FIX
DATAN1
DATAP1
GND
DATAN2
DATAP2
GND

YC2
GND
TH
PD
+5V2

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

GND
TH
PD
+5V

PDPWB-Y

APCPWB-Y

YC11
5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

LSURPWB

YC1

YC10

+24V1
+24V1
PGND
PGND

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

+5V
+5V
GND
GND
+3.3V
PGND

5
6
7
8
9
10

5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

+24V1
+24V1
GND
GND

PSPWB

YC15
+5V_AN
+5V_AN
GND
GND
+3.3V2
GND

EPWB

YC21

LSUCM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

PM-K

YC7
24V
PGND
P_REM M
_
P LOCK M
P_CLK M

YC1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

YC9
24V
PGND
P REM C
P LOCK C
P CLK C

YC4
24V
PGND
P_REM Bk
P_LOCK Bk
P_CLK Bk

YC10
SGND
BD C
LSU_TH C
5V
5V
5V
LDD_CS 1 C
SDI1
SDO1
CLK1
EEPROM CS C
MSET_N
CUALM C
INT_ST 1 C
PALA_SIG P0 C
PALA_SIG P1 C
PALA_SIG P2 C
PALA_SIG P3 C
PALA_SIG P4 C
SDCLK C
GAIN FIX C
DATA_1N_C(LVDS)
DATA_1P_C(LVDS)
SGND
DATA_2N_C(LVDS)
DATA_2P_C(LVDS)
SGND

2
1

Relay

1
2

2
1

2
1

CW
CCW

2-4-23

+24V
GND
START/STOP
LOCKED
EXT.CLOCK

PM-M

24V
PGND
P REM Y
P LOCK Y
PCLK Y

+24V
GND
START/STOP
LOCKED
EXT.CLOCK

PM-Y

2MN/2N1

No.3
YC16

FRCSW

2
1

LSUFM

5
6

2
1
+
-

1
2

Relay

2
1

1
2

1
2
3
4

NC
NC
NC
NC

5
6

FRONT_OPEN
GND

4
3

7
8

7
8

24V
LSU_FAN_OUT

2
1

9
10
11

9
10
11

CL_MOT1
CL_MOT2
GND

YC9

FRPWB

Relay

WTM

1
2

Relay

2
1

3
4

Developer unit K

YC1

TPD_TEMP_BK
DLP_VCONT_BK_1
TPD_BK_1
TN_CLK_BK
GND
DLP_ADR1_BK
DLP_ADR0_BK
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3V
VIB_MOT

11
12

11
12

1
2

1
2

3.3V2
EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1
GND
DRM_ADR0_Bk
DRM_ADR1_Bk

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

+3.3V
EEP SCL
EEP SDA
GND
A0
A1

DRPWB-K

24V
ERS_Bk_REM

7
8

7
8

2
1

2
1

DRM1 ERASER (+)


ERS1 DR (-)

CL-K

5V_LED
WTNR_LED
WTNR_SP

10
9
8

10
9
8

5V
WTNR_NEAR
GND

7
6
5

7
6
5

1
2
3

12
11
10

1
2
3

5V_LED
WTNR_LED
WTNR_FULL
5V

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

4
5
6
7

9
8
7
6

TPD_TEMP
DLP_VCONT
TPD_1
TN_CLK
GND
DLP_ADR1
DLP_ADR0
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

TS-K

VM-K

WTNR_SET

YC7

5V
WTNR_FULL
WTNR_LED
_
5V LED
5V
WTNR_NEAR
WTNR_LED
5V_LED

YC15

VM-Y

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TPD_TEMP_Y
DLP_VCONT_Y_1
TPD_Y_1
TN_CLK_Y
GND
DLP_ADR1_Y
DLP_ADR0_Y
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

1
2

1
2

11
12

11
12

3V
VIB_MOT

5V
DRM_INDEX_Bk
GND

YC8
YC2
+3.3V1
+3.3V2
+5V
+24V1
+24V1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

YC14

Drum unit Y
DRPWB-Y

CL-Y

+3.3V
EEP SCL
EEP SDA
GND
A0
A1

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

3.3V2
EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1
GND
DRM_ADR0_Y
DRM_ADR1_Y

EPWB
DRM1 ERASER (+)
ERS1 DR (-)

2
1

2
1

7
8

7
8

24V
ERS_Y_REM
5V
DRM_INDEX_Y
GND

Developer unit C

YC13

YC1

TS-C

TPD_TEMP
DLP_VCONT
TPD_1
TN_CLK
GND
DLP_ADR1
DLP_ADR0
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

VM-C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TPD_TEMP_C
DLP_VCONT_C_1
TPD_C_1
TN_CLK_C
GND
DLP_ADR1_C
DLP_ADR0_C
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

1
2

1
2

11
12

11
12

3V
VIB_MOT

YC12

Drum unit C
DRPWB-C

CL-C

+3.3V
EEP SCL
EEP SDA
GND
A0
A1

DRM1 ERASER (+)


ERS1 DR (-)

6
5
4
3
2
1

2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8

3.3V2
EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1
GND
DRM_ADR0_C
DRM_ADR1_C

24V
ERS_C_REM
5V
DRM_INDEX_C
GND

Developer unit M

YC11

YC1

TS-M

TPD_TEMP
DLP_VCONT
TPD_1
TN_CLK
GND
DLP_ADR1
DLP_ADR0
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TPD_TEMP_M
DLP_VCONT_M_1
TPD_M_1
TN_CLK_M
GND
DLP_ADR1_M
DLP_ADR0_M
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

YC10

YC2
GND
DRM_INDEX_Bk
ERS_Bk_REM
TPD_Bk_1
DLP_VCONT_Bk_1
TPD_TEMP_Bk
GND
DRM_INDEX_M
ERS_M_REM
TPD_M_1
DLP_VCONT_M_1
TPD_TEMP_M
GND
DRM_INDEX_C
ERS_C_REM
TPD_C_1
DLP_VCONT_C_1
TPD_TEMP_C
GND
TN_CLK
GND
EEP_SCL1
GND
EEP_SDA1
GND
TPD_Y_1
DLP_VCONT_Y_1
TPD_TEMP_Y
ERS_Y_REM
DRM_INDEX_Y
FRONT_OPEN
GND
I2C_SCL
GND
I2C_SDA
GND
LSU_FAN_REM
CLEAN_MOT_LOCK
CLEAN_MOT_REM
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

GND
1
DRM_INDEX_Bk
2
3
ERS_Bk
4
TPD_Bk_1
5
DLP_VCONT_Bk_1
TPD_TEMP_Bk
6
GND
7
8
DRM_INDEX_M
9
ERS_M
10
TPD_M_1
11 DLP_VCONT_M_1
TPD_TEMP_M
12
GND
13
14
DRM_INDEX_C
ERS_C
15
TPD_C_1
16
17 DLP_VCONT_C_1
18
TPD_TEMP_C
19
GND
TN_CLK
20
GND
21
EEP_SCL1
22
GND
23
24
EEP_SDA1
GND
25
26
TPD_Y_1
27 DLP_VCONT_Y_1
TPD_TEMP_Y
28
ERS_Y
29
DRM_INDEX_Y
30
31
FRONT_OPEN
32
GND
I2C_SCL
33
GND
34
I2C_SDA
35
GND
36
LSU_FAN_REM
37
38 CLEAN_MOT_LOCK
39 CLEAN_MOT_REM
40
GND

YC1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

YC7
GND
WTNR_SET
INTER_LOCK
IH_CORE_SENS
IH_CORE_MOT_REM
IH_CORE_CLK
WTNR_LED
IH_COIL_FAN_ALM
IH_COIL_FAN_H
IH_COIL_FAN_L
EXIT_FAN
VIB MOT REM
JUNC_SOL_REM
JUNC_SOL_RET
GND
EXIT_PAPE_SENS
EXIT_FEED_SENS
SB_MOT_REM
SB_MOT_PH
SB_MOT_CLK
SB_MOT_PD
SB_MOT_DIR
GND
WTNR FULL CONT
THOP DIR
DLP_FAN_CLR_H
DLP_FAN_CLR_L
WTNR_FULL
WTNR_NEAR(M)
WTNR_NEAR_VCONT
GND
ROT_MOT_REM
ROT_MOT_CLK
ROT_MOT_PD
ROT_MOT_DIR
EXIT_SUB_SENS
THOP_MOT_Bk
THOP_MOT_M
THOP_MOT_C
THOP_MOT_Y
GND
ENCODE_Bk
ENCODE_M
ENCODE_C
ENCODE_Y
THOP_Bk
THOP_M
THOP_ C
THOP_Y
GND

+3.3V1
+3.3V2
+5V
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

GND
WTNR_SET
INTER_LOCK
IH_CORE_SENS
IH_CORE_MOT_REM
IH_CORE_CLK
WTNR_LED
IH_COIL_FAN_ALM
IH_COIL_FAN_H
IH_COIL_FAN_L
EXIT_FAN
VIB_MOT_REM
JUNC_SOL_REM
JUNC_SOL_RET
GND
EXIT_PAPE_SENS
EXIT_FEED_SENS
ROT_MOT_REM
ROT_MOT_PH
ROT_MOT_CLK
ROT_MOT_PD
ROT_MOT_DIR
GND
WTNR_VCONT_FULL
THOP_DIR
DLP_FAN_CLR_H
DLP_FAN_CLR_L
WTNR_FULL
WTNR_NEAR
WTNR_VCONT_NEA
GND
WTNR_LED
THOP_MOT_Y_DIR
THOP_MOT_C_DIR
THOP_MOT_BK_DIR
EXIT_SUB_SENS
THOP_MOT_Bk_REM
THOP_MOT_M_REM
THOP_MOT_C_REM
THOP_MOT_Y_REM
GND
ENCODE_Bk
ENCODE_M
ENCODE_C
ENCODE_Y
THOP_Bk
THOP_M
THOP_ C
THOP_Y
GND

1
2

1
2

11
12

11
12

+3.3V
EEP SCL
EEP SDA
GND
A0
A1

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

DRM1 ERASER (+)


ERS1 DR (-)

2
1

2
1

7
8

7
8

Relay

2
1

+
-

DEVFM2

2
1

2
1

10
11
12

3
2
1

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

DEVFM1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

+3.3V
SDA
GND
SCL

OTEMS

5V
LED1

1
2

1
2

5V
LED2

3
4

3
4

IH COIL FAN ALM


GND
IH COIL FAN

5
6
7

5
6
7

3
2
1

Relay

1
2
3

S
+

FUFFM

24V
EXIT FAN

8
9

8
9

1
2

Relay

2
1

+
-

EFFM1

1
2
3

1
2
3

B/
B
A
A/

4
5
6
7

4
5
6
7

24V
EXIT FAN2

8
9

8
9

2
1

Relay

1
2

+
-

EFFM2

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

GND
EXIT SUB SENS
5V

5
6
7

5
6
7

B9
B8
B7
B6
B5

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
SIG
+5V

EFS2

MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT

8
9
10
11

8
9
10
11

B4
B3
B2
B1

B6
B7
B8
B9

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

B/
A/
B
A

EM

12
13
14

12
13
14

A9
A8
A7

A1
A2
A3

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

SBS

A4
A5
A6

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

EFS1

A7
A8
A9

COM
ACT
KEEP

FSSOL

YC19
3.3V1
I2C_SDA
GND
I2C_SCL

IH
IH
IH
IH

CORE
CORE
CORE
CORE

1
2
3
4

Exit unit

YC5

SB
SB
SB
SB

MOT
MOT
MOT
MOT

A
B
A7
B7

B/
A/
B
A

GND
EXIT FEED SENS
5V
_

GND
EXIT MAIN SENS
5V

15
16
17

15
16
17

A6
A5
A4

+24V
JUNC SOL KYU
JUNC SOL FUK

18
19
20

18
19
20

A3
A2
A1

2-4-24

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

YC17
GND
IH CORE SENS
5V

5V
DRM_INDEX_M
GND

Relay

YC4

24V
ERS_M_REM

WTS1

TR

1
2

CL-M

LED

5
4

3.3V2
EEP_SCL1
EEP_SDA1
GND
DRM_ADR0_M
DRM_ADR1_M

WTS2

8
9

DRPWB-M

A
K
E
C

4
3

Drum unit M

Relay

4
3
2
1

5V
Vout
GND

4
3

YC10

1
2
3
4

1
2
3

DLP_FAN_Bk
24V

ROT
ROT
ROT
ROT

3V
VIB_MOT

1
2
3

DLP_FAN_M
24V

VM-M

3
2
1

Relay

YC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Relay

YC6

Relay

TS-Y

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Connector holder

YC1
TPD_TEMP
DLP_VCONT
TPD_1
TN_CLK
GND
DLP_ADR1
DLP_ADR0
EEP_SDA1
EEP_SCL1
3.3V2

Connector holder

Developer unit Y

Drum unit K

3
2
1

Relay

1
2
3

2MN/2N1

5V
FSR_BLT_PLS
GND

A20
A19
A18

A20
A19
A18

A2
A3

A2
A3

1
2
3

14
13
12

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

FUBLS

+5V
FSR_RLS_SENS
GND

A17
A16
A15

A17
A16
A15

A4
A5
A6

A4
A5
A6

4
5
6

11
10
9

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

FURS

+5V
FSR_SIZE_SENS
GND

A14
A13
A12

A14
A13
A12

A7
A8
A9

A7
A8
A9

7
8
9

8
7
6

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

FUES

FSR_RLS_DR_CW
FSR_RLS_DR_CCW

A11
A10

A11
A10

A10 A10
A11 A11

10
11

5
4

1
2

Relay

2
1

FSR_FAN
GND
FSR_FAN_ALM

A9
A8
A7

A9
A8
A7

3
2
1

1
2
3

Relay

EDGE_FAN
GND
EDGE_FAN_ALM(R)

12
13
14

3
2
1

A6
A5
A4

A6
A5
A4

A12 A12
A13 A13
B13 B13

EDGE_FAN
GND
EDGE_FAN_ALM(F)

A3
A2
A1

A3
A2
A1

B10 B10
B11 B11
B12 B12

BRIDGE_FAN
+24V1

B20
B19

GND
MAIN_TH1
MAIN_TH2

B18
B17
B16

GUIDE_TH2
GND

Connector holder

No.4

1
2
3

1
2
3

Relay

+24V
EDGE_FAN
EDGE_FAN_ALM

YC1

B20
B19
B18
B17
B16

B1
B2
B3

B1
B2
B3

4
5
6

4
5
6

GND
MAIN_TH1
MAIN_TH2

B15
B14

B15
B14

B4
B5

B4
B5

7
8

7
8

GUIDE_TH2
GND

GUIDE_TH1
GND

B13
B12

B13
B12

B6
B7

B6
B7

9
10

9
10

EDGE_TH
GND

EDGE_TH
GND

B11
B10

B11
B10

B8
B9

B8
B9

PRESS_TH
GND

B9
B8

B9
B8

GND
+3.3V2
IH_HEAT_REM
ROTATION
IH_TXD
IH_RXD
PRESS_HEART_REM

B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

YC4
1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3

SGND
3.3V
IH_REM
ROTATION
RXD
TXD

FUPWB

FURM
+
S

FUEFM2

YC2

+12V1
REM
FAN

1
2
3

3
2
1

+
S

YC3

GND
MAIN_TH1
MAIN_TH2

1
2
3

3
2
1

GND
FSR_NCTH1
FSR_NCTH2

YC4

GUIDE_TH2
GND

1
2

2
1

FTH3

YC5

EDGE_TH
GND

1
2

2
1

FTH2

1
2

Relay

3
2
1

+
S

FURFM
FIH

YC9
1

VS

YC10

COIL_COM

EPWB

FIHPWB

FTS

YC6
+15V1
+15V2

1
2

1
2

YC8

FPWB1

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
FSR_RELAY
+24V

YC1
NEUTRAL
LIVE

YC27
MAIN_HEAT_REM
SUB_HEAT_REM
+24V2
ZEROC
GND
GND
FSR_RELAY
+24V1
PRESS_REM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3

3
2
1

1
2
3

Relay

3
2
1

+
S

IHFM

1
2

2
1

1
2

Relay

2
1

ERFM

4
2
3
7
5
11
8
1
6
10
9

4
2
3
7
5
11
8
1
6
10
9

1
2

1
2

1
2

From PSPWB

YC11
IH_PWB_FAN
GND
IH_PWB_ALM

YC19
EXIT_REAR_FAN
24V1

YC20
NC
GND
GND
5V
24V1
NC
MAIL_SDO
MAIL_SDI
MAIL_CLK
MAIL_SEL
MAL_RDY

12
11
10
9
8
7 Relay
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

GND
GND
GND
5V
24V
24V
SDI
SDO
SCLK
SEL
READY

MMPWB
Mail box (option)

2-4-25

Fuser unit

1
2

1
2

FUEFM1

Relay

2
1

FTH1

FTH4

2MN/2N1

No.5
YC6
GND
MAIL_SDI
NC
MAIL_CLK
MAIL_SDO
MAIL_RDY
MEIL_SEL
GND
MAIN_HEAT
SUB_HEAT
ZEROC
FSR_RELAY
PRESS_REM
_
EXIT REAR_FAN_L
EXIT_REAR_FAN_H
GND
GND
FSR_MOT_REM
FSR_MOT_CLK
_
FSR MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_DIR
FSR_MOT_BRAKE
GND
MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3
MPF_LNG
GND
MPF_PPR
MPF_UP
MPF_DOWN
MPF_JAM
MPF_CL
MPF_LIF2
MPF_LIFT1
GND
TC_MOT_LOCK
TC_TONER_LED
_
TC TONER_FULL
TC_TONER_VCONT
INTER_LOCK
DU2_MOT_PD
DU2_MOT_CLK
DU2_MOT_REM
GND
DU_OPEN
DU_FAN
PRESS_RLS_MOT_REM1
PRESS_RLS_MOT_REM2
PRESS_RLS_SENS
DU_SENS
BELT_JAM_SENS
GND
CLN_SOL_RET
CLN_SOL_REM
_
REG SENS_R_S(BK)
REG_SENS_R_P(BK)
REG_R_LED
GND
REG_SENS_F_S
REG_SENS_F_P
REG_F_LED
GND

YC1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

YC2

YC5
GND
M_TEMP
LOOP_SENS
GND
EDGE_FAN_H
DU1_MOT_PD
DU1_MOT_CLK
DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H)
GND
EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS
TCON_SET
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_BRK
GND
DRM_MOT_BK_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK
GND
DLP_MOT_BK_REM
DLP_MOT_BK_CLK
DLP_MOT_BK_RDY
DLP_MOT_BK_DIR
GND
DRM_MOT_CLR_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK
DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY
DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND
DLP_MOT_CLR_REM
DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK
DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY
DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND
REG_MOT_PD
REG_MOT_CLK
REG_MOT_REM(CL)
GND
IH_PWB_FAN_L
IH_PWB_FAN_H
_
IH PWB_FAN_ALM
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL
GND

EPWB

GND
JOB_SET
JOB_MOT_REM
_
JOB MOT_CLK
JOB_MOT_DIR
JOB_OPEN_SENS
JOB_SOL_REM
GND
MAIN_HEAT_REM
SUB_HEAT_REM
ZEROC
FSR_RELAY
PRESS_REM
_
EXIT REAR_FAN_L
EXIT_REAR_FAN_H
GND
GND
FSR_MOT_REM
FSR_MOT_CLK
_
FSR MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_DIR
FSR_MOT_BRK
GND
MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3
MPF_LNG
GND
MPF_PPR
MPF_UP
MPF_DOWN
MPF_JAM
MPF_CL
MPF_LIF2
MPF_LIFT1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
INTER_LOCK
DU2_PD
DU2_CLK
DU2_REM_(CL_LOW)
GND
DU_OPEN
DU_FAN
PRESS_RLS_MOT_REM1
PRESS_RLS_MOT_REM2
PRESS_RLS_SENS
DU_SENS
BELT_JAM_SENS
GND
CLN_SOL_RET
CLN_SOL_REM
_
REG SENS_R_S(BK)
REG_SENS_R_P(BK)
REG_R_LED
GND
REG_SENS_F_S
REG_SENS_F_P
REG_F_LED
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

GND
M_TEMP
LOOP_SENS
GND
EDGE_FAN_H
DU1_MOT_PD
DU1_MOT_CLK
DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H)
GND
EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS
TCON_SET
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_BRK
GND
DRM_MOT_BK_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK
GND
DLP_MOT_BK_REM
DLP_MOT_BK_CLK
DLP_MOT_BK_RDY
DLP_MOT_BK_DIR
GND
DRM_MOT_CLR_REM
DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK
DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY
DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND
DLP_MOT_CLR_REM
DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK
DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY
DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR
GND
REG_MOT_PD
REG_MOT_CLK
REG_MOT_REM(CL)
GND
IH_PWB_FAN_L
IH_PWB_FAN_H
_
IH PWB_FAN_ALM
POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL
GND

Fuser drive unit

YC10
GND
M_TEMP

1
2

1
2

3.3V
REG_F_LED
GND
_
REG SENS_F_P
REG_SENS_F_S

3
4
5
6
7

3
4
5
6
7

5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

+3.3V4
LEDREF
GND
IDS
IDP

IDS1

3.3V
REG_R_LED
GND
REG_SENS_R_P
REG_SENS_R_S

8
9
10
11
12

8
9
10
11
12

5
4
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1

+3.3V4
LEDREF
GND
IDS
IDP

IDS2

24V
CLN_SOL_REM
CLN_SOL_RET

13
14
15

13
14
15

2
1

Relay

YC18
FSR_MOT_BRK
FSR_MOT_DIR
FSR_MOT_RDY
FSR_MOT_CLK
FSR_MOT_REM
GND
24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
24V

CN1
YC13
TRANS_MOT_BRK
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_REM
GND
24V2
GND
24V2
TANK_SET

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SIG2
SIG1
SGND
VCC
BRK
CW/CCW
FG
VM
START/STOP
PGND
24V1

FUM

CN2
VCC
S.GND
SIG_1
VCC
S.GND
SIG_2

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2

ID sensor

COM
ACT

CLSOL

TRM

YC8
DLP_MOT_BK_DIR
DLP_MOT_BK_RDY
DLP_MOT_BK_CLK
DLP_MOT_BK_REM
GND
+24V1

1
2
3
4
5
6

YC22

YC9
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK
DRM_MOT_BK_BRK
DRM_MOT_BK_DIR
DRM_MOT_BK_RDY
DRM_MOT_BK_CLK
DRM_MOT_BK_REM
GND
24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

REG_CL_REM

24V2

YC25
REG_B/
REG_A/
REG_B
REG_A

FPWB1

2-4-26

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

B/
A/
B
A

RM

2MN/2N1

No.6

YC16

FPWB1

YC23
3.3V
LOOP_SENS
EDGE_FAN_REM
DU1_A
DU1_B
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
GND
DU_CL_UPPER_REM
24V2
EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS

YC13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42

C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

YC17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

YC14
GND
DU2_A
DU2_B
DU2_A/
DU2_B/
DU_OPEN_SW
DU_CL_LOWER_REM
DU_FAN
24V2
PRESS_RLSMOT2
PRESS_RLSMOT1
5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS
DU_SENS
BELT_JAM_SENS
REG_BK_SENS1_S
REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_LED

GND
GND
MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3
MPF_LNG
LED_3.3V3
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
MPF_JAM_SENS
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
MPF_LIFT_MOT_A
MPF_LIFT_MOT_B
24V2
ID_SOL_ACT
GND
GND

Drawer

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

YC1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

D43
D44
D45
D46
D47
D48
D49
D50
D51
D52
D53
D54
D55
D56
D57
D58
D59
D60

D43
D44
D45
D46
D47
D48
D49
D50
D51
D52
D53
D54
D55
D56
D57
D58
D59
D60

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

GND
DU2_A
DU2_B
DU2_A/
DU2_B/
DU_OPEN_SW
DU_CL_LOWER_REM
DU_FAN
24V2
PRESS_RLS_REM2
PRESS_RLS_REM1
5V
PRESS_RLS_SENS
DU_SENS
BELT_JAM_SENS
REG_BK_SENS1_S
REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_LED

YC5
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

TANK_SET
24V2
GND
24V2
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_BRK

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

B/
A/
B
A

EDGE_FAN_REM
24V2

5
6

5
6

2
1

Relay

1
2

FUFM1

EDGE_FAN_REM
24V2

7
8

7
8

2
1

Relay

1
2

FUFM2

GND
DU_ENTER_SENS
5V

1
2
3

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

EXIT_FAN_REM
24V2

4
5

4
5

2
1

Relay

1
2

EFM1

EXIT_FAN_REM
24V2

6
7

6
7

2
1

Relay

1
2

EFM2

24V2

DU_CL_UPPER_REM

LOOP_SENS
GND
5V

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

OUT
GND
5V

LPS

3.3V
REG_BK_LED
GND
REG_BK_SENS1_P
REG_BK_SENS1_S

4
5
6
7
8

4
5
6
7
8

GND
BELT_JAM_SENS
5V

9
10
11

9
10
11

GND
PRESS_RLS_SENS
5V

1
2
3

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

TRRS

PRESS_RLS_REM1
PRESS_RLS_REM2
NC

4
5
6

4
5
6

2
1

Relay

1
2

1
2
3

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

24V2

DU_CL2_REM

DU_OPEN
GND

3
4

3
4

2
1

2
1

DU2_B/
DU2_A/
DU2_B
DU2_A

5
6
7
8

5
6
7
8

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

DUM1

YC11

YC12
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Drawer

GND
GND
MPF_TABLE
MPF_WID1
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3
MPF_LNG
LED_3.3V3
MPF_PPR_SET
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
MPF_JAM_SENS
MPF_CL_REM
24V2
MPF_LIFT_MOT_A
MPF_LIFT_MOT_B
24V2
CLN_SOL_REM
GND
GND

3.3V
LOOP_SENS
EDGE_FAN_REM
DU1_A
DU1_B
DU1_A/
DU1_B/
GND
DU_CL_UPPER_REM
24V2
EXIT_FAN
DU_ENTER_SENS

DU1_B/
DU1_A/
DU1_B
DU1_A

MP tray
YC3

DUS1

YC10

MPF_LIFT_DR_B
MPF_LIFT_DR_A

16
15

16
15

1
2

16
15

1
2

Relay

24V2

14

14

14

1
2
3

MPLM

2
1

MPF_CL_REM

13

13

13

1
2
3

5V
MPF_JAM_SENS
GND

12
11
10

12
11
10

5
6
7

12
11
10

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

MPFS

5V
MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS
GND

9
8
7

9
8
7

8
9
10

9
8
7

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

MPLS2

5V
MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS
GND

6
5
4

6
5
4

11
12
13

6
5
4

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

MPLS1

MPF_PPR_SET
GND
LED_3.3V3

3
2
1

3
2
1

14
15
16

3
2
1

1
2
3

1
2
3

Vout
GND
3.3V

MPPS

MPF_TABLE
GND

9
8

9
8

1
2

9
8

1
2

1
2

Vout
GND

MPTSW

MPF_WID1
GND
MPF_WID2
MPF_WID3

7
6
5
4

7
6
5
4

3
4
5
6

7
6
5

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

WID1
GND
WID2
WID3

MPPWSW

5V
MPF_LNG
GND

3
2
1

3
2
1

7
8
9

MPPFCL

Relay

YC14

TRRM

YC4

YC2

Relay

3
2
1

1
2
3

Relay

3
2
1

1
2
3

1
2
3

5V
Vout
GND

24V2
ID_SOL_REM

1
2

MPPLSW
YC9
GND
DU_SENS
5V

YC6
24V2
GND
TRANS_MOT_REM
TRANS_MOT_CLK
TRANS_MOT_RDY
TRANS_MOT_DIR
TRANS_MOT_BRK

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DUS2

YC7

RYPWB

2-4-27

DUCSW
B/
A/
B
A

DUM2

2MN/2N1-3

No.7

24V2
24V2
5V
GND
GND
GND

YC11
1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

24V2
24V2
5V
GND
GND
GND

FPWB1

Middle guide unit

YC7
MID_B/
MID_A/
MID_B
MID_A

1
2
3
4

BEND_SENS
GND
5V

5
6
7

GND
FEED1_SENS
5V

8
9
10

8
9
10

6
5
4

8
9
10

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

MS

GND
REG_SENS
5V

11
12
13

11
12
13

3
2
1

11
12
13

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
Vout
5V

RS

MID_CL_REM
24V2

14
15

14
15

1
2
3
4

13
12
11
10

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

B/
A/
B
A

1
2
3
4

MM
YC13
5V
GND
CURRENT_SIG

Relay

YC12

24V2
NC

2
1

2
3

3
2
1

1
2
3

From CRPWB

Paper feed drive unit


YC2
FEED_MOT_GAIN
FEED_MOT_DIR
FEED_MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_CLK
FEED_MOT_REM
GND
24V2

YC5
V-FEED_CL

3
2
1

3
2
1

3
2
1

PCCL

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

ASIST_CL1

24V2

ASIST_CL2

24V2

FEED_CL1_REM

24V2

FEED_CL2_REM

24V2

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

3
2
1

3
2
1

ASCL1

3
2
1

3
2
1

ASCL2

3
2
1

3
2
1

PFCL1

3
2
1

3
2
1

PFCL2

PFM

YC10

Primary paper feed unit


YC8
GND
FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK
_
FEED MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_DIR
FEED_CL1_REM
FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2
LIFT_MOT2_REM
GND
LIFT_MOT1_REM1
CAS2_WID
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2
CAS2_LNG1
CAS1_WID
CAS1_LNG3
CAS1_LNG2
CAS1_LNG1
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
CAS2_QUANT1
CAS1_QUANT2
CAS1_QUANT1
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
CURRENT_SIG
V-FEED_CL
COVER_OPEN
FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
CAS1_LIFT_UP
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
CAS2_P0
CAS2_LIFT_UP
CAS2_EMPTY
PICK_SOL2_RET
PICK_SOL2_REM
GND
REG_SENS
FEED1_SENS
BEND_SENS
MID_MOT_PH
MID_MOT_REM
MID_MOT_CLK
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1

24V2
PICK_SOL1_REM
PICK_SOL1_RET

1
2
3

1
2
3

12
11
10

LED_5V
GND
CAS1_EMPTY_SENS

4
5
6

4
5
6

9
8
7

LED_5V
GND
CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS

7
8
9

7
8
9

6
5
4

5V
CAS1_P0_SENS
GND

10
11
12

10
11
12

3
2
1

24V2
PICK_SOL2_REM
PICK_SOL2_RET

13
14
15

1
2
3

12
11
10

LED_5V
GND
CAS2_EMPTY_SENS

16
17
18

4
5
6

9
8
7

LED_5V
GND
CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS

19
20
21

7
8
9

5V
CAS2_P0_SENS
GND

22
23
24

10
11
12

YC12

4
5
6

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

7
8
9

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

10
11
12

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
Vout
GND

FS1

4
5
6

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PS2

6
5
4

7
8
9

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

LS2

3
2
1

10
11
12

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
Vout
GND

FS2

PS1
LS1

Lower guide unit

YC4

YC3
CAS1_LNG1
CAS1_LNG2
GND
CAS1_LNG3

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

6
5
4
3

CAS1_WID
GND

5
6

5
6

CAS2_LNG1
CAS2_LNG2
GND
CAS2_LNG3

7
8
9
10

CAS2_WID
GND

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

2
1

5
6

2
1

2
1

7
8
9
10

6
5
4
3

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

11
12

11
12

2
1

5
6

2
1

2
1

PWSW2

LIFT_MOT1_RET
LIFT_MOT1_DR

13
14

13
14

2
1

2
1

LM1

LIFT_MOT2_RET
LIFT_MOT2_DR

15
16

1
2

2
1

2
1

LM2

LED_5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT1

17
18
19

3
4
5

6
5
4

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PGS1(U)

LED_5V
GND
CAS1_QUANT2

20
21
22

6
7
8

3
2
1

4
5
6

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PGS1(L)

LED_ 5V
GND
CAS2_QUANT1

23
24
25

9
10
11

6
5
4

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PGS2(U)

LED_5V
GND
CAS2_QUANT2

26
27
28

12
13
14

3
2
1

4
5
6

3
2
1

3
2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PGS2(L)

YC6
LED_5V
GND
FEED2_SENS

1
2
3

1
2
3

5
4
3

FEED_COVER_OPEN
GND

4
5

4
5

2
1

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
2
1

4
5

2
1

2
1

5V
GND
Vout

PCS
PCCSW

EPWB
FPWB2

2-4-28

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Relay

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Relay

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Relay

YC1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Connector holder

YC4
GND
FEED_MOT_REM
FEED_MOT_CLK
_
FEED MOT_RDY
FEED_MOT_DIR
FEED_CL1_REM
FEED_CL2_REM
ASIST_CL2
LIFT_MOT2_REM
GND
LIFT_MOT1_REM1
CAS2_WID
CAS2_LNG3
CAS2_LNG2
CAS2_LNG1
CAS1_WID
CAS1_LNG3
CAS1_LNG2
CAS1_LNG1
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
CAS2_QUANT1
CAS1_QUANT2
CAS1_QUANT1
LIFT_MOT1_LOCK
LIFT_MOT2_LOCK
CURRENT_SIG
V-FEED_CL
COVER_OPEN
FEED2_SENS
CAS1_P0
CAS1_LIFT_UP
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
PICK_SOL1_RET
PICK_SOL1_REM
CAS2_P0
CAS2_LIFT_UP
CAS2_EMPTY
PICK_SOL2_RET
PICK_SOL2_REM
GND
REG_SENS
FEED1_SENS
BEND_SENS
MID_MOT_PH
MID_MOT_REM(ROL)
MID_MOT_CLK
MID_MOT_PD
ASIST_CL1

Relay

Relay

SW1
SW2
COM
SW3

PLSW1
PWSW1

SW1
SW2
COM
SW3

PLSW2

Relay

Relay

2MN/2N1-1

No.8

YC3
1
2
3
4
5
6

+24V
GND
START/STOP
CLOCK
LD
CW/CCW

TRCM

6
5
4
3
2
1

A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

YC3

CRM

Relay

1
2

1
2

5
4

A7
A8

A10
A9

A7
A8

A7
A8

RLS_MOT_DR
24V1

3
2
1

A9
A10
A11

A8
A7
A6

A9
A10
A11

A9
A10
A11

GND
RLS_SENS
5V

A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

ZIG_MOT_DR_CCW
ZIG_MOT_DR_CW
GND
BLT_INDEX
5V

B1
B2
B3

GND
ZIG_SENS
5V

Relay

A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

1
2

A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

B16
B15
B14

B1
B2
B3

Connector holder

2
1

Relay

TRRSM

3
4
5

3
2
1

Connector holder

3
2
1

Connector holder

Relay
GND
SIG
5V

CRS

TRBSS

GND
SIG
5V

3
2
1

3
2
1

TRBLS

GND
SIG
5V

3
2
1

3
2
1

1
2
3

11
10
9

B4
B5
B6

B13
B12
B11

B4
B5
B6

B4
B5
B6

GND
BLT_SPEED
5V

TRBES

TH
OUT
GND
5V

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

4
5
6
7

8
7
6
5

B7
B8
B9
B10

B10
B9
B8
B7

B7
B8
B9
B10

B7
B8
B9
B10

TEMP
ZIG_REV
GND
5V

TRPWB

+3.3V
EEP_SCL
EEP_SDA
GND
A0
A1

6
5
4
3
2
1

8
9
10
11

4
3
2
1

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16

B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16

3.3V2
EEP_SCL2
EEP_SDA2
GND
A0
A1

B1
B2
B3

MOT_CLK
MOT_SDO
MOT_SEL
MOT_SDI
MOT_RDY
EMERGENCY
BLT_SPEED
BLT_INDEX
DRM_INDEX_BK
DRM_INDEX_M
DRM_INDEX_C

DRM_INDEX_Y
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
BLT_BRAKE
BLT_VM
BLT_REM
MOT_DATA_SET
DRM_ON
BLT_FG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Connector holder

YC9
2
1

DRM-C

YC4

24V1
GND
ICL_MOT
_ _REM
_
ICL MOT_CLK
ICL_MOT_RDY
ICL_MOT_DIR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
3
5
7
9
11

1
3
5
7
9
11

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

DRM_Y_CW/CCW
DRM_Y_LD
DRM_Y_CLK
DRM_Y_S/S
PGND
+24V1

2
4
6
8
10
12

2
4
6
8
10
12

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

DRM_BK_CW/CCW
DRM_BK_LD
DRM_BK_CLK
DRM_BK_S/S
PGND
+24V1

1
3
5
7
9
11

1
3
5
7
9
11

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

DRM_M_CW/CCW
DRM_M_LD
DRM_M_CLK
DRM_M_S/S
PGND
+24V1

2
4
6
8
10
12

2
4
6
8
10
12

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

DLP_M_CW/CCW
DLP_M_LD
DLP_M_CLK
DLP_M_S/S
PGND
+24V1

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

DLP_BK_CW/CCW
DLP_BK_LD
DLP_BK_CLK
DLP_BK_S/S
PGND
+24V1

7
8
9
10
11
12

7
8
9
10
11
12

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

CW/CCW
LD
CLOCK
START/STOP
GND
+24V

MOT_CLK
MOT_SDO
MOT_SEL
MOT_SDI
MOT_RDY
EMERGENCY
BLT_SPEED

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DRM_C_CW/CCW
DRM_C_LD
DRM_C_CLK
DRM_C_S/S
PGND
+24V1

DRM-Y

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

SGND
SGND
+5V
+5V
BLT_BRAKE
BLT_VM
BLT_REM
MOT_DATA_SET
MOT_ON
BLT_FG

DRM-K

YC5
Relay

EPWB

MCPWB

DRM-M

RFPWB
YC27

YC1
SDA
GND
SCL
+3.3V

TM-Y

1
2

Relay

3
2
1

3
2
1

1
2

Relay

3
2
1

3
2
1

2
1

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

12
11
10
9

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

GND
SDA
SCL
3.3V2

5
4

5
6

8
7

5
6

5
6

24V1
TMOT_Y_DR

3
4
5

3
2
1

7
8

6
5

24V1
TMOT_C_DR

9
10

4
3

9
10

9
10

24V1
TMOT_M_DR

1
2

5
4

2
1

11
12

11
12

24V1
TMOT_K_DR

12
11
10

1
2
3

13
14
15

GND
ENCODE_Y
5V

1
2

11
12

Relay

SRS-C

GND
SIG
5V

3
4
5

3
2
1
1
2
3

TM-M

1
2

Relay

3
2
1

3
2
1

2
1

1
2

SRS-M
TM-K

1
2

Relay

3
4
5

2
1

3
2
1

1
2

GND
SIG
5V

3
2
1

3
2
1

3
4
5

9
8
7

4
5
6

16
17
18

GND
ENCODE_C
5V

7
8
9

6
5
4

7
8
9

19
20
21

GND
ENCODE_M
5V

10
11
12

3
2
1

10
11
12

22
23
24

GND
ENCODE_K
5V

YC22
LVU_FAN
24V1

1
2

1
2

6
5

1
2

5
4
Relay

SRS-K

4
5
6

3
2
1

DEVM-MCY

YC7

5
4
Relay

GND
SIG
5V

Connector holder

2
1

Connector holder

TM-C

Relay

GND
SIG
5V

Connector holder

Relay

SRS-Y

Relay
3
4
5
6

3
4
5
6

2-4-29

4
3
2
1

3
4
5
6

2
1

Relay

1
2

PSFM

DEVM-K

2MN/2N1-1

No.9
YC15
24V1
N.C
24V2

TB1

YC17
1
2
3

1
2
3

PCUSW

To FPWB2

1
2
3

3
2
1

LIVE IN

5V1
GND
CURRENT_MONI

YC2

LIVE OUT

TR

CRPWB

YC16
1
2

1
2

1
2

1
2

24V2
GND

YC5
POWER_OFF
DRUM_HEAT_REM
GND

YC8

YC1
T1_CLR_OFF_REM
T1_CNT1
T1_CNT2
T1_CNT3
T1_CNT4
FB_CNT
T2_REM
SP_REM
T2_CNT
SP_CNT
SGND
SGND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

T1_CLR_OFF_REM
T1_CONT_Y
T1_CONT_C
T1_CONT_M
T1_CONT_Bk
FB_CONT
T_REM
T2_OFF_REM
T2_CONT
SP_CONT
GND
GND

YC1
GND
5V
GND
12V
GND
GND
24V1
24V1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

YC13
GND
GND
3.3V3
3.3V2

3
2
1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

YC4

YC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

YC17

3
2
1

24V1
24V1
24V1
12V
GND
GND
GND
GND

GND
5V
GND
12V
GND
GND
24V1
24V1

POWER_OFF
DRM_HEAT_REM
GND
FSR_RELAY_REM

YC12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

YC26

24V1
24V1
24V1
12V
GND
GND
GND
GND

YC13
24V1
24V1
24V1
24V1
24V1
24V1
24V1
24V1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1
2

1
2
3

1
2
3

To Paper feeder
1
2

To Document finisher

3
4
3
4

GND
GND
3.3V3
3.3V2

YC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

YC2
SGND
DC_MAIN_CNT_C
MAIN_IDC_C
DC_MAG_REM
AC_SLV_CLK_C
DC_SLV_CNT_C
DC_MAG_CNT_C
AC_SLV_CNT_C
AC_MAIN_CNT_C
DISCHARGE_C
AC_MAG_CNT_C
AC_MAG_CLK_C
DC_REC_REM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector holder

DC_REC_CNT
AC_MAG_CLK_Y
AC_MAG_CNT_Y
DISCHARGE_Y
AC_MAIN_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CNT_Y
DC_MAG_CNT_Y
DC_SLV_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CLK_Y
MAIN_IDC_Y
DC_MAIN_CNT_Y
DC_MAIN_REM
AC_MAIN_CLK
SGND

MH_NEUTRAL
NC
MH_LIVE

YC16

YC1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DC_REC_CNT
AC_MAG_CLK_Y
AC_MAG_CNT_Y
DISCHARGE_Y
AC_MAIN_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CNT_Y
DC_MAG_CNT_Y
DC_SLV_CNT_Y
AC_SLV_CLK_Y
MAIN_IDC_Y
DC_MAIN_CNT_Y
DC_MAIN_REM
AC_MAIN_CLK
GND

NEUTRAL
LIVE

YC2

4
3
2
1

GND
DC_MAIN_CNT_C
MAIN_IDC_C
DC_MAG_REM
AC_SLV_CLK_C
DC_SLV_CNT_C
DC_MAG_CNT_C
AC_SLV_CNT_C
AC_MAIN_CNT_C
DISCHARGE_C
AC_MAG_CNT_C
AC_MAG_CLK_C
DC_REC_REM
NC

4
3
2
1

NEUTRAL_OUT
NEUTRAL_IN
LIVE_OUT
LIVE_IN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2

1
2

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Connector holder

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

YC4

+24V1
+24V1
PGND
PGND

MC

+24V1
PGND

DH_LIVE

DH_LIVE
MSW_OUT
MSW_IN

MSW

1
2

1
2

#250
1

AC_LIVE

#250
1

AC_NEUTRAL

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

TB2
NEUTRAL

4
2
1

#110
1

TB1

PSPWB

4
2
1

YC1
MSW_OUT
MSW_IN
LIVE

2
To CRPWB
1

Inlet

YC7
DH_LIVE_IN
DH_LIVE_OUT

11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

AC_MAG_CLK_M
AC_MAG_CNT_M
DISCHARGE_M
AC_MAIN_CNT_M
AC_SLV_CNT_M
DC_MAG_CNT_M
DC_SLV_CNT_M
AC_SLV_CLK_M
MAIN_IDC_M
DC_MAIN_CNT_M
GND

YC11

YC2
+24V1
+24V1
+24V1
PGND
PGND
PGND

6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

24V1
24V1
24V1
GND
GND
GND

22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

GND
DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk
MAIN_IDC_Bk
_
AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
AC_SLV_CLK_Bk
DC_SLV_CNT_Bk
DC_MAG_CNT_Bk
AC_SLV_CNT_Bk
DISCHARGE_Bk
AC_MAG_CNT_Bk
AC_MAG_CLK_Bk

YC8
DH_LIVE
DH_LIVE
NC
NC
DH_NEUTRAL
DH_NEUTRAL

1
2

YC4

MCPWB

PS_LIVE
NC
PS_NEUTRAL

YC16
1
2
3
4
5
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

YC5
DV

1
2

TB5

YC17

YC3

SGND
DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk
MAIN_IDC_Bk
_
AC MAIN_CNT_Bk
AC_SLV_CLK_Bk
DC_SLV_CNT_Bk
DC_MAG_CNT_Bk
AC_SLV_CNT_Bk
DISCHARGE_Bk
AC_MAG_CNT_Bk
AC_MAG_CLK_Bk

MSW IN
MSW_OUT

EPWB
AC_MAG_CLK_M
AC_MAG_CNT_M
DISCHARGE_M
AC_MAIN_CNT_M
AC_SLV_CNT_M
DC_MAG_CNT_M
DC_SLV_CNT_M
AC_SLV_CLK_M
MAIN_IDC_M
DC_MAIN_CNT_M
SGND
NC

TB3

YC5
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15

To IHPWB
2

TB4

FPWB1

YC6

HVPWB1

2-4-30

24V1
24V1
24V1
PGND
PGND
PGND

1
2
3

YC9
DH_LIVE

DH_NEUTRAL

1
2
3

1
To Paper feeder
2

1
2

#250
1

#250
1

TB2

HVPWB2

+24V2
GND

CH

From Inlet

2MN/2N1

No.10
KUIO (option)

IFPWB
YC3

EPWB

OPWB

YC46
GND
SARCH1 N
SARCH1 P
GND
SARCH2 N
SARCH2 P
GND
SARCH3 N
SARCH3 P
GND
SAR VCLK N
SAR VCLK P
GND
VSYNC AN
VSYNC AP
VSYNC BN
VSYNC BP
VSYNC CN
VSYNC CP
VSYNC DN
VSYNC DP
HSYNC AN
HSYNC AP
HSYNC BN
HSYNC BP
HSYNC CN
HSYNC CP
HSYNC DN
HSYNC DP
SLEEP ENG
HLD ENG
I2C SDA
I2C SCL
G6 EG IRN
G6 EG SO
G6 EG SBSY
G6 EG SDIR
G6 EG SI
G6 EG SCLK
SLEEP INT
_

YC46
FG
VG
XV0
V0
VSS
VDD
SDA
SCL
A0
RETB
CSB
FG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

FG
VG
XV0
V0
VSS
VDD
SDA
SCL
A0
RETB
CSB
FG

LCDBL

RD
BK

1
2

1
2

5V
BLIGHT

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
GND
TAN
TAP
GND
TBN
TBP
GND
TCN
TCP
GND
TCLKN
TCLKP
GND
VSYNCA N
VSYNCA P
VSYNCB N
VSYNCB P
VSYNCC N
VSYNCC N
VSYNCD N
VSYNCD P
HSYNCA N
HSYNCA P
HSYNCB N
HSYNCB P
HSYNCC N
HSYNCC P
HSYNCD N
HSYNCD P
SLEEP
HOLD ENG
GND
GND
EGSIRN
EGSO
EGSBSY
EGSDIR
EGSI
EGSCLK
GND
_

YC8
VBUS1
USB_DN1
USB_DP1
GND
AUDIO1
WAKEUP1
RESET1
GND
VBUS0
USB_DN0
USB_DP0
GND
AUDIO0
WAKEUP0
RESET

YC3
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

VBUS1
USB_DN1
USB_DP1
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

USB_
USB_DP0
GND
AUDIO0
WAKEUP0
RESET

YC2
VBUS1
USB DN1
USB DP1
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
NC
AUDIO1
WAKEUP1
RESET1
GND
GND
VDD5
CUT1
VBUS0
RESETN1
GND
VDD5
_

YC9
5V_CUT1
GND
5V
GND
5V_CUT0
GND

YC4
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6

6
5
4
3
2
1

5V_CUT1
GND
5V
GND
5V_CUT0
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6

VBUS1
USB DN0
USB DP0
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
NC
AUDIO0
AUDIO1
WAKEUP0
RESET1
GND
VDD5
GND
CUT0
VBUS0
RESETN0
GND
VDD5

YC18

YC16

+3.3V
DBTXD
DBRXD
DBCLK
GND

1
2
3
4
5

GND
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
/CE1
A10
/OE
A9
A8
A7
VCC
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
WP
/CD2
/CD1
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
/CE2
/VS1
/IORD
/IOWD
/WE
RDY /BSY
VCC
/CSEL
/VS2
RESET
/WAIT
/INPACK
/REG
BVD2
BVD1
D8
D9
D10
GND
Lock Pin(1)
Lock Pin(2)

KUIOPWB

YC2

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

VBUS1
USB DN
USB DP
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
GND
NC
NC
NC
AUDIO
AUDIO1
WAKEUP
RESET1
GND
VDD5
GND
CUT
VBUS0
RESETN
GND
VDD5
_

YC23
YC12

YC8
9
7
6
4

9
7
6
4

C2P LCDCON

P2C SDAT

C2P SDAT
GND

1
5

1
5

+5V

+3.3V
FPRSTN
P2C OK KEY
C2P BUZCON
_

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Relay

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5
LP1
LP2
LP3

3.3V
FPRSTN
P2C OK KEY
C2P MODE2
AIRTEMP
C2P MODE1
AIRWET
P2C SDAT
WETCLK
C2P SDAT
GND
LED
5V
_

USB

1
2
3

GND

1
2
3

3
2
1

1
2
3

Relay

3
2
1

CONFM

YC5

YC21
VBUS
DATADATA+

SPEED_CONTROL
GND
5V

VBUS
DATADATA+
ID
GND
LockPin1
LockPin2
LockPin3

TD1+
TD1TD2+
TD2CT1
CT2
TD3+
TD3TD4+
TD4GRLED_A1
GRLED_K1
GRLED_A2
GRLED_K2
LockPin1
LockPin2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LP1
LP2

YC1

YC20
D1
D2
D3
D4
H1
H2
H3
H4
LP1
LP2
LP3
LP4

VBUS D
D- D
D+ D
GND
GND D
VBUS H
D- H
D+ H
LockPin1
LockPin2
LockPin3
LockPin4
_

GND
A+
AGND
BB+
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
5V
5V
5V
GND
ACT
GND
12V
12V
12V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

HDD
YC43
1
2

PSPWB

YC14
12V1
12V1
12V1
12V1
GND
GND
GND
GND

REM
5V

YC24
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

+12V
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
GND
GND
GND

MPWB

2-4-31

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

3
2
1

3
2
1

GND
SATATXDP_C2H
SATATXDN_C2H
GND
SATARXDN_H2C
SATARXDP_H2C
GND

YC27

13
14
15

GND
+5V_HDD
GND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


PAPER FEEDER

E
B(2)
J(2)

G(4)
*G(6)
C
F

K (M4x20)(4)

H (M4x8)(3)
A

English
Supplied parts
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1
B. Pin ............................................................. 2
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1
D. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1
B. Broche ....................................................... 2
C. lment de retenue ................................... 1
D. Unit de transport du papier intermdiaire 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Depsito de papel...................................... 1
B. Clavija........................................................ 2
C. Retn ......................................................... 1
D. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1
B. Stift............................................................. 2
C. Halterung ................................................... 1
D. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit ................ 1
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Unit di alimentazione della carta ............. 1
B. Perno ........................................................ 2
C. Fermo ....................................................... 1
D. Unit intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1

A. ...........................
B. .............................
C. ...............................
D. .........................

1
2
1
1

A. ............................................... 1
B. ..................................................... 2
C. ............................................... 1
D. ................................... 1

A. ...................
B. .................................
C. ...............................
D. .....................

1
2
1
1

E. Clamp ........................................................ 1
F. Wire cover.................................................. 1
G. Paper size plate ......................................... 4
H. S Tite screw M4 8 ................................... 3
*I. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6
**I.Media type plate(110V model only) ........... 2

I (12)
*I (6)
**I (2)

I. Media type plate


(except for above models)........................12
J. Stopper ...................................................... 2
K. S Tite screws M4 20 .............................. 4
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

E. Collier......................................................... 1
F. Couvercle de cble .................................... 1
G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4
H. Vis S Tite M4 8 ....................................... 3
I. Plaquette du type de support................... 12
J. Bute ......................................................... 2
K. Vis S Tite M4 20 ..................................... 4

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

E. Sujetador ................................................... 1
F. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1
G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 4
H. Tornillo S Tite M4 8 ................................. 3
I. Placa de tipo de medio ............................ 12
J. Tope ........................................................... 2
K. Tornillos S Tite M4 20 ............................. 4

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

E. Klemme...................................................... 1
F. Kabelabdeckung ........................................ 1
G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4
H. S-Tite-Schraube M4 8............................. 3
I. Medientypkarte ........................................ 12
J. Anschlag .................................................... 2
K. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20........................ 4

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

E. Morsetto..................................................... 1
F. Coperchio cavi ........................................... 1
G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4
H. Vite S Tite M4 8 ...................................... 3
I. Piastra tipo carta...................................... 12
J. Fermo ........................................................ 2
K. Vite S Tite M4 20 .................................... 4

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

E. ...............................1
F. .............................1
*G. .......................6
H. S M48 ...................3
**I. ......................2
J. ...............................2

K. S M420 .................4

E. ............................................... 1
F. ............................................ 1
G. ............................... 4
H. M48 S ........................... 3
**I. ............................. 2
J. ......................................... 2
E. .............................1
F. ...........................1
G. ...................4
H. M48 S ...................3
**I. ....................2
J. .........................2
K. M420 S ..................4

K. M420 S .......................... 4
,
.

3-1

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1. Pull each cassette out from the paper


feeder (A). Remove the lift plate stopper (1)
from each cassette and attach it to the storage location (2).
2.Gently close each cassette.

3.Pull out the lower paper cassette (3) from


the machine.
4.Remove the paper cassette (3-1).

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Sortez chaque magasin du chargeur de


papier (A). Retirez la bute de la plaque de
levage (1) de chaque magasin et fixez-la
dans l'emplacement de stockage (2).
2.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.

3.Sortez le magasin de papier infrieur (3) de


la machine.
4.Retirez le magasin de papier (3-1).

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1. Saque cada uno de los depsitos del


depsito de papel (A). Quite el tope de placa
de elevacin (1) de cada depsito y pngalo
en el espacio reservado para guardarlo (2).
2.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.

3.Extraiga el depsito inferior (3) de la


mquina.
4.Quite el depsito de papel (3-1).

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Ziehen Sie jede Kassette aus dem Papiereinzug (A) heraus. Entfernen Sie die Verriegelung des Papierlifts (1) aus jeder
Kassette und setzen Sie die Verriegelung in
die Parkposition (2) ein.
2.Alle Kassetten sachte schlieen.

3.Ziehen Sie die untere Kassette (3) aus dem


Gert heraus.
4. Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (3-1) heraus.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Estrarre ciascun cassetto dall'unit di alimentazione carta (A). Rimuovere il fermo


della piastra di sollevamento (1) da ogni cassetto e fissarlo sulla posizione a riposo (2).
2.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.

3.Estrarre il cassetto carta inferiore (3) dalla


macchina.
4.Rimuovere il cassetto carta (3-1).

1. (A) 1
(1) (2)

2.

3. (3)
4. (3-1)

1. (A) .
(1) 1 (2)
.
2. .

3. (3) .
4. (3-1) .

OFF

1.(A)
(1) 1
(2)
2.

3. (3)
4. (3-1)

3-1
7

5
5
4

3-2

6
4

6
3

A
5.Place the machine (6) on the paper feeder
(A) so that the pins (4) at the front left and
front right of the paper feeder (A) are aligned
with the holes (5) in the base of the machine.

6.Secure the machine (6) to the paper feeder


(A) with the 2 pins (B).

7.Align the holes (7) of the lower cassette (3-1)


for the machine with the pins (8) in the cassette slider (3-2). Put the paper cassette (31).
8.Push the lower paper cassette (3) in fully.

5.Monter la machine (6) sur le chargeur de


papier (A) de sorte que les broches (4)
l'avant gauche et l'avant droit du chargeur
de papier (A) soient aligns avec les trous
(5) dans la base du machine.

6.Fixer la machine (6) au chargeur de papier


(A) avec les 2 broches (B).

7.Alignez les trous (7) du magasin infrieur (31) pour la machine avec les ergots (8) dans
le tiroir du magasin (3-2). Placez le magasin
de papier (3-1).
8.Enfoncez fond le magasin de papier infrieur (3).

5.Coloque la mquina (6) sobre el depsito de


papel (A) de forma que los pasadores (4) en
los lados frontales izquierdo y derecho del
depsito de papel (A) estn alineados con
los orificios (5) de la base de la mquina.

6.Fije la mquina (6) al depsito de papel (A)


con los dos pasadores (B).

7. Alinee los orificios (7) del depsito inferior (3-1)

5.Setzen Sie das Gert (6) so auf den


Papiereinzug (A), dass die Stifte (4) vorne
links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug (A)
auf die ffnungen (5) im Boden des Gerts
ausgerichtet sind.

6.Sichern Sie das Gert (6) mit den 2 Stiften


(B) am Papiereinzug (A).

7. Richten Sie die Lcher (7) der Kassette (3-1)

5.Posizionare la macchina (6) sull'alimentatore


carta (A) in modo che i perni (4) sul lato
destro e sinistro anteriore dell'alimentatore
carta (A) siano allineati con i fori (5) presenti
sulla base della macchina..

6.Fissare la macchina (6) sull'alimentatore


carta (A) con i 2 perni (B).

7.Allineare i fori (7) del cassetto inferiore (3-1)


per la macchina con perni (8) della guida
cassetto (3-2). Inserire il cassetto carta (31).
8.Spingere il cassetto carta inferiore (3) fino in
fondo.

5. (A) (4)
(5)
(6) (A)

6. 2 (B) (6)
(A)

7. (3-1) (7)
(3-2) (8) (31)
8. (3)

5. (A)
(4) (5)
(6) (A)
.

6. (B) 2 (6) (A)


.

7. (3-1) (7)
(3-2) (8) .
(3-1) .
8. (3)
.

5.(A)
(4) (5)
(A)
(6)

6. (B)2 (6)
(A)

7. (3-1) (7)
(3-2) (8)
(3-1)
8. (3)

de la mquina con los pasadores (8) del deslizador del depsito (3-2). Coloque el depsito
de papel (3-1).
8. Ejerza presin sobre el depsito de papel inferior (3) hasta introducirlo por completo.

des Gerts mit den Stiften (8) im Kassettenanschlag (3-2) aus. Setzen Sie die Papierkassette (3-1) wieder ein.
8. Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (3) bis zum
Anschlag ein.

13
11
14

12

H(M4x8)
C

10

9.Remove the screw (9) in the rear of the


paper feeder and remove the cover (10).

10.Remove the screw (11) to remove the metal


plate (12).

11.Fit the hook (13) on the mounting plate (C)


into the opening (14) and then align the 2
positioning projections.
12.Secure the mounting plate (C) with the S Tite
screw M4 8 (H).

9.Dposer la vis (9) l'arrire du chargeur de


papier et dposer le couvercle (10).

10.Dposer la vis (11) pour enlever la plaque


mtallique (12).

11.Insrer le crochet (13) du plateau de montage (C) dans l'ouverture (14) et aligner les 2
saillies de positionnement.
12.Fixer le plateau de montage (C) avec la vis S
Tite M4 8 (H).

9.Quite el tornillo (9) del lado trasero del


depsito de papel y quite la cubierta (10).

10.Quite el tornillo (11) para desmontar la placa


de metal (12).

11.Coloque el gancho (13) de la placa de montaje (C) en la abertura (14) y, despus,


alinee los 2 resaltos de posicin.
12.Asegure la placa de montaje (C) con el tornillo S Tite M4 x 8 (H).

9.Die Schraube (9) an der Rckseite des


Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung
(10) abnehmen.

10.Die Schraube (11) herausdrehen, um die


Metallplatte (12) abzunehmen.

11.Den Haken (13) auf der Montageplatte (C) in


die ffnung (14) einpassen und dann die 2
Positionierungsnasen ausrichten.
12.Die Montageplatte (C) mit der S-TiteSchraube M4 x 8 verwenden (H) befestigen.

9.Rimuovere la vite (9) nel retro dell'unit di


alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere
il coperchio (10).

10.Rimuovere la vite (11), per rimuovere la


piastra di metallo (12).

11.Inserire il gancio (13) sulla piastra di montaggio (C) nell'apertura (14) e quindi
allineare le 2 sporgenze di posizionamento.
12.Fissare la piastra di montaggio (C) con la
vite S Tite M4 8 (H).

9. 1 (9)
(10)

10. 1 (11) (12)

11. (C) (13) (14)


2
12. 1 S M48 (H)
(C)

9. (9) 1
(10) .

10. (11) 1 (12)


.

11. (C) (13) (14)


2 .
12. M48 S (H) 1 (C)
.

9. (9)1
(10)

10. (11)1 (12)

11. (C) (13) (14)


2

12. M48 S (H)1 (C)

22
16 18

21

25
24

20

19
15

23

17

13.Pass the power cord (15) through the edging


(small) (16) and the signal cable (17)
through the edging (large) (18) and then
close the edging

14.Connect the power cord (19) and the signal


cable (20) to connectors (21) (22) respectively on the machine.
15.Replace the cover (10) using the screw (9)
removed in step 9.

16.Open the lower right cover (23) on the


machine.
Remove the strap (24) from the shaft (25)
and remove lower right cover (23).

13.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation (15)


dans le (petit) passage (16) et le cble du
signal (17) dans le (grand) passage (18) puis
fermer le passage.

14.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'alimentation (19) et le cble de signal (20) aux


connecteurs (21) (22) de la machine.
15.Reposer le couvercle (10) l'aide de la vis
(9) dpose l'tape 9.

16.Ouvrir le capot infrieur droit (23) de la


machine.
Dposer la courroie (24) de l'arbre (25) et
dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (23).

13.Pase el cable de alimentacin (15) a travs


de la pestaa (pequea) (16) y el cable de
seales (17) a travs de la pestaa (grande)
(18) y, despus, cierre la pestaa.

14.Conecte el cable de alimentacin (19) y el


cable de seal (20) a los conectores (21)
(22) respectivamente de la mquina.
15.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (10) usando el
tornillo (9) quitado en el paso 9.

16.Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (23) de la


mquina.
Quite la correa (24) del eje (25) y quite la
cubierta frontal inferior (23).

13.Das Netzkabel (15) durch den Kantenschutz


(klein) (16) und das Signalkabel (17) durch
den Kantenschutz (gro) (18) fhren und
dann den Kantenschutz schlieen.

14.Schlieen Sie das Netzkabel (19) und das


Signalkabel (20) an den entsprechenden
Steckverbindern (21) (22) des Gerts an.
15.Die Abdeckung (10) mittels der in Schritt 9
entfernten Schraube (9) wieder anbringen.

16.ffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (23)


des Gerts.
Den Riemen (24) von der Welle (25)
abnehmen und dann die untere rechte
Abdeckung (23) abnehmen.

13.Passare il cavo di alimentazione (15) attraverso il bordo (piccolo) (16) e il cavo del segnale (17) attraverso il bordo (grande) (18), e
quindi chiudere il bordo.

14.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (19) e il


cavo del segnale (20) ai connettori della
macchina (21) e (22), rispettivamente.
15.Ricollocare il coperchio (10) utilizzando la
vite (9) rimossa nel passo 9.

16.Aprire il pannello destro inferiore (23) sulla


macchina.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (24) dall'asta (25) e
quindi rimuovere il pannello destro inferiore
(23).

13. AC (15) (16)


(17) (18)

14. AC (19) (20)


(21)(22)
15. 9 1 (9)
(10)

16. (23)
(24) (25)
(23)

13.AC (15) (16) ,


(17) (18)
.

14. (19) (20)


(21), (22) .
15. 9 (9) 1
(10) .

16. (23) .
(24) (25)
(23) .

13.AC (15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

14.AC (19) (20)


(21)(22)
15. 9 (9)1
(10)

16.(23)
(24) (25)
(23)

27

26

D 27

28
H (M4x8)

28

H (M4x8)

17.Open the paper feeder right cover (26).

18.Fit the 3 hooks (27) on the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) into the 3 holes (28) in the
guide.
19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 8 (H).
NOTICE
Be sure to use S Tite screw M4 8.
Using longer screws, such as S Tite screws M4 20, may damage wires.

17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de


papier (26).

18.Insrer les 3 crochets (27) de l'unit de transport du papier intermdiaire (D) dans les 3 trous (28)
du guide.
19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermediaire (D) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 8 (H).
REMARQUE
S'assurer d'utiliser la vis S Tite M4 8.
L'utilisation de vis plus longues, comme les vis S Tite M4 20, peut endommager les fils.

17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de


papel (26).

18.Coloque los 3 ganchos (27) de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) en los 3 orificios
(28) de la gua.
19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVISO
Asegrese de usar tornillos S Tite M4 x 8.
El uso de tornillos ms largos, como tornillos S Tite M4 x 20, puede daar los cables.

17.Die rechte Abdeckung (26) des Papiereinzugs ffnen.

18.Die 3 Haken (27) an der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (D) in die 3 ffnungen (28) in der Fhrung einpassen.
19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (D) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 8 (H) sichern.
ANMERKUNG
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die S-Tite-Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden.
Die Verwendung von lngeren Schrauben als den S-Tite-Schrauben M4 x 20 kann Kabel beschdigen.

17.Aprire il pannello destro (26) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta.

18.Inserire i 3 ganci (27) sull'unit intermediale di trasporto carta (D) nei 3 fori (28) nella guida.
19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta (D) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVVISO
Utilizzare solo la vite S Tite M4 8.
Se si utilizzano viti pi lunghe, come le viti S Tite M4 20, si possono danneggiare i fili.

17. (26)

18. (D) 3 (27) 3 (28)


19. 2 S M48(H) (D)

S M48
( S M420 )

17. (26) .

18. (D) (27) 3 (28) 3 .


19. M48 S (H) 2 (D) .

M48 S .
( : M420 S ) .

17.(26)

18. (D) (27)3 (28)3


19. M48 S (H)2 (D)

M48 S
(M420 S )

29

E
F
31

30

32

20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying


unit connector (29).
21.Attach the clamp (E) and secure the connector wire.

22.Insert the projection (30) on the wire cover


(F) into the hole (31) in the paper feeder and
install the wire cover (F).
23.Close the paper feeder right cover (26) and
replace the lower right cover (23) on the
machine.

24.Turn the adjusters on each corner (32) until


they reach the floor and then secure the
paper feeder.

20.Raccorder le connecteur (29) de l'unit de


transport du papier intermdiaire.
21.Monter le collier (E) et fixer le cble du connecteur.

22.Insrer la saillie (30) du couvercle du cble


(F) dans le trou (31) du chargeur de papier
et reposer le couvercle du cble (F).
23.Fermer le couvercle droit du chargeur de
papier (26) et reposer le capot infrieur droit
(23) sur la machine.

24.Faire tourner les dispositifs de rglage de


chacun des coins (32) jusqu' ce qu'ils
touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
papier.

20.Conecte el conector de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (29).


21.Fije el sujetador (E) y asegure el cable del
conector.

22.Inserte el resalto (30) de la cubierta para el


cable (F) en el orificio (31) del depsito de
papel e instale la cubierta para el cable (F).
23.Cierre la cubierta derecha del depsito de
papel (26) y vuelva a colocar la cubierta
derecha inferior (23) en la mquina.

24.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (32)


hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuacin,
asegure el depsito de papel.

20.Den Steckverbinder (29) der eingesetzten


Papierfrdereinheit anschlieen.
21.Die Klemme (E) anbringen und das Kabel
des Steckverbinders sichern.

22.Die Nase (30) der Kabelabdeckung (F) in die


ffnung (31) des Papiereinzugs einsetzen
und die Kabelabdeckung (F) anbringen.
23.Schlieen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (26)
des Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere
rechte Abdeckung (23) wieder im Gert ein.

24.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (32) drehen, bis


sie den Boden berhren, und dann den
Papiereinzug sichern.

20.Collegare il connettore (29) dell'unit intermediale di trasporto carta.


21.Applicare il morsetto (E) e fissare il cavo del
connettore.

22.Inserire la sporgenza (30) del coperchio cavi


(F) nel foro (31) nell'unit di alimentazione
della carta ed installare il coperchio cavi (F).
23.Chiudere il pannello destro (26) dell'alimentatore carta e rimontare il pannello destro
inferiore (23) sulla macchina.

24.Ruotare i regolatori (32) presenti su ciascun


angolo finch vengano a contatto con il pavimento, e quindi fissare lunit di alimentazione della carta.

20. (29)
21. (E)

22. (F) (30)


(31) (F)
23. (26)
(23)

24. (32)

20. (29)
.
21. (E) ,
.

22. (F) (30)


(31) (F) .
23. (26)
(23) .

24. (32)
.

20.(29)

21. (E)

22.(F) (30)
(31)
(F)
23.(26)
(23)

24.(32)

33

33
J

K (M4x20)

K (M4x20)

33

33
J

25.Select holes (33) and install each stopper (J) with 2 S Tite screws M4 20 (K) so that the stoppers will be grounded on the floor.

25.Slectionner les trous (33) et installer chaque bute (J) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 (K) de sorte que les butes reposent sur le sol.

25.Seleccione los orificios (33) e instale cada tope (J) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 20 (K) de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo.

25.Whlen Sie die ffnungen (33) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (J) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20 (K) so an, dass die Anschlge am Boden
aufsitzen.

25.Selezionare i fori (33) ed installare ogni fermo (J) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 (K) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento.

25.33 2 M420 S KJ

25. (J) 33 M420 S (K) 2 .

25. (J) 33 M420 S (K) 2

I
G

Setting the paper size plate and media type


plate
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type
plate (I) into the each slots respectively.

Skewed paper feed adjustment


1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Load paper into the cassette and make a test copy to check the image.
3.If the image is skewed (skewed paper feed), make the adjustments described below.
<Reference value> Left-right difference of 1.5 mm or less

Disposition des plaquettes du format de


papier et du type de support
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et
la plaquette du type de support (I) dans leur
logement respectif.

Rglage de l'entranement du papier en biais


1.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Mettre du papier dans le tiroir et effectuer une copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.
3.Si l'image est en biais (entranement du papier en biais), rgler en procdant comme dcrit cidessous.
<Valeur de rfrence> Diffrence de droite gauche de 1,5 mm ou moins.

Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la


placa de tipo de medio
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la
placa de tipo de medio (I) en cada uno de las
ranuras, respectivamente.

Ajuste de alimentacin de papel torcida


1.Conecte el enchufe de la mquina en el receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal
de la mquina.
2.Introduzca papel en el cajn y haga una copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
3. Si la imagen est torcida (alimentacin del papel torcida) haga los ajustes que se describen a
continuacin.
<Valor de referencia> diferencia izquierda-derecha de 1,5 mm o menor.

Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der


Medientypkarte
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die
Medientypkarte (I) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen.

Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug


1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am
Hauptschalter ein.
2.Legen Sie Papier in die Papierlade ein und machen Sie eine Testkopie, um das Bild zu prfen.
3.Nehmen Sie nachstehende Einstellungen vor, falls das Bild verkantet ist (verkanteter Papiereinzug).
<Bezugswert> Links-rechts-Differenz maximal 1,5 mm.

Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e


della piastra del tipo di supporto
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la piastra del tipo di supporto (I) nei rispettivi alloggiamenti.

Regolazione alimentazione obliqua carta


1.Collegare la spina della macchina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Caricare carta nel cassetto ed eseguire una copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
3.Se l'immagine risulta obliqua (alimentazione obliqua della carta), eseguire le regolazioni descritte
sotto.
<Valore di riferimento> Differenza tra destra e sinistra di 1,5 mm o inferiore

G) I)

1.
2.
3.
1.5mm


(G)
(I) .


1. .
2. . .
3. .
1.5mm

(G)
(I)

1. ON
2.
3.

1.5mm

35

36

34

36

4.Pull out the cassette (34) in the paper feeder and loosen the 4 screws (35).
5.Turn the adjusting screw (36) to adjust the cursor skew.
6.Retighten the 4 screws (35).
7.Make another test copy to check the image.

4.Sortir le tiroir (34) du chargeur de papier et desserrer les 4 vis (35).


5.Faire tourner la vis de rglage (36) pour rgler la dviation du curseur.
6.Resserrer les 4 vis (35).
7.Faire une autre copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.

4.Extraiga el cajn (34) del depsito de papel y afloje los 4 tornillos (35).
5.Gire el tornillo de ajuste (36) para ajustar la desviacin del cursor.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 4 tornillos (35).
7.Haga otra copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.

4.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade (34) aus dem Papiereinzug und lsen Sie die 4 Schrauben (35).
5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (36), um die Cursor-Verkantung zu korrigieren.
6.Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben (35) wieder an
7.Erstellen Sie zur berprfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie.

4.Estrarre il cassetto (34) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti (35).
5.Ruotare la vite di regolazione (36) per regolare l'inclinazione del cursore.
6.Ristringere le 4 viti (35).
7.Eseguire un'altra copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.

4. (34) 4 (35)
5. (36)
6. 4 (35)
7.

4. (34) (35) 4 .
5. (36) .
6. (35) 4 .
7. .

4. (34)
(35)4
5. (36)

6. (35)4
7.

10

Adjusting the center line


The reference value for the center line is 0.5 mm or less at position (b) in the correct image (a). If the center line position is outside this range, perform
the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette3 or Cassette4.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (c): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (d): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Rglage de l'axe
La valeur de rfrence pour l'axe est de 0,5 mm ou moins la position (b) d'une image correcte (a). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le rglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, slectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette3 ou Cassette4.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage. Mire d' essai (d): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la lnea central

El valor de referencia de la lnea central es de 0,5 mm o menor, en la posicin (b) de la imagen correcta (a). Si la posicin de la lnea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrn de prueba (c): Aumente el valor de configuracin. Patrn de prueba (d): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie
Der Bezugswert fr die Mittenlinie ist 0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (b) des korrekten Bilds (a). Falls die Mittenlinie auerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, whlen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert erhhen. Testmuster (d): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale
Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale 0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (b) nell'immagine corretta (a). Se la posizione della linea centrale all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (d): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(a) (b) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette3 Cassette4
2.
(c) (d)
3. Start

(a) (b) 0.5mm . .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette3 Cassette4 .
2. .
(c) . (d) .
3. .

(a) (b) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette3 Cassette4
2.
(c) (d)
3.

11

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER

B(2)

E
J(2)

G(4)

C
F

K (M4x20)(4)

H (M4x8)(3)
D

English
Supplied parts
A. Paper feeder.............................................. 1
B. Pin ............................................................. 2
C. Retainer ..................................................... 1
D. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1
B. Broche ....................................................... 2
C. lment de retenue ................................... 1
D. Unit de transport du papier intermdiaire 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Depsito de papel...................................... 1
B. Clavija........................................................ 2
C. Retn ......................................................... 1
D. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1
B. Stift............................................................. 2
C. Halterung ................................................... 1
D. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit ................ 1
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Unit di alimentazione della carta ............. 1
B. Perno ........................................................ 2
C. Fermo ....................................................... 1
D. Unit intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1

A. ...........................
B. .............................
C. ...............................
D. .........................

1
2
1
1

A. ............................................... 1
B. ..................................................... 2
C. ............................................... 1
D. ................................... 1

A. ...................
B. .................................
C. ...............................
D. .....................

1
2
1
1

E. Clamp ........................................................ 1
F. Wire cover.................................................. 1
G. Paper size plate ......................................... 4
H. S Tite screw M4 8 ................................... 3
I. Media type plate(except for 120V model) 12
*I. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6
J. Stopper ...................................................... 2

I (12)
*I (6)
**I (2)

K. S Tite screws M4 20 .............................. 4


Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

E. Collier......................................................... 1
F. Couvercle de cble .................................... 1
G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4
H. Vis S Tite M4 8 ....................................... 3
I. Plaquette du type de support................... 12
J. Bute ......................................................... 2
K. Vis S Tite M4 20 ..................................... 4

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

E. Sujetador ................................................... 1
F. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1
G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 4
H. Tornillo S Tite M4 8 ................................. 3
I. Placa de tipo de medio ............................ 12
J. Tope ........................................................... 2
K. Tornillos S Tite M4 20 ............................. 4

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

E. Klemme...................................................... 1
F. Kabelabdeckung ........................................ 1
G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4
H. S-Tite-Schraube M4 8............................. 3
I. Medientypkarte ........................................ 12
J. Anschlag .................................................... 2
K. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20........................ 4

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

E. Morsetto..................................................... 1
F. Coperchio cavi ........................................... 1
G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4
H. Vite S Tite M4 8 ...................................... 3
I. Piastra tipo carta...................................... 12
J. Fermo ........................................................ 2
K. Vite S Tite M4 20 .................................... 4

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

E. ..............................1
F. .............................1
G. .......................4
H. S M48 ...................3
**I. ......................2
J. ...............................2

K. S M420 .................4

E. ............................................... 1
F. ............................................ 1
G. ............................... 4
H. M48 S ............................ 3
**I. ............................. 2
J. ......................................... 2
E. .............................1
F. ...........................1
G. ...................4
H. M48 S ...................3
**I. ....................2
J. .........................2
K. M420 S ..................4

K. M420 S .......................... 4
,
.

3
4

4-1

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Pull out the right cassette (1) and the left


cassette (2) from the paper feeder (A).
Remove the lift plate stopper (3) from each
cassette and attach it to the storage location.
2.Gently close each cassette.

3.Pull out the lower paper cassette (4) from


the machine.
4.Remove the paper cassette (4-1).

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Sortez le magasin droit (1) et le magasin


gauche (2) du chargeur de papier (A).
Retirez la bute de la plaque de levage (3)
de chaque magasin et fixez-la dans
l'emplacement de stockage.
2.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.

3.Sortez le magasin de papier infrieur (4) de


la machine.
4.Retirez le magasin de papier (4-1).

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Extraiga el depsito derecho (1) y el


depsito izquierdo (2) del depsito de papel
(A). Quite el tope de placa de elevacin (3)
de cada depsito y pngalo en el espacio
reservado para guardarlo.
2.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.

3.Extraiga el depsito inferior (4) de la


mquina.
4.Quite el depsito de papel (4-1).

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette (1) und die


linke Kassette (2) aus dem Papiereinzug (A)
heraus. Entfernen Sie die Verriegelung des
Papierlifts (3) aus jeder Kassette und setzen
Sie die Verriegelung in die Parkposition ein.
2.Alle Kassetten sachte schlieen.

3.Ziehen Sie die untere Kassette (4) aus dem


Gert heraus.
4.Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (4-1) heraus.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Estrarre il cassetto destro (1) e il cassetto


sinistro (2) dall'unit di alimentazione carta
(A). Rimuovere il fermo della piastra di sollevamento (3) da ogni cassetto e fissarlo sulla
posizione a riposo.
2.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.

3.Estrarre il cassetto carta inferiore (4) dalla


macchina.
4.Nehmen Sie die Papierkassette (4-1) heraus.

1. (A) (1)
(2) 1
(3)
2.

3. (4)
4. (4-1)

1. (A) (1)
(2) . (3)
1 .
2. .

3. (4) .
4. (4-1) .

OFF

1.(A) (1)
(2)
(3) 1

2.

3. (4)
4. (4-1)

4-1

6
7
6
4-2

5.Place the machine (7) on the paper feeder


(A) so that the pins (5) at the front left and
front right of the paper feeder (A) are aligned
with the holes (6) in the base of the machine.

6.Secure the machine (7) to the paper feeder


(A) with the 2 pins (B).

7.Align the holes (8) of the lower cassette (4-1)


for the machine with the pins (9) in the cassette slider (4-2). Put the paper cassette (41).
8.Push the lower paper cassette (4) in fully.

5.Monter la machine (7) sur le chargeur de


papier (A) de sorte que les broches (5)
l'avant gauche et l'avant droit du chargeur
de papier (A) soient aligns avec les trous
(6) dans la base du machine.

6.Fixer la machine (7) au chargeur de papier


(A) avec les 2 broches (B).

7.Alignez les trous (8) du magasin infrieur (41) pour la machine avec les ergots (9) dans
le tiroir du magasin (4-2). Placez le magasin
de papier (4-1).
8.Enfoncez fond le magasin de papier infrieur (4).

5.Coloque la mquina (7) sobre el depsito de


papel (A) de forma que los pasadores (5) en
los lados frontales izquierdo y derecho del
depsito de papel (A) estn alineados con
los orificios (6) de la base de la mquina.

6.Fije la mquina (7) al depsito de papel (A)


con los dos pasadores (B).

7. Alinee los orificios (8) del depsito inferior (4-1)

5.Setzen Sie das Gert (7) so auf den


Papiereinzug (A), dass die Stifte (5) vorne
links und vorne rechts am Papiereinzug (A)
auf die ffnungen (6) im Boden des Gerts
ausgerichtet sind.

6.Sichern Sie das Gert (7) mit den 2 Stiften


(B) am Papiereinzug (A).

7. Richten Sie die Lcher (8) der Kassette (4-1)

5.Posizionare la macchina (7) sull'alimentatore


carta (A) in modo che i perni (5) sul lato
destro e sinistro anteriore dell'alimentatore
carta (A) siano allineati con i fori (6) presenti
sulla base della macchina.

6.Fissare la macchina (7) sull'alimentatore


carta (A) con i 2 perni (B).

7.Allineare i fori (8) del cassetto inferiore (4-1)


per la macchina con perni (9) della guida
cassetto (4-2). Inserire il cassetto carta (41).
8.Spingere il cassetto carta inferiore (4) fino in
fondo.

5. (A) (5)
(6)
(7) (A)

6. 2 (B) (7)
(A)

7. (4-1) (8)
(4-2) (9) (41)
8. (4)

5. (A)
(5) (6)
(7) (A)
.

6. (B) 2 (7) (A)


.

7. (4-1) (8)
(4-2) (9) .
(4-1) .
8. (4)
.

5.(A)
(5) (6)
(A)
(7)

6. (B)2 (7)
(A)

7. (4-1) (8)
(4-2) (9)
(4-1)
8. (4)

de la mquina con los pasadores (9) del deslizador del depsito (4-2). Coloque el depsito
de papel (4-1).
8. Ejerza presin sobre el depsito de papel inferior (4) hasta introducirlo por completo.

des Gerts mit den Stiften (9) im Kassettenanschlag (4-2) aus. Setzen Sie die Papierkassette
(4-1) wieder ein.
8. Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (4) bis zum
Anschlag ein.

14
12
15

10

13

H(M4x8)
C

11

9.Remove the screw (10) in the rear of the


paper feeder and remove the cover (11).

10.Remove the screw (12) to remove the metal


plate (13).

11.Fit the hook (14) on the mounting plate (C)


into the opening (15) and then align the 2
positioning projections.
12.Secure the mounting plate (C) with the S Tite
screw M4 8 (H).

9.Dposer la vis (10) l'arrire du chargeur de


papier et dposer le couvercle (11).

10.Dposer la vis (12) pour enlever la plaque


mtallique (13).

11.Insrer le crochet (14) du p5ateau de montage (C) dans l'ouverture (15) et aligner les 2
saillies de positionnement.
12.Fixer le plateau de montage (C) avec la vis S
Tite M4 8 (H).

9.Quite el tornillo (10) del lado trasero del


depsito de papel y quite la cubierta (11).

10.Quite el tornillo (12) para desmontar la placa


de metal (13).

11.Coloque el gancho (14) de la placa de montaje (C) en la abertura (15) y, despus,


alinee los 2 resaltos de posicin.
12.Asegure la placa de montaje (C) con el tornillo S Tite M4 x 8 (H).

9.Die Schraube (10) an der Rckseite des


Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung
(11) abnehmen.

10.Die Schraube (12) herausdrehen, um die


Metallplatte (13) abzunehmen.

11.Den Haken (14) auf der Montageplatte (C) in


die ffnung (15) einpassen und dann die 2
Positionierungsnasen ausrichten.
12.Die Montageplatte (C) mit der S-TiteSchraube M4 x 8 verwenden (H) befestigen.

9.Rimuovere la vite (10) nel retro dell'unit di


alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere
il coperchio (11).

10.Rimuovere la vite (12), per rimuovere la


piastra di metallo (13).

11.Inserire il gancio (14) sulla piastra di montaggio (C) nell'apertura (15) e quindi
allineare le 2 sporgenze di posizionamento.
12.Fissare la piastra di montaggio (C) con la
vite S Tite M48 (H).

9. 1 (10)
(11)

10. 1 (12) (13)

11. (C) (14) (15)


2
12. 1 S M48 (H)
(C)

9. (10) 1
(11) .

10. (12) 1 (13)


.

11. (C) (14) (15)


2 .
12. M48 S (H) 1 (C)
.

9. (10)1

(11)

10. (12)1 (13)

11. (C) (14) (15)


2

12. M48 S (H)1 (C)

23
17 19

22

26
25

21

20
16

24

18

13.Pass the power cord (16) through the edging


(small) (17) and the signal cable (18)
through the edging (large) (19) and then
close the edging

14.Connect the power cord (20) and the signal


cable (21) to connectors (22) (23) respectively on the machine.
15. Replace the cover (11) using the screw (10)
removed in step 9.

16.Open the lower right cover (24) on the


machine.
Remove the strap (25) from the shaft (26)
and remove lower right cover (24).

13.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation (16)


dans le (petit) passage (17) et le cble du
signal (18) dans le (grand) passage (19) puis
fermer le passage.

14.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'alimentation (20) et le cble de signal (21) aux


connecteurs (22) (23) de la machine.
15. Reposer le couvercle (11) l'aide de la vis
(10) dpose l'tape 9.

16.Ouvrir le capot infrieur droit (24) de la


machine.
Dposer la courroie (25) de l'arbre (26) et
dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (24).

13.Pase el cable de alimentacin (16) a travs


de la pestaa (pequea) (17) y el cable de
seales (18) a travs de la pestaa (grande)
(19) y, despus, cierre la pestaa.

14.Conecte el cable de alimentacin (20) y el


cable de seal (21) a los conectores (22)
(23) respectivamente de la mquina.
15.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (11) usando el
tornillo (10) quitado en el paso 9.

16.Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (24) de la


mquina.
Quite la correa (25) del eje (26) y quite la
cubierta frontal inferior (24).

13.Das Netzkabel (16) durch den Kantenschutz


(klein) (17) und das Signalkabel (18) durch
den Kantenschutz (gro) (19) fhren und
dann den Kantenschutz schlieen.

14.Schlieen Sie das Netzkabel (20) und das


Signalkabel (21) an den entsprechenden
Steckverbindern (22) (23) des Gerts an.
15.Die Abdeckung (11) mittels der in Schritt 9
entfernten Schraube (10) wieder anbringen.

16.ffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (24)


des Gerts.
Den Riemen (25) von der Welle (26)
abnehmen und dann die untere rechte
Abdeckung (24) abnehmen.

13.Passare il cavo di alimentazione (16) attraverso il bordo (piccolo) (17) e il cavo del segnale (18) attraverso il bordo (grande) (19), e
quindi chiudere il bordo.

14.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (20) e il


cavo del segnale (21) ai connettori della
macchina (22) e (23), rispettivamente.
15.Ricollocare il coperchio (11) utilizzando la
vite (10) rimossa nel passo 9.

16.Aprire il pannello destro inferiore (24) sulla


macchina.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (25) dall'asta (26) e
quindi rimuovere il pannello destro inferiore
(24).

13. AC (16) (17)


(18) (19)

14. AC (20) (21)


(22)(23)
15. 9 1 (10)
(11)

16. (24)
(25) (26)
(24)

13.AC (16) (17) ,


(18) (19)
.

14. (20) (21)


(22), (23) .
15. 9 (10) 1
(11) .

16. (24) .
(25) (26)
(24) .

13.AC (16)
(17)
(18)
(19)

14.AC (20) (21)


(22)(23)
15. 9 (10)1
(11)

16.(24)
(25) (26)
(24)

28

27

D 28

29
H(M4x8)

H(M4x8)
29

17.Open the paper feeder right cover (27).

18.Fit the 3 hooks (28) on the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) into the 3 holes (29) in the
guide.
19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying unit (D) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 8 (H).
NOTICE
Be sure to use S Tite screw M4 8.
Using longer screws, such as S Tite screws M4 20, may damage wires.

17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de


papier (27).

18.Insrer les 3 crochets (28) de l'unit de transport du papier intermdiaire (D) dans les 3 trous (29)
du guide.
19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermediaire (D) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 8 (H).
REMARQUE
S'assurer d'utiliser la vis S Tite M4 8.
L'utilisation de vis plus longues, comme les vis S Tite M4 20, peut endommager les fils.

17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de


papel (27).

18.Coloque los 3 ganchos (28) de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) en los 3 orificios
(29) de la gua.
19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (D) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVISO
Asegrese de usar tornillos S Tite M4 x 8.
El uso de tornillos ms largos, como tornillos S Tite M4 x 20, puede daar los cables.

17.Die rechte Abdeckung (27) des Papiereinzugs ffnen.

18.Die 3 Haken (28) an der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (D) in die 3 ffnungen (29) in der Fhrung einpassen.
19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (D) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 8 (H) sichern.
ANMERKUNG
Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die S-Tite-Schraube M4 x 8 verwenden.
Die Verwendung von lngeren Schrauben als den S-Tite-Schrauben M4 x 20 kann Kabel beschdigen.

17.Aprire il pannello destro (27) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta.

18.Inserire i 3 ganci (28) sull'unit intermediale di trasporto carta (D) nei 3 fori (29) nella guida.
19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta (D) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 8 (H).
AVVISO
Utilizzare solo la vite S Tite M4 8.
Se si utilizzano viti pi lunghe, come le viti S Tite M4 20, si possono danneggiare i fili.

17. (27)

18. (D) 3 (28) 3 (29)


19. 2 S M48(H) (D)

S M48
( S M420 )

17. (27) .

18. (D) (28) 3 (29) 3 .


19. M48 S (H) 2 (D) .

M48 S .
( : M420 S ) .

17.(27)

18. (D) (28)3 (29)3


19. M48 S (H)2 (D)

M48 S
(M420 S )

30

32

31

33

20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying


unit connector (30).
21.Attach the clamp (E) and secure the connector wire.

22.Insert the projection (31) on the wire cover


(F) into the hole (32) in the paper feeder and
install the wire cover (F).
23.Close the paper feeder right cover (27) and
replace the lower right cover (24) on the
machine.

24.Turn the adjusters on each corner (33) until


they reach the floor and then secure the
paper feeder.

20.Raccorder le connecteur (30) de l'unit de


transport du papier intermdiaire.
21.Monter le collier (E) et fixer le cble du connecteur.

22.Insrer la saillie (31) du couvercle du cble


(F) dans le trou (32) du chargeur de papier
et reposer le couvercle du cble (F).
23.Fermer le couvercle droit du chargeur de
papier (27) et reposer le capot infrieur droit
(24) sur la machine.

24.Faire tourner les dispositifs de rglage de


chacun des coins (33) jusqu' ce qu'ils
touchent le sol et fixer ensuite le chargeur de
papier.

20.Conecte el conector de la unidad de transporte de papel intermedia (30).


21.Fije el sujetador (E) y asegure el cable del
conector.

22.Inserte el resalto (31) de la cubierta para el


cable (F) en el orificio (32) del depsito de
papel e instale la cubierta para el cable (F).
23.Cierre la cubierta derecha del depsito de
papel (27) y vuelva a colocar la cubierta
derecha inferior (24) en la mquina.

24.Gire los reguladores en cada esquina (33)


hasta que lleguen al piso y, a continuacin,
asegure el depsito de papel.

20.Den Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten


Papierfrdereinheit anschlieen.
21.Die Klemme (E) anbringen und das Kabel
des Steckverbinders sichern.

22.Die Nase (31) der Kabelabdeckung (F) in die


ffnung (32) des Papiereinzugs einsetzen
und die Kabelabdeckung (F) anbringen.
23.Schlieen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (27)
des Papiereinzugs und setzen Sie die untere
rechte Abdeckung (24) wieder im Gert ein.

24.Die Einsteller an jeder Ecke (33) drehen, bis


sie den Boden berhren, und dann den
Papiereinzug sichern.

20.Collegare il connettore (30) dell'unit intermediale di trasporto carta.


21.Applicare il morsetto (E) e fissare il cavo del
connettore.

22.Inserire la sporgenza (31) del coperchio cavi


(F) nel foro (32) nell'unit di alimentazione
della carta ed installare il coperchio cavi (F).
23.Chiudere il pannello destro (27) dell'alimentatore carta e rimontare il pannello destro
inferiore (24) sulla macchina.

24.Ruotare i regolatori (33) presenti su ciascun


angolo finch vengano a contatto con il pavimento, e quindi fissare lunit di alimentazione della carta.

20. (30)
21. (E)

22. (F) (31)


(32) (F)
23. (27)
(24)

24. (33)

20. (30)
.
21. (E) ,
.

22. (F) (31)


(32) (F) .
23. (27)
(24) .

24. (33)
.

20.(30)

21. (E)

22.(F) (31)
(32)
(F)
23.(27)
(24)

24.(33)

34

34
J

K (M4x20)

K (M4x20)

34

34
J

25.Select holes (34) and install each stopper (J) with 2 S Tite screws M4 20 (K) so that the stoppers will be grounded on the floor.

25.Slectionner les trous (34) et installer chaque bute (J) avec 2 vis S Tite M4 20 (K) de sorte que les butes reposent sur le sol.

25.Seleccione los orificios (34) e instale cada tope (J) con los 2 tornillos S Tite M4 20 (K) de manera que los topes se conecten a tierra en el suelo.

25.Whlen Sie die ffnungen (34) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (J) mit den 2 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20 (K) so an, dass die Anschlge am Boden
aufsitzen.

25.Selezionare i fori (34) ed installare ogni fermo (J) con le 2 viti S Tite M4 20 (K) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra sul pavimento.

25.34 2 M420 S KJ

25. (J) 34 M420 S (K) 2 .

25. (J) 34 M420 S (K) 2

36
G

35
36

Setting the paper size plate and media type


plate
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type
plate (I) into the each slots respectively.

Changing paper size (metric specifications


only)
At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4
is set for metric models. Use the procedure
below to change the size to B5.

1.Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder.


2.Turn the front lock lever (35) 90 and remove
the front deck cursor (36).

Disposition des plaquettes du format de


papier et du type de support
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et
la plaquette du type de support (I) dans leur
logement respectif.

Modification du format du papier (pour


spcifications mtriques seulement)
expdition, les modles mesure en pouces
sont rgls sur le format Letter et les modles
mesure mtrique sur le format A4. Pour passer
au format B5, procder de la manire suivante.

1.Tirer le magasin du chargeur de papier vers


soi.
2.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant
(35) de 90 et dposer le curseur de platine
avant (36).

Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la


placa de tipo de medio
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la
placa de tipo de medio (I) en cada uno de las
ranuras, respectivamente.

Cmo cambiar el tamao de papel (slo para


las especificaciones mtricas)
En el momento de salida de fbrica, se configura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4
para los modelos en sistema mtrico. Siga este
procedimiento para cambiar el tamao a B5.

1.Abra el casete del depsito de papel.


2.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (35) 90 y
quite el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36).

Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der


Medientypkarte
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die
Medientypkarte (I) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen.

ndern des Papierformats (nur metrische Spezifikationen)


Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollma
das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen
mit metrischem Ma das Format A4.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umgeschaltet werden.

1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiereinzug.


2.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (35) um
90 drehen und den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) abnehmen.

Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e


della piastra del tipo di supporto
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la piastra del tipo di supporto (I) nei rispettivi alloggiamenti.

Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le


specifiche metriche)
Al momento della spedizione, Letter impostato
per le specifiche in pollici e A4 impostato per
le specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura
riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.

1.Estrarre il cassetto dellunit di alimentatore


della carta.
2.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (35) di 90
e rimuovere il cursore frontale del deck (36).

G) I)

Letter
A4 B5

1.
2. (35) 90
36


(G)
(I) .


, Letter, A4
. B5
.

1. .
2. (35) 90
36 .

(G)
(I)

Letter A4
B5

1.
2. (35) 90

36

39

40

37
41

38

36

35

40

3.Move the front deck cursor (36) so that it is aligned with the size indicators on the top (38) and
bottom (37) of the cassette.
4.Turn the front lock lever (35) 90 to lock it.
5.Move the rear deck cursor (39) in the same way.

6.Release the hook (40) and remove the deck


trailing edge cursor (41).

3.Dplacer le curseur de platine avant (36) de sorte qu'il soit align avec les indicateurs de format
en haut (38) et en bas (37) du tiroir.
4.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (35) de 90 pour le verrouiller.
5.Dplacer le curseur de platine arrire (39) en procdant de la mme manire.

6.Librer le crochet (40) et dposer le curseur


du bord arrire de la platine (41).

3.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36) para que quede alineado con las indicadores de
tamao de la parte superior (38) e inferior (37) del cajn.
4.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (35) 90 para bloquearla.
5.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (39) de la misma forma.

6.Libere el gancho (40) y quite el cursor del


borde inferior de la plataforma (41).

3.Den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) so verschieben, dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben (38)
und unten (37) an der Kassette fluchtet.
4.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (35) zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen.
5.Den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (39) auf gleiche Weise verschieben.

6.Den Haken (40) lsen und den HinterkanteCursor (41) der Konsole abnehmen.

3.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (36) in modo che esso risulti allineato con gli indicatori di formato sulla parte superiore (38) e inferiore (37) del cassetto.
4.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (35) di 90, per bloccarla.
5.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (39) allo stesso modo.

6.Rilasciare il gancio (40) e rimuovere il cursore del bordo di uscita del deck (41).

3. (36) (37) (38)


4. (35) 90
5. (39)

6. 40 (41)

3. (37) (38) (36)


.
4. (35) 90 .
5. (39) .

6.40 (41)
.

3. (37) (38)
(36)
4. (35) 90
5. (39)

6.
40
(41)

10

44

42

39

45
0.51.5mm
41
43

36

7.Lift up the sub-cursor (42).


8.Align with the size indicator (43), engage the
hook (44) and install the deck trailing edge
cursor (41).

Adjusting the cursor width


1.Load paper in the cassettes.
2.If the gap between the front deck cursor (36) and the paper (45) is outside the 0.5 to 1.5 mm
range when the paper (45) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (39), perform the following
adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large
can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.

7.Lever le curseur secondaire (42).


8.Aligner avec l'indicateur de format (43),
engager le crochet (44) et reposer le curseur
du bord arrire de la platine (41).

Rglage de la largeur du curseur


1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2.Si l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (36) et le papier (45) est hors des limites de 0,5
1,5 mm quand le papier (45) touche le curseur de platine arrire (39), procder au rglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empcher l'entranement du papier et une largeur
trop grande risque d'entraner des problmes du type entranement du papier de biais.

7.Levante el cursor secundario (42).


8.Alinee con el indicador de tamao (43),
enganche el gancho (44) e instale el cursor
del borde inferior de la plataforma. (41).

Cmo ajustar la anchura del cursor


1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
2.Si la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (36) y el papel (45) est fuera del rango de
0,5 a 1,5 mm cuando el papel (45) toca el cursor trasero de la plataforma (39), haga el siguiente
ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequea puede impedir la alimentacin de papel; una anchura
del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentacin torcida de papel.

7.Den Unter-Cursor (42) anheben.


8.Auf die Formatanzeige (43) ausrichten, den
Haken (44) einsetzen und den HinterkanteCursor (41) der Konsole anbringen.

Einstellen der Cursor-Breite


1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36) und dem Papier (45) auerhalb
des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,5 mm liegt, wenn das Papier (45) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (39) anliegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu groe CursorBreite verkanteten Papiereinzug und hnliche Probleme verursachen kann.

7.Sollevare il cursore secondario (42).


8.Allineare con l'indicatore formato (43), fissare il gancio (44) e installare il cursore del
bordo di uscita del deck (41).

Regolazione della larghezza del cursore


1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (36) e la carta (45) fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,5 mm

7. (42)
8. (43) 44
(41)

1.
2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm

7. (42) .
8. (43) 44
(41) .


1. .
2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm .
, .

7. (42)
8. (43)
44
(41)

1.
2. (39) (45) (36) (45)
0.5 1.5mm

quando la carta (45) tocca il cursore postertiore del deck (39), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola pu ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande pu essere causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.

11

47

36

36

46
3.Insert a Philips-head screwdriver into the 2 long slots (46) in the front deck cursor (36) and loosen
the 2 adjusting screws (47). Then move the front deck cursor (36).

4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (47).


5.Check that the gap between the front deck
cursor (36) and the paper is between 0.5
and 1.5 mm.

3.Insrer un tournevis cruciforme dans les 2 longues fentes (46) du curseur de platine avant (36) et
desserrer les 2 vis de rglage (47). Dplacer ensuite le curseur de platine avant (36).

4.Resserrer les 2 vis de rglage (47).


5.Vrifier que l'cartement entre le curseur de
platine avant (36) et le papier est entre 0,5 et
1,5 mm.

3.Inserte un destornillador de cabeza Philips en las dos ranuras largas (46) en el cursor frontal de
la plataforma (36) y afloje los 2 tornillos de ajuste (47). Despus, mueva el cursor frontal de la
plataforma (36).

4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste


(47).
5.Verifique que la separacin entre el cursor
frontal de la plataforma (36) y el papel sea
de entre 0,5 y 1,5 mm.

3.Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen ffnungen (46) im vorderen Konsole-Cursor


(36) stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben (47) lsen. Danach den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (36)
verschieben.

4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (47) wieder anziehen.


5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand
zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor
(36) und dem Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,5
mm liegt.

3.Inserire un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips nelle 2 fessure lunghe (46) nel cursore frontale del deck (36) e allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (47). Quindi spostare il cursore frontale del
deck (36).

4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (47).


5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (36) e la carta sia compreso
nella gamma tra 0,5 e 1,5 mm.

3. (36) 2 (46) 2 (47)


(36)

4. 2 (47)
5. (36)
0.5 1.5mm

3. (36) 2 (46) (47) 2


(46) .

4. (47) 2 .
5. (36) 0.5 1.5
mm .

3. (36) 2 (46) (47)2

(36)

4. (47)2
5. (36) 0.5
1.5mm

12

Adjusting the center line


The reference value for the center line is 0.5 mm or less at position (b) in the correct image (a). If the center line position is outside this range, perform
the following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette3 or Cassette4.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (c): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (d): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Rglage de l'axe
La valeur de rfrence pour l'axe est de 0,5 mm ou moins la position (b) d'une image correcte (a). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le rglage suivant.
1.Passer en mode maintenance U034, slectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette3 ou Cassette4.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage. Mire d' essai (d): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la lnea central
El valor de referencia de la lnea central es de 0,5 mm o menor, en la posicin (b) de la imagen correcta (a). Si la posicin de la lnea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo de mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrn de prueba (c): Aumente el valor de configuracin. Patrn de prueba (d): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie
Der Bezugswert fr die Mittenlinie ist 0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (b) des korrekten Bilds (a). Falls die Mittenlinie auerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U034, whlen Sie LSU Out Left und Cassette3 oder Cassette4.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert erhhen. Testmuster (d): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale
Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale 0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (b) nell'immagine corretta (a). Se la posizione della linea centrale all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette3 o Cassette4.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (d): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(a) (b) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette3 Cassette4
2.
(c) (d)
3. Start

(a) (b) 0.5mm . .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette3 Cassette4 .
2. .
(c) . (d) .
3. .

(a) (b) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette3 Cassette4
2.
(c) (d)
3.

13

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


SIDE DECK

English
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm monochrome
machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.

Franais
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et aux
machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.

Espaol
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm y a las
mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas monocromticas de 65 y 80 ppm.

Deutsch
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 35,
45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommaschinen.

Italiano
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le macchine
monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm.

MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55


MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80

MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .


MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55


MFP 65/65 75/70 65
80

D (2)
C

G (2)

F (M4x8)(8)

H (6)
*H (3)
**H (1)

J (M4x10)

Supplied parts
A. Side feeder ................................................ 1
B. Large base slider ....................................... 1
C. Small base slider ....................................... 1
D. Lock pin ..................................................... 2
E. Switch press plate ..................................... 1
F. M4 8 screw ............................................. 8

G. Paper size plate ......................................... 2


H. Media type plate(except for 120V model) .. 6
*H.Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 3
I. Cover plate ................................................ 1
J. M4 10 tapping screw............................... 1
K. Film ............................................................ 1

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


material from supplied parts.

Pices fournies
A. Plateau d'alimentation latral..................... 1
B. Grande rgle de base................................ 1
C. Petite rgle de base................................... 1
D. Broche de verrouillage............................... 2
E. Plaque de pression de l'interrupteur .......... 1
F. Vis M4 8.................................................. 8

G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2


H. Plaquette du type de support..................... 6
I. Capot ......................................................... 1
J. Vis de connexion M4 10 ......................... 1
K. Film ..................................................................... 1

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Partes suministradas
A. Alimentador lateral..................................... 1
B. Deslizador de base grande........................ 1
C. Deslizador de base pequeo..................... 1
D. Clavija de bloqueo ..................................... 2
E. Placa de presin del interruptor................. 1
F. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 8

G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 2


H. Placa de tipo de medio .............................. 6
I. Tapa ........................................................... 1
J. Tornillo de roscado M4 10 ...................... 1
K. Pelcula .......................................................... 1

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Gelieferte Teile
A. Seitlicher Einzug........................................ 1
B. Groer Basis-Schieber .............................. 1
C. Kleiner Basis-Schieber .............................. 1
D. Arretierstift ................................................. 2
E. Schalterdruckplatte.................................... 1
F. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 8

G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2
H. Medientypkarte .......................................... 6
I. Abdeckplatte .............................................. 1
J. M4 10 Schneidschraube......................... 1
K. Film ..................................................................1

Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungsmaterial vollstndig von den mitgelieferten


Teilen.

Parti di fornitura
A. Unit di alimentazione laterale................... 1
B. Scivolo di base grande .............................. 1
C. Scivolo di base piccolo .............................. 1
D. Perno di bloccaggio ................................... 2
E. Piastra spingi interruttore........................... 1
F. Vite M4 8 ................................................ 8

G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2


H. Piastra tipo carta........................................ 6
I. Coperchio .................................................. 1
J. Vite autofilettante M4 10 ......................... 1
K. Pellicola ..................................................... 1

Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il


materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.

A. .............................
B. ........................
C. ........................
D. .............................
E. .............................

1
1
1
2
1

F. M48 ............................8
G. .........................2
**H. ........................1
I. .................................1
J. M410 .......................1
K. .................................1

A. ......................................... 1
B. .............................. 1
C. .............................. 1
D. .............................................. 2
E. ........................................... 1

F. M48......................................... 8
G. ............................... 2
**H. ............................. 1
I. ..................................... 1
J. M410 ................................ 1
K. .................................................. 1

,
.

A. .....................
B. ...................
C. ...................
D. ...........................
E. .....................
F. M48 ...........................

G. ...................2
**H. ....................1
I. .......................1
J. M410 .................1
K. .............................1

1
1
1
2
1
8

1
Procedure
Be sure to turn the MFP main power switch off
and disconnect the MFP power plug from the
wall outlet before starting to install the side
feeder.

Installation on medium-speed MFPs


If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 10.
1.Open the lower right cover (1) on the MFP.
Remove the strap (2) from the shaft (3) and remove lower right cover (1).

Procdure
Veiller bien mettre linterrupteur principal du
MFP hors tension et dbrancher la fiche dalimentation du MFP de la prise murale avant de
commencer linstallation du plateau d'alimentation latral.

Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne


Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer l'tape 10.
1.Ouvrir le couvercle infrieur droit (1) du MFP.
Dposer la courroie (2) de l'arbre (3) et dposer le couvercle infrieur droit (1).

Procedimiento
Asegrese de apagar el interruptor principal del
MFP y de desconectar el enchufe del MFP del
receptculo de pared antes de empezar a instalar el alimentador lateral.

Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media


Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 10.
1.Abra la cubierta frontal inferior (1) del MFP.
Quite la correa (2) del eje (3) y quite la cubierta frontal inferior (1).

Verfahren
Schalten Sie unbedingt den Hauptschalter des
MFP aus, und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des
MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab, bevor Sie mit
der Installation des seitlichen Einzugs beginnen.

Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse


Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 10.
1.Die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) am MFP ffnen.
Den Riemen (2) von der Welle (3) abnehmen und dann die untere rechte Abdeckung (1)
abnehmen.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare la procedura di installazione
dellunit di alimentazione laterale, assicurarsi di
spegnere linterruttore principale di alimentazione dellMFP, e di scollegare la spina del cavo di
alimentazione dalla presa elettrica a muro.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media


Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al passo 10.
1.Aprire il coperchio destro inferiore (1) sull'MFP.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (2) dall'asta (3) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (1).

MFP

MFP
MFP 10
1. MFP (1)
(2) (3) (1)

MFP
OFF
.

MFP
MFP 10 .
1.MFP (1) .
(2) (3) (1) .

MFP
OFF

MFP
MFP 10
1.MFP (1)
(2) (3) (1)

4
5

10

10

11

2.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (4).


3.Open the panel (6) on the MFP front right
cover (5).

4.Remove 3 screws (7) and remove the front


right cover (5).

5.Remove 3 screws (10). Remove the lower


right rear cover (11).

2.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du


MFP (4).
3.Ouvrir le panneau (6) sur le capot avant droit
du MFP (5).

4.Dposer les 3 vis (7) et dposer le capot


avant droit (5).

5.Dposer les 3 vis (10). Dposer le capot arrire droit infrieur (11).

2.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del


MFP (4).
3.Abra el panel (6) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (5).

4.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y quite la cubierta


delantera derecha (5).

5.Quite los 3 tornillos (10). Quite la cubierta


trasera inferior derecha (11).

2.ffnen Sie die Papierfrderabdeckung (4)


des MFP.
3.ffnen Sie die Platte (6) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (5) des MFP.

4.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (7) und nehmen


Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) ab.

5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (10). Nehmen


Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (11)
ab.

2.Aprire il coperchio (4) dell'unit di trasporto


carta dell'MFP.
3.Aprire il pannello (6) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (5) dell'MFP.

4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7), e quindi rimuovere il


coperchio destro posteriore (5).

5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (10). Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (11).

2. MFP (4)
3. MFP (5) (6)

4. 3 (7) (5)

5. 3 (10)
(11)

2.MFP (4) .
3.MFP (5) (6)
.

4. (7) 3 (5)
.

5. (10) 3 .
(11) .

2.MFP (4)
3.MFP (5) (6)

4. (7)3 (5)

5. (10)3 (11)

52
53

21
5

22
11

6.Remove the breakaway cover (52) from the paper feeder lower right cover (53).

7.Remove the breakaway cover (21) from the


front right cover (5) and the breakaway cover
(22) from the lower right rear cover (11).

6.Retirez le capot dtachable (52) du capot infrieur droit du chargeur de papier (53).

7.Dposer le couvercle amovible (21) du capot


avant droit (5) et le couvercle amovible (22)
du capot arrire infrieur droit (11).

6.Quite la cubierta de separacin (52) de la cubierta inferior derecha del depsito de papel (53).

7.Quite la cubierta divisoria (21) de la cubierta


delantera derecha (5) y la cubierta divisoria
(22) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(11).

6.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (52) von der untere rechte Abdeckung (53) des Papiereinzugs ab.

7.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (21)


von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (5) ab
und die Ablsungsabdeckung (22) von der
unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (11).

6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (52) dal coperchio destro inferiore (53) dell'unit di alimentazione carta.

7.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (21) dal


coperchio destro anteriore (5), e il coperchio
di distacco (22) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (11).

6.5352

7. (5) (21)
(11) (22)

6. (53) (52) .

7. (5) (21)
(11) (22)
.

6. (53) (52)

7.(5) (21)
(11) (22)

24

1mm

1mm
0mm
1mm
23

8.Remove the panel (23) from the MFP lower


right cover (1) with a flat blade screwdriver.

9.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (24) indicated in the illustration.
Proceed to step 21

8.Dposer le panneau (23) du capot infrieur


droit du MFP (1) en procdant l'aide d'un
tournevis lame.

9.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (24) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement
nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool.
Passer l'tape 21.

8.Extraiga el panel (23) de la cubierta derecha


inferior del MFP (1) con un destornillador de
pala plana.

9.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la
pelcula (K) en el lugar (24) que se indica en la ilustracin.
Vaya al paso 21.

8.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (23) von der unteren rechten Abdeckung (1) des MFP ab.

9.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in
der Abbildung angegebenen Position (24) anbringen.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 21.

8.Rimuovere il pannello (23) dal coperchio


destro inferiore (1) dell'MFP con un cacciavite a testa piana.

9.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
(K) nella posizione (24) indicata nell'illustrazione.
Procedere al passo 21.

8. MFP
(1) (23)

9. (24) K
21

8.MFP (1) (23)


.

9. , (24) K .
21 .

8.MFP (1) (23)

9.
(24) K

21

26

30

27

29

25

28

Installation on high-speed MFPs


10.Open the right cover 1 (25) on the MFP.
Remove the strap (26) from the shaft (27) and remove right cover 1
(25).

11.Open the right cover 2 (28) on the MFP.


Remove the strap (29) from the right cover shaft (30) and remove the
right cover 2 (28).

Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse


10.Ouvrir le capot droit 1 (25) du MFP.
Dposer la courroie (26) de l'arbre (27) et dposer le capot droit 1 (25).

11.Ouvrir le capot droit 2 (28) du MFP.


Dposer la courroie (29) de l'axe du capot droit (30) et dposer le
capot droit 2 (28).

Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


10.Abra la cubierta derecha 1 (25) del MFP.
Quite la correa (26) del eje (27) y quite la cubierta derecha 1 (25).

11.Abra la cubierta derecha 2 (28) del MFP.


Quite la correa (29) del eje de la cubierta derecha (30) y quite la cubierta derecha 2 (28).

Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse


10.Die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25) am MFP ffnen.
Den Riemen (26) von der Welle (27) abnehmen und dann die rechte
Abdeckung 1 (25) abnehmen.

11.Die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) am MFP ffnen.


Nehmen Sie den Riemen (29) von der Welle (30) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) ab.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


10.Aprire il coperchio destro 1 (25) sull'MFP.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (26) dall'asta (27) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro 1 (25).

11.Aprire il coperchio destro 2 (28) sull'MFP.


Rimuovere la cinghietta (29) dall'asta (30) del coperchio destro e quindi
rimuovere il coperchio destro 2 (28).

MFP
10. MFP 1(25)
(26) (27) 1(25)

11. MFP 2(28)


(30) (29) 2(28)

MFP
10.MFP 1 (25) .
(26) (27) 1 (25) .

11.MFP 2 (28) .
(29) (30) 2 (28)
.

MFP
10.MFP 1(25)
(26) (27) 1(25)

11.MFP 2(28)
(29) (30) 2(28)

32

33

59

34

37

59
34
34

31
32

32

59

38

12.Open the MFP paper conveying cover (31).


13.Open the panel (33) on the MFP front right
cover (32).

14.Remove the 4 screws (34) and release the 4


hooks (59). Then remove the front right
cover (32).

15.Remove the panel (38) from the lower right


rear cover (37) with a flat blade screwdriver.

12.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier du


MFP (31).
13.Ouvrir le panneau (33) sur le capot avant
droit du MFP (32).

14.Retirer les 4 vis (34) et librer les 4 crochets


(59). Retirer ensuite le capot avant droit (32).

15.Dposer le panneau (38) du capot arrire


infrieur droit (37) en procdant l'aide d'un
tournevis lame.

12.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel del


MFP (31).
13.Abra el panel (33) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (32).

14.Quite los 4 tornillos (34) y libere los 4 ganchos (59). Despus, quite la cubierta frontal
derecha (32).

15.Extraiga el panel (38) de la cubierta trasera


inferior derecha (37) con un destornillador
de pala plana.

12.ffnen Sie die Papierfrderabdeckung (31)


des MFP.
13.ffnen Sie die Platte (33) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (32) des MFP.

14.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (34) und


lsen Sie die 4 Haken (59). Danach nehmen
Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung (32) ab.

15.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (38) von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (37) ab.

12.Aprire il coperchio (31) dell'unit di trasporto


carta dell'MFP.
13.Aprire il pannello (33) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (32) dell'MFP.

14.Rimuovere le 4 viti (34) e rilasciare i 4 ganci


(59). Rimuovere quindi il coperchio anteriore
destro (32).

15.Rimuovere il pannello (38) dal coperchio


posteriore inferiore destro (37) con un cacciavite a testa piana.

12. MFP (31)


13. MFP (32)
(33)

14. 4 34 4 59
32

15.37
38

12.MFP (31) .
13.MFP (32)
(33) .

14. (34) 4 (59) 4


. (32)
.

15. (37) (38)


.

12.MFP (31)
13.MFP (32) (33)

14. (34)4 (59)4


(32)

15.(37) (38)

42

43

37
39

39

39

39

55

54

32

37

16.Remove 5 screws (39).Remove the lower


right rear cover (37).

17.Remove the breakaway cover (54) from the


lower right cover (55) .

18.Remove the breakaway cover (42) from the


front right cover (32) and the breakaway
cover (43) from the lower right rear cover
(37).

16.Dposer les 5 vis (39). Dposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (37).

17.Retirez le capot dtachable (54) du capot


infrieur droit (55).

18.Dposer le couvercle amovible (42) du capot


avant droit (32) et le couvercle amovible (43)
du capot arrire infrieur droit (37).

16.Quite los 5 tornillos (39). Quite la cubierta


trasera inferior derecha (37).

17.Quite la cubierta de separacin (54) de la


cubierta inferior derecha (55).

18.Quite la cubierta divisoria (42) de la cubierta


delantera derecha (32) y la cubierta divisoria
(43) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(37).

16.Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben (39). Nehmen


Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung
(37) ab.

17.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (54)


von untere rechte Abdeckung (55) ab.

18.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (42)


von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (32)
ab und die Ablsungsabdeckung (43) von
der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung
(37).

16.Rimuovere le 5 viti (39). Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (37).

17.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (54) dal


coperchio destro inferiore (55) .

18.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (42) dal


coperchio destro anteriore (32), e il coperchio di distacco (43) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (37).

16. 5 (39)
(37)

17. (55) 54

18. (32) (42)


(37) (43)

16. (39) 5 .
(37) .

17. (55) (54)


.

18. (32) (42)


(37) (43)
.

16. (39)5 (37)

17.(55) (54)

18.(32) (42)
(37) (43)

25

44

19.Remove the panel (44) from the MFP right cover 1 (25) with a flat blade screwdriver.

19.Dposer le panneau (44) du capot droit 1 du MFP (25) en procdant l'aide d'un tournevis
lame.

19.Extraiga el panel (44) de la cubierta derecha 1 del MFP (25) con un destornillador de pala plana.

19.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (44) von der rechten Abdeckung 1
(25) des MFP ab.

19.Rimuovere il pannello (44) dal coperchio destro 1 (25) dell'MFP con un cacciavite a testa piana.

19. MFP 1(25) (44)

19.MFP 1 (25) (44) .

19.MFP 1(25) (44)

51

1mm

1mm
0mm
1mm

F (M4x8)
D

20.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (K) in the position (51) indicated in the illustration.

21.Install a lock pin (D) on the front right of the


MFP using an M4 8 screw (F).

20.Coller le film (K) sur l'emplacement (51) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement
nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool.

21.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D)


droite et l'avant du MFP en procdant
l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (F).

20.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la
pelcula (K) en el lugar (51) que se indica en la ilustracin.

21.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte


derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo
M4 8 (F).

20.Zum Anbringen des Films (K) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (K) dann in der in
der Abbildung angegebenen Position (51) anbringen.

21.Bringen Sie mit einer M4 8 Schraube (F)


den Arretierungsstift (D) vorne rechts am
MFP an.

20.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
(K) nella posizione (51) indicata nell'illustrazione.

21.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla


parte anteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando
una vite M4 8 (F).

20. (51) K

21. 1 M48 (F) (D)


MFP

20. , (51) K .

21. M48(F) (D) MFP


.

20.
51

21. M48(F)1
(D) MFP

10

46

B
D
45

F (M4x8)

22.Install a lock pin (D) on the rear right of the


MFP using an M4 8 screw (F) in the same
way.

23.Place the small base slider (C) on the large base slider (B). Place so that the bend (46) on the
small base slider (C) abuts inside the rest (45) at the end of the large base slider (B).

22.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D)


droite et l'arrire du MFP en procdant de
la mme manire l'aide d'une vis M4 8
(F).

23.Placer la petite rgle de base (C) sur la grande rgle de base (B). Disposer la petite rgle de
base (C) de sorte que son extrmit replie (46) s'encastre dans la bute (45) l'extrmit de la
grande rgle de base (B).

22.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte


derecha frontal del MFP usando un tornillo
M4 8 (F).

23.Coloque el deslizador de base pequeo (C) sobre el deslizador de base grande (B). Haga que la
dobladura (46) del deslizador de base pequeo (C) quede en el interior del apoyo (45) del
extremo del deslizador de base grande (B).

22.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4


8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D)
hinten rechts am MFP an.

23.Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) auf den groen Basis-Schieber (B). Setzen Sie ihn so
auf, dass die Biegung (46) am kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) innerhalb der Auflage (45) am Ende
des groen Basis-Schiebers (B) anliegt.

22.Installare un perno di bloccaggio (D) sulla


parte posteriore destra dell'MFP utilizzando
una vite M4 8 (F) alla stessa maniera.

23.Posizionare lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sullo scivolo di base grande (B). Posizionare in modo
che la piegatura (46) sullo scivolo di base piccolo (C) si attesti all'interno del sostegno (45)
all'estremit dello scivolo di base grande (B).

22. 1 M48 (F)


(D) MFP

23.(C) (B)(C) (46)


(B) (45)

22. M48(F)
(D) MFP .

23. (B) (C) . ,


(C) (46) (B) (45)
.

22. M48(F)

(D) MFP

23. (B) (C)

(C) (46) (B) (45)

11

56

6 2 mm

F(M4x8)
B

24.Insert the small base slider (C) under the paper feeder. Install to the base (56) using 2 M4 8 screws (F) so that the gap between the small base slider
(C) and the large base slider (B) is 6 2 mm.
* For PF-730, install to the screw holes marked R.

24.Insrer la petite rgle de base (C) sous le bureau papier. Fixer la base (56) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F) de sorte que le battement entre la petite rgle
de base (C) et la grande rgle de base (B) soit de 6 2 mm.
* Pour le PF-730, fixer aux trous de vis marqus "R".

24.Inserte el deslizador de base pequeo (C) debajo del alimentador de papel. Instlelo en la base (56) usando 2 tornillos M4 8 (F) de manera tal que
el huelgo entre el deslizador de base pequeo (C) y el deslizador de base grande (B) sea de 6 2 mm.
* En el caso de PF-730, instale en los orificios para tornillo R.

24.Stecken Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) unter den Papiereinzug. Befestigen Sie ihn mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben (F) so an der Basis (56), dass der
Abstand zwischen dem kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) und dem groen Basis-Schieber (B) 6 2 mm betrgt.
* Bei Modell PF-730 an den mit "R" markierten Schraublchern befestigen.

24.Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sotto l'unit di alimentazione carta. Installare alla base (56) utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 (F) in modo che lo spazio tra
lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) e lo scivolo di base grande (B) sia di 6 2 mm.
* Per PF-730, installare ai fori per viti segnalati con R.

24.(C) 2 M48(F) (C) (56) (C)


(B) 62mm
PF-730 R

24. (C) . (C) (B) 62mm M48(F)


2 (56) .
PF-730 R .

24. (C) (C) (B)


62mm
M48(F)2 (56)
PF-730 R

12

Installation on medium-speed MFPs


If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 28.
25.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (11).
26.Reinstall the front right cover (5).
27.Reinstall the lower right cover (1).
Proceed to step 32.

Installation on high-speed MFPs


28.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (37).
29.Reinstall the front right cover (32).
30.Reinstall the right cover 2 (28).
31.Reinstall the right cover 1 (25).

Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne


Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer l'tape 28.
25.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (11).
26.Reposer le capot avant droit (5).
27.Reposer le capot infrieur droit (1).
Passer l'tape 32.

Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse


28.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (37).
29.Reposer le capot avant droit (32).
30.Reposer le capot droit 2 (28).
31.Reposer le capot droit 1 (25).

Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media


Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 28.
25.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (11).
26.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (5).
27.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (1).
Vaya al paso 32.

Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


28.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (37).
29.IReinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (32).
30.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 2 (28).
31.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 1 (25).

Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse


Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter
zu Schritt 28.
25.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (11) wieder an.
26.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder an.
27.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) wieder an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 32.

Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse


28.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (37) wieder an.
29.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (32) wieder an.
30.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (28) wieder an.
31.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (25) wieder an.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media


Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al passo 28.
25.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (11).
26.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (5).
27.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
Procedere al passo 32.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


28.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (37).
29.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (32).
30.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 2 (28).
31.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 1 (25).

MFP
MFP 28

MFP
28. (37)
29. (32)
30. 2(28)
31. 1(25)

25. (11)
26. (5)
27. (1)
32
MFP
MFP 28 .
25. (11) .
26. (5) .
27. (1) .
32 .

MFP
28. (37) .
29. (32) .
30. 2 (28) .
31. 1 (25) .

MFP
MFP 28
25.(11)
26.(5)
27.(1)
32

MFP
28.(37)
29.(32)
30.2 (28)
31.1 (25)

13

F (M4x8)

F (M4x8)

E
J (M4x10)

48
A

F (M4x8)

32.Install the switch press plate (E) using the


M4 10 tapping screw (J).

33.Install the side feeder (A) to the large base slider (B) using 2 M4 8 screws (F). Install so that the
center of the M4 8 screws (F) comes over the horizontal line (48) of the mounting plate on the
large base slider (B).

32.Fixer la plaque de pression du contacteur


(E) l'aide d'une vis de connexion M4 10
(J).

33.Fixer le dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral (A) la grande rgle de base (B) l'aide de 2
vis M4 8 (F). Procder de sorte que l'axe des vis M4 8 (F) recouvre la ligne horizontale (48)
du plateau de montage sur la grande rgle de base (B).

32.Instale la placa de presin del interruptor (E)


usando el tornillo de roscado M4 10 (J).

33.Instale el alimentador lateral (A) en el deslizador de base grande (B) usando 2 tornillos M4 8
(F). Instale de manera que el centro de los tornillos M4 8 (F) queden sobre la lnea horizontal
(48) de la placa de montaje del deslizador de base (B) grande.

32.Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Schneidschraube (J) die Schalterdruckplatte (E).

33.Befestigen Sie den seitlichen Einzug (A) mit 2 M4 8 Schrauben (F) am groen Basis-Schieber
(B). Befestigen Sie ihn so, dass die Mitte der M4 8 Schrauben (F) ber der Waagrechtlinie (48)
der Montageplatte am groen Basis-Schieber (B) liegt.

32.Installare la piastra spingi interruttore (E) utilizzando la vite autofilettante M4 10 (J).

33.Installare l'unit di alimentazione laterale (A) allo scivolo di base grande (B) utilizzando 2 viti M4
8 (F). Installare in modo che il centro delle viti M4 8 (F) sia sulla linea orizzontale (48) della piastra di montaggio sullo scivolo di base grande (B).

32. 1 M410 (J)


(E)

33. 2 M48 (F) (A) (B) M48


(F) (B) (48)

32. M410(J) 1 (E)


.

33. M48(F) 2 (B) (A) . ,


(B) (48) M48(F) .

32. M410(J)1
(E)

33. M48(F)2 (B) (A)


(B) (48) M48(F)

14

H
G

50

F
(M4x8)

49

34.Install the cover plate (I) using 2 M4 8


screws (F).

35.Plug the signal cable (49) for the side feeder


into the paper feeder connector (50).
36.Push the side feeder to connect it to the
MFP.

Setting the paper size plate and media type


plate
Insert the paper size plate (G) and media type
plate (H) into the each slots respectively

34.Fixer le capot (I) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F).

35.Enficher le cble de signal (49) du dispositif


du plateau d'alimentation latral dans le connecteur (50) du bureau papier.
36.Pousser le dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral pour le raccorder au MFP.

Disposition des plaquettes du format de


papier et du type de support
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G) et
la plaquette du type de support (H) dans leur
logement respectif.

34.Instale la tapa (I) usando los 2 tornillos M4


8 (F).

35.Conecte el cable de seal (49) del alimentador lateral en el conector del alimentador de
papel (50).
36.Empuje el alimentador lateral para conectarlo al MFP.

Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la


placa de tipo de medio
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G) y la
placa de tipo de medio (H) en cada uno de las
ranuras, respectivamente.

34.Bringen Sie die Abdeckungsplatte (I) mit 2


M4 8 Schrauben (F) an.

35.Schlieen Sie das Signalkabel (49) fr den


seitlichen Einzug am Papiereinzug-Steckverbinder (50) an.
36.Drcken Sie auf den seitlichen Einzug, um
ihn mit dem MFP zu verbinden.

Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der


Medientypkarte
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G) und die
Medientypkarte (H) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen.

34.Installare il coperchio (I) utilizzando 2 viti M4


8 (F).

35.Collegare il cavo del segnale (49) per l'unit


di alimentazione laterale nel connettore
dell'unit di alimentazione carta (50).
36.Spingere l'unit di alimentazione laterale per
collegarla all'MFP.

Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e


della piastra del tipo di supporto
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G) e la piastra del tipo di supporto (H) nei rispettivi alloggiamenti.

34. 2 M48 (F) (I)

35. (49)
(50)
36. MFP

G) (H)

34. M48(F) 2 (I)


.

35. (49)
(50) .
36. MFP
.


(G)
(H) .

34. M48(F)2 (I)

35. (49)
(50)
36.
MFP

(G)
(H)

15

2
1
Changing paper size (metric specifications only)
At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4 is set for metric models. Use the procedure below
to change the size to B5.

1.Pull out the side feeder cassette.


2.Remove a screw (1) and remove the stopper
(2).

Modification du format du papier (pour spcifications mtriques seulement)


expdition, les modles mesure en pouces sont rgls sur le format Letter et les modles
mesure mtrique sur le format A4. Pour passer au format B5, procder de la manire suivante.

1.Sortir le tiroir du dispositif du plateau d'alimentation latral.


2.Dposer la vis (1) et la bute (2).

Cmo cambiar el tamao de papel (slo para las especificaciones mtricas)


En el momento de salida de fbrica, se configura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4 para los
modelos en sistema mtrico. Siga este procedimiento para cambiar el tamao a B5.

1.Extraiga el cajn del alimentador lateral.


2.Quite el tornillo (1) y quite el tope (2).

ndern des Papierformats (nur metrische Spezifikationen)


Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollma das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen mit
metrischem Ma das Format A4.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umgeschaltet werden.

1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade des seitlichen


Einzugs heraus.
2.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (1) und
nehmen Sie den Anschlag (2) heraus.

Cambio del formato della carta (solo per le specifiche metriche)


Al momento della spedizione, Letter impostato per le specifiche in pollici e A4 impostato per le
specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.

1.Estrarre il cassetto dell'unit di alimentazione laterale.


2.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
fermo (2).

Letter A4 B5

1.
2. 1 (1) (2)


, Letter, A4 . B5
.

1. .
2. (1) 1 (2)
.

Letter A4
B5

16

1.
2. (1)1 (2)

5
B5

A4

3.Remove a screw (3) and remove the front


deck cursor (4).

4.Move the front deck cursor (4) to match the size marking (5) (the outermost is A4, the innermost
is B5) at the bottom of the cassette.
5.Fix the front deck cursor (4) using the screw (3).
6.Move the rear deck cursor (6) in the same way.

3.Dposer la vis (3) et le curseur de platine


avant (4).

4.Dplacer le curseur de platine avant (4) en fonction du repre de format papier (5) (le repre le
plus l'extrieur est celui du format A4, celui le plus l'intrieur, celui du format B5) se trouvant
au fond de le tiroir.
5.Fixer le curseur de platine avant (4) l'aide de la vis (3).
6.Dplacer le curseur de platine arrire (6) en procdant de la mme manire.

3.Quite el tornillo (3) y quite el cursor frontal de


la plataforma (4).

4.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) para que corresponda con la marca de tamao (5) (la
ms externa es A4, la ms interna es B5) en la parte inferior del cajn.
5.Fije el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) usando el tornillo (3).
6.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (6) de la misma forma.

3.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (3) und


nehmen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor
(4) heraus.

4.Versetzen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4), um die Formatmarkierung (5) am Boden der
Papierlade anzupassen (die uerste ist A4, die innerste ist B5).
5.Befestigen Sie den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) mit der Schraube (3).
6.Versetzen Sie den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) auf gleiche Weise.

3.Rimuovere la vite (3) e quindi rimuovere il


cursore frontale del deck (4).

4.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (4) per farlo corrispondere al segno del formato (5) (il pi
esterno A4, il pi interno B5) alla parte inferiore del cassetto.
5.Fissare il cursore frontale del deck (4) utilizzando la vite (3).
6.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (6) alla stessa maniera.

3. 1 (3)
(4)

4. (5) ( A4 B5) (4)


5. 1 (3) (4)
6. (6)

3. (3) 1 (4)
.

4. (5) ( A4, B5) (4)


.
5. (3) 1 (4) .
6. (6) .

3. (3)1 (4)

4. (5) ( A4 B5) (4)

5. (3)1
(4)
6. (6)

17

B5

A4

2
1

7.Remove a screw (7) and remove the deck


trailing edge cursor (8).

8.Move the deck trailing edge cursor (8) to


match the size marking (9) at the bottom of
the cassette.
9.Fix the deck trailing edge cursor (8) with the
screw (7).

10.Reinstall the stopper (2) using the screw (1).


11.Run maintenance mode U208 and set the
paper size.

7.Dposer la vis (7) et dposer le curseur du


bord arrire de la platine (8).

8.Dplacer le curseur du bord arrire de la


platine (8) en fonction du repre de format
papier (9) se trouvant au fond de le tiroir.
9.Fixer le curseur du bord arrire de la platine
(8) l'aide de la vis (7).

10.Reposer la bute (2) l'aide de la vis (1).


11.Excuter le mode maintenance U208 et
dfinir le format du papier.

7.Quite el tornillo (7) y quite el cursor del borde


inferior de la plataforma (8).

8.Mueva el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma (8) para que corresponda con la
marca de tamao (9) en la parte inferior del
cajn.
9.Fije el cursor del borde inferior de la plataforma (8) con el tornillo (7).

10.Reinstale el tope (2) usando el tornillo (1).


11.Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y
ajuste el tamao de papel.

7.Entfernen Sie eine Schraube (7) und


nehmen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8) heraus.

8.Versetzen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8),


um die Formatmarkierung (9) am Boden der
Papierlade anzupassen.
9.Befestigen Sie den Hinterkante-Cursor (8)
mit der Schraube (7).

10.Bringen Sie den Anschlag (2) wieder mit der


Schraube (1) an.
11.Fhren Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus
und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.

7.Rimuovere la vite (7) e quindi rimuovere il


cursore del bordo finale del deck (8).

8.Spostare il cursore del bordo finale del deck


(8) per farlo corrispondere al segno di formato (9) alla parte inferiore del cassetto.
9.Fissare il cursore del bordo finale del deck
(8) con la vite (7).

10.Reinstallare il fermo (2) utilizzando la vite


(1).
11.Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e
impostare il formato carta.

7. 1 (7)
(8)

8. (9)
(8)
9. 1 (7)
(8)

10. 1 (1) (2)


11. U208

7. (7) 1 (8)
.

8. (9)
(8) .
9. (7) 1 (8)
.

10. (1) 1 (2)


.
11. U208
.

7. (7)1
(8)

8. (9)
(8)
9. (7)1
(8)

10. (1)1
(2)

11. U208

18

10

0.5~1.0mm

4
Adjusting the cursor width
1.Load paper in the cassettes.
2. If the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper (10) is outside the 0.5 to 1.0 mm range when the paper (10) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (6), perform the following adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.

Rglage de la largeur du curseur


1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2.Si l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier (10) est hors des limites de 0,5 1,0 mm quand le papier (10) touche le curseur de
platine arrire (6), procder au rglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empcher l'entranement du papier et une largeur trop grande risque d'entraner des problmes du type
entranement du papier de biais.
Cmo ajustar la anchura del cursor
1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
2.Si la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel (10) est fuera del rango de 0,5 a 1,0 mm cuando el papel (10) toca el cursor trasero
de la plataforma (6), haga el siguiente ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequea puede impedir la alimentacin de papel; una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentacin torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite
1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem Papier (10) auerhalb des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt, wenn das Papier
(10) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (6) anliegt, ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu groe Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und hnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore
1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2.Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta (10) fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,0 mm quando la carta (10) tocca il cursore postertiore del
deck (6), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola pu ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande pu essere
causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.

1.
2. (6) (10) (4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm


1. .
2. (6) (10) (4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm .
, .

1.
2. (6) (10)
(4) (10) 0.5 1.0mm

19

11

11

12

3.Loosen 2 adjusting screws (11) on the front deck cursor (4) and move the cursor (4) while checking with the scale (12).
4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (11).
5.Check that the gap between the front deck cursor (4) and the paper is between 0.5 and 1.0 mm.

3.Desserrer les 2 vis de rglage (11) sur le curseur de platine avant (4) et dposer le curseur (4)
tout en vrifiant l'aide de l'chelle (12).
4.Resserrer les 2 vis de rglage (11).
5.Vrifier que l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (4) et le papier est entre 0,5 et 1,0 mm.

3.Afloje 2 tornillos de ajuste (11) en el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y mueva el cursor (4)
mientras verifica con la escala (12).
4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste (11).
5.Verifique que la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (4) y el papel sea de entre 0,5
y 1,0 mm.

3.Lsen Sie 2 Einstellschrauben (11) am vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und versetzen Sie den Cursor (4) unter Beobachtung der Skale (12).
4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (11) wieder anziehen.
5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (4) und dem
Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,0 mm liegt.

3.Allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (11) sul cursore frontale del deck (4), e quindi rimuovere il cursore
(4) controllando la scala (12).
4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (11).
5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (4) e la carta sia compreso nella gamma
tra 0,5 e 1,0 mm.

3. (4) 2 (11) (12)


(4)
4. 2 (11)
5. (4) 0.5 1.0mm

3. (4) (11) 2 (12) (4)


.
4. (11) 2 .
5. (4) 0.5 1.0 mm .

3. (4) (11)2 (12)


(4)
4. (11)2
5. (4) 0.5 1.0mm

20

Adjusting the center line


Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the
center (2) of a test pattern.
<Reference value> Wthin 2.0 mm
1.Set the maintenance mode U034. Select LSU Out Left and Cassette5.

2.Adjust the values.


Test pattern (b): Increase the setting value.
Test pattern (c): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.

Rglage de l'axe
Vrifier la dviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2)
d'une forme d'essai.
<Valeur de rfrence> 2,0 mm max.
1.Passer au mode maintenance U034. Slectionner LSU Out Left et
Cassette5.

2.Rgler les valeurs.


Mire d' essai (b): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
Mire d' essai (c): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.

Ajuste de la lnea central


Compruebe la desviacin entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y
el centro (2) de un patrn de prueba.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de 2,0 mm
1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U034. Seleccione LSU Out Left y
Cassette5.

2.Ajuste los valores.


Patrn de prueba (b): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
Patrn de prueba (c): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.

Einstellen der Mittenlinie


berprfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten
Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prfmusters.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb 2,0 mm
1.Stellen Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 ein. Whlen Sie LSU Out Left
und Cassette5.

2.Die Werte einstellen.


Testmuster (b): Den Einstellwert erhhen.
Testmuster (c): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.

Regolazione della linea centrale


Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il
centro (2) di un modello di prova.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro 2,0 mm
1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U034. Selezionare LSU Out Left
e Cassette5.

2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (b): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Modello di prova (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(a) (1) (2)


< >2.0mm
1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette5

2.
(b)
(c)
3. Start


(a) (1) (2) .
2.0mm
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette5
.

2. .
(b) .
(c) .
3. .

(a) (1) (2)

2.0mm
1. U034 LSU Out Left
Cassette5

2.
(b)
(c)
3.

21

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


SIDE MULTI TRAY

English
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.

Franais
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 45/45 et 55/50 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.

Espaol
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 45/45 y 55/50 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas monocromticas de 65 y 80 ppm.

Deutsch
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm Monochrommaschinen.

Italiano
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 45/45 e 55/50 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65
e 80 ppm.

MFP 45/45 55/50


MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80

MFP 45/45 , 55/50 .


MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 45/45 55/50


MFP 65/65 75/70 65
80

B
D (2)

C
A

G (2)
*G (3)

H (7)
*H (4)
**H (2)

J (M4x10) K (2)

F (M4x8)(10)

N (2) O

Supplied parts
A. Side multi-tray............................................ 1
B. Large base slider ....................................... 1
C. Small base slider ....................................... 1
D. Lock pin ..................................................... 2
E. Switch press plate ..................................... 1
F. M4 8 screw ........................................... 10

G. Paper size plate ......................................... 2


H. Media type plate(except for 120V model) .. 7
*H.Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 4
I. Cover plate ................................................ 1
J. M4 10 tapping screw............................... 1
K. Stopper ...................................................... 2
L. Cassette Number Label 6 .......................... 1

M. Cassette Number Label 7 .......................... 1


N. Clamp ........................................................ 2
O. Film ............................................................ 1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

Pices fournies
A. Bac multiples usages latral...................... 1
B. Grande rgle de base................................ 1
C. Petite rgle de base................................... 1
D. Broche de verrouillage............................... 2
E. Plaque de pression de l'interrupteur .......... 1
F. Vis M4 8................................................ 10

G. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 2


H. Plaquette du type de support..................... 7
I. Capot ......................................................... 1
J. Vis de connexion M4 10 ......................... 1
K. Bute ......................................................... 2
L. tiquette de numro de cassette 6 ............ 1
M. tiquette de numro de cassette 7 ............ 1

N. Collier......................................................... 2
O. Film ............................................................ 1
Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Partes suministradas
A. Bypass lateral ............................................ 1
B. Deslizador de base grande........................ 1
C. Deslizador de base pequeo..................... 1
D. Clavija de bloqueo ..................................... 2
E. Placa de presin del interruptor................. 1
F. Tornillo M4 8 ......................................... 10

G. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 2


H. Placa de tipo de medio .............................. 7
I. Tapa ........................................................... 1
J. Tornillo de roscado M4 10 ...................... 1
K. Tope ........................................................... 2
L. Etiqueta de casete con el nmero 6 .......... 1
M. Etiqueta de casete con el nmero 7 .......... 1

N. Abrazadera ................................................ 2
O. Pelcula ...................................................... 1
Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Enthaltene Teile
A. Seitliches Mehrzweck-Papierfach.............. 1
B. Groer Basis-Schieber .............................. 1
C. Kleiner Basis-Schieber .............................. 1
D. Arretierstift ................................................. 2
E. Schalterdruckplatte.................................... 1
F. M4 8 Schraube ..................................... 10

G. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 2
H. Medientypkarte .......................................... 7
I. Abdeckplatte .............................................. 1
J. M4 10 Schneidschraube......................... 1
K. Anschlag .................................................... 2
L. Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 .................. 1
M. Aufkleber Kassettennummer 7 .................. 1

N. Schelle ....................................................... 2
O. Film ............................................................ 1
Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

Parti fornite
A. Vassoio multiplo laterale ............................ 1
B. Scivolo di base grande .............................. 1
C. Scivolo di base piccolo .............................. 1
D. Perno di bloccaggio ................................... 2
E. Piastra spingi interruttore........................... 1
F. Vite M4 8 .............................................. 10

G. Piastra formato carta ................................. 2


H. Piastra tipo carta........................................ 7
I. Coperchio .................................................. 1
J. Vite autofilettante M4 10 ......................... 1
K. Fermo ........................................................ 2
L. Etichetta numero cassetta 6 ...................... 1
M. Etichetta numero cassetta 7 ...................... 1

N. Fascetta ..................................................... 2
O. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.

A. ........................... 1
B. ........................ 1
C. ........................ 1
D. ............................. 2
E. ............................. 1
F. M48 .......................... 10

*G. .........................3
**H. ........................2
I. .................................1
J. M410 .......................1
K. .................................2
L. 6 ........................1
M. 7 ........................1

N. ...............................2
O. .................................1

A. .............................. 1
B. .............................. 1
C. .............................. 1
D. .............................................. 2
E. ........................................... 1
F. M48....................................... 10

G. ............................... 2
**H. ............................. 2
I. ..................................... 1
J. M410 ................................ 1
K. ............................................... 2
L. 6 .............................. 1
M. 7 .............................. 1

N. ............................................... 2
O. .................................................. 1
,
.

PF-780
A. ................... 1
B. ................... 1
C. ................... 1
D. ........................... 2
E. ..................... 1
F. M48 .......................... 10

G. ...................2
**H. ....................2
I. .......................1
J. M410 .................1
K. ...........................2
L. 6 ..............1
M. 7 ..............1

N. .............................2
O. .............................1

(PF-730)

Q (2)

(PF-740)

V (4)
*V (6)

W (M4x8)(3)

X (6)
*X (2)
**X (12)

Y (2)

Z (M4x20)(4)

PF-730/740 Supplied parts


P. Paper feeder.............................................. 1
Q. Pin ............................................................. 2
R. Retainer ..................................................... 1
S. Intermediate paper conveying unit............. 1
T. Clamp ........................................................ 1
U. Wire cover ................................................. 1

V. Paper size plate ......................................... 4


W. S Tite screw M4 8 ................................... 3
X. Media type plate(120V model only) ........... 6
*X.Media type plate
(PF-730:110V model only)......................... 2
**X.Media type plate
(except for above models).........................12

Y. Stopper ...................................................... 2
Z. S Tite screws M4 20 .............................. 4
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

PF-730/740 Pices fournies


P. Chargeur de papier.................................... 1
Q. Broche ....................................................... 2
R. lment de retenue ................................... 1
S. Unit de transport du papier intermdiaire 1
T. Collier ........................................................ 1
U. Couvercle de cble.................................... 1

V. Plaquette du format de papier ................... 4


W. Vis S Tite M4 8 ....................................... 3
**X.Plaquette du type de support.................. 12
Y. Bute ......................................................... 2
Z. Vis S Tite M4 20 ..................................... 4

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies

PF-730/740 Enthaltene Teile


P. Depsito de papel...................................... 1
Q. Clavija........................................................ 2
R. Retn ......................................................... 1
S. Unidad de transporte de papel intermedia. 1
T. Sujetador ................................................... 1
U. Cubierta para el cable................................ 1

V. Placa de tamao de papel ......................... 4


W. Tornillo S Tite M4 8 ................................. 3
**X.Placa de tipo de medio ........................... 12
Y. Tope ........................................................... 2
Z. Tornillos S Tite M4 20 ............................. 4

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

PF-730/740 Gelieferte Teile


P. Papiereinzug.............................................. 1
Q. Stift............................................................. 2
R. Halterung ................................................... 1
S. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit ................ 1
T. Klemme ..................................................... 1
U. Kabelabdeckung........................................ 1

V. Papierformatkarte ...................................... 4
W. S-Tite-Schraube M4 8............................. 3
**X.Medientypkarte ....................................... 12
Y. Anschlag .................................................... 2
Z. S-Tite-Schrauben M4 20......................... 4

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

PF-730/740 Parti fornite


P. Unit di alimentazione della carta ............. 1
Q. Perno ........................................................ 2
R. Fermo ....................................................... 1
S. Unit intermediale di trasporto carta.......... 1
T. Morsetto..................................................... 1
U. Coperchio cavi........................................... 1

V. Piastra formato carta ................................. 4


W. Vite S Tite M4 8 ...................................... 3
**X.Piastra tipo carta..................................... 12
Y. Fermo ........................................................ 2
Z. Vite S Tite M4 20 .................................... 4

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

PF-730/740
P. ...........................
Q. .............................
R. ...............................
S. .........................
T. .................................

1
2
1
1
1

U. .............................1
*V. (PF-730) .................6
V. (PF-740) .................4
W. S M48 ...................3
*X. .........................2
Y. ...............................2

Z. S M420 .................4

PF-780
RY(Z)
1 W

PF-730/740
P. ............................................... 1
Q. ..................................................... 2
R. ............................................... 1
S. ................................... 1
T. ............................................... 1

U. ............................................ 1
V. ............................... 4
W. M48 S ........................... 3
*X. .............................. 2
Y. ......................................... 2
Z. M420 S .......................... 4

,
.

PF-730/740
P. ...................
Q. .................................
R. ...............................
S. .....................
T. .............................
U. ...........................

V. ...................4
W. M48 S ...................3
*X. .....................2
Y. .........................2
Z. M420 S ..................4

1
2
1
1
1
1

Do not use the following parts when installing


PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) and one (W).

Ne pas utiliser les pices suivantes pour l'installation de la PF-780 : (R), (Y), (Z) et un (W).

No utilice las piezas siguientes cuando instale la


PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) y una (W).

Die folgenden Teile bei der Installation von PF780 nicht verwenden: (R), (Y), (Z) und ein (W).

Non utilizzare le seguenti parti quando si installa


PF-780: (R), (Y), (Z) e uno (W).

PF-780
R
Y(Z) W1

PF-780

R
Y(Z) W
1

1
P
Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

[Side feeder assembly]


1.Remove the cover (1) of the paper feeder
(P).
(Do not use cover (1).)

2.Cut the ribs with a nipper, and then remove


the breakaway cover (2).

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

[Ensemble plateau d'alimentation latral]


1.Dposer le capot (1) du chargeur de papier
(P).
(Ne pas utiliser le capot (1).)

2.Couper les nervures avec une pince, puis


dposer le couvercle amovible (2)

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

[Ensamblaje del alimentador lateral]


1.Quite la cubierta (1) del depsito de papel
(P).
(No utilice la cubierta (1).)

2.Recorte las nervaduras con unos alicates de


corte y, a continuacin, retire la cubierta divisoria (2).

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

[Seitlicher Einzug]
1.Die Abdeckung (1) des Papiereinzugs (P)
abnehmen.
(Die Abdeckung (1) nicht verwenden.)

2.Die Rippen mit einer Zange schneiden und


dann die Ablsungsabdeckung (2) entfernen.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

[Assemblaggio unit di alimentazione laterale]


1.Rimuovere il coperchio (1) dall'unit di alimentazione della carta (P).
(Non usare il coperchio (1).)

2.Tagliare le pieghe con una pinzetta e poi


rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (2).

[ ]
1.P1
( 1)

2.2

[ ]
1. P 1 .
( 1 .)

2. 2
.

OFF

[ ]
1.
P(1)

2.2

7
6

3
4

5
3.Remove the panel (3) from the lower right
cover (4) on the paper feeder using a flat
blade screwdriver.

4.Open the paper feeder right cover (5).


Remove the strap (6) from the right cover shaft (7) and remove the right cover (5).

3.Dposer le panneau (3) du capot infrieur


droit (4) du chargeur de papier en procdant
l'aide d'un tournevis lame.

4.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de papier (5).


Dposer la courroie (6) de l'axe du capot droit (7) et dposer le capot droit (5).

3.Quite el panel (3) de la cubierta derecha


inferior (4) del depsito de papel con un
destornillador de pala plana.

4.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de papel (5).


Quite la correa (6) del eje de la cubierta derecha (7) y quite la cubierta derecha (5).

3.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (3) von der unteren rechten
Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab.

4.Die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs ffnen.


Nehmen Sie den Riemen (6) von der Welle (7) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte
Abdeckung (5) ab.

3.Rimuovere il pannello (3) dal coperchio


destro inferiore (4) sull'unit di alimentazione
carta utilizzando un cacciavite a testa piana.

4.Aprire il coperchio destro (5) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta.


Rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dall'asta (7) del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il coperchio
destro (5).

3.
(4) (3)

4. (5)
(7) (6) (5)

3. (4) (3)
.

4. (5) .
(6) (7) (5) .

3.(4)
(3)

4.(5)
(6) (7)
(5)

11

K
10
F(M4x8)

8
11
4

For PF-730
5.Remove 3 screws (8) and a screw (9) and remove the paper feeder
lower right cover (4).
For PF-740
5.Remove 3 screws (8) and a screw (10) and remove the paper feeder
lower right cover (4).

6.Align the 2 paper feeder casters (11) in the direction shown in the illustration, and fasten each of them to stopper (K) using an M4 8 screw
(F).
7.Reinstall the paper feeder lower right cover (4).
8.Reinstall the paper feeder right cover (5).

Pour PF-730
5.Dposer les 3 vis (8) et la vis (9) puis dposer le capot infrieur droit du
chargeur de papier (4).
Pour PF-740
5.Dposer les 3 vis (8) et la vis (10) puis dposer le capot infrieur droit
du chargeur de papier (4).

6.Aligner les 2 roulettes (11) du chargeur de papier selon la direction


indique sur l'illustration, et les fixer sur la bute (K) l'aide d'une vis
M4 8 (F).
7.Reposer le capot infrieur droit du chargeur de papier (4).
8.Reposer le capot droit du chargeur de papier (5).

Para PF-730
5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8) y el tornillo (9) y quite la cubierta derecha inferior del depsito de papel (4).
Para PF-740
5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8) y el tornillo (10) y quite la cubierta derecha inferior del depsito de papel (4).

6.Alinee las 2 ruedas del depsito de papel (11) en el sentido que se


indica en la ilustracin, y apritelas hasta llegar al tope (K) con un tornillo M4 8 (F).
7.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior del depsito de papel (4).
8.Reinstale la cubierta derecha del depsito de papel (5).

Fr PF-730
5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8) und eine Schraube (9) und nehmen Sie
die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab.
Fr PF-740
5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8) und eine Schraube (10) und nehmen
Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs ab.

6.Die 2 Laufrollen des Papiereinzugs (11) in der in der Abbildung


angezeigten Richtung ausrichten und jede von ihnen mithilfe einer M4
8 Schraube (F) am Anschlag (K) befestigen.
7.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (4) des Papiereinzugs wieder
an.
8.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs wieder an.

Per PF-730
5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8) e una vite (9), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio
destro inferiore (4) dell'unit di alimentazione carta.
Per PF-740
5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8) e una vite (10), e quindi rimuovere il coperchio
destro inferiore (4) dell'unit di alimentazione carta.

6.Allineare le ruote orientabili dell'unit di alimentazione della carta (11)


nella direzione mostrata nell'illustrazione e stringere ognuno al fermo
(K) con una vite M4 8 (F).
7.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore dell'unit di alimentazione
carta (4).
8.Reinstallare il coperchio destro (5) dell'unit di alimentazione carta.

PF-730
5. 3 (8) 1 (9) (4)
PF-740
5. 3 (8) 1 (10) (4)

6. 2 11 1 M48
FK
7. (4)
8. (5)

PF-730
5. (8) 3 (9) 1 ,
(4) .
PF-740
5. (8) 3 (10) 1 ,
(4) .

6. 112
K M48F1 .
7. (4) .
8. (5) .

PF-730
5. (8)3 (9)1
(4)
PF-740
5. (8)3 (10)1
(4)

6.11
2
K M48F1
7.(4)
8.(5)

13

14-1

16

A
16
14

15

12

15

9.Pull out the cassette (14) of the side multitray (A), remove a lift plate stopper (12) and
attach it in the storage location (13).

10.Remove the cassette (14-1) of the side


multi-tray (A).

11.Place the side multi-tray on the paper feeder


(P) so that each pin (15) on the right and left
sides of the front of the paper feeder (P)
matches with the holes(16) in the base of the
side multi-tray (A).

9.Tirer la cassette (14) du bac multiples


usages latral (A) vers l'extrieur, retirer la
bute de plaque dlvation (12) et la fixer
l'emplacement de rangement (13).

10.Retirez le magasin (14-1) du bac multiples


usages latral (A).

11.Placer le bac multiples usages latral sur le


chargeur de papier (P) de sorte aligner
chacune des broches (15) situes sur les
cts droit et gauche du devant du chargeur
de papier (P) avec les orifices(16) de la base
du bac multiples usages latral (A).

9.Saque el casete (14) del bypass lateral (A),


quite el tope de placa de elevacin (12) y
pngalo en el espacio reservado para
guardarlo (13).

10.Quite el depsito (14-1) del bypass lateral


(A).

11.Coloque el bypass lateral sobre el depsito


de papel (P) de tal manera que los pasadores (15) que se encuentran a izquierda y
derecha en la parte delantera del depsito
de papel (P) coincidan con los agujeros(16)
que hay en la base del bypass lateral (A).

9.Die Kassette (14) aus dem seitlichen Mehrzweck-Papierfach herausziehen (A), den
Hebeplattenanschlag (12) entfernen und an
der Speicherposition (13) anbringen.

10.Entfernen Sie die Kassette (14-1) des seitlichen Mehrfacheinzugs (A).

11.Das seitliche Mehrzweck-Papierfach auf


dem Papiereinzug (P) so platzieren, dass
jeder Stift (15) auf der linken und rechten
Vorderseite des Papiereinzugs (P) mit den
ffnungen(16) am Boden des seitlichen
Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) bereinstimmt.

9.Estrarre il cassetto (14) del vassoio multiplo


laterale (A), rimuovere il fermo della piastra
di sollevamento (12) e collegarlo nella
posizione di stoccaggio (13).

10.Rimuovere il cassetto (14-1) del vassoio


multiplo laterale (A).

11.Porre il vassoio multiplo laterale sull'unit di


alimentazione della carta (P) in modo che
ogni punta (15) a destra e sinistra davanti
all'unit di alimentazione della carta (P) corrisponda i fori(16) nella base del vassoio
multiplo laterale (A).

9. (A) (14) 1
(12)
(13)

10. (A) (14-1)

11. (P) (15)


(A) (16)
(A) (P)

9. (A) (14)
(12) 1
(13) .

10. (A) (14-1)


.

11. (P) (15)


(A) (16)
(P)
(A) .

9. (A) (14)
(12)1
(13)

10. (A) (14-1)

11.(P)
(15) (A)
(16)
(P) (A)

21
14-1

20

Q
17
14-2

18

19
14

P
12.Attach side multi-tray (A) to paper feeder (P)
using 2 pins (Q).

13.Align the holes (17) of the cassette (14-1) for


the side multi-tray (A) with the pins (18) in
the cassette slider (14-2). Put the paper cassette (14-1).
14.Push the cassette (14) in fully.

15.Open the right cover (19) of the side multitray (A).


16.Remove the strap (20) from the right cover
shaft (21) and remove the right cover (19).

12.Fixer le bac multiples usages latral (A) au


chargeur de papier (P) l'aide de 2 broches
(Q).

13.Alignez les trous (17) du magasin (14-1)


pour le bac multiples usages latral (A) avec
les ergots (18) dans le tiroir du magasin (142).Placez le magasin de papier (14-1).
14. Enfoncez fond le magasin de papier (14).

15.Ouvrir le capot de droite (19) du bac multiples usages latral (A).


16.Dposer la courroie (20) de l'axe du capot
droit (21) et dposer le capot droit (19).

12.Sujete el bypass lateral (A) al depsito de


papel (P) utilizando 2 pasadores (Q).

13.Alinee los orificios (18) del depsito (14-1)


del bypass lateral (A) con los pasadores (19)
del deslizador del depsito (14-2).
14.Ejerza presin sobre el depsito de papel
(14) hasta introducirlo por completo.

15.Abra la cubierta derecha (19) del bypass lateral (A).


16.Quite la correa (20) del eje de la cubierta
derecha (21) y quite la cubierta derecha(19).

12.Das seitliche Mehrzweck-Papierfach (A)


mithilfe der 2 Stifte (Q) am Papiereinzug (P)
befestigen.

13.Richten Sie die Lcher (17) der Kassette


(14-1) des seitlichen Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) mit den Stiften (18) im Kassettenanschlag (14-2) aus. Setzen Sie die
Papierkassette (14-1) wieder ein.
14.Schieben Sie die Papierkassette (14) bis
zum Anschlag ein.

15.Die rechte Abdeckung (19) des seitlichen


Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) ffnen.
16.Nehmen Sie den Riemen (20) von der Welle
(21) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die
rechte Abdeckung (19) ab.

12.Collegare il vassoio multiplo laterale (A)


all'unit di alimentazione della carta (P) utilizzando 2 puntine (Q).

13.Allineare i fori (17) del cassetto (14-1) per il


vassoio multiplo laterale (A) con i perni (18)
della guida cassetto (14-2). Inserire il cassetto carta (14-1).
14.Spingere il cassetto (14) fino in fondo.

15.Aprire il pannello destro (19) del vassoio


multiplo laterale (A).
16.Rimuovere la cinghietta (20) dall'asta (21)
del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio destro (19).

12. 2 (Q) (A)


(P)

13. (A) (14-1)


(17) (14-2) (18)
(14-1)
14. (14)

15. (A) 19
16. (21) (20)
(19)

12. (Q) 2 (A)


(P) .

13. (A) (14-1)


(17) (14-2)
(18) . (14-1)
.
14. (14) .

15. (A) 19
.
16. (20) (21)
(19) .

12. (Q)2 (A)


(P)

13. (A) (14-1)


(17) (14-2)
(18)
(14-1)

14. (14)

15. (A) 19

16. (20) (21)

(19)

S
1

W(M4x8)

17.Open the paper feeder right cover (5).

18.Insert the intermediate paper conveying unit


(S) in order of 1 to 2 on the illustration.

19.Secure the intermediate paper conveying


unit (S) with the 2 S Tite screw M4 8 (W).

17.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de


papier (5).

18.Insrer l'unit de transport du papier intermdiaire (S) en suivant l'ordre 1 2 indiqu


sur l'illustration.

19.Fixer l'unite de transport du papier intermediaire (S) a l'aide des 2 Vis S Tite M4 8 (W).

17.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de


papel (5).

18.Inserte la unidad de transporte de papel


intermedia (S) siguiendo el orden de 1 a 2
de la ilustracin.

19.Asegure la unidad de transporte de papel


intermedia (S) con los 2 Tornillo S Tite M4
8 (W).

17.Die rechte Abdeckung (5) des Papiereinzugs


ffnen.

18.Die eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit (S) in


der in der Abbildung gezeigten Reihenfolge
1 bis 2 einbauen.

19.Die eingesetzte Papierfordereinheit (S) mit


den 2 S-Tite-Schraube M4 8 (W) sichern.

17.Aprire il pannello destro (5) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta.

18.Inserire l'unit intermediale di trasporto carta


(S) da 1 a 2 sull'illustrazione.

19.Fissare l'unita intermediale di trasporto carta


(S) con le 2 Vite S Tite M4 8 (W).

17. (5)

18.S

19. 2 S M48(W)
(S)

17. (5) .

18. S
, .

19. M48 S (W) 2


(S) .

17.5

18.S

19. M48 S (W)2


(S)

22

24

23

25

26

20.Connect the intermediate paper conveying


unit(S) connector (22).
21.Attach the clamp (T) and secure the connector wire.

22. Insert the projection (23) of the wire cover (U)


into the hole (24) in the intermediate paper
conveying unit, and attach the wire cover (U).
23. Replace the right cover (19) of the side multitray (A).
24. Close the right cover of the paper feeder (5).

25.Remove the screw (25) in the rear of the


paper feeder and remove the cover (26).

20.Raccorder le connecteur (22) de l'unit de


transport du papier intermdiaire(S).
21.Monter le collier (T) et fixer le cble du connecteur.

22. Insrer la saillie (23) du couvercle de cble (U)

25.Dposer la vis (25) l'arrire du chargeur de


papier et dposer le couvercle (26).

20.Conecte el conector(22) de la unidad de


transporte de papel intermedia (S).
21.Fije el sujetador (T) y asegure el cable del
conector.

20.Den Steckverbinder (22) der eingesetzten


Papierfrdereinheit anschlieen(S).
21.Die Klemme (T) anbringen und das Kabel
des Steckverbinders sichern.

dans l'orifice (24) de l'unit de transport du


papier intermdiaire, et fixer le couvercle de
cble (U).
23. Remettre le capot de droite (19) du bac multiples usages latral (A) en place.
24. Fermer le capot de droite du chargeur de papier
(5).

22. Introduzca el resalto (23) de la cubierta para el


cable (U) por el agujero (24) de la unidad de
transporte de papel intermedia y sujete la cubierta para el cable (U).
23. Sustituya la cubierta derecha (19) del bypass
lateral (A).
24. Cierre la cubierta derecha del depsito de papel
(5).

22. Die Nase (23) der Kabelabdeckung (U) in die


ffnung (24) in der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit einsetzen und die Kabelabdeckung (U)
befestigen.
23. Die rechte Abdeckung (19) des seitlichen Mehrzweck-Papierfachs (A) wieder anbringen.
24. Die rechte Abdeckung des Papiereinzugs (5)
schlieen.

25.Quite el tornillo (25) del lado trasero del


depsito de papel y quite la cubierta (26).

25.Die Schraube (25) an der Rckseite des


Papiereinzugs entfernen und die Abdeckung
(26) abnehmen.

20.Collegare il connettore (22) dell'unit intermediale di trasporto carta(S).


21.Applicare il morsetto (T) e fissare il cavo del
connettore.

22.Inserire la proiezione (23) del coperchio cavi


(U) nel foro (24) dell'unit intermediale di trasporto carta e collegare il coperchio cavi (U).
23.Sostituire il pannello destro (19) del vassoio
multiplo laterale (A).
24.Chiudere il pannello destro dell'unit di alimentazione della carta (5).

25.Rimuovere la vite (25) nel retro dell'unit di


alimentazione della carta e quindi rimuovere
il coperchio (26).

20. (S) (22)


21. (T)

22. (U) (23)


(24) (U)
23. (A)
19
24.5

25. 1 (25)
(26)

20. (S) (22)


.
21. (T) ,
.

22. (U) (23)


(24) (U)
.
23. (A) 19
.
24. 5 .

25. (25) 1
(26) .

20. (S) (22)

21. (T)

22.(U) (23)
(24) (U)

23. (A) 19

24.5

25. (25)1

(26)

30
29

28

27

1
26.Connect the power cord (27) and the signal
cable (28) to connectors (29) (30) respectively on the Side multi-tray.

27. Replace the cover (26) using the screw (25)


removed in step 25.

[Connecting the side feeder to the machine]


Installation with medium-speed MFPs and
printers
If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to
step 12.
1.Open the lower right cover (1) on the
machine.Remove the strap (2) from the shaft
(3) and remove lower right cover (1).

26.Raccorder respectivement le cordon d'alimentation (27) et le cble signal (28) aux


connecteurs (29) (30) du Bac multiples
usages latral.

27. Reposer le couvercle (26) l'aide de la vis


(25) dpose l'tape 25.

[Connexion du chargeur latral la machine]


Installation avec les imprimantes multifonctions
et les imprimantes vitesse moyenne
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse,
passer l'tape 12.
1. Ouvrir le capot infrieur droit (1) de la machine.
Dposer la courroie (2) de l'arbre (3) et dposer
le couvercle infrieur droit (1).

26.Conecte el cable de alimentacin (27) y el


cable de seales (28) a los conectores (29)
(30) del bypass lateral, respectivamente.

27.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (26) usando el


tornillo (25) quitado en el paso 25.

26.Das Netzkabel (27) und das Signalkabel


(28) an den entsprechenden Steckverbindern (29) (30) des Seitliches MehrzweckPapierfach anschlieen.

27.Die Abdeckung (26) mittels der in Schritt 25


entfernten Schraube (25) wieder anbringen.

26.Collegare il cavo di alimentazione (27) e il


cavo del segnale (28) rispettivamente ai
connettori (29) e (30) sull'vassoio multiplo
laterale.

27.Ricollocare il coperchio (26) utilizzando la


vite (25) rimossa nel passo 25.

26. AC (27) (28)


(29)(30)

27. 25 1 (25)
(26)

[ ]
MFP
MFP 12
1. (1)
(2) (3)
(1)

26.AC (27) (28)


(29), (30)
.

27. 25 (25) 1
(26) .

[ ]
MFP
MFP 12
.
1. (1) .
(2) (3)
(1) .

26.AC (27) (28)


(29)(30)

27. 25 (25)1
(26)

[ ]
MFP
MFP 12
1.(1)
(2) (3)
(1)

10

[Conexin del depsito lateral a la mquina]


Instalacin con unidades MFP e impresoras de
velocidad media
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al
paso 12.
1. Abra la cubierta derecha inferior (1) de la mquina.
Quite la correa (2) del eje (3) y quite la cubierta
frontal inferior (1).
[Anschluss des seitlichen Einzugs am Gert.]
Installation an mittelschnellen MFPs und Druckern
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 12.
1. ffnen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) des
Gerts.
Den Riemen (2) von der Welle (3) abnehmen und
dann die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) abnehmen.
[Collegare l'alimentatore laterale alla macchina.]
Installazione con MFP e stampanti di media
velocit
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere
al passo 12.
1. Aprire il coperchio destro inferiore (1) sulla macchina.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (2) dall'asta (3) e quindi
rimuovere il coperchio destro inferiore (1).

4
5

2.Open the machine paper conveying cover


(4).
3.Open the panel (6) on the machine front
right cover (5).

4.Remove 3 screws (7) and remove the front


right cover (5).

5.Remove 3 screws (8). Remove the lower


right rear cover (9).

2.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier de la


machine (4).
3.Ouvrir le panneau (6) sur le capot avant droit
de la machine (5).

4.Dposer les 3 vis (7) et dposer le capot


avant droit (5).

5.Dposer les 3 vis (8). Dposer le capot arrire droit infrieur (9).

2.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel de la


mquina (4).
3.Abra el panel (6) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (5) de la mquina.

4.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y quite la cubierta


delantera derecha (5).

5.Quite los 3 tornillos (8). Quite la cubierta


trasera inferior derecha (9).

2.ffnen Sie die Papiertransportabdeckung (4)


des Gerts.
3.ffnen Sie die Platte (6) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (5) des Gerts.

4.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (7) und nehmen


Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) ab.

5.Entfernen Sie 3 Schrauben (8). Nehmen Sie


die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (9) ab.

2.Aprire il coperchio (4) dell'unit di trasporto


carta della macchina.
3.Aprire il pannello (6) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (5) della macchina.

4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7), e quindi rimuovere il


coperchio destro posteriore (5).

5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (8). Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (9).

2. (4)
3. (5) (6)

4. 3 (7) (5)

5. 3 (8) (9)

2. (4) .
3. (5) (6)
.

4. (7) 3 (5)
.

5. (8) 3 .
(9) .

2.(4)
3.(5) (6)

4. (7)3 (5)

5. (8)3 (9)

11

10

13

14

15
11

12

16

6.Remove the panel (11) from the lower right


cover (10) on the paper feeder using a flat
blade screwdriver.

7.Open the paper feeder right cover (12).


Remove the strap (13) from the right cover
shaft (14) and remove the right cover (12).

8.Remove the breakaway cover (15) from the


paper feeder lower right cover (16).

6.Dposer le panneau (11) du capot infrieur


droit (10) du chargeur de papier en procdant l'aide d'un tournevis lame.

7.Ouvrir le couvercle droit du chargeur de


papier (12).
Dposer la courroie (13) de l'axe du capot
droit (14) et dposer le capot droit (12).

8.Retirez le capot dtachable (15) du capot


infrieur droit du chargeur de papier (16).

6.Quite el panel (11) de la cubierta derecha


inferior (10) del depsito de papel con un
destornillador de pala plana.

7.Abra la cubierta derecha del depsito de


papel (12).
Quite la correa (13) del eje de la cubierta
derecha (14) y quite la cubierta derecha
(12).

8.Quite la cubierta de separacin (15) de la


cubierta inferior derecha del depsito de
papel (16).

6.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (11) von der unteren rechten Abdeckung (10) des Papiereinzugs ab.

7.Die rechte Abdeckung (12) des Papiereinzugs ffnen.


Nehmen Sie den Riemen (13) von der Welle
(14) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die
rechte Abdeckung (12) ab.

8.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (15)


von der untere rechte Abdeckung (16) des
Papiereinzugs ab.

6.Rimuovere il pannello (11) dal coperchio


destro inferiore (10) sull'unit di alimentazione carta utilizzando un cacciavite a testa
piana.

7.Aprire il coperchio destro (12) dell'unit di


alimentazione della carta.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (13) dall'asta (14)
del coperchio destro e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio destro (12).

8.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (15) dal


coperchio destro inferiore (16) dell'unit di
alimentazione carta.

6.
(10) (11)

7. (12)
(14) (13)
(12)

8.16
15

6. (10)
(11)
.

7. (12) .
(13) (14)
(12) .

8. (16)
(15) .

6.(10)
(11)

7.(12)

(13) (14)

(12)

8. (16)
(15)

12

17
5

19

18
9

9.Remove the breakaway cover (17) from the front right cover (5) and
the breakaway cover (18) from the lower right rear cover (9).

10.Remove the panel (19) from the machine lower right cover (1) with a
flat blade screwdriver.

9.Dposer le couvercle amovible (17) du capot avant droit (5) et le couvercle amovible (18) du capot arrire infrieur droit (9).

10.Retirer le panneau (19) du capot infrieur droit de la machine (1)


l'aide d'un tournevis lame plate.

9.Quite la cubierta divisoria (17) de la cubierta delantera derecha (5) y la


cubierta divisoria (18) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (9).

10.Extraiga el panel (19) de la cubierta derecha inferior de la mquina (1)


con un destornillador de pala plana.

9.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (17) von der vorderen rechten


Abdeckung (5) ab und die Ablsungsabdeckung (18) von der unteren
rechten hinteren Abdeckung (9).

10.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (19) von
der unteren rechten Abdeckung (1) des Gerts ab.

9.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (17) dal coperchio destro anteriore


(5), e il coperchio di distacco (18) dal coperchio posteriore inferiore
destro (9).

10.Rimuovere il pannello (19) dal coperchio destro inferiore (1) della macchina con un cacciavite a testa piatta.

9. (5) (17) (9)


(18)

10. (1) (19)

9. (5) (17) (9)


(18) .

10. (1) (19)


.

9.(5) (17) (9)


(18)

10.(1) (19)

13

20

1mm

1mm
0mm
1mm
O

11.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (O) in the position (20) indicated in the illustration.
Proceed to step 23.

11.Coller le film (O) sur l'emplacement (20) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool.
Passer l'tape 23.

11.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la pelcula (O) en el lugar (20) que se indica en la ilustracin.
Vaya al paso 23.

11.Zum Anbringen des Films (O) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (O) dann in der in der Abbildung angegebenen Position (20) anbringen.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 23.

11.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola (O) nella posizione (20) indicata nell'illustrazione.
Procedere al passo 23.

11. (20) O
23

11. , (20) O .
23 .

11. (20) O

23

14

22

26

23

25

21

24

Installation on high-speed MFPs


12.Open the right cover 1 (21) on the machine.
Remove the strap (22) from the shaft (23) and remove right cover 1
(21).

13.Open the right cover 2 (24) on the machine.


Remove the strap (25) from the right cover shaft (26) and remove the
right cover 2 (24).

Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse


12.Ouvrir le capot droit 1 (21) de la machine.
Dposer la courroie (22) de l'arbre (23) et dposer le capot droit 1 (21).

13.Ouvrir le capot droit 2 (24) de la machine.


Dposer la courroie (25) de l'axe du capot droit (26) et dposer le
capot droit 2 (24).

Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


12.Abra la cubierta derecha 1 (21) de la mquina.
Quite la correa (22) del eje (23) y quite la cubierta derecha 1 (21).

13.Abra la cubierta derecha 2 (24) de la mquina.


Quite la correa (25) del eje de la cubierta derecha (26) y quite la cubierta derecha 2 (24).

Installation an MFP der Hochleistungs1lasse


12.ffnen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (21) des Gerts.
Den Riemen (22) von der Welle (23) abnehmen und dann die rechte
Abdeckung 1 (21) abnehmen.

13.ffnen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24) des Gerts.


Nehmen Sie den Riemen (25) von der Welle (26) der rechten Abdeckung und dann die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24) ab.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


12.Aprire il coperchio destro 1 (21) sulla macchina.
Rimuovere la cinghietta (22) dall'asta (23) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio destro 1 (21).

13.Aprire il coperchio destro 2 (24) sulla macchina.


Rimuovere la cinghietta (25) dall'asta (26) del coperchio destro e quindi
rimuovere il coperchio destro 2 (24).

MFP
12. 1(21)
(22) (23) 1(21)

13. 2(24)
(26) (25) 2(24)

MFP
12. 1(21) .
(22) (23) 1 (21) .

13. 2(24) .
(25) (26) 2 (24) 5
.

MFP
12.1(21)
(22) (23) 1(21)

13.2(24)
(25) (26) 2(24)

15

28

29

31

30

32

31
30
30

27
28

28

31

33

14.Open the machine paper conveying cover


(27).
15.Open the panel (29) on the machine front
right cover (28).

16.Remove the 4 screws (30) and release the 4


hooks (31). Then remove the front right
cover (28).

17.Remove the panel (33) from the lower right


rear cover (32) with a flat blade screwdriver.

14.Ouvrir le capot du transport du papier de la


machine (27).
15.Ouvrir le panneau (29) sur le capot avant
droit de la machine (28).

16.Retirer les 4 vis (30) et librer les 4 crochets


(31). Retirer ensuite le capot avant droit (28).

17.Dposer le panneau (33) du capot arrire


infrieur droit (32) en procdant l'aide d'un
tournevis lame.

14.Abra la cubierta de transporte del papel de la


mquina (27).
15.Abra el panel (29) en la cubierta delantera
derecha (28) de la mquina.

16.Quite los 4 tornillos (30) y libere los 4 ganchos (31). Despus, quite la cubierta frontal
derecha (28).

17.Extraiga el panel (33) de la cubierta trasera


inferior derecha (32) con un destornillador
de pala plana.

14.ffnen Sie die Abdeckung des Papiertransports (27) des Gerts.


15.ffnen Sie die Platte (29) der vorderen
rechten Abdeckung (28) des Gerts.

16.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (30) und


lsen Sie die 4 Haken (31). Danach nehmen
Sie die rechte vordere Abdeckung (28) ab.

17.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (33) von der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung (32) ab.

14.Aprire il coperchio (27) dell'unit di trasporto


carta della macchina.
15.Aprire il pannello (29) sul coperchio destro
anteriore (28) della macchina.

16.Rimuovere le 4 viti (30) e rilasciare i 4 ganci


(31). Rimuovere quindi il coperchio anteriore
destro (28).

17.Rimuovere il pannello (33) dal coperchio


posteriore inferiore destro (32) con un cacciavite a testa piana.

14. (27)
15. (28)
(29)

16. 4 30 4 31
28

17.32
33

14. (27) .
15. (28) (29)
.

16. (30) 4 (31) 4


. (28)
.

17. (32) (33)


.

14.(27)
15.(28) (29)

16. (30)4 (31)4


(28)

17.(32) (33)

16

37

38

32
34

34

34

34

36

35

28

32

18.Remove 5 screws (34).Remove the lower


right rear cover (32).

19.Remove the breakaway cover (35) from the


lower right cover (36) .

20.Remove the breakaway cover (37) from the


front right cover (28) and the breakaway
cover (38) from the lower right rear cover
(32).

18.Dposer les 5 vis (34) . Dposer le capot


arrire infrieur droit (32).

19.Retirez le capot dtachable (35) du capot


infrieur droit (36).

20.Dposer le couvercle amovible (37) du capot


avant droit (28) et le couvercle amovible (38)
du capot arrire infrieur droit (32).

18.Quite los 5 tornillos (34). Quite la cubierta


trasera inferior derecha (32).

19.Quite la cubierta de separacin (35) de la


cubierta inferior derecha (36).

20.Quite la cubierta divisoria (37) de la cubierta


delantera derecha (28) y la cubierta divisoria
(38) de la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(32).

18.Entfernen Sie 5 Schrauben (34). Nehmen


Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung
(32) ab.

19.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (35)


von untere rechte Abdeckung (36) ab.

20.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (37)


von der vorderen rechten Abdeckung (28)
ab und die Ablsungsabdeckung (38) von
der unteren rechten hinteren Abdeckung
(32).

18.Rimuovere le 5 viti (34). Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (32).

19.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (35) dal


coperchio destro inferiore (36) .

20.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (37) dal


coperchio destro anteriore (28), e il coperchio di distacco (38) dal coperchio posteriore
inferiore destro (32).

18. 5 (34)
(32)

19. (36) 35

20. (28) (37)


(32) (38)

18. (34) 5 .
(32) .

19. (36) (35)


.

20. (28) (37)


(32) (38)
.

18. (34)5 (32)

19.(36) (35)

20.(28) (37)
(32) (38)

17

40

1mm

21

1mm
0mm
1mm

39
O

21.Remove the panel (39) from the machine


right cover 1 (21) with a flat blade screwdriver.

22. After using alcohol to clean place adhering the film, adhere the film (O) in the position (40) indicated in the illustration.

21.Retirer le panneau (39) du capot droit 1 de la


machine (21) l'aide d'un tournevis lame
plate.

22.Coller le film (O) sur l'emplacement (40) indiqu dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement
nettoy cet emplacement l'alcool.

21.Extraiga el panel (39) de la cubierta derecha


1 de la mquina (21) con un destornillador
de pala plana.

22.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la pelcula, pegue la
pelcula (O) en el lugar (40) que se indica en la ilustracin.

21.Nehmen Sie mit einem flachen Schraubendreher die Platte (39) von der rechten
Abdeckung 1 (21) des Gerts ab.

22.Zum Anbringen des Films (O) die Stelle zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und den Film (O) dann in der
in der Abbildung angegebenen Position (40) anbringen.

21.Rimuovere il pannello (39) dal coperchio


destro 1 (21) della macchina con un cacciavite a testa piatta.

22.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce alla pellicola, far aderire la pellicola
(O) nella posizione (40) indicata nell'illustrazione.

21. 1
(21) (39)

22. (40) O

21.
1(21) (39) .

22. , (40) O .

21.1(21) (39)

22.
40
O

18

F(M4x8)
D

F(M4x8)

23.Install a lock pin (D) on the front right of the machine using an M4 8
screw (F).

24.Install a lock pin (D) on the rear right of the machine using an M4 8
screw (F) in the same way.

23.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) sur l'avant droit de la machine


l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (F).

24.Monter une broche de verrouillage (D) sur l'arrire droit de la machine


de la mme manire l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (F).

23.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte derecha frontal de la


mquina usando un tornillo M4 8 (F).

24.Instale una clavija de bloqueo (D) en la parte derecha posterior de la


mquina usando un tornillo M4 8 (F).

23.Bringen Sie mit einer M4 8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D)


vorne rechts am Gert an.

24.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise mit einer M4 8 Schraube (F) den Arretierungsstift (D) hinten rechts am Gert an.

23.Installare un perno di blocco (D) sul lato destro anteriore della macchina utilizzando una vite M4 8 (F).

24.Analogamente, installare un perno di blocco (D) sul lato destro posteriore della macchina utilizzando una vite M4 8 (F).

23. 1 M48 (F) (D)

24. 1 M48 (F) (D)

23. M4 8(F) (D)


.

24. M4 8(F) (D)


.

23. M48(F)1
(D)

24. M48(F) (D)

19

42

41

25.Place the small base slider (C) on the large base slider (B). Place so that the bend (42) on the small base slider (C) abuts inside the rest (41) at the
end of the large base slider (B).

25.Placer la petite rgle de base (C) sur la grande rgle de base (B). Disposer la petite rgle de base (C) de sorte que son extrmit replie (42) s'encastre dans la bute (41) l'extrmit de la grande rgle de base (B).

25.Coloque el deslizador de base pequeo (C) sobre el deslizador de base grande (B). Haga que la dobladura (42) del deslizador de base pequeo (C)
quede en el interior del apoyo (41) del extremo del deslizador de base grande (B).

25.Setzen Sie den kleinen Basis-Schieber (C) auf den groen Basis-Schieber (B). Setzen Sie ihn so auf, dass die Biegung (42) am kleinen BasisSchieber (C) innerhalb der Auflage (41) am Ende des groen Basis-Schiebers (B) anliegt.

25.Posizionare lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sullo scivolo di base grande (B). Posizionare in modo che la piegatura (42) sullo scivolo di base piccolo (C)
si attesti all'interno del sostegno (41) all'estremit dello scivolo di base grande (B).

25.(C) (B)(C) (42) (B) (41)

25. (B) (C) . , (C) (42) (B)


(41) .

25. (B) (C)


(C) (42) (B)
(41)

20

43

6 2 mm

F(M4x8)
B

26.Insert the small base slider (C) under the machine. Install to the base (43) using 2 M4 8 screws (F) so that the gap between the small base slider (C)
and the large base slider (B) is 6 2 mm.
* For PF-730, install to the screw holes marked R.

26.Insrer la petite rgle de base (C) sous l'appareil. Fixer la base (43) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F) de sorte que l'interstice entre la petite rgle de base
(C) et la grande rgle de base (B) soit de 6 2 mm.
* Pour le PF-730, fixer aux trous de vis marqus "R".

26.Introduzca el deslizador de base pequeo (C) por debajo de la mquina. Instlelo en la base (43) usando 2 tornillos M4 8 (F) de modo que el espacio entre el deslizador de base pequeo (C) y el deslizador de base grande (B) sea de 6 2 mm.
* En el caso de PF-730, instale en los orificios para tornillo R.

26.Setzen Sie die Fhrungsschiene (C) unter das Gert. Befestigen Sie sie mit zwei M4 8 Schrauben (F) so an der Basis (43), dass der Abstand
zwischen der kleinen Fhrungsschiene (C) und der groen Fhrungsschiene (B) 6 2 mm betrgt.
* Bei Modell PF-730 an den mit "R" markierten Schraublchern befestigen.

26.Inserire lo scivolo di base piccolo (C) sotto la macchina. Installare sulla base (43) utilizzando 2 viti M4 8 (F) in modo che lo spazio tra lo scivolo di
base piccolo (C) e lo scivolo di base grande (B) sia di 6 2 mm.
* Per PF-730, installare ai fori per viti segnalati con R.

26. ( )(C) 2 M48(F) (C) (43) (C)


(B) 62mm
PF-730 R

26. (C) . (C) (B) 6 2 mm M4


8 (F) 2 (43) .
PF-730 R .

26. (C) (C) (B)


62mm
M48(F)2 (43)
PF-730 R

21

Installation with medium-speed MFPs and printers


If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 31.
27.Reinstall the paper feeder right cover (12).

28.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (9).


29.Reinstall the front right cover (5).
30.Reinstall the lower right cover (1).
Proceed to step 35.

Installation avec les imprimantes multifonctions et les imprimantes


vitesse moyenne
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer l'tape 31.
27.Reposer le capot droit du chargeur de papier (12).

28.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (9).


29.Reposer le capot avant droit (5).
30.Reposer le capot infrieur droit (1).
Passer l'tape 35.

Instalacin con unidades MFP e impresoras de velocidad media


Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al paso 31.
27.Reinstale la cubierta derecha del depsito de papel (12).

28.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha (9).


29.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (5).
30.Reinstale la cubierta derecha inferior (1).
Vaya al paso 35.

Installation an mittelschnellen MFPs und Druckern


Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter
zu Schritt 31.
27.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (12) des Papiereinzugs wieder an.

28.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere Abdeckung (9) wieder an.
29.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung (5) wieder an.
30.Bringen Sie die untere rechte Abdeckung (1) wieder an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 35.

Installazione con MFP e stampanti di media velocit


Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al passo 31.
27.Reinstallare il coperchio destro (12) dell'unit di alimentazione carta.

28.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore destro (9).


29.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore (5).
30.Reinstallare il coperchio destro inferiore (1).
Procedere al passo 35.

MFP
MFP 31
27. (12)

28. (9)
29. (5)
30. (1)
35

MFP
MFP 31 .
27. (12) .

28. (9) .
29. (5) .
30. (1) .
35 .

MFP
MFP 31
27.(12)

28.(9)
29.(5)
30.(1)
35

22

E
J(M4x10)

Installation on high-speed MFPs


31.Reinstall the lower right rear cover (32).

32.Reinstall the front right cover (28).


33.Reinstall the right cover 2 (24).
34.Reinstall the right cover 1 (21).

35.Install the switch press plate (E) using the


M4 10 tapping screw (J).

Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse


31.Reposer le capot arrire infrieur droit (32).

32.Reposer le capot avant droit (28).


33.Reposer le capot droit 2 (24).
34.Reposer le capot droit 1 (21).

35.Fixer la plaque de pression du contacteur


(E) l'aide d'une vis de connexion M4 10
(J).

Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


31.Reinstale la cubierta trasera inferior derecha
(32).

32.Reinstale la cubierta delantera derecha (28).


33.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 2 (24).
34.Reinstale la cubierta derecha 1 (21).

35.Instale la placa de presin del interruptor (E)


usando el tornillo de roscado M4 10 (J).

Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse


31.Bringen Sie die untere rechte hintere
Abdeckung (32) wieder an.

32.Bringen Sie die vordere rechte Abdeckung


(28) wieder an.
33.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 2 (24)
wieder an.
34.Bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung 1 (21)
wieder an.

35.Befestigen Sie mit der M4 10 Schneidschraube (J) die Schalterdruckplatte (E).

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


31.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore inferiore
destro (32).

32.Reinstallare il coperchio destro anteriore


(28).
33.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 2 (24).
34.Reinstallare il coperchio destro 1 (21).

35.Installare la piastra spingi interruttore (E) utilizzando la vite autofilettante M4 10 (J).

MFP
31. (32)

32. (28)
33. 2(24)
34. 1(21)

35. 1 M410 (J)


(E)

MFP
31. (32)
.

32. (28) .
33. 2 (24) .
34. 1 (21) .

35. M410(J) 1 (E)


.

MFP
31.(32)

32.(28)
33.2 (24)
34.1 (21)

35. M410(J)1
(E)

23

F(M4x8)

44

F(M4x8)

F(M4x8)

36.Attach the side feeder to the large base slider (B) using 2 M4 8 screws (F).Install so that the
center of the M4 8 screws (F) comes over the horizontal line (44) of the mounting plate on the
large base slider (B).

37.Install the cover plate (I) using 2 M4 8


screws (F).

36.Fixer le plateau d'alimentation latral la grande rgle de base (B) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F).
Procder de sorte que l'axe des vis M4 8 (F) recouvre la ligne horizontale (44) du plateau de
montage sur la grande rgle de base (B).

37.Fixer le capot (I) l'aide de 2 vis M4 8 (F).

36.Sujete el alimentador lateral al deslizador de base grande (B) con 2 tornillos M4 8 (F). Instale
de manera que el centro de los tornillos M4 8 (F) queden sobre la lnea horizontal (44) de la
placa de montaje del deslizador de base (B) grande.

37.Instale la tapa (I) usando los 2 tornillos M4


8 (F).

36.Den seitlichen Einzug am groen Basis-Schieber (B) mithilfe der 2 Schrauben 2 M4 8 (F) befestigen. Befestigen Sie ihn so, dass die Mitte der M4 8 Schrauben (F) ber der Waagrechtlinie
(44) der Montageplatte am groen Basis-Schieber (B) liegt.

37.Bringen Sie die Abdeckungsplatte (I) mit 2


M4 8 Schrauben (F) an.

36.Collegare l'unit di alimentazione laterale allo scivolo di base grande (B) usando 2 viti M4 8 (F).
Installare in modo che il centro delle viti M4 8 (F) sia sulla linea orizzontale (44) della piastra di
montaggio sullo scivolo di base grande (B).

37.Installare il coperchio (I) utilizzando 2 viti M4


8 (F).

36. 2 M48 (F) ( )(B) M48 (F)


(B) (44)

37. 2 M48 (F) (I)

36. M48(F) 2 (B) . ,


(B) (44) M48(F) .

37. M48(F) 2 (I)


.

36. M48(F)2 (B)

(B) (44) M48(F)

37. M48(F)2 (I)

24

(PF-730)

(PF-740)

L
M

45
M
L

46
38.Connect the signal cable (46) of the side
feeder to the connector (45) of the machine.
39.Push the side feeder to connect it to the
machine.

40.After using alcohol to clean place adhering the cassette number label 6 (L) and the cassette number label 7 (M), adhere them in the positions indicated in the illustration.

38.Connecter le cble de signal (46) du


chargeur latral au connecteur (45) de la
machine.
39.Pousser le chargeur latral pour le raccorder
la machine.

40.Coller l'tiquette de numro de cassette 6 (L) et l'tiquette de numro de cassette 7 (M) sur les
emplacements indiqus dans l'illustration, aprs avoir soigneusement nettoy ces derniers
l'alcool.

38.Conecte el cable de seal (46) del depsito


lateral al conector (45) de la mquina.
39.Empuje el depsito lateral para conectarlo a
la mquina.

40.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la zona donde se va a pegar la etiqueta de casete con el
nmero 6 (L) y la etiqueta de casete con el nmero 7 (M), pguelas en los lugares que se indican
en la ilustracin.

38.Das Signalkabel (46) des seitlichen Einzugs


an den Stecker (45) des Gerts anschlieen.
39.Schieben Sie den seitlichen Einzug, um ihn
mit dem Gert zu verbinden.

40.Zum Anbringen der Aufkleber Kassettennummer 6 (L) und Kassettennummer 7 (M) die Stellen
zuvor mit Alkohol reinigen und die Aufkleber dann an den in der Abbildung angegebenen Positionen anbringen.

38.Collegare il cavo del segnale (46) dell'alimentatore laterale al connettore (45) della
macchina.
39.Spingere l'alimentatore laterale per collegarlo alla macchina.

40.Dopo aver utilizzato alcol per pulire la piastra che aderisce all'etichetta numero cassetta 6 (L) e
l'etichetta numero cassetta 7 (M), farli aderire nelle posizioni indicate nell'illustrazione.

38. (46)
(45)
39.

40. 6L 7M

38. (46)
(45) .
39.
.

40. 6L, 7M ,
.

38. (46)
(45)
39.

40. 6L
7M

25

(PF-730)

(PF-740)
48

51

49

47

50

For PF-730
41.Pull each cassette out and then remove the lift plate stopper (47) from each cassette and attach it
to the storage location (48).
For PF-740
41.Pull out the right cassette (49) and the left cassette (50), remove each of the lift plate stoppers
(51) and attach them in the storage location.

42.Gently close each cassette.

Pour PF-730
41.Sortez chaque magasin puis retirer la bute de plaque dlvation (47) de chaque tiroir et la fixer
lemplacement de rangement (48).
Pour PF-740
41.Sortez le magasin droit (49) et le magasin gauche (50), dposer toutes les butes du plateau de
levage (51) et les ranger soigneusement.

42.Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir.

Para PF-730
41.Saque cada uno de los depsitos y quite el tope de la placa de elevacin (47) de cada bandeja y
colquela en su lugar de depsito (48).
Para PF-740
41.Extraiga el depsito derecho (49) y el depsito izquierdo (50) , quite cada uno de los topes de
placa de elevacin (51) y fjelos en el lugar de almacenamiento.

42.Cierre suavemente cada bandeja.

Fr PF-730
41.Ziehen Sie jede Kassette aus, dann den Hebeplattenanschlag (47) von jeder Kassette entfernen
und an der Speicherposition (48) anbringen.
Fr PF-740
41.Ziehen Sie die rechte Kassette (49) und die linke Kassette (50) aus, jeden der Hebeplattenanschlge (51) entfernen und in der vorgesehenen Position verstauen.

42.Alle Kassetten sachte schlieen.

Per PF-730
41.Estrarre ciascun cassetto e poi rimuovere il fermo della piastra di sollevamento (47) da ciascun
cassetto e fissarlo nella posizione di immagazzinaggio (48).
Per PF-740
41.Estrarre il cassetto destro (49) e il cassetto sinistro (50), rimuovere ciascuno dei fermi (51) della
piastra di sollevamento ed applicarli nella posizione di conservazione.

42.Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto.

PF-730
41. 1 (47) (48)
PF-740
41. (49) (50) 1 (51)

42.

PF-730
41. (47) 1 (48) .
PF-740
41. (49) (50) (51) 1

42. .

PF-730
41.(47) 1 (48)
PF-740
41. (49) (50)
(51) 1

42.

26

52 53

52 53

When there is 1 power cable


43.Remove a screw (53).
When there are 2 power cables
43.Remove 2 screws (52) and (53).

When there is 1 power cable


44.Pass the power cable through the clamp (N) and fasten it using a
screw (53) removed in step 43.
When there are 2 power cables
44.Pass the power cable through clamp (N) and fasten it using 2 screws
(52) (53) removed in step 43.

En cas d'utilisation de 1 seul cordon d'alimentation


43.Retirer la vis (53).
En cas d'utilisation de 2 cordons d'alimentation
43.Retirer les 2 vis (52) et (53).

En cas d'utilisation de 1 seul cordon d'alimentation


44.Faire passer le cordon d'alimentation au travers de collier (N) et le fixer
l'aide de la vis (53) dpose l'tape 43.
En cas d'utilisation de 2 cordons d'alimentation
44.Faire passer les cordons d'alimentation au travers des colliers (N) et
les fixer l'aide des 2 vis (52) et (53) dposes l'tape 43.

Si hay 1 cable elctrico


43.Quite un tornillo (53).
Si hay 2 cables elctricos
43.Quite 2 tornillos (52) y (53).

Si hay 1 cable elctrico


44.Pase el cable elctrico por el sujetador (N) y apritelo con el tornillo
(53) que quit en el paso 43.
Si hay 2 cables elctricos
44.Pase el cable elctrico por el sujetador (N) y apritelo con los 2 tornillos (52) y (53) que quit en el paso 43.

Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist


43.Die Schraube (53) entfernen.
Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind
43.Die 2 Schrauben (52) und (53) entfernen.

Wenn 1 Netzkabel vorhanden ist


44.Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme (N) fhren und es mit der in Schritt
43 entfernten Schraube (53) befestigen.
Wenn 2 Netzkabel vorhanden sind
44.Das Netzkabel durch die Klemme (N) fhren und es mit den in Schritt
43 entfernten 2 Schrauben (52) (53) befestigen.

Quando esiste 1 cavo di alimentazione


43.Rimuovere una vite (53).
Quando esistono 2 cavi di alimentazione
43.Rimuovere 2 viti (52) e (53).

Quando esiste 1 cavo di alimentazione


44.Passare il cavo di alimentazione attraverso il morsetto (N) e stringerlo
usando una vite (53) rimossa nel passo 43.
Quando esistono 2 cavi di alimentazione
44.Passare il cavo di alimentazione attraverso il morsetto (N) e stringerlo
usando 2 viti (52) (53) rimosse nel passo 43.

1
43. 1 53
2
43. 2 5253

1
44.N 43 1 53

2
44.N 43 2 52(53)

1
43.531 .
2
43.52532 .

1
44. N 43
531 .
2
44. N 43
52(53) 2 .

1
43.53
1
2
43.52
532

1
44.
N 43 53
1

2
(53)2
44.
N 43 52

27

H,X
G,V

Setting the paper size plate and media type


plate
Insert the paper size plate (G,V) and media type
plate (H,X) into the each slots respectively.

Skewed paper feed adjustment (PF-730 only)


1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Load paper into the cassette and make a test copy to check the image.
3.If the image is skewed (skewed paper feed), make the adjustments described below.
<Reference value> Left-right difference of 1.5 mm or less

Disposition des plaquettes du format de


papier et du type de support
Introduire la plaquette du format de papier (G,V)
et la plaquette du type de support (H,X) dans
leur logement respectif.

Rglage de l'entranement du papier en biais (PF-730 uniquement)


1. Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2. Mettre du papier dans le tiroir et effectuer une copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.
3. Si l'image est en biais (entranement du papier en biais), rgler en procdant comme dcrit ci-dessous.
<Valeur de rfrence> Diffrence de droite gauche de 1,5 mm ou moins.

Ajuste de la placa de tamao de papel y la


placa de tipo de medio
Inserte la placa de tamao de papel (G,V) y la
placa de tipo de medio (H,X) en cada uno de las
ranuras, respectivamente.

Ajuste de alimentacin de papel torcida (PF-730 solamente)


1. Conecte el enchufe de la mquina en el receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la
mquina.
2. Introduzca papel en el cajn y haga una copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.
3. Si la imagen est torcida (alimentacin del papel torcida) haga los ajustes que se describen a continuacin.
<Valor de referencia> diferencia izquierda-derecha de 1,5 mm o menor.

Einsetzen der Papierformatkarte und der


Medientypkarte
Setzen Sie die Papierformatkarte (G,V) und die
Medientypkarte (H,X) in die jeweiligen Fhrungen.

Einstellung bei verkantetem Papiereinzug (nur PF-730)


1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am
Hauptschalter ein.
2. Legen Sie Papier in die Papierlade ein und machen Sie eine Testkopie, um das Bild zu prfen.
3. Nehmen Sie nachstehende Einstellungen vor, falls das Bild verkantet ist (verkanteter Papiereinzug).
<Bezugswert> Links-rechts-Differenz maximal 1,5 mm.

Impostazione della piastra di formato carta e


della piastra del tipo di supporto
Inserire la piastra del formato carta (G,V) e la
piastra del tipo di supporto (H,X) nei rispettivi
alloggiamenti.

Regolazione alimentazione obliqua carta (solo PF-730)


1. Collegare la spina della macchina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2. Caricare carta nel cassetto ed eseguire una copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.
3. Se l'immagine risulta obliqua (alimentazione obliqua della carta), eseguire le regolazioni descritte sotto.
<Valore di riferimento> Differenza tra destra e sinistra di 1,5 mm o inferiore

(G,V) (H,X)

( PF-730)
1.
2.
3.
1.5mm


(G,V)
(H,X) .

(PF-730 )
1. .
2. . .
3. .
1.5mm

(G,V)
(H,X)

(PF-730 )
1. ON
2.
3.

1.5mm

28

4.Pull out the cassette (1) in the paper feeder and loosen the 4 screws (2).
5.Turn the adjusting screw (3) to adjust the cursor skew.
6.Retighten the 4 screws (2).
7.Make another test copy to check the image.

4.Sortir le tiroir (1) du bureau papier et desserrer les 4 vis (2).


5.Faire tourner la vis de rglage (3) pour rgler la dviation du curseur.
6.Resserrer les 4 vis (2).
7.Faire une autre copie d'essai pour vrifier l'image.

4.Extraiga el cajn (1) del alimentador de papel y afloje los 4 tornillos (2).
5.Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) para ajustar la desviacin del cursor.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 4 tornillos (2).
7.Haga otra copia de prueba para verificar la imagen.

4.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade (1) aus dem Papiereinzug und lsen Sie die 4 Schrauben (2).
5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube (3), um die Cursor-Verkantung zu korrigieren.
6.Ziehen Sie die 4 Schrauben (2) wieder an
7.Erstellen Sie zur berprfung des Bilds noch einmal eine Testkopie.

4.Estrarre il cassetto (1) dell'unit di alimentazione della carta e quindi allentare le 4 viti (2).
5.Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) per regolare l'inclinazione del cursore.
6.Ristringere le 4 viti (2).
7.Eseguire un'altra copia di prova per controllare l'immagine.

4. (1) 4 (2)
5. (3)
6. 4 (2)
7.

4. (1) (2) 4 .
5. (3) .
6. (2) 4 .
7. .

4. (1)
(2)4
5. (3)
6. (2)4
7.

29

4
5

Changing paper size (PF-740, metric specifications only)


At shipment, Letter is set for inch models and A4
is set for metric models. Use the procedure
below to change the size to B5.

1.Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder.


2.Turn the front lock lever (4) 90 and remove the front deck cursor (5).

Modification du format du papier (PF-740,


pour spcifications mtriques seulement)
expdition, les modles mesure en pouces
sont rgls sur le format Letter et les modles
mesure mtrique sur le format A4. Pour passer
au format B5, procder de la manire suivante.

1.Tirer le magasin du bureau papier vers soi.


2.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (4) de 90 et dposer le curseur de platine avant (5).

Cmo cambiar el tamao de papel (PF-740,


slo para las especificaciones mtricas)
En el momento de salida de fbrica, se configura Carta para los modelos en pulgadas y A4
para los modelos en sistema mtrico. Siga este
procedimiento para cambiar el tamao a B5.

1.Abra el casete del alimentador de papel.


2.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (4) 90 y quite el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5).

ndern des Papierformats (PF-740, nur metrische Spezifikationen)


Beim Werksversand ist bei Modellen mit Zollma
das Format Letter voreingestellt und bei Modellen
mit metrischem Ma das Format A4.
Das Format kann wie folgend auf B5 umgeschaltet werden.

1.Ziehen Sie die Papierlade aus dem Papiereinzug.


2.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (4) um 90 drehen und den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5)
abnehmen.

Cambio del formato della carta (PF-740, solo


per le specifiche metriche)
Al momento della spedizione, Letter impostato
per le specifiche in pollici e A4 impostato per
le specifiche metriche. Usare la procedura
riportata sotto per cambiare il formato a B5.

1.Estrarre il cassetto dellunit di alimentatore della carta.


2.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (4) di 90 e rimuovere il cursore frontale del deck (5).

PF-740,
Letter
A4 B5

1.
2. (4) 905

PF-740,
, Letter, A4
. B5
.

1. .
2. (4) 90 5 .

PF-740,
Letter A4
B5

1.
2. (4) 90 5

30

6
10

3.Move the front deck cursor (5) so that it is aligned with the size indicators on the top (7) and bottom (6) of the cassette.
4.Turn the front lock lever (4) 90 to lock it.
5.Move the rear deck cursor (8) in the same way.

6.Release the hook (9) and remove the deck


trailing edge cursor (10).

3.Dplacer le curseur de platine avant (5) de sorte qu'il soit align avec les indicateurs de format en
haut (7) et en bas (6) du tiroir.
4.Faire tourner le levier de verrouillage avant (4) de 90 pour le verrouiller.
5.Dplacer le curseur de platine arrire (8) en procdant de la mme manire.

6.Librer le crochet (9) et dposer le curseur


du bord arrire de la platine (10).

3.Mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5) para que quede alineado con las indicadores de
tamao de la parte superior (7) e inferior (6) del cajn.
4.Gire la palanca de bloqueo frontal (4) 90 para bloquearla.
5.Mueva el cursor trasero de la plataforma (8) de la misma forma.

6.Libere el gancho (9) y quite el cursor del


borde inferior de la plataforma (10).

3.Den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5) so verschieben, dass er mit den Formatanzeigen oben (7) und
unten (6) an der Kassette fluchtet.
4.Den vorderen Verriegelungshebel (4) zum Verriegeln um 90 drehen.
5.Den hinteren Konsole-Cursor (8) auf gleiche Weise verschieben.

6.Den Haken (9) lsen und den HinterkanteCursor (10) der Konsole abnehmen.

3.Spostare il cursore frontale del deck (5) in modo che esso risulti allineato con gli indicatori di formato sulla parte superiore (7) e inferiore (6) del cassetto.
4.Ruotare la leva frontale di blocco (4) di 90, per bloccarla.
5.Spostare il cursore posteriore del deck (8) allo stesso modo.

6.Rilasciare il gancio (9) e rimuovere il cursore


del bordo di uscita del deck (10).

3. (5) (6) (7)


4. (4) 90
5. (8)

6.9 (10)

3. (6) (7) (5)


.
4. (4) 90 .
5. (8) .

6.9 (10)
.

3. (6) (7) (5)

4. (4) 90
5. (8)

6.
9
(10)

31

13

11

14
0.51.5mm
10
12

7.Lift up the sub-cursor (11).


8.Align with the size indicator (12), engage the
hook (13) and install the deck trailing edge
cursor (10).

Adjusting the cursor width (PF-740 only)


1.Load paper in the cassettes.
2.If the gap between the front deck cursor (5) and the paper (14) is outside the 0.5 to 1.5 mm range
when the paper (14) is touching up against the rear deck cursor (8), perform the following adjustment.
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding, while a cursor width that is too large
can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.

7.Lever le curseur secondaire (11).


8.Aligner avec l'indicateur de format (12),
engager le crochet (13) et reposer le curseur
du bord arrire de la platine (10).

Rglage de la largeur du curseur (PF-740 uniquement)


1.Charger les tiroirs en papier.
2.Si l'cartement entre le curseur de platine avant (5) et le papier (14) est hors des limites de 0,5
1,5 mm quand le papier (14) touche le curseur de platine arrire (8), procder au rglage suivant.
* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empcher l'entranement du papier et une largeur
trop grande risque d'entraner des problmes du type entranement du papier de biais.

7.Levante el cursor secundario (11).


8.Alinee con el indicador de tamao (12),
enganche el gancho (13) e instale el cursor
del borde inferior de la plataforma. (10).

Cmo ajustar la anchura del cursor (PF-740 solamente)


1.Cargue papel en los cajones.
2.Si la separacin entre el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5) y el papel (14) est fuera del rango de 0,5
a 1,5 mm cuando el papel (14) toca el cursor trasero de la plataforma (8), haga el siguiente ajuste.
* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequea puede impedir la alimentacin de papel; una anchura
del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentacin torcida de papel.

7.Den Unter-Cursor (11) anheben.


8.Auf die Formatanzeige (12) ausrichten, den
Haken (13) einsetzen und den HinterkanteCursor (10) der Konsole anbringen.

Einstellen der Cursor-Breite (nur PF-740)


1.Papier in die Papierladen einlegen.
2.Falls der Abstand zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5) und dem Papier (14) auerhalb
des Bereichs 0,5 bis 1,5 mm liegt, wenn das Papier (14) am hinteren Konsole-Cursor (8) anliegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern, wogegen eine zu groe CursorBreite verkanteten Papiereinzug und hnliche Probleme verursachen kann.

7.Sollevare il cursore secondario (11).


8.Allineare con l'indicatore formato (12), fissare il gancio (13) e installare il cursore del
bordo di uscita del deck (10).

Regolazione della larghezza del cursore (solo PF-740)


1. Caricare carta nei cassetti.
2. Se lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (5) e la carta (14) fuori della gamma da 0,5 a 1,5 mm

7. (11)
8. (12)13
(10)

PF-740
1.
2. (8) (14) (5) (14)
0.5 1.5mm

7. (11) .
8. (12) 13
(10) .

PF-740
1. .
2. (8) (14) (5) (14)
0.5 1.5mm .
, .

7. (11)
8. (12)
13
(10)

(PF-740 )
1.
2. (8) (14)
(5) (14)
0.5 1.5mm

32

quando la carta (14) tocca il cursore postertiore del deck (8), eseguire la regolazione seguente.
* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola pu ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta, mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande pu essere causa di problemi, come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.

16

15
3.Insert a Philips-head screwdriver into the 2 long slots (15) in the front deck cursor (5) and loosen
the 2 adjusting screws (16). Then move the front deck cursor (5).

4.Retighten the 2 adjusting screws (16).


5.Check that the gap between the front deck
cursor (5) and the paper is between 0.5 and
1.5 mm.

3.Insrer un tournevis cruciforme dans les 2 longues fentes (15) du curseur de platine avant (5) et
desserrer les 2 vis de rglage (16). Dplacer ensuite le curseur de platine avant (5).

4.Resserrer les 2 vis de rglage (16).


5.Vrifier que l'cartement entre le curseur de
platine avant (5) et le papier est entre 0,5 et
1,5 mm.

3.Inserte un destornillador de cabeza Philips en las dos ranuras largas (15) en el cursor frontal de
la plataforma (5) y afloje los 2 tornillos de ajuste (16). Despus, mueva el cursor frontal de la plataforma (5).

4.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos de ajuste


(16).
5.Verifique que la separacin entre el cursor
frontal de la plataforma (5) y el papel sea de
entre 0,5 y 1,5 mm.

3.Einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher in die 2 langen ffnungen (15) im vorderen Konsole-Cursor


(5) stecken und die 2 Einstellschrauben (16) lsen. Danach den vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5)
verschieben.

4.Die 2 Einstellschrauben (16) wieder anziehen.


5.Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Abstand
zwischen dem vorderen Konsole-Cursor (5)
und dem Papier im Bereich 0,5 bis 1,5 mm
liegt.

3.Inserire un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips nelle 2 fessure lunghe (15) nel cursore frontale del deck (5) e allentare le 2 viti di regolazione (16). Quindi spostare il cursore frontale del
deck (5).

4.Ristringere le 2 viti di regolazione (16).


5.Controllare che lo spazio tra il cursore frontale del deck (5) e la carta sia compreso
nella gamma tra 0,5 e 1,5 mm.

3. (5) 2 (15) 2 (16)


(5)

4. 2 (16)
5. (5)
0.5 1.5mm

3. (5) 2 (15) (16) 2


(5) .

4. (16) 2 .
5. (5) 0.5 1.5
mm .

3. (5) 2 (15)
(16)2

(5)

4. (16)2
5. (5) 0.5
1.5mm

33

Adjusting the center line


The reference value for the center line is 0.5 mm or less at position (f) in the correct image (e). If the center line position is outside this range, perform the
following adjustment.
1.Set maintenance mode U034, select LSU Out Left and Cassette 5, Cassette 6 or Cassette 7.
2.Adjust the values.
Test pattern (g): Increase the setting value. Test pattern (h): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
Rglage de l'axe
La valeur de rfrence pour l'axe est de 0,5 mm ou moins la position (f) d'une image correcte (e). Si la position de l'axe est hors de cette plage,
effectuez le rglage suivant.
1.Passer au mode maintenance U034, slectionner LSU Out Left et Cassette 5, Cassette 6 ou Cassette 7.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Mire d' essai (g): Augmentez la valeur de rglage. Mire d' essai (h): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.
Ajuste de la lnea central

El valor de referencia de la lnea central es de 0,5 mm o menor, en la posicin (f) de la imagen correcta (e). Si la posicin de la lnea central estuviera
fuera de este rango, haga el siguiente ajuste.
1.Entre al modo mantenimiento U034, seleccione LSU Out Left y Cassette 5, Cassette 6 o Cassette 7.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Patrn de prueba (g): Aumente el valor de configuracin. Patrn de prueba (h): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.
Einstellen der Mittenlinie
Der Bezugswert fr die Mittenlinie ist 0,5 mm oder weniger an Position (f) des korrekten Bilds (e). Falls die Mittenlinie auerhalb dieses Bereichs liegt,
ist folgende Einstellung vorzunehmen.
1.In den Wartungsmodus U034 schalten und LSU Out Left und Cassette 5, Cassette 6 oder Cassette 7 whlen.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Testmuster (g): Den Einstellwert erhhen. Testmuster (h): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.
Regolazione della linea centrale
Il valore di riferimento per la linea centrale 0,5 mm o inferiore alla posizione (f) nell'immagine corretta (e). Se la posizione della linea centrale all'infuori di questa gamma, effettuare la regolazione seguente.
1.Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U034, selezionare LSU Out Left e Cassette 5, Cassette 6 o Cassette 7.
2.Regolare i valori.
Modello di prova (g): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. Modello di prova (h): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(e) (f) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette5Cassette6 Cassette7
2.
(g) (h)
3. Start

(e) (f) 0.5mm . .
1. U034 LSU Out Left, Cassette5, Cassette6 Cassette7 .
2. .
(g) . (h) .
3. .

(e) (f) 0.5mm


1. U034 LSU Out LeftCassette5
Cassette6 Cassette7
2.
(g) (h)
3.

34

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


1000-SHEETS FINISHER

English A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP, see Page 1 to Page 6.
For installation with a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 13.

Franais Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction, voir Page 1 Page 6.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante, voir Page 7 Page 13.

Espaol El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalacin con un MFP, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 7 a la 13.

Deutsch Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 13.

Italiano Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Per l'installazione con una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 13.


MFP P1-P6
P7-P13

. .
MFP 1 ~6 .
7 ~13 .

MFP 1 6
7 13

C
I(M4x20)
B
E

D
F

H(M4x8)

Supplied parts
A. Document finisher...................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1
C. Lower earth plate....................................... 1
D. Connecting plate........................................ 1
E. Connector cover ........................................ 1
F. Eject guide................................................. 1

G. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
H. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1
I. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

Pices fournies
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1
C. Plaque de terre infrieure .......................... 1
D. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
E. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
F. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1

G. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1


H. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1
I. Vis M4 20................................................ 2

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Partes suministradas
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1
C. Placa de conexin a tierra inferior ............. 1
D. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
E. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
F. Gua de salida ........................................... 1

G. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1


H. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1
I. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Enthaltene Teile
A. Finisher...................................................... 1
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1
C. Untere Grundplatte .................................... 1
D. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
E. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
F. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1

G. Heftklammer-Magazin................................ 1
H. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 1
I. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

Parti fornite
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1
C. Piastra di messa a terra inferiore............... 1
D. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
E. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
F. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1

G. Contenitore punti ....................................... 1


H. Vite M4 8................................................. 1
I. Vite M4 20............................................... 2

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

A. ...............................
B. .............................
C. ...........................
D. ...............................
E. ...........................

F. ..........................1
G. .............................1
H. M48 ............................1
I. M420 ...........................2

A. .................................. 1
B. ........................................ 1
C. ........................................... 1
D. .............................................. 1
E. ........................................ 1

F. ....................................... 1
G. ............................... 1
H. M48......................................... 1
I. M420 ....................................... 2

,
.

A. ...........
B. ...........................
C. ...........................
D. ...............................
E. .....................
F. ..........................

G. ...............1
H. M48 ............................1
I. M420 ...........................2

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

A
1

NOTICE
The Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be
installed before the document finisher is
installed.

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Install eject tray (B) to document finisher (A)


by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the back of
the tray in the holes (2) of the finisher lift
plate.

REMARQUE
Le kit de fixation (AK-730 ou AK-731) doit tre
install avant d'installer le finisseur de document.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Installez le bac d'jection (B) sur le finisseur


de document (A) en insrant les 2 crochets
(1) au dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les
trous (2) du dispositif de levage du finisseur.

AVISO
El Kit de conexin (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de documentos.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Instale la bandeja de salida (B) en el finalizador de documentos (A); para ello, inserte los
2 enganches (1) de la parte posterior de la
bandeja en los orificios (2) de la placa de
elevacin del finalizador.

ANMERKUNG
Das Attachment Kit (AK-730 oder AK-731) muss
installiert werden, bevor der Finisher installiert
wird.

Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Setzen Sie das Ausgabefach (B) in den Finisher (A), indem Sie die 2 Haken (1) auf der
Rckseite des Fachs in die beiden Lcher
(2) der Finisher-Lift-Platte einsetzen.

AVVISO
Installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK731) prima di collegare il finisher documenti.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Installare il vassoio di uscita (B) sul finisher


documenti (A) inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul
retro del vassoio nei fori (2) della piastra di
elevazione del finisher.

(AK-730
AK-731)

1. (B) 2 (1)
(A) (2)


(AK-730 AK-731)
.

1. (B) (1) 2
(A) (2)
.

AK-730 AK731)

OFF

1. (B) (1)2
(A)
(2)

I(M4x20)
D
I(M4x20)

H(M4x8)
F

C
2.Secure the lower earth plate (C) with M4 8
screws (H).

3.Install the eject guide (F) by fitting the 2 eject


guide pins (4) into the holes in the machine.

4.Attach the connecting plate (D) to the


machine using 2 M4 20 screws (I). Attach
it at the point as shown above.
5.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the
left cover.

2.Fixez la plaque de terre infrieure (C) avec


des vis M4 8 (H).

3.Installer le guide d'jection (F) en insrant


les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
trous de la machine.

4.Fixez la plaque de connexion (D) la


machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (I). Raccordez-le au point indiqu ci-dessus.
5.Dposer le capot amovible (5) du capot
gauche.

2.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra inferior (C)


con tornillos M4 8 (H).

3.Instale la gua de salida (F) encajando los 2


clavijas de la gua de salida (4) en los orificios de la mquina.

4.Fije la placa de conexin (D) a la mquina


mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (I). Conctela
en el punto que se muestra arriba.
5.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta
izquierda.

2.Befestigen Sie die untere Grundplatte (C)


mit den M4 x 8 Schrauben (H).

3.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (F),


indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Auswerffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
einsetzen.

4.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (D) mit 2


M4 20 Schrauben (I) am Gert an. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an.
5.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (5)
von der linken Abdeckung ab.

2.Fissare la piastra di messa a terra inferiore


(C) con le viti M4 8 (H).

3.Installare la guida di espulsione (F) inserendo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
nei fori della macchina.

4.Applicare la piastra di connessione (D) alla


macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (I).
Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata.
5.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal
coperchio sinistro.

2. M48(H) (C)

3. (F) 2 (4)

4. 2 M420(I) (D)

5. (5)

2. (C) M48(H) .

3. (F) (4) 2
.

4. M4 20(I) 2
(D) .
.
5. (5) .

2. (C) M48(H)

3. (F) (4)2

4. (D) M420(I)2

5. (5)

8 9

E
E

10

6.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the


connector (7) on the machine.Hook the signal line wire (8) onto the hook (9).

7.Fit the connector cover (E) in the connecting


plate (D).Take care not to get the cable
pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as
shown above.Check that the signal line connector is covered by the connector cover (E).

8.Attach the interface cover (10)* on the


machine.
* The cover which was removed while installing the AK-730 or AK-731.

6.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal


(6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine.
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le
crochet (9).

7.Placer le cache de connecteur (E) dans la


plaque de connexion (D). Prendre soin ne
pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-le au point
indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (E).

8.Raccordez le capot d'interface (10)* la


machine.
* Le cache qui a t retir lors de l'installation de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.

6.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6)


al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el
cable de la lnea de seales (8) en el
enganche (9).

7.Acople la cubierta del conector (E) en la


placa de conexin (D). Tenga cuidado de
que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Conctela en el punto que se muestra
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubierta del conector (E).

8.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (10)* de la


mquina.
* La cubierta que se quit al instalar el kit
AK-730 o AK-731.

6.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung


(6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7).
Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8)
in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein.

7.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (E) in die


Verbindungsplatte (D) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der SteckerAbdeckung (E) abgedeckt ist.

8.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung


(10)* am Gert an.
* Die Abdeckung, die zur Installation des AK730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde

6.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale


(6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Agganciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio
(9).

7.Inserire il copri connettore (E) nella piastra di


connessione (D). Fare attenzione a non
impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione
sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (E).

8.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (10)* sulla


macchina.
* Il coperchio che stato rimosso per installare il kit AK-730 o AK-731

6. (6)
(7) (8) (9)

7. (E) (D)

(E)

8. (10)*
* AK-730 AK-731

6. (6)
(7) .
(8) (9) .

7. (E) (D)
. (E)
.
.
(E) .

8. (10)*
.
* AK-730 AK-731
.

6.(6)
(7) (8)

(9)

7.(E) (D)

(E)

8.(10)*

* AK-730 AK-731

13
14

12

16

13

16

15 D
14

14

9.Open the document finisher front cover


(12).Remove the screw (13).Pull the lock
frame (14) frontwards.

10.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate


(D) into the hole (16) on the document finisher. Connect the document finisher to the
machine.
* If the document finisher doesn't comply
with the reference of the height as
described on page 14, adjust the height.

11.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the


machine so that the connectors at the far
end are connected.
12.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
(13) removed in step 9.

9.Ouvrir le capot avant du finisseur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13). Tirer le cadre
de verrouillage (14) vers le bas.

10.Introduire l'ergot (15) sur la plaque de connexion (D) dans le trou (16) sur le finisseur
de document. Connecter le finisseur de document sur la machine.
* Si le finisseur de document n'est pas conforme la rfrence de hauteur comme
dcrit la page 14, ajustez la hauteur.

11.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage


(14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
12.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
la vis (13) dpose l'tape 9.

9.Abra la cubierta frontal del finalizador de


documentos (12). Quite el tornillo (13).
Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia delante.

10.Inserte la clavija (15) de la placa de conexin (D) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de documentos a la mquina.
* Si el finalizador de documentos no cumple
con la referencia de altura como se
describe en la pgina 14, ajuste la altura.

11.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el


marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
modo que se conecten los conectores en el
extremo ms lejano.
12.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 9.

9.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die Schraube (13).
Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung (14) nach vorne.

10.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindungsplatte (D) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers.
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert.
* Falls die Hhe des Finishers nicht mit der
auf Seite 14 in der Referenz beschriebenen Hhe bereinstimmt, justieren
Sie die Hhe.

11.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder


langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindungen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlossen werden.
12.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
der in Schritt 9 entfernten Schraube (13).

9.Aprire il coperchio frontale del finisher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13). Tirare in
avanti la frame di blocco (14).

10.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connessione (D) nel foro (16) del finisher documenti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla
macchina.
* Se il finisher documenti non conforme
con il riferimento altezza come descritto a
pagina 14, regolare l'altezza.

11.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)


nella macchina in modo che i connettori
all'estremit risultino collegati.
12.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 9.

9.12
13 14

10. (D) 15
16
P14

11.14

12. 9 1 (13)
(14)

9. (12)
. (13) .
(14) .

10. (D) (15)


(16) .
.
14

.

11.
(14)
.
12. 9 (13)1
(14) .

9.
(12) (13)

(14)

10. (D) (15)


(16)

P14

11.
(14)
12. 9
13
14

G
12

13.Install the staple cartridge (G).


14.Close the front cover (12).
Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
page 18.

13.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (G).


14.Refermer le capot avant (12).
Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agrafage page 18.

13.Instale el cartucho de grapas (G).


14.Cierre la cubierta frontal (12).
Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado
en la pgina 18.

13.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin


(G).
14.Schlieen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (12).
Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 18 fort.
13.Installare il contenitore punti (G).
14.Chiudere il pannello anteriore (12).
Proseguire con la regolazione della
posizione di pinzatura a pagina 18.

13. (G)
14. (12)
P18

13. (G) .
14. (12) .
18
.

13. (G)
14.(12)
P18

AK-735

H(M4x8)
E
Y

Supplied parts
A. Document finisher...................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1
C. Lower earth plate....................................... 1
D. Connecting plate........................................ 1
E. Connector cover ........................................ 1
F. Eject guide................................................. 1

G. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
H. M4 8 screw ............................................. 1
I. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
Y. Earth Plate ................................................. 1
Z. Cover ......................................................... 1

Pices fournies
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1
C. Plaque de terre infrieure .......................... 1
D. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
E. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1
F. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1

G. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1


H. Vis M4 8.................................................. 1
I. Vis M4 20................................................ 2
Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1
Z. Capot ......................................................... 1

Partes suministradas
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1
C. Placa de conexin a tierra inferior ............. 1
D. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
E. Cubierta del conector................................. 1
F. Gua de salida ........................................... 1

G. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1


H. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 1
I. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2
Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1
Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1

Enthaltene Teile
A. Finisher...................................................... 1
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1
C. Untere Grundplatte .................................... 1
D. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
E. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1
F. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1

G. Heftklammer-Magazin................................ 1
H. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 1
I. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1
Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1

Parti fornite
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1
C. Piastra di messa a terra inferiore............... 1
D. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
E. Copri connettore ........................................ 1
F. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1

G. Contenitore punti ....................................... 1


H. Vite M4 8................................................. 1
I. Vite M4 20............................................... 2
Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1
Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1

A. ...............................
B. .............................
C. ...........................
D. ...............................
E. ...........................

1
1
1
1
1

F. ..........................1
G. .............................1
H. M48 ............................1
I. M420 ...........................2
Y. ...............................1
Z. .................................1

A. .................................. 1
B. ........................................ 1
C. ........................................... 1
D. .............................................. 1
E. ........................................ 1

F. ....................................... 1
G. ............................... 1
H. M48......................................... 1
I. M420 ....................................... 2
Y. ............................................... 1
Z. .................................................. 1

A. ...........
B. ...........................
C. ...........................
D. ...............................
E. .....................
F. ..........................

G. ...............1
H. M48 ............................1
I. M420 ...........................2
Y. .............................1
Z. ...............................1

1
1
1
1
1
1

I(M4x20)
G

(C) and (Z) are not used.


Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

(C) et (Z) ne sont pas utiliss.


Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

(C) y (Z) no se utilizan.


Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

(C) und (Z) werden nicht bentigt.


Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

(C) e (Z) non sono utilizzati.


Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.

(C) (Z)

(C) (Z) .
,
.

(C), (Z)

A
1

NOTICE
The Attachment Kit (AK-735) must be installed
before the document finisher is installed.

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Install eject tray (B) to document finisher (A)


by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the back of
the tray in the holes (2) of the finisher lift
plate.

REMARQUE
Le kit de fixation (AK-735) doit tre install
avant d'installer le finisseur de document.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Installez le bac d'jection (B) sur le finisseur


de document (A) en insrant les 2 crochets
(1) au dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les
trous (2) du dispositif de levage du finisseur.

AVISO
El Kit de conexin (AK-735) se debe instalar
antes de instalarse el finalizador de documentos.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Instale la bandeja de salida (B) en el finalizador de documentos (A); para ello, inserte los
2 enganches (1) de la parte posterior de la
bandeja en los orificios (2) de la placa de
elevacin del finalizador.

ANMERKUNG
Das Attachment Kit (AK-735) muss installiert
werden, bevor der Finisher installiert wird.

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Setzen Sie das Ausgabefach (B) in den Finisher (A), indem Sie die 2 Haken (1) auf der
Rckseite des Fachs in die beiden Lcher
(2) der Finisher-Lift-Platte einsetzen.

AVVISO
Installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-735) prima
di collegare il finisher documenti.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Installare il vassoio di uscita (B) sul finisher


documenti (A) inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul
retro del vassoio nei fori (2) della piastra di
elevazione del finisher.

AK735)

1. (B) 2 (1)
(A) (2)


(AK-735) .

1. (B) (1) 2
(A) (2)
.

AK-735)

OFF

1. (B) (1)2
(A)
(2)

4
3
F

H(M4x8)

Y
2.Secure the earth plate (Y)* with M4 8
screws (H).
*The part was supplied with the AK-735.

3.Remove the machine interface cover (3).

4.Install the eject guide (F) by fitting the 2 eject


guide pins (4) into the holes in the machine.

2.Fixez la plaque de terre (Y)* avec des vis M4


8 (H).
*La pice a t fournie avec l'AK-735

3.Dposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la


machine.

4.Installer le guide d'jection (F) en insrant


les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
trous de la machine.

2.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (Y)* con


tornillos M4 8 (H).
*La pieza se proporcion con AK-735

3.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la


mquina.

4.Instale la gua de salida (F) encajando los 2


clavijas de la gua de salida (4) en los orificios de la mquina.

2.Befestigen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* mit den


M4 x 8 Schrauben (H).
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten.

3.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3)


des Gerts ab.

4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (F),


indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Auswerffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
einsetzen.

2.Fissare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* con


le viti M4 8 (H).
*Parte fornita con AK-735

3.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3)


della macchina.

4.Installare la guida di espulsione (F) inserendo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
nei fori della macchina.

2. M48(H) (Y)*
*AK-735

3. (3)

4. (F) 2 (4)

2.M4 8(H) (Y)*


.
*AK-735

3. (3) .

4. (F) (4) 2
.

2. (Y)* M48(H)
*AK-735

3.(3)

4. (F) (4)2

8 9

I(M4x20)
D
I(M4x20)

E
E

5
6

5.Attach the connecting plate (D) to the


machine using 2 M4 20 screws (I). Attach
it at the point as shown above.
6.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the
left cover.

7.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the


connector (7) on the machine. Hook the signal line wire (8) onto the hook (9).

8.Fit the connector cover (D) in the connecting


plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as
shown above.Check that the signal line connector is covered by the connector cover (E).

5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (D) la


machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (I). Raccordez-le au point indiqu ci-dessus.
6.Dposer le capot amovible (5) du capot
gauche.

7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal


(6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine.
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le
crochet (9).

8.Placer le cache de connecteur (D) dans la


plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin ne
pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-le au point
indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (E).

5.Fije la placa de conexin (D) a la mquina


mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (I). Conctela
en el punto que se muestra arriba.
6.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta
izquierda.

7.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6)


al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el
cable de la lnea de seales (8) en el
enganche (9).

8.Acople la cubierta del conector (D) en la


placa de conexin (E). Tenga cuidado de
que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Conctela en el punto que se muestra
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubierta del conector (E).

5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (D) mit 2


M4 20 Schrauben (I) am Gert an. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an.
6.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (5)
von der linken Abdeckung ab.

7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung


(6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7).
Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8)
in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein.

8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (D) in die


Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der SteckerAbdeckung (E) abgedeckt ist.

5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (D) alla


macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (I).
Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata.
6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal
coperchio sinistro.

7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale


(6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Agganciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio
(9).

8.Inserire il copri connettore (D) nella piastra di


connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione
sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (E).

5. 2 M420(I) (D)

6. (5)

7. (6)
(7) (8) (9)

8. (E) (D)

(E)

5. M4 20(I) 2
(D) .
.
6. (5) .

7. (6)
(7) .
(8) (9) .

8. (E) (D)
. (E)
.
.
(E) .

5. (D) M420(I)2

6. (5)

7.(6)
(7) (8)

(9)

8.(E) (D)

(E)

10

11

11-1

11-2

10
11-1
11

10
9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear
cover (11) .

10.Separate the rear cover(11) into the two covers(11-1,11-2).


The cover (11-2) is not used.

11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10)


removed in step 9.

9.Retirez la vis (10). Retire le capot arrire


(11).

10.Sparez le capot arrire (11) en deux capots


(11-1, 11-2).
Le capot (11-2) n'est pas utilis.

11.Installez le capot (11-1) l'aide de la vis (10)


dpose l'tape 9.

9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta posterior (11).

10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos


cubiertas (11-1, 11-2).
La cubierta (11-2) no se utiliza.

11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10)


quitado en el paso 9.

9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen


Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11).

10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei


Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf.
Die Abdeckung (11-2) wird nicht bentigt.

11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit der


in Schritt 9 entfernten Schrauben (10).

9.Togliere la vite (10). Rimuovere il coperchio


posteriore (11).

10.Separare il coperchio posteriore (11) in due


coperchi (11-1,11-2).
Il coperchio (11-2) non viene utilizzato.

11.Installare il coperchio (11-1) utilizzando la


vite (10) rimossa nel passo 9.

9.10 11

10. (11) 2 (11-1,11-2)


(11-2)

11. 9 (10)
(11-1)

9. (10) . (11)
.

10. (11) 2 (11-1, 11-2)


.
(11-2) .

11. 9 (10)
(11-1) .

9. (10) (11)

10.(11) 2 (11-1,11-2)

(11-2)

11. 9 (10) 11-1

11

13
14

12

16

13

16

15 D
14

14

12.Open the document finisher front cover


(12).Remove the screw (13). Pull the lock
frame (14) frontwards.

13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate


(D) into the hole (16) on the document finisher. Connect the document finisher to the
machine.
* If the document finisher doesn't comply
with the reference of the height as
described on page 14, adjust the height.

14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the


machine so that the connectors at the far
end are connected.
15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
(13) removed in step 12.

12.Ouvrir le capot avant du finisseur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13). Tirer le cadre
de verrouillage (14) vers le bas.

13.Introduire l'ergot (15) sur la plaque de connexion (D) dans le trou (16) sur le finisseur
de document. Connecter le finisseur de document sur la machine.
* Si le finisseur de document n'est pas conforme la rfrence de hauteur comme
dcrit la page 14, ajustez la hauteur.

14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage


(14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
la vis (13) dpose l'tape 12.

12.Abra la cubierta frontal del finalizador de


documentos (12). Quite el tornillo (13).
Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia delante.

13.Inserte la clavija (15) de la placa de conexin (D) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de documentos a la mquina.
* Si el finalizador de documentos no cumple
con la referencia de altura como se
describe en la pgina 14, ajuste la altura.

14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el


marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
modo que se conecten los conectores en el
extremo ms lejano.
15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 12.

12.ffnen Sie die vordere Abdeckung des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die Schraube (13).
Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung (14) nach vorne.

13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindungsplatte (D) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers.
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert.
* Falls die Hhe des Finishers nicht mit der
auf Seite 14 in der Referenz beschriebenen Hhe bereinstimmt, justieren
Sie die Hhe.

14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder


langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindungen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlossen werden.
15.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13).

12.Aprire il coperchio frontale del finisher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13). Tirare in
avanti la frame di blocco (14).

13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connessione (D) nel foro (16) del finisher documenti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla
macchina.
* Se il finisher documenti non conforme
con il riferimento altezza come descritto a
pagina 14, regolare l'altezza.

14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)


nella macchina in modo che i connettori
all'estremit risultino collegati.
15.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12.

12.12
13 14

13. (D) 15
16
P14

14.14

15. 12 1 13
14

12. (12)
. (13) .
(14) .

13. (D) (15)


(16) .
.
14

.

14.
(14)
.
15. 12 (13)1
(14) .

12.
(12) (13)

(14)

13. (D) (15)


(16)

P14

14.
(14)
15. 12 13

14

12

G
12

16.Install the staple cartridge (G).


17.Close the front cover (12).
Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
page 18.

16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (G).


17.Refermer le capot avant (12).
Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agrafage page 18.

16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (G).


17.Cierre la cubierta frontal (12).
Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado
en la pgina 18.

16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin


(G).
17.Schlieen Sie die vordere Abdeckung (12).
Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 18 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (G).
17.Chiudere il pannello anteriore (12).
Proseguire con la regolazione della
posizione di pinzatura a pagina 18.

16. (G)
17. (12)
P18

16. (G) .
17. (12) .
18
.

16. (G)
17.(12)
P18

13

15

16

15

21

b
a

a
b

16

21

Adjusting the height


1.Check that the respective heights of the pins
(15) on the connecting plate installed on the
machine and the connecting holes (16) on
the document finisher comply with the standards below.

Compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is within the height range (b) of the curved section (21).
Non-compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is extends beyond the height range (b) of the curved
section (21).
If the heights are non-compliant, use the procedure below to adjust the height.

Rglage de la hauteur
1.Vrifiez que les hauteurs respectives des
ergots (15) sur la plaque de connexion
installe sur la machine et les trous de connexion (16) sur le finisseur de document
sont conformes aux rfrences ci-dessous.

Bon : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) est dans les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
Mauvais : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) dpasse les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
Si la hauteur n'est pas conforme, l'ajuster en procdant comme indiqu ci-dessous.

Ajuste de la altura
1.Compruebe que las alturas correspondientes de las clavijas (15) de la placa de fijacin
instalados en la mquina y los orificios de
conexin (16) del finalizador de documentos
cumplen las referencias de abajo.

Cumple: el dimetro (a) de la clavija (15) est dentro del rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
(21).
No cumple: el dimetro (a) de la clavija (15) sobrepasa el rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
(21).
Si las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones, utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
altura.

Einstellen der Hhe


1.berprfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Ghe der
Stifte (15) der am Gert installierten Verbindungsplatte und Verbindungsffnungen (16)
des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen
Werten bereinstimmen.

Korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) befindet sich im Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts
(21).
Nicht korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) ragt ber den Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts (21) hinaus.
Falls die Hhen nicht korrekt sind, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.

Regolazione dell'altezza
1.Controllare che le rispettive altezze dei perni
(15) sulla piastra di connessione installata
sulla macchina e i fori di connessione (16)
sulla finisher documenti corrispondano ai
riferimenti mostrati sotto.

Conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) compreso nella gamma di altezza (b) della sezione curvata (21).
Non conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) si estende oltre la gamma di altezza (b) della sezione
curvata (21).
Se le altezze sono non corrispondenti, utilizzare la procedura riportata sotto per regolare l'altezza.

1. (15)
(16)

(15) a (21) b
(15) a (21) b

1. (15)
(16)
.

(15) a (21) b .
(15) a (21) b .
.

1. (15)

(16)

(15) (a) (21) (b)


(15) (a) (21) (b)

14

27

25

24

22

23

26

2.Remove each of the screws (22) and


remove the front foot cover (23) and rear
foot cover (24).

3.Remove the screw (25) to remove the spanner (26).


4.Loosen the 2 screws (27) on the front right
and on the rear right of the document finisher.

2.Dposer toutes les vis (22) puis le capot du


pied avant (23) et le capot du pied arrire
(24).

3.Dposer la vis (25) pour librer la cl (26).


4.Desserrer les 2 vis (27) du ct avant droit et
arrire droit du finisseur de document.

2.Quite cada uno de los tornillos (22) y quite la


cubierta de la pata frontal (23) y la cubierta
de la pata posterior (24).

3.Quite el tornillo (25) para extraer la llave


inglesa (26).
4.Afloje los 2 tornillos (27) en los lados derecho frontal y derecho posterior del finalizador de documentos.

2.Entfernen Sie smtliche Schrauben (22) und


nehmen Sie die Vorderfuabdeckung (23)
und die Hinterfuabdeckung (24).

3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (25), um den


Schlssel (26) abzunehmen
4.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (27) vorne rechts
und hinten rechts am Finisher.

2.Rimuovere ciascuna delle viti (22) e quindi


rimuovere la copertura del piede anteriore
(23) e la copertura del piede posteriore (24).

3.Rimuovere la vite (25) per rimuovere la chiave (26).


4.Allentare le 2 viti (27) sulla parte anteriore
destra e posteriore destra della finisher documenti.

2. 1 (22)
(23) (24)

3. (25) (26)
4. 2
(27)

2. (22) 1 (23),
(24) .

3. (25) 1 , (26)
.
4. (27)
2 .

2. (22) 1
(23)
(24)

3. (25)1 (26)

4.
(27) 2

15

28
29

30

26
5.Turn the adjustment bolts (28) with the spanner (26) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
lowers the document finisher.
6.Retighten each of the 2 screws (27) and replace the spanner (26).

7.If the distances between the document finisher and the machine (29, 30) are unequal,
use the procedure below to adjust the spacing.

5.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (28) avec la cl (26) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
document.
Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
6.Resserrer les 2 vis (27) et repositionner la cl (26) au mme endroit.

7.Si les distances entre le finisseur de document et la machine (29, 30) sont ingales,
rgler l'espacement en procdant de la
manire suivante.

5.Gire los pernos de ajuste (28) con la llave inglesa (26) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documentos.
6.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (27) y coloque la llave inglesa en su lugar (26).

7.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de documentos y la mquina (29, 30) no son
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento
para ajustar la separacin.

5.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (28) mit dem Schlssel (26), um die Hhe des Finishers
einzustellen.
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
6.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (27) wieder an und verstauen Sie den Schlssel (26) wieder.

7.Falls die Abstnde zwischen dem Finisher


und dem Gert (29, 30) ungleich sind, fhren
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um
den Abstand zu korrigieren.

5.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (28) con la chiave (26) per regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
6.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (27) e riporre la chiave (26).

7.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la


macchina (29, 30) sono diverse, attenersi
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la
spaziatura.

5. (26) (28)

6. 2 (27) (26)

7. (2930)

5. (26) (28) .
,
.
6. (27) 2 (26) .

7. (29, 30)

.

5.(26) (28)

6. (27) 2
(26)

7.
(2930)

16

31

32

8.Loosen the 2 screws (31) on the front left


and on the rear left of the document finisher.

9.Turn the adjustment bolts (32) with a Philips-head screwdriver to adjust the height of the document finisher.
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
lowers the document finisher.
10.Retighten each of the 2 screws (31).
11.Replace the front foot cover (23) and rear foot cover (24).

8.Desserrer les 2 vis (31) du ct avant


gauche et arrire gauche du finisseur de
document.

9.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (32) l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de document.
Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
10.Resserrer les 2 vis (31).
11.Reposer le capot du pied avant (23) et le capot du pied arrire (24).

8.Afloje los 2 tornillos (31) en los lados izquierdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finalizador de documentos.

9.Gire los pernos de ajuste (32) con un destornillador de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del
finalizador de documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documentos.
10.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (31).
11.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la pata frontal (23) y la cubierta de la pata posterior (24).

8.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (31) vorne links


und hinten links am Finisher.

9.Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (32) mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Hhe
des Finishers zu korrigieren.
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
10.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (31) nach.
11.Setzen Sie die Vorderfuabdeckung (23) und die Hinterfuabdeckung (24) wieder ein.

8.Allentare le 2 viti (31) sulla parte anteriore


sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher
documenti.

9.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (32) con un cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per regolare
l'altezza della finisher documenti.
Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
10.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (31).
11.Ricollocare la copertura del piede anteriore (23) e la copertura del piede posteriore (24).

8. 2
(31)

9. (32)

10. 2 (31)
11. (23) (24)

8. (31)
2 .

9. (32) .
,
.
10. (31) 2 .
11. (23), (24) .

8.
(31) 2

9. (32)

10. (31) 2
11. (23) (24)

17

78.5mm2.5

158mm2.5

Adjusting the stapling position


1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center.If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper

Ajustement de la position d'agrafage


1.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procder une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vrifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en dcalage. Si la position d'agrafage est dcale, la rgler en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier.

Ajuste de la posicin de grapado


1.Conecte el enchufe de la mquina al receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la mquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posicin de grapado est descentrada. Si la posicin de grapado est descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posicin.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am Gauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prfen Sie, ob die Heftposition auermittig ist. Falls die Heftposition auermittig ist, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte

Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura


1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalit di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro. Se la posizione di spillatura fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio

1.
2.2
3.
78.5mm 2.5mm


1. ON .
2. 2 .
3. . .
78.5mm 2.5mm

1. ON
2.2

3.

78.5mm 2.5mm

18

(a)

(b)

4.Set maintenance mode U246, select [Finisher] and [Staple HP].


5.Adjust the values.
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase
the setting value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b):
Decrease the setting value.

6.Perform a test copy.


7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the staple position is within the reference
value.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper

4.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner [Finisher] et [Staple


HP].
5.Rgler les valeurs.
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'avant de la machine (a): augmenter la valeur de rglage.
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'arrire de la machine (b): rduire
la valeur de rglage.

6.Effectuer une copie de test.


7.Recommencer les tapes 4 6 jusqu' ce que la position d'agrafe soit
conforme la valeur de rfrence
<Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
de papier.

4.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione [Finisher] y [Staple HP].


5.Ajuste los valores.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la
mquina (a): aumente el valor de configuracin.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte posterior de la mquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuracin.

6.Haga una copia de prueba.


7.Repita los pasos 4 a 6 hasta que la posicin de grapado se encuentre
dentro del valor de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del pape

4.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie [Finisher] und


[Staple HP].
5.Die Werte einstellen.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Gerts (a) abgestapelt wird: Vergrern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Gerts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.

6.Eine Testkopie erstellen.


7.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 6, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
des Bezugswerts liegt.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte

4.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare [Finisher] e


[Staple HP].
5.Regolare i valori.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della macchina (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della macchina (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.

6.Eseguire una copia di prova.


7.Ripetere i passi 4 to 6 finch la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
del valore di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio

4. U246 [Finisher][Staple HP]


5.
(a)
(b)

6.
7. 4 6
78.5mm 2.5mm

4. U246 [Finisher], [Staple HP]


.
5. .
(a) .
(b) .

6. .
7. 4 6 .
78.5mm 2.5mm

4. U246
[Finisher][Staple HP]

5.
(a)
(b)

6.
7. 4 6
78.5mm 2.5mm

19

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


4000-SHEETS FINISHER

English A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP, see Page 1 to Page 7.
For installation with a Printer, see Page 8 to Page 14.
References to medium-speed MFPs in this document denote 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 and 55/50 ppm color machines, and 35, 45 and 55 ppm
monochrome machines.
References to high-speed MFPs in this document denote 65/65 and 75/70 ppm color machines, and 65 and 80 ppm monochrome machines.
Franais Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction, voir Page 1 Page 7.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante, voir Page 8 Page 14.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP vitesse moyenne renvoient aux machines couleurs 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 et 55/50 ppm et
aux machines monochromes 35, 45 et 55 ppm.
Dans le prsent document, les rfrences aux MFP grande vitesse renvoient aux machines couleurs 65/65 et 75/70 ppm et aux machines
monochromes 65 et 80 ppm.
Espaol El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalacin con un MFP, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 7.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 8 a la 14
.
Las referencias a las MFP de velocidad media de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 y 55/50 ppm
y a las mquinas monocromticas de 35, 45 y 55 ppm.
Las referencias a las MFP de alta velocidad de este documento corresponden a las mquinas a color de 65/65 y 75/70 ppm y a las mquinas
Deutsch Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 7.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 8 bis 14.
Angaben fr MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 und 55/50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die
35, 45 und 55 ppm Monochrommaschinen.
Angaben fr MFP der Hochleistungsklasse in dieser Anleitung gelten fr die 65/65 und 75/70 ppm Vollfarbenkopierer sowie fr die 65 und 80 ppm
Monochrommaschinen.

Italiano Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP, vedere le pagine da 1 a 7.
Per l'installazione con una stampante, vedere le pagine da 8 a 14.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit media riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 30/30, 35/35, 45/45 e 55/50 ppm, e le
macchine monocromatiche 35, 45 e 55 ppm.
I riferimenti per le MFP a velocit alta riportati in questo documento indicano le macchine a colori 65/65 e 75/70 ppm, e le macchine monocromatiche 65 e 80 ppm.

MFP P1-P7
P8-P14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65 80

. .
MFP 1 ~7 .
8 ~14 .
MFP 30/30 , 35/35 , 45/45 , 55/50 , 35 , 45 , 55 .
MFP 65/65 , 75/70 , 65 , 80 .

MFP 1 7
8 14
MFP 30/30 35/35 45/45 55/50 35 45 55
MFP 65/65 75/70 65
80

I(M4x8)
B

D
J(M4x20)

C
E

Supplied parts
A. Document finisher...................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1
F. Connector cover ........................................ 1

G. Eject guide ................................................. 1


H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 2
J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

Pices fournies
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
F. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1

G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1


H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1
I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2
J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Partes suministradas
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
F. Cubierta del conector................................. 1

G. Gua de salida............................................ 1
H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1
I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2
J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Enthaltene Teile
A. Finisher...................................................... 1
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
F. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1

G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1
H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1
I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2
J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

Parti fornite
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1
C. Piastra di connessione per messa a terra . 1
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
F. Copri connettore ........................................ 1

G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1


H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1
I. Vite M4 8................................................. 2
J. Vite M4 20............................................... 2

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

A. ...............................
B. .............................
C. ...........................
D. .............................
E. ...............................

F. ...........................1
G. ..........................1
H. .............................1
I. M48 ............................2
J. M420 ...........................2

A. ........................................ 1
B. ........................................ 1
C. ........................................ 1
D. ........................................ 1
E. .............................................. 1

F. ........................................ 1
G. ....................................... 1
H. ............................... 1
I. M48......................................... 2
J. M420 ....................................... 2

,
.

A. ...........
B. ...........................
C. .........................
D. ...........................
E. ...............................
F. .....................

G. ..........................1
H. ...............1
I. M48 ............................2
J. M420 ...........................2

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1

NOTICE
When installing on a medium-speed MFP, the
Attachment Kit (AK-730 or AK-731) must be
installed before the document finisher is
installed.

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Install by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the


back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
the document finisher (A) lift.

REMARQUE
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante multifonction vitesse moyenne, le kit de fixation
(AK-730 ou AK-731) doit tre install avant
d'installer le finisseur de document.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Procder en insrant les 2 crochets (1) au


dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
du dispositif de levage du finisseur de document (A).

AVISO
Si se instala en un MFP de velocidad media, el
Kit de conexin (AK-730 o AK-731) se debe
instalar antes de instalarse el finalizador de documentos.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Instale insertando los 2 ganchos (1) de la


parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
en los orificios (2) del elevador del finalizador de documentos (A).

ANMERKUNG
Bei der Installation an einem mittelschnellen
MFP muss das Attachment-Kit (AK-730 oder
AK-731) vor dem Finisher installiert werden.

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (1) zur Befestigung


an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Finishers (A) ein.

AVVISO
Quando si installa un MFP di fascia media,
prima di installare il finisher documenti occorre
installare l'unit Attachment Kit (AK-730 o AK731).

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Installare inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul retro del


vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul sollevatore della finisher documenti (A).

MFP
AK-730 AK-731)

1. (B) 2 (1)
(A) (2)

MFP
(AK-730 AK-731)
.

1. (B) (1) 2
(A) (2)
.

MFP

AK-730 AK-731)

OFF

1. (B) (1)2
(A)
(2)

I(M4x8)

I(M4x8)
D
C
C

I(M4x8)

I(M4x8)

Installation on medium-speed MFPs


2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location
indicated by the "55" marking on the earth connection plate (C).
3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the center of the bottom of the
document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I).
Proceed to step 6.The procedure for installing the kit on a high-speed
MFP is described on the following steps.

Installation on high-speed MFPs


2.Using an M4 8 screw (I), secure the earth spring (D) in the location
indicated by the "65" marking on the earth connection plate (C).
3.Attach the earth connection plate (C) to the front side of the bottom of
the document finisher using an M4 8 screw (I).

Montage sur des MFP vitesse moyenne


2. En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la terre (D)

Montage sur des MFP grande vitesse


2.En procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (I), fixez le ressort de mise la
terre (D) l'endroit indiqu par la marque "65" sur la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C).
3.Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) l'avant de la
partie infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I).

l'endroit indiqu par la marque "55" sur la plaque de raccordement de mise la


terre (C).
3. Fixez la plaque de raccordement de mise la terre (C) au milieu de la partie
infrieure du finisseur de document avec une vis M4 8 (I).
Passer l'tape 6. La procdure d'installation du kit sur l'imprimante multifonction grande vitesse est dcrite dans les tapes suivantes.

Instalacin en las MFP de velocidad media


2. Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D) en el
lugar indicado por la marca "55" de la placa de conexin a tierra (C).

3. Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el centro de la parte inferior del


finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I).

Vaya al paso 6.En los siguientes pasos se describe el procedimiento


de instalacin del kit en un MFP de velocidad alta.
Installation an MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse
2. Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der mit
"55" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C).

3. Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) mittig an der Unterseite des Finishers an.
Gehen Sie weiter zu Schritt 6.Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation des Kits
an einem schnellen MFP wird in den folgenden Schritten beschrieben.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit media


2. Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D) nella
posizione indicata dal segno "55" sulla piastra di connessione per messa a terra
(C).
3. Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al centro in basso della
finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I).
Procedere al passo 6. La procedura di installazione del Kit su un MFP di fascia
alta descritta nelle pagine successive.

Instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


2.Con un tornillo M4 8 (I), asegure el resorte de conexin a tierra (D)
en el lugar indicado por la marca "65" de la placa de conexin a tierra
(C).
3.Fije la placa de conexin a tierra (C) en el lado frontal de la parte inferior del finalizador de documentos usando un tornillo M4 8 (I).
Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse
2.Befestigen Sie die Grundfeder (D) mit einer M4 8 Schraube (I) an der
mit "65" bezeichneten Stelle der Grundanschlussplatte (C).
3.Bringen Sie die Grundanschlussplatte (C) mit einer M4 8 Schraube
(I) vorne an der Unterseite des Finishers an.

Installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


2.Utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I), fissare la molla di messa a terra (D)
nella posizione indicata dal segno "65" sulla piastra di connessione
per messa a terra (C).
3.Applicare la piastra di connessione per messa a terra (C) al lato anteriore in basso della finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I).

MFP
2. (C) 55 1 M48(I)
(D)
3. M48(I) (C)
6 MFP

MFP
2. (C) 65 1 M48(I)
(D)
3. M48(I) (C)

MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I) 1

MFP
2. (C) 65 M48(I) 1
(D) .
3. M48(I) (C)
.

(D) .

3. M48(I) (C) .
6 . MFP
.
MFP
2. (C) 55 M48(I)
(D)
3. M48(I) (C)

6 MFP

MFP
2. (C) 65 M48(I)
(D)
3. M48(I) (C)

Only for installation on high-speed MFPs


If installing on a medium-speed MFP, proceed to step 6.
4.Remove the machine interface cover (3).
5.Remove the screw (4) and remove the controller cover (5).

6.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2


eject guide pins (6) into the holes in the
machine.

Pour montage sur des MFP grande vitesse uniquement


Si le montage est fait sur un MFP vitesse moyenne, passer l'tape 6.
4.Dposer le couvercle d'interface (3) de la machine.
5.Dposer la vis (4) puis le couvercle du contrleur (5).

6.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant


les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (6) dans les
trous de la machine.

Solo para la instalacin en las MFP de alta velocidad


Si se instala en una MFP de velocidad media, vaya al paso 6.
4.Quite la cubierta de la interfaz (3) de la mquina.
5.Quite el tornillo (4) y quite la cubierta del controlador (5).

6.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2


pasadores de la gua de salida (6) en los orificios de la mquina.

Nur bei Installation an MFP der Hochleistungsklasse


Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 6.
4.Nehmen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3) des Gerts ab.
5.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (4) und nehmen Sie die Controller-Abdeckung (5) ab.

6.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),


indem Sie die beiden Stifte (6) der Auswerffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
einsetzen.

Solo per l'installazione sulle MFP a velocit alta


Se si installa su una MFP a velocit media, procedere al passo 6.
4.Rimuovere la copertura di interfaccia (3) della macchina.
5.Rimuovere la vite (4) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio del controller (5).

6.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inserendo i 2 perni (6) della guida di espulsione
nei fori della macchina.

MFP
MFP 6
4. (3)
5. 1 (4) (5)

6. (G) 2 (6)

MFP
MFP 6 .
4. (3) .
5. (4) 1 (5) .

6. (G) (6) 2
.

MFP
MFP 6
4.(3)
5. (4) (5)

6. (G) (6)2

10 11

J(M4x20)
E
J(M4x20)

F
F

7
8
7.Attach the connecting plate (E) to the
machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J). Attach
them at the point as shown above.
Only if installing to a medium-speed MFP

7. Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J).Conctelas en el punto


que se muestra arriba.
Solo si instala en una MFP de velocidad media
Si se instala en una MFP de alta velocidad, vaya al
paso 9.
8. Quite la cubierta divisoria (7) de la cubierta izquierda.

7. Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2 M4 20


Schrauben (J) am Gert an.Bringen Sie diese an der in der
Abbildung gezeigten Stelle an.
Nur bei Installation eines MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse
Gehen Sie zur Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse weiter zu Schritt 9.
8. Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (7) von der linken
Abdeckung ab.

7. Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J).Fissare nella
posizione sopra indicata.
Solo se si installa ad un'MFP a velocit media
Se si installa su una MFP a velocit alta, procedere al
passo 9.
8. Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (7) dal coperchio sinistro.

7. 2 M420(J) (E)

MFP 9
8.7

7. M4 20(J) 2 (E)
.
. .
MFP
MFP 9
.
8. (7) .

7. (E) M420(J)2

MFP
MFP 9
8. (7)

10.Fit the connector cover (F) in the connecting


plate (E). Take care not to get the cable
pinched by objects. Attach it at the point as
shown above. Check that the signal line connector is covered by the connector cover (F).

9.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal


(8) sur le connecteur (9) de la machine.
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (10) sur le
crochet (11).

10.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la


plaque de connexion (E).Prendre soin ne
pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point
indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (F).

9.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (8)


al conector (9) de la mquina. Enganche el
cable de la lnea de seales (10) en el
enganche (11).

10.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la


placa de conexin (E).Tenga cuidado de que
el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Conctelas en el punto que se muestra
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubierta del conector (F).

9.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung


(8) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (9).
Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (10)
in den Befestigungshaken (11) ein.

10.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die


Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der SteckerAbdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.

9.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale


(8) al connettore (9) sulla periferica. Agganciare il cavo di linea del segnale (10) al gancio (11).

10.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di


connessione (E).Fare attenzione a non impigliare il cavo.Fissare nella posizione sopra
indicata.Controllare che il connettore della
linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri connettore (F).

9.8
9 1011

10. (F) (E)

(F)

9. (8) (9)
. (10)
(11) .

10. (F) (E)


. (F)
.
. (F)
.

9.(8)
(9) (10)
(11)

10.(F) (E)

(F)

8.Remove the breakaway cover (7) from the


left cover.
2 vis M4 20 (J).Raccordez-les au point indiqu ci-dessus.
Uniquement en cas d'installation sur un MFP vitesse
moyenne
Si le montage est fait sur un MFP grande vitesse, passer
l'tape 9.
8. Dposer le couvercle amovible (7) du couvercle gauche.

9.Connect the signal line connector (8) to the


connector (9) on the machine. Hook the signal line wire (10) onto the hook (11).

If installing on a high-speed MFP, proceed to step 9.

7. Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la machine l'aide de

14

12

13
14

11.Attach the interface cover (3)* on the machine.


* Installing with a high-speed MFP : the cover which was removed in step 4.
Installing with a medium-speed MFP : the cover which was removed while installing the AK-730
or AK-731.

12.Open the document finisher upper front


cover (12). Remove the screw (13). Pull the
lock frame (14) frontwards.

11.Raccordez le couvercle d'interface (3)* la machine.


* Installation avec une imprimante multifonction grande vitesse : le cache qui a t retir
l'tape 4.
Installation avec une imprimante multifonction moyenne vitesse : le cache qui a t retir lors
de l'installation de l'AK-730 ou AK-731.

12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finisseur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13).
Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le
bas.

11.Conecte la cubierta de interfaz (3)* de la mquina.


* Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad alta : la cubierta que se quit en el paso 4.
Instalacin con un MFP de velocidad media : la cubierta que se quit al instalar el kit AK-730 o
AK-731.

12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finalizador de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo
(13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia
delante.

11.Bringen Sie die Schnittstellenabdeckung (3)* am Gert an.


*Installation an einem MFP der Hochleistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die in Schritt 4 entfernt
wurde
Installation an einem MFP der mittleren Leistungsklasse : die Abdeckung, die zur Installation
des AK-730 oder AK-731 entfernt wurde

12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung


des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die
Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
(14) nach vorne.

11.Fissare la copertura di interfaccia (3)* sulla macchina.


* Installazione su un MFP di fascia alta : il coperchio che stato rimosso al punto 4
Installazione su un MFP di fascia media : il coperchio che stato rimosso per installare il kit AK730 o AK-731

12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del finisher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13).
Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14).

11. (3)*
* MFP : 4
MFP : AK-730 AK-731

12.12
13 14

11. (3)* .
* MFP : 4
MFP : AK-730 AK-731

12. (12) .
(13) . (14)
.

11.(3)*
* MFP : 4
MFP : AK-730 AK-731

12.
(12) (13)

(14)

13

16

15 E

14
H
12

13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate


(E) into the hole (16) on the document finisher. Connect the document finisher to the
machine.
* If you cannot connect the document finisher, adjust the height as described on page
15.

14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the


machine so that the connectors at the far
end are connected.
15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
(13) removed in step 12.

16.Install the staple cartridge (H).


17.Close the upper front cover (12).

13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de


connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finisseur de document. Connecter le finisseur de
document sur la machine.
* S'il s'avre impossible de connecter le
finisseur de document, en rgler la hauteur
comme dcrit en page 15.

14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage


(14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
la vis (13) dpose l'tape 12.

16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).


17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).

13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conexin (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de
documentos. Conecte el finalizador de documentos a la mquina.
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de documentos, ajuste la altura como se describe
en la pgina 15.

14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el


marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
modo que se conecten los conectores en el
extremo ms lejano.
15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 12.

16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).


17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).

13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindungsplatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers.
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert.
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen
knnen, sollten Sie die Hhe wie auf Seite
15 beschrieben einstellen.

14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder


langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindungen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlossen werden.
15.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13).

16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin


(H).
17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(12).

13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connessione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher documenti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla
macchina.
* Se non possibile collegare la finisher
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto
a pagina 15.

14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)


nella macchina in modo che i connettori
all'estremit risultino collegati.
15.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12.

16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).


17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
(12).

13. (E) 15
16
P15

14.14

15. 12 1 (13)
(14)

16. (H)
17. (12)

13. (E) (15)


(16) .
.
P15
.

14.
(14)
.
15. 12 131
14 .

16. (H) .
17. (12) .

13. (E) (15)


(16)


P15

14.
(14)
15. 12 13

14

16. (H)
17.(12)

Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on


page 20.

Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agrafage page 20.

Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado


en la pgina 20.

Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition


auf Seite 20 fort.

Proseguire con la regolazione della


posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.

P20

20
.

P20

AK-735

I(M4x8)
J(M4x20)

H
Z

Supplied parts
A. Document finisher...................................... 1
B. Eject tray.................................................... 1
C. Earth connection plate............................... 1
D. Earth spring ............................................... 1
E. Connecting plate........................................ 1
F. Connector cover ........................................ 1

G. Eject guide ................................................. 1


H. Staple cartridge.......................................... 1
I. M4 8 screw ............................................. 3
J. M4 20 screw ........................................... 2
K. Earth Plate ................................................. 1
L. Cover ......................................................... 1

Pices fournies
A. Finisseur de document .............................. 1
B. Bac d'jection ............................................ 1
C. Plaque de raccordement de mise la terre1
D. Ressort de mise la terre ......................... 1
E. Plaque de connexion ................................. 1
F. Cache de connecteur ................................ 1

G. Guide d'jection ......................................... 1


H. Cartouche dagrafes .................................. 1
I. Vis M4 8.................................................. 2
J. Vis M4 20................................................ 2
Y. Plaque de terre .......................................... 1
Z. Couvercle................................................... 1

Partes suministradas
A. Finalizador de documentos ....................... 1
B. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1
C. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1
D. Resorte de conexin a tierra ..................... 1
E. Placa de conexin ..................................... 1
F. Cubierta del conector................................. 1

G. Gua de salida............................................ 1
H. Cartucho de grapas ................................... 1
I. Tornillo M4 8 ........................................... 2
J. Tornillo M4 20 ......................................... 2
Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1
Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1

Enthaltene Teile
A. Finisher...................................................... 1
B. Auswerffach ............................................... 1
C. Grundanschlussplatte................................ 1
D. Grundfeder ................................................ 1
E. Verbindungsplatte...................................... 1
F. Stecker-Abdeckung ................................... 1

G. Ausgabefhrung ........................................ 1
H. Heftklammermagazin................................. 1
I. M4 8 Schraube ....................................... 2
J. M4 20 Schraube ..................................... 2
Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1
Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1

Parti fornite
A. Finisher documenti .................................... 1
B. Vassoio di espulsione ................................ 1
C. Piastra di connessione per messa a terra . 1
D. Molla di messa a terra ............................... 1
E. Piastra di connessione .............................. 1
F. Copri connettore ........................................ 1

G. Guida di espulsione ................................... 1


H. Contenitore punti ...................................... 1
I. Vite M4 8................................................. 2
J. Vite M4 20............................................... 2
Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1
Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1

A. ....................................
B. ..................................
C. ................................
D. ..................................
E. ....................................
F. ................................

G. ...............................
H. ..................................
I. M48 .................................
J. M420 ................................
Y. ....................................
Z. ......................................

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
2
2
1
1

A. .................................................1
B. .................................................1
C. .................................................1
D. .................................................1
E. .......................................................1
F. .................................................1

G. ................................................1
H. ........................................1
I. M48 .................................................2
J. M420................................................2
Y. ........................................................1
Z. ...........................................................1

A. ...........
B. ...........................
C. .........................
D. ...........................
E. ...............................
F. .....................

G. ..........................1
H. ...............1
I. M48 ............................2
J. M420 ...........................2
Y. .............................1
Z. ...............................1

1
1
1
1
1
1

C ,D and Z are not used.


Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.

C, D et Z ne sont pas utiliss.


Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

C, D y Z no se utilizan.
Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

C, D und Z werden nicht bentigt.


Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

C, D e Z non sono utilizzati.

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

CD Z

C, D Z .
,
.

C,D,Z

NOTICE
The Attachment Kit (AK-735) must be installed
before the document finisher is installed.

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Install by inserting the 2 hooks (1) on the


back of the eject tray (B) into the holes (2) in
the document finisher (A) lift.

REMARQUE
Le gabarit de fixation (AK-735) doit tre en
place avant de procder l'installation du finisseur de document.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Procder en insrant les 2 crochets (1) au


dos du bac d'jection (B) dans les trous (2)
du dispositif de levage du finisseur document (A).

AVISO
El Kit de instalacin (AK-735) debe instalarse
antes de instalar el finalizador de documentos.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Instale insertando los 2 ganchos (1) de la


parte posterior de la bandeja de salida (B)
en los orificios (2) del elevador del finalizador de documentos (A).

ANMERKUNG
Das Gertezusatz (AK-735) muss installiert
werden, bevor man den Finisher installiert.

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (1) zur Befestigung


an der Rckseite des Auswerffachs (B) in
die ffnungen (2) an der Hebeplatte des Finishers (A) ein.

AVVISO
Il kit accessorio (AK-735) deve essere installato
prima che sia installata la finisher documenti.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Installare inserendo i 2 ganci (1) sul retro del


vassoio di espulsione (B) nei fori (2) sul sollevatore della finisher documenti (A).

AK735)

1. (B) 2 (1)
(A) (2)

AK-735)
.

1. (B) (1) 2
(A) (2)
.

AK-735)

OFF

1. (B) (1)2
(A)
(2)

4
3
G

I(M4x8)

2.Attach the earth plate (Y)* to the center of


the bottom of the document finisher using an
M4 8 screw (I).
*The part was supplied with AK-735

3.Remove the cover (3) from the machine.

4.Install the eject guide (G) by fitting the 2


eject guide pins (4) into the holes in the
machine.

2.Raccordez la plaque de terre (Y)* en bas au


centre du finisseur de document en utilisant
une vis M4 8 (I).
*La pice a t fournie avec l'AK-735

3.Retirer le couvercle (3) de la machine.

4.Installer le guide d'jection (G) en insrant


les 2 ergots du guide d'jection (4) dans les
trous de la machine.

2.Conecte la placa de conexin a tierra (Y)* al


centro de la parte inferior del finalizador de
documentos con un tornillo M4 8 (I).
*La pieza se proporcion con AK-735

3.Quite la cubierta (3) de la mquina.

4.Instale la gua de salida (G) encajando los 2


pasadores de la gua de salida (4) en los orificios de la mquina.

2.Bringen Sie die Grundplatte (Y)* in der Mitte


des Bodens des Finishers mit den M4 x 8
Schrauben (I) an.
*Dieses Teil ist im AK-735 enthalten.

3.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (3) vom Gert.

4.Installieren Sie die Ausgabefhrung (G),


indem Sie die beiden Stifte (4) der Auswerffhrung in die Aufnahmen des Gerts
einsetzen.

2.Applicare la piastra di messa a terra (Y)* al


centro dell'area inferiore della finisher documenti utilizzando una vite M4 8 (I).
*Parte fornita con AK-735

3.Rimuovere il coperchio (3) dalla macchina.

4.Installare la guida di espulsione (G) inserendo i 2 perni (4) della guida di espulsione
nei fori della macchina.

2. M48(I) (Y)*

*AK-735

3.3

4. (G) 2 (4)

2. M4 8(I) (Y)*
.
*AK-735

3. (3) .

4. (G) (4) 2
.

2. M48(I) (Y)*

*AK-735

3.(3)

4. (G) (4)2

10

8 9

J(M4x20)
E
J(M4x20)

F
F

5
6

5.Attach the connecting plate (E) to the


machine using 2 M4 20 screws (J).Attach
them at the point as shown above.
6.Remove the breakaway cover (5) from the
left cover.

7.Connect the signal line connector (6) to the


connector (7) on the machine. Hook the signal line wire (8) onto the hook (9).

8.Fit the connector cover (F) in the connecting


plate (E).Take care not to get the cable
pinched by objects.Attach it at the point as
shown above.Check that the signal line connector is covered by the connector cover (F).

5.Fixez la plaque de connexion (E) la


machine l'aide de 2 vis M4 20 (J). Raccordez-les au point indiqu ci-dessus.
6.Dposer le couvercle amovible (5) du couvercle gauche.

7.Raccorder le connecteur de ligne de signal


(6) sur le connecteur (7) de la machine.
Accrocher le fil de ligne de signal (8) sur le
crochet (9).

8.Placer le cache de connecteur (F) dans la


plaque de connexion (E). Prendre soin ne
pas pincer le cble. Raccordez-les au point
indiqu ci-dessus. Vrifier que le connecteur
de ligne de signal est couvert par le cache
de connecteur (F).

5.Fije la placa de conexin (E) a la mquina


mediante 2 tornillos M4 20 (J). Conctelas
en el punto que se muestra arriba.
6.Quite la cubierta divisoria (5) de la cubierta
izquierda.

7.Conecte el conector de lnea de seales (6)


al conector (7) de la mquina. Enganche el
cable de la lnea de seales (8) en el
enganche (9).

8.Acople la cubierta del conector (F) en la


placa de conexin (E). Tenga cuidado de
que el cable no quede atrapado por objetos.
Conctelas en el punto que se muestra
arriba. Compruebe que el conector de la
lnea de seales quede cubierto por la cubierta del conector (F).

5.Bringen Sie die Verbindungsplatte (E) mit 2


M4 20 Schrauben (J) am Gert an. Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an.
6.Nehmen Sie die Ablsungsabdeckung (5)
von der linken Abdeckung ab.

7.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung


(6) mit dem Steckverbinder im Gert (7).
Hngen Sie das Kabel der Signalleitung (8)
in den Befestigungshaken (9) ein.

8.Setzen Sie die Stecker-Abdeckung (F) in die


Verbindungsplatte (E) ein. Stellen Sie sicher,
dass das Kabel nicht eingeklemmt wird.
Bringen Sie diese an der in der Abbildung
gezeigten Stelle an. berprfen Sie, ob der
Stecker der Signalleitung von der SteckerAbdeckung (F) abgedeckt ist.

5.Applicare la piastra di connessione (E) alla


macchina utilizzando le 2 viti M4 20 (J).
Fissare nella posizione sopra indicata.
6.Rimuovere il coperchio di distacco (5) dal
coperchio sinistro.

7.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale


(6) al connettore (7) sulla periferica. Agganciare il cavo di linea del segnale (8) al gancio
(9).

8.Inserire il copri connettore (F) nella piastra di


connessione (E). Fare attenzione a non
impigliare il cavo. Fissare nella posizione
sopra indicata. Controllare che il connettore
della linea del segnale sia coperto dal copri
connettore (F).

5. 2 M420(J) (E)

6.5

7. (6)
(7) (8) (9)

8. (F) (E)

(F)

5. M4 20(J) 2
(E) .
.
6. (5) .

7. (6) (7)
. (8) (9)
.

8. (F) (E)
. (F)
.
. (F)
.

5. (E) M420(J)2

6. (5)

7.(6)
(7) (8)

(9)

8.(F) (E)

(F)

11

10

11

11-2

10
11-1
11-1

11

9.Remove the screw (10).Remove the rear


cover (11) .

10.Separate the rear cover (11) into the two


covers(11-1,11-2).
The cover(11-2) isnot used.

11.Install the cover (11-1) using the screw (10).

9.Retirez la vis (10). Retire le capot arrire


(11).

10.Sparez le couvercle arrire (11) en deux


couvercles (11-1, 11-2).
Le couvercle (11-2) n'est pas utilis.

11.Installez le couvercle (11-1) l'aide de la vis


(10).

9.Quite el tornillo (10). Quite la cubierta posterior (11).

10.Separe la cubierta posterior (11) en las dos


cubiertas (11-1, 11-2).
La cubierta (11-2) no se utiliza.

11.Instale la cubierta (11-1) con un tornillo (10).

9.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (10). Entfernen


Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11).

10.Teilen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (11) in zwei


Abdeckungen (11-1, 11-2) auf.
Die Abdeckung (11-2) wird nicht bentigt.

11.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (11-1) mit den


Schrauben (10).

9.Togliere la vite (10). Rimuovere il coperchio


posteriore (11).

10.Separare il coperchio posteriore (11) in due


coperchi (11-1,11-2).
Il coperchio (11-2) non viene utilizzato.

11.Installare il coperchio (11-1) utilizzando la


vite (10).

9.10 11

10. (11) 2 (11-1,11-2)


(11-2)

11. (10) (11-1)

9. (10) . (11)
.

10. (11) 2 (11-1, 11-2)


.
(11-2) .

11. (10) (11-1)


.

9. (10) (11)

10.(11) 2 (11-1,11-2)

(11-2)

11. (10) 11-1

12

13
14

12

13

14

16
14

E
15

12.Open the document finisher upper front


cover (12). Remove the screw (13).Pull the
lock frame (14) frontwards.

13.Insert the pin (15) on the connecting plate


(E) into the hole (16) on the document finisher.Connect the document finisher to the
machine.
* If you cannot connect the document finisher, adjust the height as described on page
15.

14.Slowly push the lock frame (14) fully into the


machine so that the connectors at the far
end are connected.
15.Secure the lock frame (14) using the screw
(13) removed in step 12.

12.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur du finisseur de document (12). Retirez la vis (13).
Tirer le cadre de verrouillage (14) vers le
bas.

13.Introduire la broche (15) sur la plaque de


connexion (E) dans le trou (16) sur le finisseur de document.Connecter le finisseur de
document sur la machine.
* S'il s'avre impossible de connecter le
finisseur de document, en rgler la hauteur
comme dcrit en page 15.

14.Pousser doucement le cadre de verrouillage


(14) fond dans la machine de sorte que les
connecteurs l'extrmit soient raccords.
15.Fixez le bti de verrouillage (14) l'aide de
la vis (13) dpose l'tape 12.

12.Abra la cubierta frontal superior del finalizador de documentos (12). Quite el tornillo
(13). Empuje el marco de cierre (14) hacia
delante.

13.Inserte el pasador (15) de la placa de conexin (E) en el orificio (16) del finalizador de
documentos.Conecte el finalizador de documentos a la mquina.
* Si no puede conectar el finalizador de documentos, ajuste la altura como se describe
en la pgina 15.

14.Empuje lentamente y hasta el fondo el


marco del cierre (14) hacia la mquina de
modo que se conecten los conectores en el
extremo ms lejano.
15.Asegure la carcasa de bloqueo (14) por
medio del tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 12.

12.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung


des Finishers (12). Entfernen Sie die
Schraube (13). Ziehen Sie die Verriegelung
(14) nach vorne.

13.Setzen Sie den Stift (15) der Verbindungsplatte (E) in die ffnung (16) des Finishers.
Verbinden Sie den Finisher mit dem Gert.
* Falls Sie den Finisher nicht anschlieen
knnen, sollten Sie die Hhe wie auf Seite
15 beschrieben einstellen.

14.Schieben Sie die Verriegelung (14) wieder


langsam ins Gert, so dass die Verbindungen am anderen Ende des Gerts geschlossen werden.
15.Befestigen Sie den Fixierrahmen (14) mit
der in Schritt 12 entfernten Schraube (13).

12.Aprire il coperchio frontale superiore del finisher documenti (12). Togliere la vite (13).
Tirare in avanti la frame di blocco (14).

13.Inserire il perno (15) della piastra di connessione (E) nel foro (16) del finisher documenti. Collegare il finisher documenti alla
macchina.
* Se non possibile collegare la finisher
documenti, regolare laltezza come descritto
a pagina 15.

14.Spingere lentamente la frame di blocco (14)


nella macchina in modo che i connettori
all'estremit risultino collegati.
15.Fissare il telaio di bloccaggio (14) utilizzando
la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 12.

12.12
13 14

13. (E) 15
16
P15

14.14

15. 12 1 (13)
(14)

12. (12) .
(13) . (14)
.

13. (E) (15)


(16) .
.
P15
.

14.
(14)
.
15. 12 131
14 .

12.
(12) (13)

(14)

13. (E) (15)


(16)


P15

14.
(14)
15. 12 13

14

13

H
12
16.Install the staple cartridge (H).
17.Close the upper front cover (12).
Proceed to adjusting the stapling position on
page 20.

16.Installer la cartouche d'agrafes (H).


17.Refermer le couvercle avant suprieur (12).
Passez l'ajustement de la position d'agrafage page 20.

16.Instale el cartucho de grapas (H).


17.Cierre la cubierta frontal superior (12).
Proceda al ajuste de la posicin de grapado
en la pgina 20.

16.Installieren Sie das Heftklammer-Magazin


(H).
17.Schlieen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung
(12).
Fahren Sie mit der Justage der Heftposition
auf Seite 20 fort.
16.Installare il contenitore punti (H).
17.Chiudere il coperchio superiore anteriore
(12).
Proseguire con la regolazione della
posizione di pinzatura a pagina 20.
16. (H)
17. (12)
P20

16. (H) .
17. (12) .
20
.

16. (H)
17.(12)
P20

14

15

b
16

15

21

Adjusting the height


1.Check that the respective heights of the pins
(15) on the connecting plate installed on the
machine and the connecting holes (16) on
the document finisher comply with the references below.

Compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is within the height range (b) of the curved section (21).
Non-compliant: The diameter (a) of the pin (15) is extends beyond the height range (b) of the curved
section (21).
If the heights are non-compliant, use the procedure below to adjust the height.

Rglage de la hauteur
1.Vrifiez que les hauteurs respectives des
ergots (15) sur la plaque de connexion
installe sur la machine et les trous de connexion (16) sur le finisseur de document
sont conformes aux rfrences ci-dessous.

Bon : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) est dans les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
Mauvais : Le diamtre (a) de l'ergot (15) dpasse les limites de hauteur (b) de la partie courbe (21).
Si la hauteur n'est pas conforme, l'ajuster en procdant comme indiqu ci-dessous.

Ajuste de la altura
1.Compruebe que las alturas correspondientes de los pasadores (15) de la placa de
fijacin instalados en la mquina y los orificios de conexin (16) del finalizador de documentos cumplen las referencias de abajo.

Cumple: el dimetro (a) del pasador (15) est dentro del rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
(21).
No cumple: el dimetro (a) del pasador (15) sobrepasa el rango de altura (b) de la seccin curvada
(21).
Si las alturas no cumplen con las especificaciones, utilice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
altura.

Einstellen der Hhe


1.berprfen Sie, dass die jeweilige Hhe der
Stifte (15) der am Gert installierten Verbindungsplatte und Verbindungsffnungen (16)
des Finishers mit den unten angegebenen
Werten bereinstimmen.

Korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) befindet sich im Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts
(21).
Nicht korrekt: Der Durchmesser (a) des Stifts (15) ragt ber den Hhenbereich (b) des Kurvenabschnitts (21) hinaus.
Falls die Hhen nicht korrekt sind, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.

Regolazione dell'altezza
1.Controllare che le rispettive altezze dei perni
(15) sulla piastra di connessione installata
sulla macchina e i fori di connessione (16)
sulla finisher documenti corrispondano ai
riferimenti mostrati sotto.

Conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) compreso nella gamma di altezza (b) della sezione curvata (21).
Non conformit: Il diametro (a) del perno (15) si estende oltre la gamma di altezza (b) della sezione
curvata (21).
Se le altezze sono non corrispondenti, utilizzare la procedura riportata sotto per regolare l'altezza.

1. (15)
(16)

(15) (a) (21) (b)


(15) (a) (21) (b)

1. (15)
(16)
.

(15) (a) (21) (b) .


(15) (a) (21) (b) .
.

1. (15)

(16)

(15) (a) (21) (b)


(15) (a) (21) (b)

15

24

25
26

12
22

26
23

24

25

27

26

24

2.Open the upper front cover (12) of the document finisher.


3.Remove the screw (22) and open the lower
front cover (23).

4.Remove the 2 screws (24) and remove the


foot cover (25).

5.Remove the 3 screws (26) and remove the


lower rear cover (27).

2.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur (12) du


finisseur de document.
3.Dposer la vis (22) et ouvrir le couvercle
avant infrieur (23).

4.Dposer les 2 vis (24) puis le couvercle du


pied (25).

5.Dposer les 3 vis (26) puis le couvercle arrire infrieur (27).

2.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (12) del


finalizador de documentos.
3.Quite el tornillo (22) y abra la cubierta frontal
inferior (23).

4.Quite los 2 tornillos (24) y quite la cubierta


de la pata (25).

5.Quite los 3 tornillos (26) y quite la cubierta


posterior inferior (27).

2.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung


(12) des Finishers.
3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (22) und ffnen
Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (23).

4.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (24) und


nehmen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) ab.

5.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (26) und


nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung
(27) ab.

2.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (12)


della finisher documenti.
3.Rimuovere la vite (22) ed aprire il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (23).

4.Rimuovere le 2 viti (24) e quindi rimuovere la


copertura del piede (25).

5.Rimuovere le 3 viti (26) e quindi rimuovere il


coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).

2. (12)
3. 1 (22) (23)

4. 2 (24) (25)

5. 3 (26) (27)

2. (12) .
3. (22) 1 (23)
.

4. (24) 2 , (25)
.

5. (26) 3 , (27)
.

2.
(12)
3. (22)1 (23)

4. (24)2 (25)

5. (26)3 (27)

16

31

29

28

30
29

6.Remove the screw (28) to remove the spanner (29).


7.Loosen the 2 screws (30) on the front right
and on the rear right of the document finisher.

8.Turn the adjustment bolts (31) with the spanner (29) to adjust the height of the document finisher.
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise
lowers the document finisher.
9.Retighten each of the 2 screws (30) and replace the spanner (29).

6.Dposer la vis (28) pour librer la cl (29).


7.Desserrer les 2 vis (30) du ct avant droit et
arrire droit du finisseur de document.

8.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (31) avec la cl (29) pour ajuster la hauteur du finisseur de
document.
Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens horloger pour lever le finisseur de document, et dans
le sens contraire au sens horloger pour le descendre.
9.Resserrer les 2 vis (30) et repositionner la cl (29) au mme endroit.

6.Quite el tornillo (28) para extraer la llave


inglesa (29).
7.Afloje los 2 tornillos (30) en los lados derecho frontal y derecho posterior del finalizador de documentos.

8.Gire los pernos de ajuste (31) con la llave inglesa (29) para ajustar la altura del finalizador de
documentos.
Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documentos.
9.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (30) y coloque la llave inglesa en su lugar (29).

6.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (28), um den


Schlssel (29) abzunehmen
7.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) vorne rechts
und hinten rechts am Finisher.

8.Drehen Sie die Einstellschrauben (31) mit dem Schlssel (29), um die Hhe des Finishers
einzustellen.
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend er
durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird.
9.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (30) wieder an und verstauen Sie den Schlssel (29) wieder.

6.Rimuovere la vite (28) per rimuovere la chiave (29).


7.Allentare le 2 viti (30) sulla parte anteriore
destra e posteriore destra della finisher documenti.

8.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (31) con la chiave (29) per regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finisher documenti.
9.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (30) e riporre la chiave (29).

6. (28) (29)
7. 2
(30)

8. (29) (31)

9. 2 (30) (29)

6. (28) 1 , (29)
.
7. (30) 2
.

8. (29) (31) .
,
.
9. (30) 2 (29) .

6. (28)1 (29)

7.
(30) 2

8.(29) (31)

9. (30) 2
(29)

17

32

35

33

34
10.If the distances between the document finisher and the machine (32, 33) are unequal,
use the procedure below to adjust the spacing.

11.Loosen the 2 screws (34) on the front left


and on the rear left of the document finisher.

12.Turn the adjustment bolts (35) with a Philipshead screwdriver to adjust the height of the
document finisher.
Turning the adjustment bolt clockwise lifts
the document finisher, and turning it counterclockwise lowers the document finisher.

10.Si les distances entre le finisseur de document et la machine (32, 33) sont ingales,
rgler l'espacement en procdant de la
manire suivante.

11.Desserrer les 2 vis (34) du ct avant


gauche et arrire gauche du finisseur de
document.

12.Faire tourner les boulons de rglage (35)


l'aide d'un tournevis cruciforme pour ajuster
la hauteur du finisseur de document.
Tourner le boulon de rglage dans le sens
horloger pour lever le finisseur de document,
et dans le sens contraire au sens horloger
pour le descendre.

10.Si las distancias entre el finalizador de documentos y la mquina (32, 33) no son
iguales, utilice el siguiente procedimiento
para ajustar la separacin.

11.Afloje los 2 tornillos (34) en los lados izquierdo frontal e izquierdo posterior del finalizador de documentos.

12. Gire los pernos de ajuste (35) con un destornillador

10.Falls die Abstnde zwischen dem Finisher


und dem Gert (32, 33) ungleich sind, fhren
Sie die unten angegebenen Schritte aus, um
den Abstand zu korrigieren.

11.Lsen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) vorne links


und hinten links am Finisher.

12. Stellen Sie die Einstellschrauben (35) mit einem

10.Se le distanze tra la finisher documenti e la


macchina (32, 33) sono diverse, attenersi
alla sottostante procedura per regolare la
spaziatura.

11.Allentare le 2 viti (34) sulla parte anteriore


sinistra e posteriore sinistra della finisher
documenti.

12.Ruotare i bulloni di regolazione (35) con un


cacciavite con testa a croce tipo Philips per
regolare l'altezza della finisher documenti.
Ruotando il bullone di regolazione in senso
orario si solleva la finisher documenti, mentre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa
la finisher documenti.

10. (3233)

11. 2
(34)

12. (35)

10. (32, 33)



.

11. (34) 2
.

12. (35)
.

,
.

10.
3233

11.
(34) 2

12. (35)

18

de cabeza Philips para ajustar la altura del finalizador de documentos.


Al girar el perno de ajuste en la direccin de las
manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de
documentos y al girar en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documentos.

Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher ein, um die Hhe


des Finishers zu korrigieren.
Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Finisher angehoben, whrend
er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn
abgesenkt wird.

13.Retighten each of the 2 screws (34).


14.Reinstall the foot cover (25) and lower rear
cover (27).

13.Resserrer les 2 vis (34).


14.Reposer le couvercle du pied (25) et le couvercle arrire infrieur (27).

13.Vuelva a apretar los 2 tornillos (34).


14.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (25) y
la cubierta posterior inferior (27).

13.Ziehen Sie die 2 Schrauben (34) nach.


14.Setzen Sie die Fuabdeckung (25) und die
untere hintere Abdeckung (27) wieder ein.

13.Ristringere ciascuna delle 2 viti (34).


14.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (25) e il
coperchio inferiore posteriore (27).

13. 2 (34)
14. (25)
(27)

13. (34) 2 .
14. (25), (27)
.

13. (34) 2
14.(25)
(27)

19

78.5mm2.5

158mm2.5

Adjusting the stapling position


1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center. If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper

Ajustement de la position d'agrafage


1.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procder une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vrifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en dcalage.Si la position d'agrafage est dcale, la rgler en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier.

Ajuste de la posicin de grapado


1.Conecte el enchufe de la mquina al receptculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la mquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posicin de grapado est descentrada.Si la posicin de grapado est descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posicin.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gert am Hauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prfen Sie, ob die Heftposition auermittig ist.Falls die Heftposition auermittig ist, mssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte

Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura


1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere linterruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalit di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro.Se la posizione di spillatura fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio

1.
2.2
3.
78.5mm 2.5mm


1. ON .
2. 2 .
3. . .
78.5mm 2.5mm

1. ON
2.2

3.

78.5mm 2.5mm

20

(a)

(b)

4.Set maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Staple HP.


5.Adjust the values.
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase
the setting value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b):
Decrease the setting value.

6.Perform a test copy.


7.Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the staple position is within the reference
value.
<Reference value> 78.5 mm 2.5 mm from the center of the paper

4.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Staple


HP.
5.Rgler les valeurs.
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'avant de la machine (a): augmenter la valeur de rglage.
Si le papier est agraf trop prs de l'arrire de la machine (b): rduire
la valeur de rglage.

6.Effectuer une copie de test.


7.Recommencer les tapes 4 6 jusqu' ce que la position d'agrafe soit
conforme la valeur de rfrence
<Valeur de rfrence> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
de papier.

4.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Staple


HP.
5.Ajuste los valores.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la
mquina (a): aumente el valor de configuracin.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte posterior de la mquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuracin.

6.Haga una copia de prueba.


7.Repita los pasos 4 a 6 hasta que la posicin de grapado se encuentre
dentro del valor de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm del centro del papel

4.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und


Staple HP.
5.Die Werte einstellen.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Gerts (a) abgestapelt wird: Vergrern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Gerts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.

6.Eine Testkopie erstellen.


7.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 6, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
des Bezugswerts liegt.
<Bezugswert> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte

4.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Staple HP.


5.Regolare i valori.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della macchina (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della macchina (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.

6.Eseguire una copia di prova.


7.Ripetere i passi 4 to 6 finch la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
del valore di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> 78,5 mm 2,5 mm dal centro del foglio

4. U246 FinisherStaple HP
5.
(a)
(b)

6.
7. 4 6
78.5mm 2.5mm

4. U246 Finisher, Staple HP


.
5. .
(a) .
(b) .

6. .
7. 4 6 .
78.5mm 2.5mm

4. U246 Finisher
Staple HP

5.
(a)
(b)

6.
7. 4 6
78.5mm 2.5mm

21

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT

A
D
B

English
Supplied parts
A. Paper conveying unit ................................. 1
B. Pin ............................................................. 2
C. Pin ............................................................. 1
D. Cover ......................................................... 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Unit de transport du papier ...................... 1
B. Goupille ..................................................... 2
C. Goupille ..................................................... 1
D. Couvercle .................................................. 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Unidad de transporte de papel .................. 1
B. Pasador ..................................................... 2
C. Pasador ..................................................... 1
D. Cubierta ..................................................... 1
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Papierfhrung ............................................ 1
B. Stift............................................................. 2
C. Stift............................................................. 1
D. Abdeckung................................................. 1
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Unit di trasporto carta .............................. 1
B. Perno ......................................................... 2
C. Perno ......................................................... 1
D. Coperchio .................................................. 1

A. .........................
B. .................................
C. .................................
D. .................................

1
2
1
1

A. ........................................ 1
B. ..................................................... 2
C. ..................................................... 1
D. .................................................. 1

A. .........................
B. .................................
C. .................................
D. ...............................

1
2
1
1

Y
Z

Y. Earth Plate ................................................. 1


Z. Cover ......................................................... 1
The procedures for installing Y and Z are
described in the installation guide for the finisher.

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

Y. Prise de terre ............................................. 1


Z. Couvercle................................................... 1
Les procdures pour installer Y et Z sont
dcrites dans le manuel d'installation du module
de finition.

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Y. Placa de conexin a tierra ......................... 1


Z. Cubierta ..................................................... 1
Los procedimientos de instalacin de Y y Z se
describen en la gua de instalacin del finalizador.

Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Y. Grundplatte ................................................ 1
Z. Abdeckung................................................. 1
Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation von Y und
Z wird in der Installationsanweisung des Finishers beschrieben.

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

Y. Piastra di messa a terra............................. 1


Z. Coperchio .................................................. 1
Le procedure di installazione Y e Z sono
descritte nella guida di installazione del finisher.

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

Y. ...............................1
Z. .................................1
Y Z

Y. ............................................... 1
Z. .................................................. 1
Y Z
.

,
.

Y. .............................1
Z. ...............................1
Y,Z

2
1

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Install the cover (D) to the actuator (1).


2.Place the paper conveying unit (A) on top of the machine and slide to the right.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Installer le couvercle (D) sur l'actionneur (1).


2.Placer l'unit de transport du papier (A) au-dessus de la machine et la faire coulisser vers la
droite.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Instale la cubierta (D) en el accionador (1).


2.Coloque la unidad de transporte de papel (A) sobre la parte superior de la mquina y deslcela
hacia la derecha.

Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Installieren Sie die Abdeckung (D) ber den Sensor (1).


2.Legen Sie die Papierfhrung (A) oben auf das Gert und schieben diese nach rechts.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Installare il coperchio (D) sull'attuatore (1).


2.Posizionare l'unit di trasporto carta (A) sulla parte superiore della macchina e inserirla sulla destra.

1. D (1)
2. A

1. (D) (1) .
2. (A) .

OFF

1. (D) (1)
2. (A)

4
2

3.Secure the paper conveying unit (A) using


the three pins (B,C).

4.Install the eject guide (2) by fitting the two


eject guide projections (3) into the holes of
the paper conveying unit (A).

5.Remove the cover (4) from the machine.


The cover (4) is not used.

Eject guide (2) is supplied with the finisher.


DF-770(B): Eject guide (G)
DF-790(B): Eject guide (H)

3.Fixer l'unit de transport du papier (A)


l'aide des trois goupilles (B,C).

4.Installer le guide d'jection (2) en montant


les deux projections du guide d'jection (3)
dans les trous de l'unit de transport du
papier (A).

5.Retirer le couvercle (4) de la machine.


Le capot (4) n'est pas utilis.

Le guide d'jection (2) est fourni avec le module de


finition.
DF-770(B): Guide d'jection (G)
DF-790(B): Guide d'jection (H)

3.Fije la unidad de transporte de papel (A) con


los tres pasadores (B,C).

4.Instale la gua de salida (2) ajustando las


dos proyecciones (3) de la gua de salida en
los orificios de la unidad de transporte de
papel (A).

5.Retire la cubierta (4) de la mquina.


La cubierta (4) no se utiliza.

La gua de salida (2) se proporciona con el finalizador.


DF-770(B): Gua de salida (G)
DF-790(B): Gua de salida (H)

3.Sichern Sie die Papiertransporteinheit (A)


mit drei Stiften (B,C).

4.Installieren Sie die Auswerffhrung (2),


indem Sie die beiden Nasen (3) der Auswerffhrung in die Aufnahmen der Papierfhrung (A) einsetzen.

5.Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (4) vom Gert.


Die Abdeckung (4) wird nicht bentigt.

Die Auswerffhrung (2) wird mit dem Finisher


geliefert.
DF-770(B): Auswerffhrung (G)
DF-790(B): Auswerffhrung (H)

3.Fissare l'unit di trasporto carta (A) utilizzando i tre perni (B,C).

4.Installare la guida di espulsione (2) fissando


le due protezioni (3) nei fori dell'unit di trasporto carta (A).

5.Rimuovere il coperchio (4) dalla macchina.


Il coperchio (4) non viene utilizzato.

La guida di espulsione (2) fornita con il finisher.


DF-770(B): Guida di espulsione (G)
DF-790(B): Guida di espulsione (H)

3. B,C
A

4. (2) 2 (3)
(A)

5. 4
4

(2)
DF-770(B): (G)
DF-790(B): (H)

3. (B,C) (A)
.

4. (3) 2
(A)
(2) .

5. (4) .
(4) .

(2) .
DF-770(B): (G)
DF-790(B): (H)

3. (B,C) 3 (A)

4. (2) (3) 2
(A)
(2)

DF-770(B): (G)
DF-790(B): (H)

5. (4)
(4)

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


CENTER-FOLDING UNIT

G
C

I
B

H
E

A
D

O
Q

E. Front side cover ......................................... 1


F. Rear side cover.......................................... 1
G. Output stock tray........................................ 1
H. Output tray ................................................. 1
I. Relay paper conveying unit ....................... 1
J. Pin.............................................................. 1
K. M4 8 screw ............................................11

L. M4 10 screw (black)................................ 2
M. M4 12 screw ........................................... 4
N. Lock plate .................................................. 2
O. Binding band.............................................. 1
P. Guide ......................................................... 1
Q. D7 label...................................................... 1
R. Operation label .......................................... 1

E. Capot latral avant..................................... 1


F. Capot latral arrire ................................... 1
G. Plateau de sortie du papier........................ 1
H. Plateau de sortie........................................ 1
I. Unit de transport du papier de relais........ 1
J. Goupille...................................................... 1
K. Vis M4 8.................................................11

L. Vis M4 10 (noire) .................................... 2


M. Vis M4 12................................................ 4
N. Plaque de verrouillage ............................... 2
O. Collier de fixation ....................................... 1
P. Guide ......................................................... 1
Q. tiquette D7 ............................................... 1
R. tiquette de fonctionnement ...................... 1

E. Cubierta lateral frontal ............................... 1


F. Cubierta lateral posterior ........................... 1
G. Bandeja de recoleccin de papel de salida... 1
H. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1
I. Unidad de transporte de papel por relevador ... 1
J. Pasador ..................................................... 1
K. Tornillo M4 8 ..........................................11

L. Tornillo M4 10 (negro)............................. 2
M. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 4
N. Placa de cierre........................................... 2
O. Correa de sujecin..................................... 1
P. Gua ........................................................... 1
Q. Etiqueta D7 ................................................ 1
R. Etiqueta de funcionamiento ....................... 1

E. Vordere Seitenabdeckung ......................... 1


F. Hintere Seitenabdeckung .......................... 1
G. Ausgabestapelfach .................................... 1
H. Ausgabefach.............................................. 1
I. Eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit................. 1
J. Stift............................................................. 1
K. M4 8 Schraube ......................................11

L. M4 10 Schraube (schwarz)..................... 2
M. M4 12 Schraube ..................................... 4
N. Sperrplatte ................................................. 2
O. Schellenband ............................................. 1
P. Fhrung ..................................................... 1
Q. D7 Aufkleber .............................................. 1
R. Bedienungsaufkleber ................................. 1

E. Coperchio laterale anteriore ...................... 1


F. Coperchio laterale posteriore..................... 1
G. Vassoio di uscita stoccaggio ...................... 1
H. Vassoio di uscita ........................................ 1
I. Unit relay di trasporto carta...................... 1
J. Perno ......................................................... 1
K. Vite M4 8................................................11

L. Vite M4 10 (nera) .................................... 2


M. Vite M4 12............................................... 4
N. Piastra di bloccaggio.................................. 2
O. Fascetta di legatura ................................... 1
P. Guida ......................................................... 1
Q. Etichetta D7 ............................................... 1
R. Etichetta di operazione .............................. 1

1
1
1
1

E. ...........................1
F. ...........................1
G. .............................1
H. .............................1
I. .........................1
J. .................................1
K. M48 ...........................11

L. M410 ......................2
M. M412 ...........................4
N. ...............................2
O. ...............................1
P. .................................1
Q. D7 ...............................1
R. .............................1

........................................ 1
.............................................. 1
.............................................. 1
........................................ 1

E. .................................... 1
F. .................................... 1
G. .................................. 1
H. ........................................ 1
I. .................................. 1
J. ..................................................... 1
K. M48....................................... 11

L. M410............................... 2
M. M412 ....................................... 4
N. ..................................... 2
O. ........................................... 1
P. ............................................... 1
Q. D7 ............................................. 1
R. ............................................ 1

E. .......................1
F. .......................1
G. ...................1
H. ...........................1
I. .....................1
J. .................................1
K. M48 ...........................11

L. M410
.......................2
M. M412 ...........................4
N. .......................2
O. ...........................1
P. ...............................1
Q. D7 .............................1
R. ...........................1

English
Supplied parts
A. Center-Folding unit .................................... 1
B. Front rail .................................................... 1
C. Rear rail ..................................................... 1
D. Output stopper........................................... 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Plieuse....................................................... 1
B. Glissire avant........................................... 1
C. Glissire arrire ......................................... 1
D. Bute de sortie .......................................... 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Unidad de plegado .................................... 1
B. Carril frontal ............................................... 1
C. Carril posterior ........................................... 1
D. Tope de salida ........................................... 1
Deutsch
Gelieferte Teile
A. Mittenfalteinheit ......................................... 1
B. Vordere Schiene ........................................ 1
C. Hintere Schiene ......................................... 1
D. Ausgabeanschlag ...................................... 1
Italiano
Parti di fornitura
A. Unit di piegatura centrale......................... 1
B. Rotaia anteriore ......................................... 1
C. Rotaia posteriore ....................................... 1
D. Fermo di uscita .......................................... 1

A. ...................
B. .............................
C. .............................
D. .............................

A.
B.
C.
D.

A. .......................
B. .............................
C. .............................
D. .......................

1
1
1
1

1
2
3

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


material from supplied parts.

Procedure
Before installing the center-folding unit, turn the
MFPs main power switch off and unplug the
power cable from the power supply.
Install the document finisher, and then install the
center-folding unit.

1.Open the upper front cover (1) of the document finisher.


2.Remove the screw (2) and open the lower
front cover (3).
(NOTICE)
Discard the screw (2) and do not fasten the
lower front cover (3).

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

Procdure
Avant dinstaller la plieuse mettre linterrupteur
dalimentation principal du MFP hors tension et
dbrancher le cble dalimentation de la prise
de courant.
Installer le finisseur de document, puis installer
la plieuse.

1.Ouvrir le couvercle avant suprieur (1) du


retoucheur de document.
2.Dposer la vis (2) et ouvrir le couvercle
avant infrieur (3).
(AVIS)
Jeter la vis (2) et ne pas fixer le capot infrieur avant (3).

Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o


material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

Procedimiento
Antes de instalar la unidad de plegado, desconecte el interruptor de alimentacin principal de
la MFP y desenchufe el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de corriente.
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y
luego instale la unidad de plegado.

1.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (1) del finalizador de documentos.


2.Quite el tornillo (2) y abra la cubierta frontal
inferior (3).
(AVISO)
Descarte el tornillo (2) y no ajuste la cubierta
frontal inferior (3).

Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungsmaterial vollstndig von den mitgelieferten


Teilen.

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an.

1.ffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (1)


des Dokument-Finishers.
2.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und ffnen Sie
die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
(HINWEIS)
Entsorgen Sie die Schraube (2) und befestigen
Sie nicht die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).

Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il


materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.

Procedura
Prima di installare lunit di piegatura centrale,
assicurarsi che linterruttore principale della
fotocopiatrice sia spento e che il cavo di alimentazione non sia inserito nella presa.
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
allinstallazione dellunit di piegatura centrale.

1.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (1)


della finitrice di documenti.
2.Rimuovere la vite (2) ed aprire il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (3).
(NOTIFICA)
Eliminare le viti (2) e non fissare il coperchio
inferiore anteriore (3).

MFP

1.1
2. 1 23
( )
23

,
.

MFP
OFF
.
,
.

1. (1) .
2. (2) 1 (3)
.
( )
(2) (3)
.

MFP
OFF

1.
(1)
2. (2)1 (3)

(2) (3)

8
8

3.Remove the 2 screws (4) and remove the


foot cover (5).

4.Remove the 3 screws (6) and remove the


lower rear cover (7).

5.Remove 2 screws (8) and remove the lower


middle cover (9).

3.Dposer les 2 vis (4) puis le couvercle du


pied (5).

4.Dposer les 3 vis (6) puis le couvercle arrire infrieur (7).

5.Dposer les 2 vis (8) et le couvercle intermdiaire infrieur (9).

3.Quite los 2 tornillos (4) y quite la cubierta de


la pata (5).

4.Quite los 3 tornillos (6) y quite la cubierta


posterior inferior (7).

5.Quite los 2 tornillos (8) y quite la cubierta


intermedia inferior (9).

3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (4) und


nehmen Sie die Fuabdeckung (5) ab.

4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (6) und


nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung
(7) ab.

5.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (8) und


nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung
(9) ab.

3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (4) e quindi rimuovere la


copertura del piede (5).

4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (6) e quindi rimuovere il


coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).

5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (8) e quindi rimuovere il


pannello centrale inferiore (9).

3. 2 45

4. 3 67

5. 2 (8) (9)

3. (4) 2 , (5)
.

4. (6) 3 , (7)
.

5. (8) 2 (9)
.

3. (4)2 (5)

4. (6)3 (7)

5. (8)2 (9)

12
M

10

M
C

13

N
B

11

6.Install the lock plates (N) on the front and


rear supports using an M4 8 screw (K)
each.

7.Place the hook (11) of the front rail (B) on the


notch (10) at the front of the document finisher, at the same time inserting the projection (13) on the front rail (B) in the hole (12)
in the document finisher.
8.Fix the front rail (B) using 2 M4 12 screws
(M).

9.Install the rear rail (C) at the rear of the document finisher using 2 M4 12 screws (M) in
the same way.

6.Monter les plaques de verrouillage (N) sur


les supports avant et arrire en procdant
l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (K) dans les deux
cas.

7.Placer le crochet (11) de la glissire avant


(B) dans l'encoche (10) l'avant du retoucheur de document tout en insrant la saillie
(13) de la glisire avant (B) dans le trou (12)
du retoucheur de document.
8.Fixer la glissire avant (B) l'aide de 2 vis
M4 12 (M).

9.Monter la glissire arrire (C) au dos du


retoucheur de document en procdant de la
mme faon et l'aide de 2 vis M4 12 (M).

6.Instale las placas de cierre (N) en los


soportes frontal y posterior usando un tornillo M4 8 (K) en cada uno.

7.Coloque el gancho (11) del carril frontal (B)


en la muesca (10) de la parte frontal del finalizador de documentos al mismo tiempo que
inserta el resalto (13) del carril frontal (B) en
el orificio (12) del finalizador de documentos.
8.Fije el carril frontal (B) usando 2 tornillos M4
12 (M).

9.Instale el carril posterior (C) en la parte posterior del finalizador de documentos usando
2 tornillos M4 12 (M) de la misma forma.

6.Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten (N) an den


vorderen und hinteren Sttzen mit jeweils
einer M4 8 Schraube (K).

7. Setzen Sie den Haken (11) der vorderen Schiene

9.Montieren Sie die hintere Schiene (C) auf


gleiche Weise mit 2 M4 12 Schrauben (M)
an der Rckseite des Dokument-Finishers.

6.Installare le piastre di bloccaggio (N) sui


supporti anteriore e posteriore utilizzando
una vite M4 8 (K) ciascuna.

7.Posizionare il gancio (11) della rotaia anteriore


(B) sull'incavo (10) alla parte anteriore della finitrice di documenti, contemporaneamente
inserire la la sporgenza (13) sulla rotaia anteriore (B) nel foro (12) nella finitrice di documenti.
8.Fissare la rotaia anteriore (B) utilizzando 2
viti M4 12 (M).

9.Installare la rotaia posteriore (C) alla parte


posteriore della finitrice di documenti utilizzando 2 viti M4 12 (M) alla stessa maniera.

6. 1 M48(K) (N)

7. (B) (11)
(10) (B)
(13) (12)
8. 2 M412(M)
(B)

9. 2 M412(M)
(C)

6. (N)
M48(K) 1 .

7. (10)
(B) (11)
(12) (B) (13)
.
8. M412(M) 2 (B)
.

9. M412(M) 2
(C) .

6. (N)
M48(K) 1

7.
(10) (B) (11)

(12) (B) (13)

8. M412(M)2 (B)

9. M412(M)2
(C)

(B) in die Aussparung (10) vorne am DokumentFinisher ein, und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vorsprung (13) an der vorderen Schiene (B) in die ffnung (12) des Dokument-Finishers ein.
8. Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene (B) mit den 2
M4 12 Schrauben (M).

17
14
A
18
15

16

10.Place the left rollers (14) at the front and rear of the center-folding unit (A) on the tracks (15) on the inner sides of the rails, and roll in the direction
shown. The middle rollers (16) will roll onto the rails.
11.Insert the center-folding unit (A) into the document finisher along the rails.
(NOTICE)
Insert without removing the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17). (The fixing tape (18) is removed at step 15)

10.Disposer les rouleaux gauche (14) l'avant et l'arrire de la plieuse (A) sur les voies (15) de ct interne des glissires et faire rouler dans la direction indique. Les rouleaux intermdiaires (16) vont se placer d'eux-mmes sur les glissires.
11.Insrer la plieuse (A) dans le retoucheur de document le long des glissires.
(AVIS)
Insrer sans enlever la bande adhsive de fixation (18) pour le guide cble (17). (La bande adhsive de fixation (18) est enleve l'tape 15).

10.Coloque los rodillos izquierdos (14) en las partes frontal y posterior de la unidad de plegado (A) en las pistas (15) de los lados internos de los carriles
y hgalos rodar en la direccin de la ilustracin. Los rodillos intermedios (16) rodarn sobre los carriles.
11.Inserte la unidad de plegado (A) en el finalizador de documentos a lo largo de los carriles.
(AVISO)
Inserte sin quitar la cinta de fijacin (18) de la gua para el cable (17). (La cinta de fijacin (18) se quita en el paso 15.)

10.Setzen Sie die linken Rollen (14) an der Vorderseite und Rckseite der Mittenfalteinheit (A) auf die Bahnen (15) an den Innenseiten der Schienen, und
rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung. Die mittleren Rollen (16) rollen nun auf die Schienen.
11.Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) entlang den Schienen in den Dokument-Finisher ein.
(HINWEIS)
Schieben Sie sie ein, ohne das Klebeband (18) fr die Kabelfhrung (17) zu entfernen. (Das Klebeband (18) wird bei Schritt 15 entfernt.)

10.Posizionare i rulli di sinistra (14) alla parte anteriore e posteriore dell'unit di piegatura centrale (A) sulle piste (15) sui lati interni delle rotaie, e farli
scorrere nella direzione mostrata. I rulli intermedi (16) scorreranno sulle rotaie.
11.Inserire l'unit di piegatura centrale (A) nella finitrice di documenti lungo le rotaie.
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire senza rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17). (Il nastro di fissaggio (18) viene rimosso al punto 15)

10. (A) (14) (15) (16)


11. (A)
( )
1718 15 18

10. (A) (14) (15) . (16)


.
11. (A) .
( )
(17) (18) . (18) 15 .

10. (A) (14)


(15)
(16)

11. (A)

(17) (18)
(18) 15

20

20

22

23

K
21

19

21
I

12.Release the lock lever (19) and pull out the


center-folding unit (A) to the left of the document finisher.

13.Align the holes (21) in the relay paper conveying unit (I) with the 2 projections (20) on the document finisher. Install so that the lip (22) on the top frame of the relay paper conveying unit rests on
the document finishers frame (23).
14.Install the relay paper conveying unit (I) using 4 M4 8 screws (K).

12.Librer le levier de verrouillage (19) et sortir


la plieuse (A) par la gauche du retoucheur
de document.

13.Aligner les trous (21) de l'unit de transport de relais (I) avec les 2 saillies (20) du retoucheur de
document. Procder de sorte que la lvre (22) du chssis suprieur de l'unit de transport de
relais repose sur le chssis du retoucheur de document (23).
14.Installer l'unit de transport de relais (I) l'aide de 4 vis M4 8 (K).

12.Libere la palanca de bloqueo (19) y extraiga


la unidad de plegado (A) hacia la izquierda
del finalizador de documentos.

13.Alinee los orificios (21) de la unidad de transporte de papel (I) con los dos resaltos (20) del finalizador de documentos. Instale de forma tal que el reborde (22) del marco superior de la unidad
de transporte de papel apoye en el marco del finalizador de documentos (23).
14.Instale la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I) usando 4 tornillos M4 8 (K).

12.Lsen Sie den Verriegelungshebel (19) und


ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) zur linken
Seite des Dokument-Finishers heraus.

13.Richten Sie die ffnungen (21) der eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit (I) auf die 2 Vorsprnge (20)
des Dokument-Finishers aus. Montieren Sie so, dass die Lippe (22) am oberen Rahmen der
eingesetzten Papierfrdereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument-Finishers (23) ruht.
14.Montieren Sie die eingesetzte Papierfrdereinheit (I) mit 4 M4 8 Schrauben (K).

12.Rilasciare la leva di blocco (19) e quindi


estrarre l'unit di piegatura centrale (A) alla
sinistra della finitrice di documenti.

13.Allineare i fori (21) nell'unit relay di trasporto carta (I) con le 2 sporgenze (20) sulla finitrice di
documenti. Installare in modo che il bordo (22) sulla struttura superiore dell'unit relay di trasporto carta rimanga sulla struttura (23) della finitrice di documenti.
14.Installare l'unit relay di trasporto carta (I) utilizzando 4 viti M4 8 (K).

12.19 -
A

13. 2 (20) (I) (21)


(22) (23)
14. 4 M48(K) (I)

12. (19) (A)


.

13. (20) 2 (I) (21) .


(22) (23) .
14. M48(K) 4 (I) .

12.(19)
(A)

13. (20)2 (I) (21)


(22)
(23)
14. M48(K)4
(I)

25
J

17

24

17

A
15.Remove the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17) and insert the pin (J) into the wire guide (17), with the 2 projections (24) on either side of the frame
(25).
(NOTICE)
Insert the pin (J) to keep wires in the wire guide (17).
16.Screw the pin (J) into the document finisher to anchor the wire guide (17).

15.Enlever la bande adhsive de fixation (18) du guide cble (17) et insrer la goupille (J) dans le guide cble (17) avec les 2 saillies (24) de chaque ct
du bti (25).
(AVIS)
Insrer la goupille (J) pour que les cbles demeurent dans le guide cble (17).
16.Visser la goupille (J) dans le retoucheur de document pour fixer le guide cble (17) en place.

15.Quite la cinta de fijacin (18) de la gua para el cable (17) e inserte el pasador (J) en la gua para el cable (17) con los 2 resaltos (24) a cada lado del
marco (25).
(AVISO)
Inserte el pasador (J) para mantener los cables en la gua para el cable (17).
16.Atornille el pasador (J) en el finalizador de documentos para anclar la gua para el cable (17).

15.Entfernen Sie das Klebeband (18) fr die Kabelfhrung (17) und stecken Sie die Rndelschraube (J) in die Kabelfhrung (17), wobei der Rahmen (25)
zwischen den 2 Vorsprngen (24) liegen muss.
(HINWEIS)
Stecken Sie die Rndelschraube (J) ein, um die Kabel in der Kabelfhrung (17) zu halten.
16.Schrauben Sie die Rndelschraube (J) in den Dokument-Finisher, um die Kabelfhrung (17) zu verankern.

15.Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17) e quindi inserire il perno (J) nella guida cavi (17), con le 2 sporgenze (24) su ciascun lato
della struttura (25).
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire il perno (J) per mantenere i cavi nella guida cavi (17).
16.Avvitare il perno (J) nella finitrice di documenti per ancorare la guida cavi (17).

15.171825 2 24 1 J17
( )
(J) (17) (17)
16. (J) (17)

15. (17) (18) (24) 2 (25) (J) 1 (17)


.
( )
(J) (17) .
16. (J) (17) .

15. (17) (18)


(24)2 (25)
(J)1 (17)

(J) (17)
16. (J) (17)

31

28
30

O
27

26

29

32
31

P
32

17.Install the ground wire (26) to the frame


using an M4 8 screw (K).
18.Install the binding band (O) to the wires and
fit the band into the frame.

19.Plug the 2 connectors (27) into the connectors (28) on the document finisher.
20.Plug the connector (29) into the connector
(30) on the relay paper conveying unit (I).

21.Align holes (32) at 2 locations in the guide


(P) with projections (31) on the document
finisher.
22.Install the guide (P) on the document finisher
using 4 M4 8 screws (K).

17.Fixer le cble de terre (26) au chssis en


procdant l'aide d'une vis M4 8 (K).
18.Monter le collier de fixation (O) sur les
cbles et assujettir le collier au chssis.

19.Enficher les 2 connecteurs (27) dans les


connecteurs (28) du retoucheur de document.
20.Enficher le connecteur (29) dans le connecteur (30) de l'unit de transport de relais
(I).

21.Aligner les trous (32) en 2 endroits du guide


(P) avec les saillies (31) du retoucheur de
document.
22.Monter le guide (P) sur le retoucheur de document l'aide de 4 vis M4 8 (K).

17.Instale el cable de conexin a tierra (26) en


el marco usando un tornillo M4 8 (K).
18.Instale la correa de sujecin (O) en los
cables y coloque la correa en el marco.

19.Enchufe los 2 conectores (27) en los conectores (28) del finalizador de documentos.
20.Enchufe el conector (29) en el conector (30)
de la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I).

21.Alinee los orificios (32) de los 2 lugares de la


gua (P) con los resaltos (31) del finalizador
de documentos.
22.Instale la gua (P) en el finalizador de documentos usando 4 tornillos M4 8 (K).

17.Montieren Sie das Massekabel (26) mit einer


M4 8 Schraube (K) an den Rahmen.
18.Bringen Sie das Schellenband (O) an den
Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den
Rahmen ein.

19.Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder (27) mit


den Steckverbindern (28) des DokumentFinishers.
20.Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder (29) mit
dem Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten
Papierfrdereinheit (I).

21.Richten Sie die ffnungen (32) an 2 Stellen


in der Fhrung (P) auf die Vorsprnge (31)
des Dokument-Finishers aus.
22.Montieren Sie die Fhrung (P) mit 4 M4 8
Schrauben (K) am Dokument-Finisher.

17.Installare il cavo di terra (26) alla struttura


utilizzando una vite M4 8 (K).
18.Installare la fascetta di legatura (O) ai cavi e
quindi fissare la fascetta nella struttura.

19.Inserire i 2 connettori (27) nei connettori (28)


sulla finitrice di documenti.
20.Inserire il connettore (29) nel connettore (30)
sull'unit relay di trasporto carta (I).

21.Allineare i fori (32) alle 2 posizioni nella


guida (P) con le sporgenze (31) sulla finitrice
di documenti.
22.Installare la guida (P) sulla finitrice di documenti utilizzando 4 viti M4 8 (K).

17. M48(K) (26)

18. (O) (O)

19. 2 (27) (28)

20. (29) (H)


(30)

21. 2 (31) (P)


(32)
22. 4 M48(K) (P)

17. M48(K) (26)


.
18. (O)
(O) .

19. (27) 2
(28) .
20. (29) (I)
(30) .

21. (31) 2 (P)


(32) .
22. M48(K) 4
(P) .

17. M48(K) (26)

18. (O)
(O)

19.(27)2
(28)
20.(29) (I)
(30)

21. (31)2
(P) (32)
22. M48(K)4
(P)

33
F

37

L
35
E
L

36

34

23.Open the eject cover (33).


24.Engage the projection (34) and hook (35) on the front side cover (E)
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the front side
cover (E) using an M4 10 screw (black) (L).

25.Engage the projection (36) and hook (37) on the rear side cover (F)
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the rear side
cover (F) using an M4 10 screw (black) (L).

23.Ouvrir le capot d'jection (33).


24.Engager la saillie (34) et le crochet (35) du capot latral avant (E) dans
la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latral avant (E) l'aide
d'une vis M4 10 (noire) (L).

25.Engager la saillie (36) et le crochet (37) du capot latral arrire (F)


dans la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latral arrire (F)
l'aide d'une vis M4 10 (noire) (L).

23.Abra la cubierta de expulsin (33).


24.Enganche el resalto (34) y el gancho (35) de la cubierta lateral frontal
(E) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalacin de la cubierta
lateral frontal (E) usando un tornillo M4 10 (negro) (L).

25.Enganche el resalto (36) y el gancho (37) de la cubierta lateral posterior (F) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalacin de la
cubierta lateral posterior (F) usando un tornillo M4 10 (negro) (L).

23.ffnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).


24.Hngen Sie den Vorsprung (34) und den Haken (35) der vorderen
Seitenabdeckung (E) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
vordere Seitenabdeckung (E) mit einer M4 10 Schraube (schwarz)
(L).

25.Hngen Sie den Vorsprung (36) und den Haken (37) der hinteren
Seitenabdeckung (F) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
hintere Seitenabdeckung (F) mit einer M4 10 Schraube (schwarz)
(L).

23.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione carta (33).


24.Innestare la sporgenza (34) e il gancio (35) sul coperchio laterale anteriore (E) con l'unit di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione
del coperchio laterale anteriore (E) utilizzando una vite M4 10 (nera)
(L).

25.Innestare la sporgenza (36) e il gancio (37) sul coperchio laterale posteriore (F) con l'unit di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione del coperchio laterale posteriore (F) utilizzando una vite M4 10
(nera) (L).

23. (33)
24. (E) (34) (35)
(A) 1 M410(L) (E)

25. (F) (36) (37)


(A) 1 M410(L) (F)

23. (33) .
24. (E) (34) (35) (A)
. M410(L) 1 (E)
.

25. (F) (36) (37) (A)


. M410(L) 1 (F)
.

23.(33)
24. (E) (34) (35)

(A)
M410(L)1 (E)

25. (F) (36) (37)


(A)
M410(L)1
(F)

33
A

38
H
G

38

26.Insert the 2 pins (38) on the output tray (H) in the holes in the center-folding unit (A) to install the
tray.
27.Install the output stock tray (G) on the output tray (H).
28.Close the eject cover (33).

26.Insrer les 2 goupilles (38) du plateau de sortie (H) dans les trous de la plieuse (A) pour installer
le plateau.
27.Installer la bute de sortie du papier (G) sur le plateau de sortie (H).
28.Fermer le capot d'jection (33).

26.Inserte los 2 pasadores (38) de la bandeja de salida (H) en los orificios de la unidad de plegado
(A) para instalar la bandeja.
27.Instale la bandeja de recoleccin de papel de salida (G) en la bandeja de salida (H).
28.Cierre la cubierta de expulsin (33).

26.Stecken Sie die 2 Rndelschrauben (38) des Ausgabefachs (H) in die ffnungen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein, um das Fach zu installieren.
27.Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach (G) am Ausgabefach (H) an.
28.Schlieen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).

26.Inserire i 2 perni (38) sul vassoio di uscita (H) nei fori sull'unit di piegatura centrale (A) per installare il vassoio.
27.Installare il vassoio di uscita stoccaggio (G) sul vassoio di uscita (H).
28.Chiudere il coperchio di esplusione carta (33).

26. (H) 2 (38) (A) (H)


27. (G) (H)
28. (33)

26. (H) (38) 2 (A) (H)


.
27. (G) (H) .
28. (33) .

26. (H) (38)2 (A)


(H)

27. (G) (H)


28.(33)

10

41

40

40

39

39

Q
D

29.Insert the 2 projections (39) on the back of the output stopper (D) in the portions circled on the
center-folding unit (A).
Fit the 3 hooks (40) on the output stopper (D) in the holes (41) in the center-folding unit (A).

30.Adhere the D7 label (Q) at the location


shown in the figure.

29.Insrer les 2 saillies (39) au dos de la bute de sortie (D) dans les parties encercles de la
plieuse (A).
Assujettir les 3 crochets (40) de la bute de sortie (D) dans les trous (41) de la plieuse (A).

30.Apposer l'tiquette D7 (Q) l'endroit repr


sur la figure.

29.Inserte los 2 resaltos (39) de la parte posterior del tope de salida (D) en las porciones marcadas
con un crculo de la unidad de plegado (A).
Coloque los 3 ganchos (40) del tope de salida (D) en los orificios (41) de la unidad de plegado
(A).

30.Adhiera la etiqueta D7 (Q) en el lugar que se


muestra en la ilustracin.

29.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprnge (39) auf der Rckseite des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die mit Kreis
bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein.
Setzen Sie die 3 Haken (40) des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die ffnungen (41) der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein.

30.Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber (Q) an der


abgebildeten Stelle an.

29.Inserire le 2 sporgenze (39) sulla parte posteriore del fermo di uscita (D) nelle porzioni cerchiate
sull'unit di piegatura centrale (A).
Fissare i 3 ganci (40) sul fermo di uscita (D) nei fori (41) nell'unit di piegatura centrale (A).

30.Far aderire l'etichetta D7 (Q) alla posizione


mostrata nella figura.

29. (D) 2 (39) (A)


(D) 3 (40) (A) (41)

30. D7 (Q)

29. (D) (39) 2 (A) .


(D) (40) 3 (A) (41) .

30.D7 (Q) .

29.(D) (39)2 (A)


(D) (40)3 (A) (41)

30.D7 (Q)

11

R
31. Adhere the Operation label (R) at the location shown in the figure.
32.Reinstall the foot cover (5) and lower rear cover (7).
33.Close the lower front cover (3) and the upper front cover (1).

31.Apposer l'tiquette de fonctionnement (R) l'endroit repr sur la figure.


32.Reposer le couvercle du pied (5) et le couvercle arrire infrieur (7).
33.Fermer le capot infrieur avant (3) et le couvercle avant suprieur (1).

31.Adhiera la etiqueta de funcionamiento (R) en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustracin.


32.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (5) y la cubierta posterior inferior (7).
33.Cierre la cubierta frontal inferior (3) y la cubierta frontal superior (1).

31.Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber (R) an der abgebildeten Stelle an.


32.Bringen Sie die Fuabdeckung (5) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder an.
33.Schlieen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (3) und die obere vordere Abdeckung (1).

31.Far aderire l'etichetta di operazione (R) alla posizione mostrata nella figura.
32.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (5) e il coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).
33.Chiudere il coperchio inferiore anteriore (3) e il coperchio superiore anteriore (1).

31. (R)
32. (5) (7)
33.31

31. (R) .
32. (5) (7) .
33. (3) (1) .

31. (R)
32.(5) (7)
33.(3) (1)

12

Adjustment of centerfold-stapling position


Check the distance (a) from the stapling position to the center of the paper.
If the distance (a) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below
to adjust the position.
<Reference value (a)> 2 mm

1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Staple Pos.


2.Adjust the values.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.

Rglage de la position d'agrafage des pages centrales dpliables


Vrifier la distance (a) entre la position d'agrafage et le milieu de la feuille
de papier. Si cette distance (a) est suprieure la valeur de rfrence,
rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence (a)> 2 mm

1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Staple


Pos.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.

Ajuste de la posicin de grapado de la unidad de plegado


Compruebe la distancia (a) desde la posicin de grapado con respecto al
centro del papel. Si dicha distancia (a) supera el valor de referencia,
realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin.
<Valor de referencia (a)> 2 mm

1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Staple


Pos.
2.Ajuste los valores.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.

Einstellung der Mittenfalt-Heftposition


berprfen Sie den Abstand (a) zwischen der Heftposition und der Papiermitte. Falls der Abstand (a) grer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die Position
gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen.
<Bezugswert (a)> 2 mm

1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und


Staple Pos.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.

Regolazione della posizione di cucitura dellunit di piegatura centrale


Controllare la distanza (a) dalla posizione di spillatura al centro del foglio.
Se la distanza (a) superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la procedura
riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (a)> 2 mm

1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e Staple Pos.


2.Regolare i valori.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(a) (a)

(a) 2mm

1. U246 BookletStaple Pos


2.
3. Start


(a) . (a)
.
(a) 2mm

1. U246 Booklet, Staple Pos


.
2. .
3. .

(a) (a)

(a) 2mm

1. U246
Booklet
Staple Pos

2.
3.

13

Adjustment of center folding position


Check the distance (b) from the edge of the paper to the center folding
position. If the distance (b) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (b)>
A4, Letter: Length of paper 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper 1/2 3 mm

1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Booklet Pos.


2.Adjust the values.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.

Rglage de la position de pliage central


Vrifier la distance (b) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position de
pliage central. Si cette distance (b) est suprieure la valeur de rfrence,
rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence (b)>
A4, Letter : Longueur de la feuille 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longueur de la feuille 1/2 3 mm

1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Booklet


Pos.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.

Ajuste de la posicin de plegado


Compruebe la distancia (b) desde el borde del papel a la posicin de plegado. Si dicha distancia (b) supera el valor de referencia, realice el
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin.
<Valor de referencia (b)>
A4, Letter: Longitud del papel 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longitud del papel 1/2 3 mm

1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Booklet Pos.


2.Ajuste los valores.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.

Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition


berprfen Sie den Abstand (b) zwischen der Papierkante und der Mittenfaltposition. Falls der Abstand (b) grer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die
Position gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen.
<Bezugswert (b)>
A4, Letter: Papierlnge 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Papierlnge 1/2 3 mm

1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und


Booklet Pos.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.

Regolazione della posizione centrale di piegatura


Controllare la distanza (b) dal bordo della carta alla posizione centrale di
piegatura. Se la distanza (b) superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la
procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (b)>
A4, Letter: Lunghezza carta 1/2 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Lunghezza carta 1/2 3 mm

1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e


Booklet Pos.
2.Regolare i valori.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

(b) (b)

(b)
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 1/2 3mm

1. U246 BookletBooklet Pos


2.
3. Start


(b) . (b)
.
(b)
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 1/2 3mm

1. U246 Booklet, Booklet Pos


.
2. .
3. .

(b)
(b)

(b)
A4,Letter: 1/2 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 1/2 3mm

1. U246
BookletBooklet Pos

2.
3.

14

Adjustment of tri-folding position


Check the distance (c) from the edge of the paper to the second folding
position. If the distance (c) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (c)> 7.0 2 mm

1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Three Fold.


2.Adjust the values.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.

Rglage de la position de triple pliage


Vrifier la distance (c) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position du
deuxime pliage. Si cette distance (c) est suprieure la valeur de
rfrence, rgler la position en procdant de la manire suivante.
<Valeur de rfrence (c)> 7,0 2 mm

1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Booklet et Three


Fold.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.

Ajuste de la posicin de plegado trptico


Compruebe la distancia (c) desde el borde del papel a la segunda posicin
de plegado. Si dicha distancia (c) supera el valor de referencia, realice el
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posicin.
<Valor de referencia (c)> 7,0 2 mm

1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Three


Fold.
2.Ajuste los valores.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.

Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition


berprfen Sie den Abstand (c) zwischen der Papierkante und der
zweiten Faltposition. Falls der Abstand (c) grer als der Bezugswert ist,
ist die Position gem der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen.
<Bezugswert (c)> 7,0 2 mm

1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Booklet und


Three Fold.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.

Regolazione della posizione di piegatura tripla


Controllare la distanza (c) dal bordo della carta alla posizione della seconda piegatura. Se la distanza (c) superiore al valore di riferimento,
seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (c)> 7,0 2 mm

1.Impostare la modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e


Three Fold.
2.Regolare i valori.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

2 (c) (c)

(c) 7.02mm

1. U246 BookletThree Fold


2.
3. Start


(c) . (c)
.
(c) 7.02mm

1. U246 Booklet, Three Fold


.
2. .
3. .

(c) (c)

(c) 7.02mm

1. U246
BookletThree Fold

2.
3.

15

NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-790

AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modle: DF-790

AVISO
Este accesorio es slo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalacin de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-790

HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehr ist nur fr den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehr gem der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-790

NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dellapplicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dellaccessorio.
Modello: DF-790

:DF-790

.
.
DF-790

DF-790

16

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


MAILBOX

English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.

Franais
Une procdure diffrente est requise selon le produit qui est install avec cette unit.Chaque procdure est dcrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 Page 12.

Espaol
El procedimiento es diferente segn el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes pginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalacin con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las pginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalacin con una impresora, consulte las pginas de la 7 a la 12.

Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erlutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 12.
.
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui installata l'unit.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.

1 6
7 12

. .
1 ~6 .
7 ~12 .

1 6
7 12

E (M4x12)

English
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Bote lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrire ... 1
D. Case djection de copies.......................... 7
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Buzn de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsin de copias .............. 7
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefcher................................ 7
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7

A. ................................
B. ........................
C. ........................
D. ..............................

E. M4 12 screw ........................................... 2
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

E. Vis M4 12................................................ 2
F. tiquette de nom de plateau
(pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

E. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 2
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja
(para usuarios)........................................... 1

Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

E. Schraube M4 12 ..................................... 2
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (fr Benutzer) .......... 1

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

E. Vite M4 12............................................... 2
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio
(per utenti) ................................................. 1

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

E. M412 .......................... 2
F. ( ) ............... 1

E. M4 12..................................... 2
F. ( ) .................. 1

,
.

E. M412 ...........................2
F.
.........1

1
1
1
7

A. ............................................ 1
B. ..................................... 1
C. ..................................... 1
D. ............................................... 7

A. .......................
B. .......................
C. .......................
D. .............................

1
1
1
7

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flatblade screwdriver or the like.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

1.Retirer le couvercle suprieur avant (2) et le couvercle suprieur arrire (3) situs en haut du
retoucheur (1) laide dun tournevis tte plate ou dun outil quivalent.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.

1. (1) (2) (3)

1. (1) (2), (3)


.

OFF

1. (1) (2) (3)

4
5

2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.

2.Insrer les crochets (4) se trouvant l'avant et l'arrire au fond de la bote lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situes l'avant et l'arrire en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustr ici, puis fixer la bote lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever lgrement l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la bote lettres (A) et la machine.

2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustracin, y coloque el buzn de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzn de correo (A) y la
mquina.

2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) in die ffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gert bildet.

2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nellillustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso lalto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.

2. (A) (4) (1) (5) (A) (1)

(A) (A)

2. (A) (4) (1) (5) (A)


.

(A) (A) .

2. (A) (4) (1) (5)


(A) (1)

(A) (A)

A
A

E(M4x12)
A

6
8

3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws


M4x12 (E).

4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox


(A).

5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into


the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).

3.Fixer la bote lettres (A) l'aide de deux vis


M4x12 (E).

4.Retirer le couvercle arrire (6) de la bote


lettres (A).

5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la bote


lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrire (6) de la bote
lettres (A).

3.Fije el buzn de correo (A) con dos tornillos


M4x12 (E).

4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzn de


correo (A).

5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzn de correo


(A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la mquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzn de correo (A).

3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei


Schrauben M4x12 (E).

4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der


Mailbox (A).

5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)


in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gertegehuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.

3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti


M4x12 (E).

4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della


mailbox (A).

5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)


al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).

3. M4x12EA

4. (A) (6)

5.A7
8
6.A6

3.M4x12 (E)
(A) .

4. (A) (6) .

5. (A) (7)
(8)
6. (A) (6)
.

3. M412(E)2
(A)

4. (A) (6)

5. (A) (7)
(8)
6. (A) (6)

7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting


plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the finisher to install the cover (B).

8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on


the finisher in the same way.

7.Insrer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la


plaque de montage avant (B) de la bote
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce
couvercle (B).

8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de montage arrire (C) sur le retoucheur en procdant de la mme manire.

7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2


ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de
montaje frontal (B) para el buzn de correo
en el finalizador.

8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la


placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finalizador.

7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen


Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) fr die
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeckung (B) zu installieren.

8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere


Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Finisher an.

7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati


sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il
coperchio (B).

8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
maniera.

7. (B) 2
(9)
(B)

8. (C)

7. (B) (9) 2
(B)
.

8. (C)
.

7. (B)
(9)2
(B)

8. (C)

10

11

9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to
the highest.
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.

10.Insert the power plug from the machine into


the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and verify the machine operates normally.

9.Fixer les sept cases djection de copies (D) sur la section djection de la bote lettres (A), en
procdant de la case situe tout en bas celle situe tout en haut.
Appuyer sur les deux extrmits de chaque case d'jection des copies (D) pour cintrer lgrement cette pice, puis monter la case en insrant les broches avant et arrire (10) dans les trous
ronds (11) l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres.

10.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine


dans la prise et mettre la machine sous tension, puis vrifier qu'elle fonctionne correctement.

9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsin de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco;
despus, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzn de correo.

10.Enchufe el cable de alimentacin de la


mquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la mquina funciona correctamente.

9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefcher (D) in die Ausgabeffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein,
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum hchsten.
Drcken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen.
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlcher (11)
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.

10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in


eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Hauptschalter des Gerts ein, um den
Betrieb zu prfen.

9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto pi in basso fino a quello pi in alto.
Premere le due estremit di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da piegarlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.

10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,


accendere la macchina e controllare che
funzioni correttamente.

9. (A) 7 (D)
(D) (10) (11)

10.

9. (D) 7 (A) .
(D) (10) (11)
.

10.
ON
.

9. (D)7 (A)
(D) (10) (11)

10.

ON

E (M4x12)

English
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Bote lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrire ... 1
D. Case djection de copies.......................... 7
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Buzn de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsin de copias .............. 7
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefcher................................ 7
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7

1
1
1
7

A. ............................................ 1
B. ..................................... 1
C. ..................................... 1
D. ............................................... 7

1
1
1
7

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

B and C are not used.

E. Vis M4 12................................................ 2
F. tiquette de nom de plateau
(pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.

B et C ne sont pas utiliss.


E. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 2
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja
(para usuarios)........................................... 1

Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.

B y C no se utilizan.
E. Schraube M4 12 ..................................... 2
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (fr Benutzer) .......... 1

Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder


und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.

B und C werden nicht bentigt.

E. Vite M4 12............................................... 2
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio
(per utenti) ................................................. 1

Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di


protezione dalle parti fornite.

B e C non sono utilizzati.

B C

E. M4 12..................................... 2
F. ( ) .................. 1

,
.

B C .

E. M412 ...........................2
F.
.........1

A. .......................
B. .......................
C. .......................
D. .............................

E. M4 12 screw ........................................... 2
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1

E. M412 .......................... 2
F. ( ) ............... 1

A. ................................
B. ........................
C. ........................
D. ..............................

B,C

Note
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed
before the mailbox is installed.

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
power plug from the wall outlet.

Remarque
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit tre install
avant d'installer la bote lettres.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de dbrancher la
fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.

Nota
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar
antes de la instalacin del buzn de correo.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin de la toma de pared.

Hinweis
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden.

Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.

Nota
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di
installare il vassoio mailbox.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.

AK-736)

(AK-736)
.

(AK-736)

OFF

E(M4x12)
1

E(M4x12)

1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine.
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.

2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws


M4x12 (E).

1.Insrer les crochets (1) situs l'avant et l'arrire du fond de la bote lettres (A) dans les encoches (2) de la machine et fixer la bote aux lettres (A) la machine.
Remarque
Lever lgrement l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la bote lettres (A) et la machine.

2.Fixer la bote lettres (A) l'aide de deux vis


M4x12 (E).

1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del
buzn de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la mquina y acople el buzn de correo (A) a la
mquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzn de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzn de correo (A) y la mquina.

2.Fije el buzn de correo (A) con dos tornillos


M4x12 (E).

1.Fhren Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden,
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Gerts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gert.
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rckseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gert bildet.

2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei


Schrauben M4x12 (E).

1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina.
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso lalto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.

2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti


M4x12 (E).

1.A12A

(A) (A)

2. M4x12EA

1. (A) (1) (2) (A)


.

(A) (A)
.

2.M4x12 (E)
(A) .

1. (A) (1) (2)


(A)

(A) (A)

2. M412(E)2
(A)

A
3

4
6

4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox
(A).

4.Remove the wire saddle (4).


5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).

3.Retirer le couvercle arrire (3) de la bote


lettres (A).

4.Retirer le serre-cble (4).


5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la bote lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-cble (4) dans la position illustre sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrire (3) de la bote lettres (A).

3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzn de


correo (A).

4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).


5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzn de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la mquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posicin que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzn de correo (A).

3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der


Mailbox (A).

4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).


5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gertegehuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.

3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della


mailbox (A).

4.Rimuovere l'unit sella (4).


5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unit sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).

3.A (3)

4.4
5.A5 (6)
6. (4)
7.A3

3. (A) (3) .

4. (4) .
5. (A) (5) (6) .
6. (4) .
7. (A) (3) .

3. (A) (3)

4. (4)
5. (A) (5) (6)
6. (4)
7. (A) (3)

10

102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place.

9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).

8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position.

9. laide des deux vis (102) retires ltape 2 du guide dinstallation


pour lAK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfonc vers le bas.

8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicacin prevista.

9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quit en el paso 2 de la gua de instalacin para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presin sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubierta derecha (Z).

8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y).

9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsanleitung fr das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) wieder an.
*Drcken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, whrend Sie
diese befestigen.

8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione.

9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura


descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coperchio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.

8.Y

9. AK-736 2 2 102
Z)
* Z)

8. (Y) .

9.AK-736 2 (102)
(Z) .
* (Z) (Z)
.

8.(Y)

9.AK-736 2 (102)2 (Z)

* (Z)

11

7
101

10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to
the highest.
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox.

11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).


12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and verify the machine operates normally.

10.Fixer les sept cases djection de copies (D) sur la section djection de la bote lettres (A), en
procdant de la case situe tout en bas celle situe tout en haut.
Appuyer sur les deux extrmits de chaque case d'jection des copies (D) pour cintrer lgrement cette pice, puis monter la case en insrant les broches avant et arrire (7) dans les trous
ronds (8) l'avant et l'arrire de la bote lettres.

11.Fermer l'unit de transport du papier (101).


12.Insrer la fiche dalimentation de la machine
dans la prise et mettre la machine sous tension, puis vrifier qu'elle fonctionne correctement.

10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsin de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco;
despus, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzn de correo.

11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de


papel(101).
12.Enchufe el cable de alimentacin de la
mquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la mquina funciona correctamente.

10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefcher (D) in die Ausgabeffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein,
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum hchsten.
Drcken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen.
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlcher (8)
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.

11.Schlieen Sie die Papierfhrung (101).


12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Gerts in
eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Hauptschalter des Gerts ein, um den
Betrieb zu prfen.

10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto pi in basso fino a quello pi in alto.
Premere le due estremit di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da piegarlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.

11.Chiudere l'unit trasporto carta (101).


12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
accendere la macchina e controllare che
funzioni correttamente.

10. (A) 7 (D)


(D) (7) (8)

11.101
12.

10. (D) 7 (A) .


(D) (7) (8)
.

11. (101) .
12.
ON
.

10. (D)7 (A)


(D) (7) (8)

11. (101)
12.

ON

12

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


MAILBOX ATTACHMENT KIT

Z
A

Y
B (M4x12)

English
Supplied parts
A. Solenoid unit.............................................. 1
B. M4 12 screw ........................................... 1
Y. Left cover ................................................... 1
Z. Right cover ................................................ 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Unit solnode.......................................... 1
B. Vis M4 12................................................ 1
Y. Couvercle gauche...................................... 1
Z. Couvercle droit .......................................... 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Unidad solenoide....................................... 1
B. Tornillo M4 12 ......................................... 1
Y. Cubierta izquierda...................................... 1
Z. Cubierta derecha ....................................... 1
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. Magnetspule .............................................. 1
B. Schraube M4 x 12 ..................................... 1
Y. Linke Abdeckung ....................................... 1
Z. Rechte Abdeckung .................................... 1
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. Unit solenoide.......................................... 1
B. Vite M4 12 .............................................. 1
Y. Coperchio di sinistra .................................. 1
Z. Coperchio di destra ................................... 1

1
1
1
1

A. ............................... 1
B. M412....................................... 1
Y. ........................................... 1
Z. ........................................... 1

Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.
Les procdures pour installer Y et Z sont
dcrites dans le manuel d'installation de la bote
lettres.
Asegrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Los procedimientos de instalacin Y y Z se
describen en la gua de instalacin del buzn de
correo.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass smtliche Klebebnder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.
Die Vorgehensweise zur Installation von Y und
Z wird in der Installationsanweisung der Mailbox
beschrieben.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.
Le procedure di installazione Y e Z sono
descritte nella guida di installazione del vassoio
mailbox.

1
1
1
1

Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.

Procdure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
dbrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.

Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalacin, asegrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
mquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentacin
de la toma de pared.

Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen berzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Gerts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.

Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.

Y,Z

,
.
Y Z
.

A. ...................
B. M412 ..........................
Y. .............................
Z. .............................

The procedures for installing Y and Z are


described in the installation guide for the mailbox.

A. ...........................
B. M412 ..........................
Y. ...............................
Z. ...............................

Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning


materials from the parts supplied.

Y,Z

OFF

102

102

1
3
2

101

1.Pull out the paper conveying unit (101).


2.Remove the two screws (102) and remove
the upper right cover (1).
(The upper right cover (1) which was
removed is not used.)

3.Remove the screw (2) and remove the


retainer (3).

4.Remove the breakaway part (4) from the


retainer (3).

1.Sortir l'unit de transport du papier (101).


2.Retirer les deux vis (102) et retirer le couvercle suprieur droit (1).
(Le couvercle suprieur droit (1) qui a t
retir n'est pas utilis.)

3.Retirer la vis (2) et retirer le dispositif de


retenue (3).

4.Retirer la partie dtachable (4) du dispositif


de retenue (3).

1.Extraiga la unidad de transporte de papel


(101).
2.Quite los dos tornillos (102) y retire la cubierta superior derecha (1).
(La cubierta superior derecha (1) que se ha
retirado no se utiliza.)

3.Quite el tornillo (2) y retire el retn (3).

4.Aparte la parte de separacin (4) del retn


(3).

1.Ziehen Sie die Papierfhrung (101) heraus.


2.Entfernen Sie zwei Schrauben (102) und
entfernen Sie die obere rechte Abdeckung
(1).
(Die gerade entfernte obere rechte Abdeckung (1) wird nicht mehr bentigt.)

3.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und entfernen Sie die Halterung (3).

4.Entfernen Sie die Sollbruchstelle (4) von der


Halterung (3).

1.Estrarre l'unit trasporto carta (101).


2.Togliere le due viti (102) e rimuovere il
coperchio destro superiore (1).
(Il coperchio destro superiore (1) rimosso
non viene utilizzato.)

3.Togliere la vite (2) e rimuovere il fermo (3).

4.Rimuovere la parte di separazione (4) dal


fermo (3).

1. (101)
2.1021
1

3.23

4.34

1. (101) .
2. (102)
(1) .
( (1)
.)

3. (2) (3)
.

4. (3) (4)
.

1. (101)
2. (102)2 (1)

(1)

3. (2)1 (3)

4. (3) (4)

6
A

B(M4x12)
2

5.Install the solenoid unit (A) to the machine


by inseting the two hooks (5) into the
notches of the machine.

6.Secure the solenoid unit (A) using a screw


M4x12 (B).
7.Plug the connector (6) of the machine into
the connector of the solenoid unit (A).

8.Using the screw (2) removed in step 3, reinstall the retainer (3).

5.Installer l'unit solnode (A) sur la machine


en insrant les deux crochets (5) dans les
encoches de la machine.

6.Fixer l'unit solnode (A) l'aide d'une vis


M4x12 (B).
7.Brancher le connecteur (6) de la machine
dans le connecteur de l'unit solnode (A).

8. l'aide de la vis (2) retire l'tape 3,


remonter le dispositif de retenue (3).

5.Instale la unidad solenoide (A) en la


mquina insertando los dos enganches (5)
en las hendiduras de la mquina.

6.Fije la unidad solenoide (A) con un tornillo


M4x12 (B).
7.Enchufe el conector (6) de la mquina al
conector de la unidad solenoide (A).

8.Con el tornillo (2) que quit en el paso 3,


vuelva a instalar el retn (3).

5.Installieren Sie die Magnetspule (A) im


Gert, indem Sie die zwei Haken (5) in die
entsprechenden Aufnahmen im Gert einfhren.

6.Sichern Sie die Magnetspule (A) mit der


Schraube M4x12 (B).
7.Stecken Sie den Stecker (6) des Gerts in
die Steckbuchse der Magnetspule (A).

8.Mit der in Schritt 3 entfernten Schraube (2)


bringen Sie die Halterung (3) wieder an.

5.Installare l'unit solenoide (A) sulla macchina inserendo i due ganci (5) negli incavi
della macchina.

6.Fissare l'unit solenoide (A) utilizzando una


vite M4x12 (B).
7.Collegare il connettore (6) della macchina al
connettore dell'unit solenoide (A).

8.Utilizzando la vite (2) rimossa al punto 3,


reinstallare il fermo (3).

5.5
A

6. M4x12BA
7.6A

8. 3 2
3

5. (5)
(A) .

6.M4x12 (B)
(A) .
7. (6) (A)
.

8.3 (2)
(3) .

5. (A)

(5)2

6. M412(B)1
(A)
7.(6)
(A)

8. 3 (2)1 (3)

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


PUNCH UNIT

B
C

A
G
I

English
Supplied parts
A. Punch guide............................................... 1
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1
C. Motor unit................................................... 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1
Franais
Pices fournies
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1
D. Bague d'arrt ............................................. 1
Espaol
Partes suministradas
A. Gua de perforacin................................... 1
B. Perforadora................................................ 1
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1
Deutsch
Gelieferte Teile
A. Locherfhrung ........................................... 1
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1
Italiano
Parti di fornitura
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1
B. Unit di perforazione ................................. 1
C. Unit motore .............................................. 1
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1

A. ...........................
B. .............................
C. .............................
D. ...............................

1
1
1
1

A. ......................................... 1
B. ......................................... 1
C. ......................................... 1
D. ............................................... 1

A. .........................
B. .......................
C. .....................
D. .......................

1
1
1
1

E. Spring......................................................... 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
H. M3 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
I. Label sheet ................................................ 1
J. Film ............................................................ 1
K. Small clamp (for DF-770)........................... 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1
G. Bac de rcupration de la perforatrice....... 1
H. Vis S taraude M3 8 ............................... 3
I. Feuillet dtiquettes.................................... 1
J. Film ............................................................ 1
K. Petit collier (pour DF-770).......................... 1
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1
F. PWB de perforacin................................... 1
G. Caja para desechos de la perforacin ....... 1
H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 8........................... 3
I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1
J. Pelcula ...................................................... 1
K. Sujetador pequeo (para DF-770) ............. 1
E. Feder ......................................................... 1
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1
G. Lochungsabfallbehlter.............................. 1
H. M3 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3
I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1
J. Film ............................................................ 1
K. Kleine Klemme (fr DF-770) ..................... 1
E. Molla .......................................................... 1
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1
G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 8 .................. 3
I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1
J. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770) ................... 1
E. .................................1
F. .......................1
G. ...........................1
H. M3 X 8 S ..............3
I. ...............................1
J. .................................1
E. ............................................... 1
F. ............................................ 1
G. ...................................... 1
H. M38 S......................... 3
I. ........................................... 1
J. .................................................. 1
E. .................................1
F. ...........................1
G. ...................1
H. M38 S .............3
I. .........................1
J. .............................1
K.
DF-770 .................1

L. Large clamp (for DF-790) .......................... 1


M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
material from supplied parts.

L. Grand collier (pour DF-790) ....................... 1


M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adhsive et/ou les matriaux de rembourrage des
pices fournies.
L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790)................ 1
M. Ncleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Asegrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
L. Groe Klemme (fr DF-790) ...................... 1
M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dmpfungsmaterial vollstndig von den mitgelieferten
Teilen.
L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790) ................... 1
M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.

K. DF-770 ) ................1
L. DF-790 ................1
M. .................................1

K. DF-770 ....................... 1
L. DF-790 ....................... 1
M. ..................................... 1
,
.
L.
DF-790 .................1
M. .......................1

Procedure
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and
that its power cord is unplugged from the power
outlet.
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.

Removing the cover (DF-770)


If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 1 on
page 3.
1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
rear cover (2).

2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the


upper rear cover (4).

Procdure
Avant dinstaller la perforatrice, sassurer que
linterrupteur dalimentation principal du MFP est
hors tension et que le cble dalimentation est
dbranch de la prise secteur.
Installer dabord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.

Dpose du couvercle (DF-770)


Pour l'installation sur le modle DF-790, passer
l'tape 1 de la page 3.
1.Dposer la vis (1) et dposer le petit couvercle arrire (2).

2.Dposer les 2 vis (3) et dposer le couvercle


suprieur arrire (4).

Procedimiento

Extraccin de la cubierta (DF-770)


Si realiza la instalacin en el DF-790, vaya al
paso 1 de la pgina 3.
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, despus, quite la cubierta trasera pequea (2).

2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, despus, quite la


cubierta trasera superior (4).

Verfahren
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.

Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770)


Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu
Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.

2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere


hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.

Procedura
Prima di installate l'unit di perforazione, assicurarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scollegato dalla presa di corrente.
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
allinstallazione dellunit di perforazione.

Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770)


Se si installa sull'unit DF-790, procedere al
passo 1 a pagina 3.
1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
pannello posteriore piccolo (2).

2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il


pannello superiore posteriore (4).

MFP

DF-770
DF-790 P3 1
1. 1 (1) (2)

2. 2 (3) (4)

MFP
OFF
.
,
.

DF-770
DF-790 P3 1
.
1. (1) 1 (2)
.

2. (3) 2 (4)
.

MFP
OFF

DF-770
DF-790
P3 1
1. (1)1 (2)

2. (3)2 (4)

Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegrese de que


el interruptor principal de la alimentacin
del MFP est desconectado y de que el cable de alimentacin est desenchufado de la toma de corriente de la pared.
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.

6
10
8

7
7

Removing the cover (DF-790)


1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small
rear cover (6).

2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the


upper rear cover (8).

Installing the hole punch unit


3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
(10) outwards.

Dpose du couvercle (DF-790)


1.Dposer la vis (5) et dposer le petit couvercle arrire (6).

2.Dposer les 3 vis (7) et dposer le couvercle


suprieur arrire (8).

Installation de la perforatrice
3.Dposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
l'extrieur.

Extraccin de la cubierta (DF-790)


1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, despus, quite la cubierta trasera pequea (6).

2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, despus, quite la


cubierta trasera superior (8).

Instalacin de la perforadora
3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la gua (10)
hacia fuera.

Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790)


1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen.

2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere


hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen.

Anbringen der Lochereinheit


3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Fhrung
(10) nach auen ziehen.

Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790)


1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il
pannello posteriore piccolo (6).

2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il


pannello superiore posteriore (8).

Installare lunit di perforazione


3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
(10) verso l'esterno.

DF-790
1. 1 (5) (6)

2. 3 (7) (8)

3. 1 (9) (10)

DF-790
1. (5) 1 (6)
.

2. (7) 3 (8)
.


3. (9) 1 (10)
.

DF-790
1. (5)1 (6)

2. (7)3 (8)

3. (9)1 (10)

38

4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film.

4.Aprs avoir utilis de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachure (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est appos, coller ce film.

4.Despus de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustracin para pegar la pelcula (J), pegue la pelcula.

4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen.

4.Dopo aver usato lalcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per ladesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola.

4.38J

4. 38 , J .

4.38J

12
B

11

A
A
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document finisher frame (12).

6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the document finisher.

5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous
le bti du retoucheur de document (12).

6.Insrer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur


de document.

5.Instale la gua de perforacin (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la gua (11) quede
debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12).

6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de


documentos.

5.Die Locherfhrung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Fhrung (11) unter dem Rahmen
(12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt.

6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Finisher einsetzen.

5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il
telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti.

6.Inserire l'unit di perforazione (B) nella finitrice di documenti.

5. (A) (11) (12)

6. (B)

5. (A) (11) (12) .

6. (B)
.

5. (A) (11) (12)

6. (B)

B
13

C
16
B

15
14

H
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).

8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws


(H).

7.Lever lgrement la perforatrice (B) et insrer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14)
du retoucheur de document. Insrer en mme temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).

8.Fixer le moteur (C) l'aide de 2 vis (H).

7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).

8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornillos (H).

7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14)
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die
ffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.

8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben


(H) sichern.

7.Sollevare leggermente l'unit di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unit motore (C)
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unit motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unit di perforazione (B).

8.Fissare l'unit motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).

7. (B) (C) (13) (14)


(C) (15) (B) (16)

8. 2 (H) (C)

7. (B) (C) (13) (14) .


(C) (15) (B) (16) .

8. (H) 2 (C)
.

7. (B) (C) (13)


(14) (C) (15)
(B) (16)

8. (H)2
(C)

17

19

15

18

D
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole
punch unit and motor unit.

10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through


the motor unit edging (18).
11.Plug the wire from the hole punch unit motor
into the connector on the motor unit (19).

9.Monter la bague d'arrt (D) sur la tige du


moteur (15) et insrer le ressort (E) entre la
perforatrice et le moteur.

10.Faire passer le cble de la perforatrice (17)


dans le passage de cbles du moteur (18)
11.Raccorder le cble du moteur de la perforatrice au connecteur du moteur (19).

9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla


de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz.

10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a


travs de la pestaa de la unidad motriz
(18).
11.Enchufe el cable del motor de la perforadora
al conector de la unidad motriz (19).

9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15)


der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E)
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit
einsetzen.

10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den


Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit fhren.
11.Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an
den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit (19)
anschlieen.

9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta


(15) dell'unit motore ed inserire molla (E)
tra l'unit di perforazione e l'unit motore.

10.Far passare il cavo dell'unit di perforazione


(17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unit
motore.
11.Collegare il cavo dal motore dell'unit di perforazione nel connettore sull'unit motore
(19).

9. (D) (15)
(E)

10. (17)
(18)
11.
(19)

9. (15) (D)
(E)
.

10. (17)
(18) .
11.
(19) .

9. (15)
(D)
(E)

10. (17)
(18)
11.
(19)

25
23
24

21

25
F

20

22

20
H

Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770)
If installing on the DF-790, proceed to step 12 on page 12.
12.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.

14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the connectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).

Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (DF-770).


Pour une installation sur le modle DF-790, passer l'tape 12 en page 12.
12.Insrer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la dcoupe (21) du retoucheur
de document. Insrer en mme temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le cble de terre de la perforatrice (24) la PWB de la perforatrice (F) l'aide d'une vis (H).

14.Raccorder les 6 cbles de la perforatrice aux


connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).

Instalacin del PWB de perforacin y la caja para desechos de la perforacin (DF-770)


Si realiza la instalacin en el DF-790, vaya al paso 12 de la pgina 12.
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforacin (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22)
del PWB de perforacin (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexin a tierra de la perforadora (24) y el PWB
de perforacin (F).

14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los


conectores (25) del PWB de perforacin (F).

Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehlters (DF-770)


Zur Installation des DF-790 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12.
12.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einsetzen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die ffnung (22) auf der LocherPWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.

14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steckverbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
anschlieen.

Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770)
Se si installa sull'unit DF-790, procedere al passo 12 a pagina 12.
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di documenti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unit di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).

14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unit di perforazione


nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
stampati di perforazione (F).

DF-770
DF-790 P12 12
12. (F) 2 (20) (21) (F)
(22) (23)
13. 1 (H) (24) (F)

14. 6 (F)
(25)

DF-770
DF-790 P12 12 .
12. (F) (20) 2 (21) . (F)
(22) (23) .
13. (H) 1 (24) (F) .

14. 6 (F)
(25) .

DF-770
DF-790
P12 12
12. (F) (20)2 (21)
(F) (22) (23)
13. (H)1
(24) (F)

14. 6
(F) (25)

27

26
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the connectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26).

16.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.

15.Raccorder les 2 cbles de la PWB de la perforatrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB


principale du DF (26).

16.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les cbles du moteur et de la perforatrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place
17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au cble.

15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de perforacin a los conectores (27) del PWB principal del DF (26).

16.Instale el sujetador pequeo (K) en el finalizador, despus tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
motriz y la perforadora.
17.Fije el ncleo de ferrita (M) al cable.

15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steckverbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26)
anschlieen.

16.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
Lochereinheit hindurchfhren und befestigen.
17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.

15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti


stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27)
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF.

16.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dallunit motore e
dallunit di perforazione.
17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.

15. 2 DF
(26) (27)

16.K
17.M

15. 2 DF
(26) (27) .

16. K ,
.
17. M .

15. 2 DF
(26) (27)

16.K

17.M

28

G
18.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small
rear cover (2).

19.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).

18.Reposer le couvercle suprieur arrire (4) et


le petit couvercle arrire (2).

19.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur avant (28) et insrer le bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (G).

18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior


(4) y la cubierta trasera pequea (2).

19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforacin (G).

18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kleine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.

19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) ffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehlter (G) einsetzen.

18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore


(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).

19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).

18. (4)
(2)

19. (28) (G)

18. (4) (2)


.

19. (28) (G) .

18.(4) (2)

19.(28)
(G)

10

J( B )

J( C )

20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the
locations shown in the illustration: B, C..

21.Close the upper front cover (28).

20.Aprs avoir nettoy chaque zone lalcool, apposer les tiquettes suivantes du feuillet
dtiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqus dans lillustration : B, C.

21.Fermer le couvercle suprieur avant (28).

20.Despus de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las
etiquetas siguientes, y pguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustracin: B, C.

21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).

20.Nachdem Sie alle Flchen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C.

21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)


schlieen.

20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J)
sui punti mostrati nellillustrazione: B, C.

21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).

20.JBC

21. (28)

20. ( ) .

21. (28) .

20. (J) B
C

21.(28)

11

32
33

31

34

34
30

H
29

Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790)
12.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.

14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the connectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).

Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (DF-790).


12.Insrer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la dcoupe (30) du retoucheur
de document. Insrer en mme temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le cble de terre de la perforatrice (33) la PWB de la perforatrice (F) l'aide d'une vis (H).

14.Raccorder les 6 cbles de la perforatrice aux


connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).

Instalacin del PWB de perforacin y la caja para desechos de la perforacin (DF-790)


12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforacin (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforacin (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexin a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforacin (F).

14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los


conectores (34) del PWB de perforacin (F).

Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehlters (DF-790)


12.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einsetzen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die ffnung (31) auf der LocherPWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.

14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steckverbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
anschlieen.

Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790)
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di documenti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unit di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).

14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unit di perforazione


nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
stampati di perforazione (F).

DF-790
12. (F) 2 (29) (30) (F)
(31) (32)
13. 1 (H) (33) (F)

14. 6 (F)
(34)

DF-790
12. (F) (29) 2 (30) . (F)
(31) (32) .
13. (H) 1 (33) (F) .

14. 6 (F)
(34) .

DF-790
12. (F) (29)2 (30)
(F) (31) (32)
13. (H)1
(33) (F)

14. 6
(F) (34)

12

36

35
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the connectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35).

16.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.

15.Raccorder les 2 cbles de la PWB de la perforatrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB


principale du DF (35).

16.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les cbles du moteur et de la perforatrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au cble.

15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de perforacin a los conectores (36) del PWB principal del DF (35).

16.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, despus tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
motriz y la perforadora.
17.Fije el ncleo de ferrita (M) al cable.

15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steckverbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35)
anschlieen.

16.Die groe Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
Lochereinheit hindurchfhren und befestigen.
17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.

15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti


stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36)
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF.

16.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dallunit motore e
dallunit di perforazione.
17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.

15. 2 DF
(35) (36)

16.L
17.M

15. 2 DF
(35) (36) .

16. L ,
.
17. M .

15. 2 DF
(35) (36)

16.L

17.M

13

37

G
18.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small
rear cover (6).

19.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).

18.Reposer le couvercle suprieur arrire (8) et


le petit couvercle arrire (6).

19.Ouvrir le couvercle suprieur avant (37) et insrer le bac de rcupration de la perforatrice (G).

18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior


(8) y la cubierta trasera pequea (6).

19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforacin (G).

18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kleine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.

19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) ffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehlter (G) einsetzen.

18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore


(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).

19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).

18. (8)
(6)

19. (37) (G)

18. (8) (6)


.

19. (37) (G) .

18.(8) (6)

19.(37)
(G)

14

J( A )

J( C )

20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
21.Close the upper front cover (37).

20.Aprs avoir nettoy chaque zone lalcool, apposer les tiquettes suivantes du feuillet dtiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqus dans lillustration :
A, C.
21.Fermer le couvercle suprieur avant (37).

20.Despus de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y pguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustracin: A, C.
21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).

20.Nachdem Sie alle Flchen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schlieen.

20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nellillustrazione: A, C.
21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).

20.JAC
21. (37)

20. ( ) A .
21. (37) .

20. (J) A
C
21.(37)

15

[Adjusting the hole punch position]


1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall outlet and turn the MFP main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the
procedure below to adjust the hole position.

Adjusting the hole punch entry registration


1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
2.Adjust the values.
When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.

[Rglage de la position des perforations]


1. Insrer la fiche dalimentation du MFP dans la prise

Rglage de l'enregistrement de l'entre des perforations


1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
2.Rgler les valeurs.
Si le papier est aliment de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
Si le papier est froiss exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.
3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.

murale et mettre linterrupteur principal du MFP


sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation.
3. Si les perforations sont dcentres, suivre la
procdure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de
perforation.

[Ajuste de la posicin de perforacin]


1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptculo de
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP.

2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de perforacin.

3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de

Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforacin


1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
2.Ajuste los valores.
Cuando el papel alimentado est torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
Cuando el papel se dobl copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.

abajo para ajustar la posicin del agujero.

[Einstellen der Lochungsposition]


1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am
Hauptschalter ein.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen.

3. Falls eine auermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die

Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung


1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhhen.
Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.

Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.

[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione]


1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione
dellMFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e
accendere linterruttore principale di alimentazione.
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalit di perforazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione.

Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione


1.Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
2.Regolare i valori.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
dell'impostazione.
Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.

1. MFP

2.
3.

1. U246 FinisherPunch Regist


2.
(a)
Z (b)
3. Start


1.MFP
ON .
2. .
3.
.


1. U246 Finisher, Punch Regist .
2. .
(a) .
Z (b) .
3. .

1.MFP

ON
2.
3.

1. U246 Finisher
Punch Regist
2.
(a)
Z (b)
3.

16

Adjusting the hole punch position feed


1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed.
2.Adjust the values.
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.

3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.


<Reference value (c)>
Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm

Rglage de la position du point de perforation


1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Feed.
2. Rgler les valeurs.

3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.


<Valeur de rfrence (c)>
Spcifications mtriques: 13 mm; Spcifications en pouces: 9,5 mm

Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que dfini par la valeur de
rfrence (c): Augmentez la valeur de rglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que dfini par la valeur de
rfrence (c): Diminuez la valeur de rglage.

Ajuste de la alimentacin de la posicin de perforacin


1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed.
2. Ajuste los valores.

3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.


<Valor de referencia (c)>
Sistema mtrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm

Si la posicin de perforacin est ms cerca del borde que el valor de referencia


(c): Aumente el valor de configuracin.
Si la posicin de perforacin est ms alejada del borde que el valor de referencia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuracin.

Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition


1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed.
2. Die Werte einstellen.

3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.


<Bezugswert (c)>
Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm

Falls die Lochungsposition nher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.

Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione


1. Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed.
2. Regolare i valori.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione pi vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione pi lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.

3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.


<Valore di riferimento (c)>
Specificazione in unit metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
mm

1. U246 FinisherPunch Feed


2.
(c)
(c)

3. Start
(c)
13mm9.5mm


1. U246 Finisher, Punch Feed
.
2. .
(c) .
(c) .

3. .
(c)
13mm, 9.5mm

1. U246 Finisher
Punch Feed

2.
(c)
(c)

3.

(c)
13mm9.5mm

17

f
f

Centering the hole punch position


1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width.
2.Adjust the values.
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the
setting value.
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.

3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.


<Reference value>
Metric specification: d = 80 mm 0.5, e = 40 mm 2
Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch 0.5, e = 1.375 inch 2,
f = 4.25 inch 0.5

Centrage de la position de perforation


1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, slectionner Finisher et Punch Width.
2. Rgler les valeurs.

3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de rglage.


<Valeur de rfrence>
Spcifications mtriques: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
Spcifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces 2,
f = 4.25 pouces 0,5

Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de


rglage.
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrire de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de rglage.

Centrado de la posicin de perforacin


1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width.
2. Ajuste los valores.
Si la perforacin se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la mquina:
Reduzca el valor de configuracin.
Si la perforacin se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
mquina: Aumente el valor de configuracin.

Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition


1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, whlen Sie Finisher und Punch
Width.

2. Die Werte einstellen.


Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gertefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gertefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhhen.

Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione


1. Entrare in modalit manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width.
2. Regolare i valori.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.

3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuracin.


<Valor de referencia>
Sistema mtrico: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada 2,
f = 4.25 0,5 pulgada

3.Den Einstellwert durch Drcken der Start-Taste besttigen.


<Bezugswert>
Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm 0,5; e = 40 mm 2
Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll 2,
f = 4.25 Zoll 0,5

3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.


<Valore di riferimento>
Specificazione in unit metrica: d = 80 mm 0,5, e = 40 mm 2
Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici 2,
f = 4.25 pollici 0.5

1. U246 FinisherPunch Width


2.

3. Start

d=80mm0.5e=40mm2
d=2.75inch0.5e=1.375inch2f=4.25inch0.5


1. U246 Finisher, Punch Width
.
2. .
.
.

3. .

d=80mm0.5, e=40mm2
d=2.75inch0.5, e=1.375inch2, f=4.25inch0.5

1. U246 Finisher
Punch Width

2.

3.

d=80mm0.5e=40mm2
d=2.75inch0.5e=1.375inch2f=4.25inch0.5

18

NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Refer to the supplied guide to install the accessory in the field.
Machine: DF-770, DF-790

AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Se reporter au guide fourni pour installer l'accessoire dans le champ.
Modle: DF-770, DF-790

AVISO
Este accesorio es slo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Consulte las instrucciones para la instalacin de accesorios en el lugar del cliente.
Modelo: DF-770, DF-790

HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehr ist nur fr den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Installieren Sie das Zubehr gem der mitgelieferten Anleitung im Feld.
Modell: DF-770, DF-790

NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dellapplicante.
Consultare la guida fornita in dotazione per il montaggio in campo dellaccessorio.
Modello: DF-770, DF-790

:DF-770,DF-790

.
.
DF-770,DF-790

DF-770, DF-790

19

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR


BANNER GUIDE

B
A

2011.12
302K956720-01

2
B

2011.12
302K956720-01

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.


Headquarters
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
Phone: +1-973-808-8444
Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100
Miami, Florida 33166, USA
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.


6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, Mxico
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.


Alameda frica, 545, Plo Empresarial Consbrs,
Tambor, Santana de Parnaba-SP, CEP 06543-306,
Brazil
Phone: +55-11-4195-8496
Fax: +55-11-4195-6167

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions


New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand
Phone: +64-9-415-4517
Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited


16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2610-2181
Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions


(China) Corporation
8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions


(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Bangsue, Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Singapore Pte. Ltd.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Hong Kong Limited
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.


18F, Kangnam bldg, 1321-1,
Seocho-Dong, Seocho-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions


India Private Limited
First Floor, ORCHID CENTRE
Sector-53, Golf Course Road, Gurgaon 122 002,
India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.


Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.


Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited


Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
United Kingdom
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.


Via Verdi, 89/91 20063 Cernusco s/N.(MI),
Italy
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.


Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Belgium
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.


Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
France
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH


Eduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 95, 1230 Vienna,
Austria
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB


Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf


Postboks 150 Oppsal, 0619 Oslo,
Norway
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S


Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Denmark
Phone: +45-70223880
Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.


Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Portugal
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

KYOCERA Document Solutions


South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,


28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain
Phone: +34-91-6318392
Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,


90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa.
Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,


Finland
Phone: +358-9-47805200
Fax: +358-9-47805390

Botanichesky pereulok 5, Moscow, 129090,


Russia
Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions


Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zrich Branch

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zrich,


Switzerland
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,


Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.


2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.


is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi